UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, DC 20549

FORM 10-K

 

(Mark One)

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2015

 

OR

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from                to              

 

Commission File No. 0-18279

 

The Community Financial Corporation

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Maryland 52-1652138
(State of other jurisdiction of (I.R.S. Employer
incorporation or organization) Identification No.)

 

3035 Leonardtown Road, Waldorf, Maryland 20601
(Address of principal executive offices) (Zip Code)

 

Registrant’s telephone number, including area code: (301) 645-5601

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each class Name of each exchange on which registered
Common Stock, par value $.01 per share The NASDAQ Stock Market, LLC

 

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes ¨ No x

 

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes ¨ No x

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports) and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.

Yes x No ¨

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).

Yes x No ¨

 

Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K. x

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

 

Large Accelerated Filer   ¨ Accelerated Filer   x
Non-Accelerated Filer   ¨ Smaller Reporting Company   ¨

 

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.)

Yes ¨ No x

 

The aggregate market value of voting stock held by non-affiliates of the registrant was approximately $84.2 million based on the closing price $21.50 per share at which the common stock was sold on the last business day of the Company’s most recently completed second fiscal quarter.  For purposes of this calculation only, the shares held by directors, executive officers and the Company’s Employee Stock Ownership Plan of the registrant are deemed to be shares held by affiliates.

 

Number of shares of common stock outstanding as of March 3, 2016: 4,652,292

 

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE

 

Portions of the Proxy Statement for the 2016 Annual Meeting of Stockholders. (Part III)

 

 

 

 

INDEX

 

  Page
   
Part I  
   
Item 1.  Business 1
   
Supervision and Regulation 17
   
Management 22
   
Item 1A. Risk Factors 24
   
Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments 34
   
Item 2. Properties 34
   
Item 3.  Legal Proceedings 34
   
Item 4.  Mine Safety Disclosures 34
   
Part II  
   
Item 5 - Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities 35
   
Item 6 - Selected Financial Data 38
   
Item 7 - Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations 40
   
Item 8 - Financial Statements and Supplementary Data 71
   
Item 9.  Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure 125
   
Item 9A.  Controls and Procedures 125
   
Item 9B. Other Information 125
   
Part III  
   
Item 10.  Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance 125
   
Item 11.  Executive Compensation 126
   
Item 12.  Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters 126
   
Item 13.  Certain Relationships, Related Transactions and Director Independence 127
   
Item 14.  Principal Accountant Fees and Services 127
   
Part IV  
   
Item 15.  Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules 127

 

 

 

 

PART I

 

This report contains certain “forward-looking statements” within the meaning of the federal securities laws. These statements are not historical facts, rather statements based on The Community Financial Corporation’s current expectations regarding its business strategies, intended results and future performance. Forward-looking statements are preceded by terms such as “expects,” “believes,” “anticipates,” “intends” and similar expressions.

 

Management’s ability to predict results or the effect of future plans or strategies is inherently uncertain. Factors that could affect actual results include interest rate trends, the general economic climate in the market area in which The Community Financial Corporation operates, as well as nationwide, The Community Financial Corporation’s ability to control costs and expenses, competitive products and pricing, changes in accounting principles, loan demand, loan delinquency rates, charge-offs, changes in federal and state legislation and regulation and effectively manage the risks the Company faces, including credit, operational and cyber security risks. These factors should be considered in evaluating the forward-looking statements and undue reliance should not be placed on such statements. The Community Financial Corporation assumes no obligation to update any forward-looking statement after the date of the statements or to reflect the occurrence of anticipated or unanticipated events.

 

Item 1.  Business

 

Business

 

The Community Financial Corporation (the “Company’) is a bank holding company organized in 1989 under the laws of the State of Maryland. It owns all the outstanding shares of capital stock of Community Bank of the Chesapeake (the “Bank”), a Maryland-chartered commercial bank. The Bank was organized in 1950 as Tri-County Building and Loan Association of Waldorf, a mutual savings and loan association, and in 1986 converted to a federal stock savings bank and adopted the name Tri-County Federal Savings Bank. In 1997, the Bank converted to a Maryland-chartered commercial bank and adopted the name Community Bank of Tri-County. Effective October 18, 2013, Community Bank changed its name to become Community Bank of the Chesapeake.

 

The Company engages in no significant activity other than holding the stock of the Bank and operating the business of the Bank. Accordingly, the information set forth in this 10-K, including financial statements and related data, relates primarily to the Bank and its subsidiaries.

 

The Bank maintains its main office and operations center in Waldorf, Maryland, in addition to its branch offices in Lexington Park, Leonardtown, La Plata, Dunkirk, Bryans Road, Waldorf, Charlotte Hall, Prince Frederick and Lusby, Maryland and Fredericksburg and King George, Virginia. The Company’s second branch in Fredericksburg is scheduled to open in downtown during the first quarter of 2016. During the third quarter pf 2015, the Company agreed to sell its King George, Virginia branch building and equipment and the transaction closed on January 28, 2016. In addition, the Bank maintains five loan production offices (“LPOs”) in La Plata, Prince Frederick, Leonardtown and Annapolis, Maryland and Fredericksburg, Virginia. The Leonardtown and Fredericksburg LPOs are co-located with branches. The Annapolis LPO opened in October 2014.

 

The Bank operates 16 automated teller machines including four stand-alone locations. The Bank offers telephone and internet banking services. The Bank is engaged in the commercial and retail banking business as authorized by the banking statutes of the States of Maryland and Virginia and applicable federal regulations, including the acceptance of deposits, and the origination of loans to individuals, associations, partnerships and corporations. The Bank’s real estate portfolio consists of commercial mortgage loans, residential first and second mortgage loans and home equity lines of credit. Commercial lending consists of both secured and unsecured loans. The Bank is a member of the Federal Reserve and Federal Home Loan Bank (the “FHLB”) system and its deposits are insured up to applicable limits by the Deposit Insurance Fund administered by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”).

 

Market Area

The Bank considers its principal lending and deposit market area to consist of the tri-county area in Southern Maryland and the greater Fredericksburg market in Virginia. As a result of the Bank’s expansion into the greater Fredericksburg market in 2013, Stafford County has become part of the Bank’s principal lending and deposit market area. The Annapolis LPO opening in October 2014 provided additional growth in 2015. Our market area is one of the fastest growing regions in the country and is home to a mix of federal facilities, industrial and high-tech businesses.

 

  1  

 

 

The presence of several major federal facilities located within the Bank’s footprint and in adjoining counties contribute to economic growth. Major federal facilities include the Patuxent River Naval Air Station in St. Mary’s County, the Indian Head Division, Naval Surface Warfare Center in Charles County and the Naval Surface Warfare –Naval Support Facility in King George County. In addition, there are several major federal facilities located in adjoining markets including Andrews Air Force Base and Defense Intelligence Agency & Defense Intelligence Analysis Center in Prince Georges County, Maryland and the U.S. Marine Base Quantico, Drug Enforcement Administration Quantico facility and Federal Bureau of Investigation Quantico facility in Prince William County, Virginia. These facilities directly employ thousands of local employees and serve as an important player in the region’s overall economic health.

 

The economic health of the region, while stabilized by the influence of the federal government, is not solely dependent on this sector. Calvert County is home to the Dominion Power Cove Point Liquid Natural Gas Terminal, which is one of the nation’s largest liquefied natural gas terminals and Dominion Power is currently constructing liquefaction facilities for exporting liquefied natural gas. Based on information from the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, unemployment rates in the Company’s footprint have historically remained well below the national average.

 

Southern Maryland is generally considered to have more affordable housing than many other Washington and Baltimore area suburbs. During the recession, growth in the Bank’s market area was slowed as the demand for new housing in the tri-county area fell with the overall housing market. According to the Maryland Department of Planning, new housing unit starts fell from 2006 through 2010. However, after 2010, real estate values stabilized and there were positive trends in housing beginning in 2012.

 

The Bank expanded into the greater Fredericksburg, Virginia market in August 2013. According to the Fredericksburg Regional Alliance, the Fredericksburg Region, including the City of Fredericksburg and the counties of Caroline, King George, Spotsylvania, and Stafford, Virginia, has been one of the the fastest growing region in the Commonwealth of Virginia for greater than the past eight years.

 

The Bank’s primary market area also boasts a strong median household income. According to SNL Financial, the median household income in 2014 was greater than $94,000 and $92,000, respectively, for our legacy Southern Maryland market and for our new markets of Fredericksburg and Annapolis compared to slightly more than $51,000 for the United States.

 

Competition

The Bank faces strong competition in the attraction of deposits and in the origination of loans. Its most direct competition for deposits and loans comes from other banks, savings and loan associations and federal and state credit unions located in its primary market area. There are more than 25 FDIC-insured depository institutions operating in the Bank’s footprint including subsidiaries of several large, regional and national bank holding companies. The Bank also faces additional significant competition for customers’ funds from mutual funds, brokerage firms, and other financial service companies. The Bank competes for loans by providing competitive rates and flexibility of terms and service, including customer access to senior decision makers. It competes for deposits by offering depositors a wide variety of account types, convenient office locations and competitive rates. Other services offered include tax deferred retirement programs, brokerage services through an affiliation with Community Wealth Advisors, cash management services and safe deposit boxes. The Bank has used targeted direct mail, print and online advertising and community outreach to increase its market share of deposits, loans and other services in its market area. It provides ongoing training for its staff in an attempt to ensure high-quality service.

 

Lending Activities

General

The Bank offers a wide variety of real estate and commercial loans. The Bank’s lending activities include commercial real estate loans, construction loans, land acquisition and development loans, equipment financing, commercial and consumer loans. The Company exited the residential mortgage origination line of business in April 2015 and has established third party sources to supply its residential whole loan portfolio. Most of the Bank’s customers are residents of, or businesses located in the Bank’s market area. The Bank’s primary targets for commercial loans consist of small and medium-sized businesses with revenues of $5.0 million to $35.0 million as well as local municipal agencies and not-for-profits in Southern Maryland, the Annapolis area of Maryland, the Northern Neck region, and the greater Fredericksburg area of Virginia.

 

  2  

 

 

Commercial Real Estate (CRE) and Other Non-Residential Real Estate Loans

The permanent financing of commercial and other improved real estate projects, including office buildings, retail locations, churches, and other special purpose buildings, is the largest component of the Bank’s loan portfolio. Commercial real estate loans amounted to $613.5 million or 66.8% of the loan portfolio and $561.1 million or 64.3% of the loan portfolio, respectively at December 31, 2015 and 2014. This portfolio has increased in both absolute size and as a percentage of the loan portfolio in each of the last five years. The CRE portfolio includes commercial construction balances. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, commercial construction balances were 5.3% and 4.4% of the CRE portfolio.

 

The primary security on a commercial real estate loan is the real property and the leases or businesses that produce income for the real property. The Bank generally limits its exposure to a single borrower to 15% of the Bank’s capital and participates with other lenders on larger projects. Loans secured by commercial real estate are generally limited to 80% of the lower of the appraised value or sales price and have an initial contractual loan amortization period ranging from three to 20 years. Interest rates and payments on these loans typically adjust after an initial fixed-rate period, which is generally between three and ten years. Interest rates and payments on adjustable-rate loans are adjusted to a rate based on the United States Treasury Bill Index. Almost all of the Bank’s commercial real estate loans are secured by real estate located in the Bank’s primary market area. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, the largest outstanding commercial real estate loan was $9.7 million and $9.9 million, respectively, which is secured by commercial real estate and was performing according to its terms at December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

Loans secured by commercial real estate are larger and involve greater risks than one- to four-family residential mortgage loans. Because payments on loans secured by such properties are often dependent on the successful operation or management of the properties, repayment of such loans may be subject to a greater extent to adverse conditions in the real estate market or the economy. As a result of the greater emphasis that the Bank places on increasing its portfolio of commercial real estate loans, the Bank is increasingly exposed to the risks posed by this type of lending. To monitor cash flows on income properties, the Bank requires borrowers and loan guarantors, if any, to provide annual financial statements on multi-family or commercial real estate loans. In reaching a decision on whether to make a multi-family or commercial real estate loan, the Bank considers the net operating income of the property, the borrower’s expertise, credit history and profitability, and the value of the underlying property, as well as the borrower’s global cash flows. Environmental surveys are generally required for commercial real estate loans over $250,000.

 

Residential First Mortgage Loans

Residential first mortgage loans are generally long-term loans, amortized on a monthly or bi-weekly basis, with principal and interest due each payment. The initial contractual loan payment period for residential loans typically ranges from ten to 30 years. The Bank’s experience indicates that residential real estate loans remain outstanding for significantly shorter time periods than their contractual terms. Borrowers may refinance or prepay loans at their option, without penalty. The Bank originates both fixed-rate and adjustable-rate residential first mortgages.

 

The Company exited the residential mortgage origination line of business in April 2015 and has established third party sources to fund its residential whole loan portfolio. The third party sources will allow the Company to maintain a well-diversified residential portfolio while addressing the credit needs of the communities in its footprint. The Bank’s practice has been to purchase the right to service the loans acquired.

 

Fixed-rate residential first mortgages include loan periods from ten to 30 years and bi-weekly payment loans. Total fixed-rate loans in our residential first mortgage portfolio amounted to $116.4 million and $125.5 million, respectively, as of December 31, 2015 and 2014. Fixed-rate loans may be packaged and sold to investors or retained in the Bank’s loan portfolio. The Bank generally retains the right to service loans sold for a payment based upon a percentage (generally 0.25% of the outstanding loan balance). As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Bank serviced $63.0 million and $68.7 million, respectively, in residential mortgage loans for others.

 

Adjustable mortgages are generally adjustable on a one-, three- and five-year basis with limitations on upward adjustments per re-pricing period and a upward cap over the life of the loan. As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Bank had $33.6 million and $27.4 million, respectively, in adjustable-rate residential mortgage loans. At December 31, 2015, the largest outstanding residential first mortgage loan was $10.8 million, which was secured by over 120 single family homes located in the Bank’s market area. The loan was performing according to its terms at December 31, 2015. At December 31, 2014, the largest outstanding residential first mortgage loan was $2.2 million, which was secured by a residence located in the Bank’s market area. The loan was performing according to its terms at December 31, 2014.

 

  3  

 

 

The Bank’s practice has been to purchase individual residential first mortgage loans secured by owner-occupied single-family homes from the Bank’s third party partners. The Bank underwrites non-owner occupied one- to four-family loans up to a maximum 80% loan-to-value of the appraised value depending on the overall strength of the application. Residential first mortgage loans with loan-to-value ratios in excess of 80% generally carry private mortgage insurance to lower the Bank’s exposure to approximately 80% of the value of the property. The Bank had fewer than 10 loans with private mortgage insurance at December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

All improved real estate that serves as security for a loan made by the Bank must be insured, in the amount and by such companies as may be approved by the Bank, against fire, vandalism, malicious mischief and other hazards. Such insurance must be maintained through the entire term of the loan and in an amount not less than that amount necessary to pay the Bank’s indebtedness in full.

 

Construction and Land Development Loans

The Bank offers construction loans for the construction of one- to four-family dwellings to home builders. Construction loans totaled $14.1 million and $14.5 million, respectively, at December 31, 2015 and 2014. Generally, these loans are secured by the real estate under construction as well as by guarantees of the principals involved. Draws are made upon satisfactory completion of predefined stages of construction. The Bank will typically lend up to the lower of 80% of the appraised value or the contract purchase price of the homes to be constructed. In addition, the Bank offers loans to acquire and develop land, as well as loans on undeveloped, subdivided lots for home building by individuals. Land acquisition and development loans totaled $22.0 million and $21.9 million, respectively, at December 31, 2015 and 2014. Bank policy requires that zoning and permits must be in place prior to making development loans. The Bank will typically lend up to the lower of 75% of the appraised value or cost. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, the largest outstanding construction and land development loan was $4.9 million, which was secured by land in the Bank’s market area.

 

The Bank’s ability to originate residential construction and development loans is heavily dependent on the continued demand for single-family housing construction in the Bank’s market area. The Bank’s investment in these loans has declined in recent years. Construction and land development loans as a percentage of the total loan portfolio have been decreasing since 2008 from greater than 10% as of December 31, 2008 to 3.9% at December 31, 2015. If the demand for new houses being built from smaller builders in the Bank’s market areas continues to decline, this portion of the loan portfolio may continue to decline. In addition, a decline in demand for new housing might adversely affect the ability of borrowers to repay these loans.

 

Construction and land development loans are inherently riskier than providing financing on owner-occupied real estate. The Bank’s risk of loss is affected by the accuracy of the initial estimate of the market value of the completed project as well as the accuracy of the cost estimates made to complete the project. In addition, the volatility of the real estate market has made it increasingly difficult to ensure that the valuation of land associated with these loans is accurate. During the construction phase, a number of factors could result in delays and cost overruns. If the estimate of construction costs proves to be inaccurate, the Bank may be required to advance funds beyond the amount originally committed to permit completion of the development. If the estimate of value proves to be inaccurate, the Bank may be confronted, at or before the maturity of the loan, with a project having a value that is insufficient to assure full repayment. As a result of these factors, construction lending often involves the disbursement of substantial funds with repayment dependent, in part, on the success of the project rather than the ability of the borrower or guarantor to repay principal and interest. If the Bank forecloses on a project, the Bank may not be able to recover all of the unpaid balance of, and accrued interest on, the loan as well as related foreclosure and holding costs.

 

Home Equity and Second Mortgage Loans

The Bank maintains a portfolio of home equity and second mortgage loans. Home equity loans, which totaled $19.5 million and $18.7 million, respectively at December 31, 2015 and 2014, are generally made in the form of lines of credit with minimum amounts of $5,000, have terms of up to 20 years, variable rates priced at the then current Wall Street Journal prime rate plus a margin, and require an 80% or 90% loan-to-value ratio (including any prior liens), depending on the specific loan program. Second mortgage loans, which totaled $2.2 million and $2.8 million, respectively at December 31, 2015 and 2014, are fixed or variable-rate loans that have original terms between five and 15 years. Loan-to-value ratios of up to 95% are allowed depending on the specific loan program.

 

These products contain a higher risk of default than residential first mortgages as in the event of foreclosure, the first mortgage would need to be paid off prior to collection of the second mortgage. This risk has been heightened as the market value of residential property has declined. The Bank monitors the property values of the properties that secure its second mortgages and is lowering credit availability where prudent. The Bank believes that its policies and procedures are sufficient to mitigate the additional risk posed by these loans at the current time.

 

  4  

 

 

Commercial Loans

The Bank offers commercial loans to its business customers. The Bank offers a variety of commercial loan products including term loans and lines of credit. The portfolio consists primarily of demand loans and lines of credit. Such loans can be made for terms of up to five years. However, most of the loans are originated for a term of two years or less. The Bank offers both fixed-rate and adjustable-rate loans (typically tied to the then current Wall Street Journal prime rate plus a margin with a floor) under these product lines. Commercial loans remain an important class of the Bank’s loan portfolio, but have decreased as a percentage of total loans and in total dollars over the last few years. At $67.2 million and 7.3% of total loans and $73.6 million and 8.4% of total loans at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively, the commercial loan portfolio decreased by $6.4 million and $20.6 million compared to the prior year end balance.

 

When making commercial business loans, the Bank considers the financial condition of the borrower, the borrower’s payment history of both corporate and personal debt, the projected cash flows of the business as well the borrower’s global cash flows, the viability of the industry in which the borrower operates, the value of the collateral, and the borrower’s ability to service the debt. These loans are primarily secured by equipment, real property, accounts receivable or other security as determined by the Bank. The higher interest rates and shorter loan terms available on commercial lending make these products attractive to the Bank.

 

Commercial business loans, however, entail greater risk than residential mortgage loans. Unlike residential mortgage loans, which generally are made on the basis of the borrower’s ability to make repayment from his or her employment or other income and which are secured by real property whose value tends to be more easily ascertainable, commercial loans are made on the basis of the borrower’s ability to make repayment from the cash flows of the borrower’s business. As a result, the availability of funds for the repayment of commercial loans may depend substantially on the success of the business itself. In the case of business failure, collateral would need to be liquidated to provide repayment for the loan. In many cases, the highly specialized nature of collateral would make full recovery from the sale of collateral problematic. The Bank attempts to control these risks by establishing guidelines that provide for loans with low loan-to-value ratios. At December 31, 2015 and 2015, the largest outstanding commercial loan was $12.0 million, which was secured by commercial real estate (all of which was located in the Bank’s market area), cash and investments. This loan was performing according to its terms at December 31, 2015 and 2014. This operating line of credit was paid off subsequent to December 31, 2015.

 

Consumer Loans

The Bank has consumer loans secured by automobiles, boats, recreational vehicles and trucks. The Bank also makes home improvement loans and offers both secured and unsecured personal lines of credit. Consumer loans totaled $366,000 and $613,000, respectively, at December 31, 2015 and 2014. Consumer loans entail greater risk than residential mortgage loans, particularly in the case of consumer loans, which are unsecured or secured by rapidly depreciating assets such as automobiles. In such cases, any repossessed collateral may not provide an adequate source of repayment of the outstanding loan balance. Further collection efforts may be hampered by the borrower’s lack of current income or other assets. In addition, consumer loan collections are dependent on the borrower’s continuing financial stability and thus are more likely to be adversely affected by job loss, divorce, illness or personal bankruptcy. Furthermore, the application of various federal and state laws including federal and state bankruptcy and insolvency laws, may limit the amount that can be recovered on such loans. Such loans may also give rise to claims and defenses by a consumer loan borrower against an assignee such as the Bank, and a borrower may be able to assert against such assignee claims and defenses that it has against the seller of the underlying collateral.

 

Commercial Equipment Loans

The Bank also maintains an amortizing commercial portfolio consisting primarily of commercial equipment loans. Commercial equipment loans totaled $29.9 million and $26.2 million, or 3.3% and 3.0% of the total loan portfolio, respectively, at December 31, 2015 and 2014. These loans consist primarily of fixed-rate, short-term loans collateralized by customers’ equipment including trucks, cars, construction and other more specialized equipment. When making commercial equipment loans, the Bank considers the same factors it considers when underwriting a commercial business loan. The higher interest rates and shorter loan terms available on commercial equipment lending make these products attractive to the Bank. These loans entail greater risk than loans such as residential mortgage loans. Unlike residential mortgage loans, which generally are made on the basis of the borrower’s ability to make repayment from his or her employment or other income and which are secured by real property whose value tends to be more easily ascertainable, commercial loans are of higher risk and typically are made on the basis of the borrower’s ability to make repayment from the cash flows of the borrower’s business. As a result, the availability of funds for the repayment of commercial loans may depend substantially on the success of the business itself. In the case of business failure, collateral would need to be liquidated to provide repayment for the loan. In many cases, the highly specialized nature of collateral equipment would make full recovery from the sale of collateral problematic. The Bank assesses the amount of collateral required for a loan based upon the credit worthiness of the borrowers.

 

  5  

 

 

Loan Portfolio Analysis

Set forth below is selected data relating to the composition of the Bank’s loan portfolio by type of loan on the dates indicated.

 

    At December 31,  
    2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
(dollars in thousands)   Amount     %     Amount     %     Amount     %     Amount     %     Amount     %  
                   
Commercial real estate   $ 613,479       66.76 %   $ 561,080       64.34 %   $ 476,648       58.97 %   $ 419,667       55.47 %   $ 370,384       51.55 %
Residential first mtgs.     149,967       16.32 %     152,837       17.52 %     159,147       19.69 %     177,663       23.48 %     164,543       22.90 %
Construction and
land dev.
    36,189       3.94 %     36,370       4.17 %     32,001       3.96 %     31,819       4.21 %     36,745       5.11 %
Home equity and
second mtgs.
    21,716       2.36 %     21,452       2.46 %     21,692       2.68 %     21,982       2.91 %     24,138       3.36 %
Commercial loans     67,246       7.32 %     73,625       8.44 %     94,176       11.65 %     88,158       11.65 %     101,968       14.19 %
Consumer loans     366       0.04 %     613       0.07 %     838       0.10 %     995       0.13 %     1,001       0.14 %
Commercial equipment     29,931       3.26 %     26,152       3.00 %     23,738       2.94 %     16,268       2.15 %     19,761       2.75 %
Total Loans     918,894       100.00 %     872,129       100.00 %     808,240       100.00 %     756,552       100.00 %     718,540       100.00 %
Deferred loan fees     1,154               1,239               972               664               796          
Allowance for loan losses     8,540               8,481               8,138               8,247               7,655          
Loans receivable, net   $ 909,200             $ 862,409             $ 799,130             $ 747,641             $ 710,089          

 

The following table sets forth for the periods indicated the average balances outstanding and average interest rates for each major category of loans.

 

    For the Years Ended December 31,  
    2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
          Average           Average           Average           Average           Average  
    Average     Yield/     Average     Yield/     Average     Yield/     Average     Yield/     Average     Yield/  
dollars in thousands   Balance     Cost     Balance     Cost     Balance     Cost     Balance     Cost     Balance     Cost  
Commercial real estate     597,034       4.65 %     523,796       4.82 %     434,889       5.08 %     395,276       5.40 %     357,272       5.72 %
Residential first mortgages     147,606       4.36 %     159,689       4.42 %     169,671       4.68 %     177,401       4.68 %     153,249       4.94 %
Construction and
land development
    34,333       4.81 %     29,921       4.68 %     27,065       4.75 %     31,499       4.94 %     33,108       4.90 %
Home equity and
second mortgages
    21,332       4.09 %     21,426       4.21 %     21,647       4.33 %     22,703       4.33 %     24,201       4.36 %

Commercial and equipment loans (1)

    81,957       5.61 %     92,199       5.21 %     95,316       5.11 %     99,735       4.88 %     109,618       5.12 %
Consumer loans     465       8.82 %     701       7.99 %     954       7.23 %     1,002       7.98 %     1,143       8.05 %
Allowance for loan losses     (8,541 )     n/a       (8,351 )     n/a       (8,173 )     n/a       (7,818 )     n/a       (7,349 )     n/a  
Net Average Loans     874,186       4.73 %     819,381       4.82 %     741,369       5.02 %     719,798       5.16 %     671,242       5.42 %

 

(1) Includes both commercial loans and commercial equipment loans.

 

  6  

 

 

Loan Originations, Purchases and Sales

The Bank solicits loan applications through marketing by commercial loan officers, its branch network, and referrals from customers. Loans are processed and approved according to guidelines established by the Bank. Loan requirements such as income verification, collateral appraisal, and credit reports vary by loan type. Additionally, residential mortgages are purchased from third party providers after reviewing loan documents, underwriting support, and completing other procedures, as necessary. Loan processing functions are generally centralized except for small consumer loans. Depending on market conditions, residential mortgage loans may be classified with the intent to sell to third parties such as FHLMC. Residential mortgage loans in the amounts of $4.2 million, $13.6 million and $23.3 million were sold by the Bank for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

To comply with internal and regulatory limits on loans to one borrower, the Bank may sell portions of commercial and commercial real estate loans to other lenders. The Bank sold CRE participations of $1.5 million in 2015 and $482,000 in 2014. The Bank may also buy loans, portions of loans, or participation certificates from other lenders. The Bank only purchases loans or portions of loans after reviewing loan documents, underwriting support, and completing other procedures, as necessary. The Bank purchased no commercial real estate of commercial loans during 2015 and 2014. Purchased participation loans are subject to the same regulatory and internal policy requirements as other loans in the Bank’s portfolio as described below.

 

Loan Approvals, Procedures and Authority

Loan approval authority is established by Board policy. Loan approval authorities vary by individual with the Chief Executive Officer having approval authority up to $1.25 million, the Chief Lending Officer up to $1.0 million, the Chief Risk Officer up to $1.0 million and the Chief Operating Officer up to $1.0 million. The individual lending authority of the other lenders is set by management and based on their individual abilities. The loan approval authorities of the Chief Executive Officer, the Chief Lending Officer, the Chief Risk Officer, the Chief Operating Officer, the Senior Credit Officer and the regional senior loan officers may be combined and a minimum of at least three other individuals (two-thirds of which must be executive level) need to be present in an officers’ loan committee. The officers’ loan committee approves loans up to the Bank’s legal lending limit. The in-house lending guideline is approved by the Credit Risk Committee on an annual basis or as needed if more frequently and is less than the Bank’s legal lending limit. Relationships in excess of the Bank’s in-house lending guideline are reported to the Board of Directors. The Board of Directors approves all loans required to be approved by regulation, such as Regulation O loans.

 

The Credit Risk Committee of the Board, consisting of three or more directors, has been delegated by the Board of Directors of the Bank to assist the Board in its oversight responsibilities. The committee reviews the Bank’s credit risk management, including the significant policies, procedures and practices employed to manage credit risk, and provides recommendations to the Board on strategic guidance to management on the assumption, management and mitigation of credit risk.

 

Depending on the loan and collateral type, conditions for protecting the Bank’s collateral are specified in the loan documents. Typically these conditions might include requirements to maintain hazard and title insurance and to pay property taxes.

 

Loans to One Borrower

Under Maryland law, the maximum amount that the Bank is permitted to lend to any one borrower and his or her related interests may generally not exceed 10% of the Bank’s unimpaired capital and surplus, which is defined to include the Bank’s capital, surplus, retained earnings and 50% of its reserve for possible loan losses. Under this authority, the Bank would have been permitted to lend up to $13.7 million and $13.1 million, respectively, to any one borrower at December 31, 2015 and 2014. By interpretive ruling of the Maryland Commissioner, Maryland banks have the option of lending up to the amount that would be permissible for a national bank, which is generally 15% of unimpaired capital and surplus (defined to include a bank’s total capital for regulatory capital purposes plus any loan loss allowances not included in regulatory capital). Under this formula, the Bank would have been permitted to lend up to $21.2 million and $20.3 million, respectively, to any one borrower at December 31, 2015 and 2014. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, the largest amount outstanding to any one borrower and his or her related interests was $12.0 million. This borrower is a AAA-rated university hospital system located within the our market area.

 

Loan Commitments

The Bank does not normally negotiate standby commitments for the construction and purchase of real estate. Most loan commitments are granted for a one-month period. The Bank’s outstanding commitments to originate loans at December 31, 2015 and 2014 were approximately $73.5 million and $36.3 million, respectively, excluding undisbursed portions of loans in process. It has been the Bank’s experience that few commitments expire unfunded. 

 

  7  

 

 

Maturity of Loan Portfolio

See Note 6 of the Consolidated Financial Statements for regarding the dollar amount of loans maturing in the Bank’s portfolio based on their contractual terms to maturity as of December 31, 2015 and 2014. Demand loans, loans having no stated schedule of repayments and no stated maturity, and overdrafts are reported as due in one year or less.

 

Asset Classification

Federal regulations and our policies require that we utilize an internal asset classification system as a means of reporting on asset quality. We use an internal asset classification system, substantially consistent with Federal banking regulations, as a part of our credit monitoring system. Federal banking regulations set forth a classification scheme for problem and potential problem assets as “substandard,” “doubtful” or “loss” assets. An asset is considered “substandard” if it is inadequately protected by the current net worth and paying capacity of the obligor or of the collateral pledged, if any. “Substandard” assets include those characterized by the “distinct possibility” that the insured institution will sustain “some loss” if the deficiencies are not corrected. Assets classified as “doubtful” have all of the weaknesses inherent in those classified “substandard” with the added characteristic that the weaknesses present make “collection or liquidation in full,” on the basis of currently existing facts, conditions, and values, “highly questionable and improbable.” Assets classified as “loss” are those considered “uncollectible” and of such little value that their continuance as assets without the establishment of a specific loss reserve is not warranted. Assets that do not currently expose the insured institution to sufficient risk to warrant classification in one of the aforementioned categories but possess weaknesses are required to be designated “special mention.”

 

When an insured institution classifies one or more assets, or portions thereof, as “substandard” or “doubtful,” it is required that a general valuation allowance for loan losses be established in an amount deemed prudent by management. General valuation allowances represent loss allowances that have been established to recognize the inherent losses associated with lending activities, but that, unlike specific allowances, have not been allocated to particular problem assets. When an insured institution classifies one or more assets, or portions thereof, as “loss,” it is required either to establish a specific allowance for losses equal to 100% of the amount of the asset so classified or to charge off such amount.

 

The table below sets forth information on our classified assets and assets designated special mention at the dates indicated. Classified and special mention assets include loans, securities and other real estate owned.

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014     December 31, 2013     December 31, 2012     December 31, 2011  
Classified assets                                        
Substandard   $ 42,485     $ 54,022     $ 56,880     $ 58,595     $ 79,601  
Doubtful     861       -       -       -       -  
Loss     -       -       -       -       37  
Total classified assets     43,346       54,022       56,880       58,595       79,638  
Special mention assets     1,642       5,460       9,246       6,092       -  
    $ 44,988     $ 59,482     $ 66,126     $ 64,687     $ 79,638  

 

Delinquencies

The Bank’s collection procedures provide that when a loan is 15 days delinquent, the borrower is contacted by mail and payment is requested. If the delinquency continues, subsequent efforts will be made to contact the delinquent borrower and obtain payment. If these efforts prove unsuccessful, the Bank will pursue appropriate legal action including repossession of the collateral and other actions as deemed necessary. In certain instances, the Bank will attempt to modify the loan or grant a limited moratorium on loan payments to enable the borrower to reorganize his financial affairs. For an analysis of past due loans as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively, refer to Note 6 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Impaired Loans

A loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Bank will be unable to collect the scheduled payments of principal or interest when due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. The Bank evaluates substandard and doubtful classified loans, loans delinquent 90 days or greater, non-accrual loans and troubled debt restructures (“TDRs”) on an individualized basis to determine whether a loan is impaired (See Notes 1 and 6 of the Consolidated Financial Statements).

 

  8  

 

 

Factors considered by management in determining impaired status include payment status, collateral value and the probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due. Loans that experience insignificant payment delays and payment shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired. Management determines the significance of payment delays and shortfalls on a case-by-case basis, taking into consideration the circumstances surrounding the loan. These circumstances include the length of the delay, the reasons for the delay, the borrower’s payment record and the amount of the shortfall in relation to the principal and interest owed. Loans not impaired are included in the pool of loans evaluated in the general component of the allowance.

 

If a specific loan is deemed to be impaired it is evaluated for impairment. Impairment is measured on a loan-by-loan basis for commercial and construction loans by either the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, the loan’s observable market price or the fair value of the collateral, if the loan is collateral dependent. For loans that have an impairment, a specific allowance is established when the discounted cash flows (or collateral value or observable market price) of the impaired loan is lower than carrying value of that loan.

 

The Bank considers all TDRs to be impaired and defines TDRs as loans whose terms have been modified to provide for a reduction or a delay in the payment of either interest or principal because of deterioration in the financial condition of the borrower. A loan extended or renewed at a stated interest rate equal to the current interest rate for new debt with similar risk is not considered a TDR. Once an obligation has been classified as a TDR it continues to be considered a TDR until paid in full or until the debt is refinanced at market rates with no debt forgiveness. TDRs are evaluated for impairment on a loan-by-loan basis in accordance with the Bank’s impairment methodology. The Bank does not participate in any specific government or Bank-sponsored loan modification programs. All restructured loan agreements are individual contracts negotiated with a borrower.

 

Specific loan loss reserves of $1.6 million and $451,000, respectively, related to impaired loans at December 31, 2015 and 2014. The following table sets forth information with respect to the Bank’s impaired loans at the dates indicated. The table includes a breakdown between impaired loans with and without an allowance:

 

    December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
Recorded investment with no allowance   $ 35,171     $ 45,587     $ 28,220     $ 34,717     $ 10,621  
Recorded investment with allowance     4,066       4,122       9,786       4,273       10,096  
                                         
Total impaired loans   $ 39,237     $ 49,709     $ 38,006     $ 38,990     $ 20,717  
                                         
Specific allocations of allowance   $ 1,608     $ 451     $ 985     $ 1,548     $ 1,997  
                                         
Interest income recognized   $ 1,366     $ 1,841     $ 1,608     $ 1,850     $ 793  

 

For additional information regarding impaired loans by class at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively, refer to Note 6 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

The Bank closely monitors the payment activity of all its loans. The Bank periodically reviews the adequacy of the allowance for loan losses based on an analysis of the size of and composition of the loan portfolio, the Bank’s historical loss experience, including trends in delinquency, non-performing and classified loans and charge-offs, economic conditions in the Bank’s market area, and a review of selected individual loans. Loan losses are charged off against the allowance when individual loans are deemed uncollectible. Subsequent recoveries, if any, are credited to the allowance. The Bank believes it has established its existing allowance for loan losses in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and is in compliance with appropriate regulatory guidelines. However, the establishment of the level of the allowance for loan losses is highly subjective and dependent on incomplete information as to the ultimate disposition of loans. Accordingly, actual losses may vary from the amounts estimated. Additionally, our regulators as an integral part of their examination process, periodically review our allowance for loan losses and may require us to increase or decrease the allowance for loan losses, thereby affecting the Bank’s financial condition and earnings. For a more complete discussion of the allowance for loan losses, see the section captioned “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations-Critical Accounting Policies” and Notes 1 and 6 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

  9  

 

 

The following table allocates the allowance for loan losses by loan category at the dates indicated. The allocation of the allowance to each category is not necessarily indicative of future losses and does not restrict the use of the allowance to absorb losses in any category.

 

    At December 31,  
    2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
(dollars in thousands)   Amount     % (1)     Amount     % (1)     Amount     % (1)     Amount     % (1)     Amount     % (1)  
                                                             
Commercial real estate   $ 3,882       66.76 %   $ 4,076       64.34 %   $ 3,525       58.97 %   $ 4,092       55.47 %   $ 2,526       51.55 %
Residential first mtgs.     705       16.32 %     1,092       17.52 %     1,401       19.69 %     1,083       23.48 %     539       22.90 %
Construction and land dev.     1,103       3.94 %     1,071       4.17 %     584       3.96 %     533       4.21 %     354       5.11 %
Home equity and second mtgs.     142       2.36 %     173       2.46 %     249       2.68 %     280       2.91 %     144       3.36 %
Commercial loans     1,477       7.32 %     1,677       8.44 %     1,916       11.65 %     1,948       11.65 %     3,850       14.19 %
Consumer loans     2       0.04 %     3       0.07 %     10       0.10 %     19       0.13 %     19       0.14 %
Commercial equipment     1,229       3.26 %     389       3.00 %     453       2.94 %     292       2.15 %     223       2.75 %
Total allowance for loan losses   $ 8,540       100.00 %   $ 8,481       100.00 %   $ 8,138       100.00 %   $ 8,247       100.00 %   $ 7,655       100.00 %

 

(1) Percent of loans in each category to total loans

 

  10  

 

 

The following table sets forth an analysis of activity in the Bank’s allowance for loan losses for the periods indicated.

 

    At December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
                               
Balance at beginning of period   $ 8,481     $ 8,138     $ 8,247     $ 7,655     $ 7,669  
Charge-offs:                                        
Commercial real estate     78       350       140       486       1,249  
Residential first mtgs.     30       94       348       11       49  
Construction and land dev.     -       992       36       141       213  
Home equity and second mtgs.     100       59       111       211       -  
Commercial loans     432       1,134       480       1,004       2,441  
Consumer loans     -       3       12       5       3  
Commercial equipment     818       10       35       169       150  
Total Charge-offs     1,458       2,642       1,162       2,027       4,105  
Recoveries:                                        
Commercial real estate     17       11       -       -       -  
Residential first mtgs.     1       186       11       38       1  
Construction and land dev.     32       84       1       -       -  
Home equity and second mtgs.     -       10       17       -       -  
Commercial loans     11       5       23       51       -  
Consumer loans     -       11       3       1       1  
Commercial equipment     23       25       58       -       2  
Total Recoveries     84       332       113       90       4  
Net Charge-offs     1,374       2,310       1,049       1,937       4,101  
Provision for Loan Losses     1,433       2,653       940       2,529       4,087  
Balance at end of period   $ 8,540     $ 8,481     $ 8,138     $ 8,247     $ 7,655  
                                         
Allowance for loan losses to total loans     0.93 %     0.97 %     1.01 %     1.09 %     1.07 %
Net charge-offs to average loans     0.16 %     0.28 %     0.14 %     0.27 %     0.61 %

 

Non-performing Assets

The Bank’s non-performing assets include other real estate owned, non-accrual loans and TDRs. Both non-accrual and TDR loans include loans that are paid current and are performing in accordance with the term of their original or modified contract terms. For a detailed discussion on asset quality see the section captioned “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations-Asset Quality.”

 

Other Real Estate Owned (“OREO”)

Real estate acquired by the Bank as a result of foreclosure or by deed in lieu of foreclosure is classified as foreclosed real estate until such time as it is sold. When such property is acquired, it is recorded at its fair market value. Subsequent to foreclosure, the property is carried at the lower of cost or fair value less selling costs. Additional write-downs as well as carrying expenses of the foreclosed properties are charged to expenses in the current period. The Bank had foreclosed real estate with a carrying value of approximately $9.4 million and $5.9 million, respectively at December 31, 2015 and 2014. For a discussion of the accounting for foreclosed real estate, see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations - Critical Accounting Policies - Other Real Estate Owned” and Notes 1 and 8 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Non-accrual Loans

Loans are reviewed on a regular basis and are placed on non-accrual status when, in the opinion of management, the collection of additional interest is doubtful. The accrual of interest on mortgage and commercial loans is discontinued at the time the loan is 90 days delinquent unless the credit is well secured and in the process of collection. Consumer loans are typically charged-off no later than 90 days past due. In all cases, loans are placed on non-accrual or charged-off at an earlier date if collection of principal or interest is considered doubtful. Non-accrual loans are evaluated for impaired status on a loan by loan basis in accordance with the Company’s impairment methodology.

 

  11  

 

 

All interest accrued but not collected from loans that are placed on non-accrual or charged-off is reversed against interest income. The interest on these loans is accounted for on the cash-basis or cost-recovery method, until qualifying for return to accrual status. Loans are returned to accrual status when all principal and interest amounts contractually due are brought current and future payments are reasonably assured. Non-accrual loans include certain loans that are current with all loan payments and are placed on non-accrual status due to customer operating results and cash flows. Interest is recognized on non-accrual loans on a cash-basis if the loans are not impaired or there is no impairment. For a discussion of the accounting for non-accrual loans, see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations-Asset Quality” and Notes 1 and 6 in the Consolidated Financial Statements. The following table sets forth information with respect to the Bank’s non-performing assets. There were no loans 90 days or more past due that were still accruing interest at the dates indicated.

 

    December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
Non-accrual loans:                                        
Commercial real estate   $ 3,480     $ 3,824     $ 7,930     $ 5,331     $ 2,866  
Residential first mtgs.     1,948       533       2,245       3,739       2,439  
Construction and land dev.     3,555       3,634       2,968       -       1,414  
Home equity and second mtgs.     48       399       115       71       291  
Commercial loans     2,054       1,587       1,935       3,732       2,264  
Consumer loans     -       -       24       52       1  
Commercial equipment     348       286       234       216       236  
Total non-accrual loans (1)     11,433       10,263       15,451       13,141       9,511  
OREO     9,449       5,883       6,797       6,891       5,029  
TDRs: (2)                                        
Commercial real estate     11,897       10,438       3,141       3,097       7,697  
Residential first mtgs.     881       906       1,485       1,418       -  
Construction and land dev.     4,283       4,376       -       -       1,717  
Commercial loans     1,384       2,262       -       -       2,369  
Commercial equipment     123       154       67       -       130  
Total TDRs     18,568       18,136       4,693       4,515       11,913  
Total Accrual TDRs     13,133       13,249       4,364       4,515       11,113  
                                         
Total non-accrual loans, OREO and Accrual TDRs   $ 34,015     $ 29,395     $ 26,612     $ 24,547     $ 25,653  
                                         
Interest due at stated rates, but not recognized   $ 987     $ 845     $ 599     $ 626     $ 415  
                                         
Non-accrual loans to total loans     1.24 %     1.18 %     1.91 %     1.74 %     1.32 %
Non-accrual loans and Accrual TDRs to total loans (2)     2.67 %     2.70 %     2.45 %     2.33 %     2.87 %

Non-accrual loans, OREO and Accrual TDRs to total assets (2)

    2.98 %     2.71 %     2.60 %     2.50 %     2.61 %

 

(1) Non-accrual loans include all loans that are 90 days or more delinquent and loans that are non-accrual due to the operating results or cash flows of a customer.

 

(2) TDR loans include both non-accrual and accuring performing loans. All TDR loans are included in the calculation of asset quality financial ratios. Non-accrual TDR loans are included in the non-accrual balance and accruing TDR loans are included in the accruing TDR balance.

 

Investment Activities

The Bank maintains a portfolio of investment securities to provide liquidity as well as a source of earnings. The Bank’s investment securities portfolio consists primarily of asset-backed mortgage-backed (“MBS”) and collateralized mortgage obligations (“CMOs”) and other securities issued by U.S. government-sponsored enterprises (“GSEs”), including FNMA and FHLMC. The Bank also has smaller holdings of privately issued mortgage-backed securities, U.S. Treasury obligations, and other equity and debt securities. As a member of the Federal Reserve and FHLB system, the Bank is required to maintain investments in the Federal Reserve Bank as a condition of membership and the Federal Home Loan Bank based upon levels of borrowings.

 

  12  

 

 

The following table sets forth the carrying value of the Company’s investment securities portfolio and FHLB of Atlanta and Federal Reserve Bank stock at the dates indicated. HTM securities and FHLB of Atlanta and Federal Reserve Bank stock are carried at amortized cost and AFS securities are carried at fair value. At December 31, 2015, 2014, 2013, 2012 and 2011, their estimated fair value was $151.4 million, $133.3 million, $139.9 million, $166.9 million and $201.5 million, respectively.

 

    At December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
Asset-backed securities:                                        
Freddie Mac and Fannie Mae   $ 138,267     $ 119,762     $ 126,607     $ 150,318     $ 180,638  
Other     1,093       1,472       3,120       4,439       9,839  
Total asset-backed securities     139,360       121,234       129,727       154,757       190,477  
                                         
Corporate equity securities     39       40       41       37       37  
Bond mutual funds     4,387       4,321       4,130       4,281       4,080  
Treasury bills     750       850       750       750       750  
Total investment securities     144,536       126,445       134,648       159,825       195,344  
FHLB and Federal Reserve Bank stock     6,931       6,434       5,593       5,476       5,587  
Total investment securities   $ 151,467     $ 132,879     $ 140,241     $ 165,301     $ 200,931  

 

The maturities and weighted average yields for investment securities available for sale (“AFS”) and held to maturity (“HTM”) at December 31, 2015 and 2014 are shown below.  

 

                After One     After Five              
    One Year or Less     Through Five Years     Through Ten Years     After Ten Years  
December 31, 2015   Amortized     Average     Amortized     Average     Amortized     Average     Amortized     Average  
(dollars in thousands)   Cost     Yield     Cost     Yield     Cost     Yield     Cost     Yield  
AFS Investment securities:                                                                
Asset-backed securities   $ 6,075       1.86 %   $ 15,355       1.86 %   $ 7,727       1.87 %   $ 2,048       1.86 %
Mutual funds     4,288       2.02 %     -       0.00 %     -       0.00 %     -       0.00 %
                                                                 
Total AFS investment securities   $ 10,363       1.93 %   $ 15,355       1.86 %   $ 7,727       1.87 %   $ 2,048       1.86 %
                                                                 
HTM Investment securities:                                                                
Asset-backed securities   $ 21,850       2.31 %   $ 50,895       2.32 %   $ 23,259       2.32 %   $ 12,666       2.25 %
U.S. government obligations     750       0.00 %     -       0.00 %     -       0.00 %     -       0.00 %
                                                                 
Total HTM investment securities   $ 22,600       2.23 %   $ 50,895       2.32 %   $ 23,259       2.32 %   $ 12,666       2.25 %

 

                After One     After Five              
    One Year or Less     Through Five Years     Through Ten Years     After Ten Years  
December 31, 2014   Amortized     Average     Amortized     Average     Amortized     Average     Amortized     Average  
(dollars in thousands)   Cost     Yield     Cost     Yield     Cost     Yield     Cost     Yield  
AFS Investment securities:                                                                
Asset-backed securities   $ 8,084       1.81 %   $ 19,708       1.82 %   $ 8,671       1.76 %   $ 1,865       1.69 %
Mutual funds     4,198       2.05 %     -       0.00 %     -       0.00 %     -       0.00 %
                                                                 
Total AFS investment securities   $ 12,282       1.89 %   $ 19,708       1.82 %   $ 8,671       1.76 %   $ 1,865       1.69 %
                                                                 
HTM Investment securities:                                                                
Asset-backed securities   $ 20,647       2.02 %   $ 44,575       2.00 %   $ 14,299       1.88 %   $ 4,135       1.57 %
U.S. government obligations     850       0.00 %     -       0.00 %     -       0.00 %     -       0.00 %
                                                                 
Total HTM investment securities   $ 21,497       1.94 %   $ 44,575       2.00 %   $ 14,299       1.88 %   $ 4,135       1.57 %

 

  13  

 

 

The Bank’s investment policy provides that securities that will be held for indefinite periods of time, including securities that will be used as part of the Bank’s asset/liability management strategy and that may be sold in response to changes in interest rates, prepayments and similar factors are classified as available for sale and accounted for at fair value. Management’s intent is to hold securities reported at amortized cost to maturity. Certain of the Company’s asset-backed securities are issued by private issuers (defined as an issuer that is not a government or a government-sponsored entity). The Company had no investments in any private issuer’s securities that aggregate to more than 10% of the Company’s equity. For a discussion of investments see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations-Asset Quality” and Notes 1 and 5 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Deposits and Other Sources of Funds

 

General

The funds needed by the Bank to make loans are primarily generated by deposit accounts solicited from the communities surrounding its ten branches in the tri-county area and its branch in the Fredericksburg area of Virginia. Total deposits were $906.9 million and $869.4 million, respectively, as of December 31, 2015 and 2014. The Company uses both traditional brokered deposits and reciprocal brokered deposits. Traditional brokered deposits at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014 were $49.1 million and $41.7 million, respectively. Reciprocal brokered deposits at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014 were $61.1 million and $41.6 million, respectively. The reciprocal brokered deposits have many characteristics of core deposits and are used to maximize FDIC insurance available to our customers.

 

Deposits

The Bank’s deposit products include savings, money market, demand deposit, IRA, SEP, and time deposit accounts. Variations in service charges, terms and interest rates are used to target specific markets. Ancillary products and services for deposit customers include safe deposit boxes, night depositories, automated clearinghouse transactions, wire transfers, ATMs, online and telephone banking, remote deposit capture, merchant card services, investment services, positive pay, payroll services and lockbox. The Bank is a member of ACCEL, Master Card, Allpoint and Star ATM networks.

 

The following table sets forth for the periods indicated the average balances outstanding and average interest rates for each major category of deposits.

 

    For the Years Ended December 31,  
    2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
    Average     Average     Average     Average     Average     Average     Average     Average     Average     Average  
(dollars in thousands)   Balance     Rate     Balance     Rate     Balance     Rate     Balance     Rate     Balance     Rate  
Savings   $ 44,963       0.10 %   $ 40,104       0.10 %   $ 37,540       0.10 %   $ 32,577       0.17 %   $ 31,446       0.35 %
Interest-bearing  demand and money market accounts     322,717       0.28 %     281,960       0.27 %     268,832       0.33 %     262,331       0.56 %     217,183       1.00 %
Certificates of deposit     378,179       0.85 %     389,641       0.97 %     392,675       1.19 %     432,487       1.60 %     434,811       1.94 %
Total interest-bearing deposits     745,859       0.56 %     711,705       0.64 %     699,047       0.80 %     727,395       1.16 %     683,440       1.57 %
Noninterest-bearing demand deposits     120,527               100,783               87,649               74,161               66,105          
    $ 866,386       0.48 %   $ 812,488       0.56 %   $ 786,696       0.71 %   $ 801,556       1.05 %   $ 749,545       1.43 %

 

  14  

 

 

The following table indicates the amount of the Bank’s certificates of deposit and other time deposits of $100,000 or more and $250,000 or more by time remaining until maturity as of December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

    At December 31, 2015  
Time Deposit Maturity Period   $100,000
or More
    $250,000
or More
 
(dollars in thousands)            
Three months or less   $ 33,873     $ 14,071  
Three through six months     42,091       24,860  
Six through twelve months     65,299       26,778  
Over twelve months     81,031       32,903  
Total   $ 222,294     $ 98,612  

 

    At December 31, 2014  
Time Deposit Maturity Period   $100,000
or More
    $250,000
or More
 
(dollars in thousands)            
Three months or less   $ 57,152     $ 24,445  
Three through six months     35,288       13,087  
Six through twelve months     51,151       24,790  
Over twelve months     72,637       21,610  
Total   $ 216,228     $ 83,932  

 

For a discussion of deposits, see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations-Liabilities” and Notes 1 and 10 in the Consolidated Financial Statements. Note 10 includes the scheduled contractual maturities of total certificates of deposits of $375.6 million and $385.4 million, respectively at December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

  15  

 

 

Borrowings

Deposits are the primary source of funds for the Bank’s lending and investment activities and for its general business purposes. The Bank uses advances from the FHLB of Atlanta to supplement the supply of funds it may lend and to meet deposit withdrawal requirements. Advances from the FHLB are secured by the Bank’s stock in the FHLB, a portion of the Bank’s loan portfolio and certain investments. Generally, the Bank’s ability to borrow from the FHLB of Atlanta is limited by its available collateral and also by an overall limitation of 30% of assets. Further, short-term credit facilities are available at the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond and other commercial banks. Long-term debt consists of adjustable-rate advances with rates based upon LIBOR, fixed-rate advances, and convertible advances. For a discussion of borrowing, see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations-Liabilities” and Notes 1, 11, 16 and 17 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Subsidiary Activities

In April 1997, the Bank formed a wholly owned subsidiary, Community Mortgage Corporation of Tri-County, to offer mortgage banking, brokerage, and other services to the public. This corporation is currently inactive. The Company has two direct subsidiaries other than the Bank. In July 2004, Tri-County Capital Trust I was established as a statutory trust under Delaware law as a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company to issue trust preferred securities. Tri-County Capital Trust I issued $7.0 million of trust preferred securities on July 22, 2004. In June 2005, Tri-County Capital Trust II was also established as a statutory trust under Delaware law as a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company to issue trust preferred securities. Tri-County Capital Trust II issued $5.0 million of trust preferred securities on June 15, 2005. For more information regarding these entities, see Note 16 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

  16  

 

 

Supervision and Regulation

 

Regulation of the Company

 

General

As a bank holding company, the Company is subject to comprehensive regulation, examination and supervision by the Federal Reserve Board under the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (the “BHCA”), and the regulations of the Federal Reserve Board. The Federal Reserve Board also has extensive enforcement authority over bank holding companies, including, among other things, the ability to assess civil money penalties, to issue cease and desist or removal orders, and to require that a holding company divest subsidiaries (including its bank subsidiaries). In general, enforcement actions may be initiated for violations of law and regulations and unsafe or unsound practices.

 

The following discussion summarizes certain of the regulations applicable to the Company but does not purport to be a complete description of such regulations and is qualified in its entirety by reference to the actual laws and regulations involved.

 

Acquisition of Control

A bank holding company, with certain exceptions, must obtain Federal Reserve Board approval before (1) acquiring ownership or control of another bank or bank holding company if it would own or control more than 5% of such shares or (2) acquiring all or substantially all of the assets of another bank or bank holding company; or (3) merging with another bank holding company. In evaluating such application, the Federal Reserve Board considers factors such as the financial condition and managerial resources of the companies involved, the convenience and needs of the communities to be served and competitive factors. Federal law provides that no person may acquire “control” of a bank holding company or insured bank without the approval of the appropriate federal regulator. Control is defined to mean direct or indirect ownership, control of 25% or more of any class of voting stock, control of the election of a majority of the bank’s directors or a determination by the Federal Reserve Board that the acquirer has or would have the power to exercise a controlling influence over the management or policies of the institution.

 

Permissible Activities

A bank holding company is limited in its activities to banking, managing or controlling banks, or providing services for its subsidiaries. Other permitted non-bank activities have been identified as closely related to banking. Bank holding companies that are “well capitalized” and “well managed” and whose financial institution subsidiaries have satisfactory Community Reinvestment Act records can elect to become “financial holding companies,” which are permitted to engage in a broader range of financial activities than are permitted to bank holding companies. The Company has not opted to become a financial holding company.

 

The Federal Reserve Board has the power to order a holding company or its subsidiaries to terminate any activity, or to terminate its ownership or control of any subsidiary, when it has reasonable cause to believe that the continuation of such activity or such ownership or control constitutes a serious risk to the financial safety, soundness or stability of any bank subsidiary of that holding company.

 

The Maryland Financial Institutions Code prohibits a bank holding company from acquiring more than 5% of any class of voting stock of a bank or bank holding company without the approval of the Commissioner of Financial Regulation. The Maryland Financial Institutions Code additionally prohibits any person from acquiring voting stock in a bank or bank holding company without 60 days prior notice to the Commissioner if such acquisition will give the person control of 25% or more of the voting stock of the bank or bank holding company. The Commissioner may deny approval of the acquisition if the Commissioner determines it to be anti-competitive or to threaten the safety or soundness of a banking institution.

 

Dividend

The Federal Reserve Board has the power to prohibit dividends by bank holding companies if their actions constitute unsafe or unsound practices. The Federal Reserve Board has issued a policy statement on the payment of cash dividends by bank holding companies, which expresses the Federal Reserve Board’s view that a bank holding company should pay cash dividends only to the extent that the company’s net income for the past year is sufficient to cover both the cash dividends and a rate of earnings retention that is consistent with the company’s capital needs, asset quality and overall financial condition. The Federal Reserve Board also indicated that it would be inappropriate for a bank holding company experiencing serious financial problems to borrow funds to pay dividends. Under the prompt corrective action regulations adopted by the Federal Reserve Board, the Federal Reserve Board may prohibit a bank holding company from paying any dividends if the holding company’s bank subsidiary is classified as “undercapitalized.” See “Regulation of the Bank – Capital Adequacy.”

 

  17  

 

 

Sources of Strength

The Dodd-Frank Act codified the source of strength doctrine requiring bank holding companies to serve as a source of strength for their depository subsidiaries, by providing capital, liquidity and other support in times of financial stress. The regulatory agencies are required, under the Act, to issue implementing regulations.

 

Stock Repurchases

The Company is required to give the Federal Reserve Board prior written notice of any purchase or redemption of its outstanding equity securities if the gross consideration for the purchase or redemption, when combined with the net consideration paid for all such purchases or redemptions during the preceding 12 months, is equal to 10% or more of the Company’s consolidated net worth. The Federal Reserve Board may disapprove such a purchase or redemption. This requirement does not apply to bank holding companies that are “well capitalized,” “well-managed” and are not the subject of any unresolved supervisory issues.

 

Capital Requirement

Bank holding companies are required to maintain on a consolidated basis, specified minimum ratios of capital to total assets and capital to risk-weighted assets. These requirements, which generally apply to bank holding companies with consolidated assets of $500 million or more, are substantially similar to, but somewhat more generous than, those applicable to the Bank. See “– Regulation of the Bank – Capital Adequacy.” The Dodd-Frank Act required the Federal Reserve Board to adopt consolidated capital requirements for holding companies that are equally as stringent as those applicable to the depository institution subsidiaries. That means that certain instruments that had previously been includable in Tier 1 capital for bank holding companies, such as trust preferred securities, will no longer be eligible for inclusion. The revised capital requirements are subject to certain grandfathering and transition rules. The Company is currently considered a grandfathered institution under these rules.

 

Regulation of the Bank

 

General

The Bank is a Maryland commercial bank and its deposit accounts are insured by the Deposit Insurance Fund of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation. The Bank is a member of the Federal Reserve and FHLB systems. The Bank is subject to supervision, examination and regulation by Commissioner of Financial Regulation of the State of Maryland (the “Commissioner”) and the Federal Reserve Board.

 

The Dodd-Frank Act established the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau as an independent bureau of the Federal Reserve Board. The Consumer Financial Protection Bureau assumed responsibility for implementing federal consumer financial protection and fair lending laws and regulations, a function currently handled by federal bank regulatory agencies. However, institutions of less than $10 billion, such as the Bank, will continue to be examined for compliance with consumer protection or fair lending laws and regulations by, and be subject to enforcement authority of their potential regulators.

 

The following discussion summarizes certain regulations applicable to the Bank but does not purport to be a complete description of such regulations and is qualified in its entirety by reference to the actual laws and regulations involved.

 

Capital Adequacy

On July 9, 2013, the federal bank regulatory agencies issued a final rule that revised their risk-based capital requirements and the method for calculating risk-weighted assets to make them consistent with agreements that were reached by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (“Basel III”) and certain provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act.

 

The rule established a new common equity Tier 1 minimum capital requirement (4.5% of risk-weighted assets), increased the minimum Tier 1 capital to risk-based assets requirement (from 4.0% to 6.0% of risk-weighted assets) and assigned a higher risk weight (150%) to exposures that are more than 90 days past due or are on nonaccrual status and to certain commercial real estate facilities that finance the acquisition, development or construction of real property.

 

The rule also includes changes in what constitutes regulatory capital, some of which are subject to a two-year transition period. These changes include the phasing-out of certain instruments as qualifying capital. In addition, Tier 2 capital is no longer limited to the amount of Tier 1 capital included in total capital. Mortgage servicing rights, certain deferred tax assets and investments in unconsolidated subsidiaries over designated percentages of common stock will be required to be deducted from capital, subject to a two-year transition period. Finally, Tier 1 capital will include accumulated other comprehensive income (which includes all unrealized gains and losses on available for sale debt and equity securities), subject to a two-year transition period.

 

  18  

 

 

Finally, the rule limits capital distributions and certain discretionary bonus payments if the banking organization does not hold a “capital conservation buffer” consisting of 2.5% of common equity Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets in addition to the amount necessary to meet its minimum risk-based capital requirements.

 

The final rule became effective on January 1, 2015. The capital conservation buffer requirement will be phased in beginning January 1, 2016, at 0.625% of risk-weighted assets, increasing each year until fully implemented at 2.5% on January 1, 2019.

 

Prompt Corrective Regulatory Action

Federal law requires, among other things, that federal bank regulatory authorities take “prompt corrective action” with respect to institutions that do not meet minimum capital requirements. For such purposes, the law establishes five capital tiers: well capitalized, adequately capitalized, undercapitalized, significantly undercapitalized, and critically undercapitalized.

 

As a result of Basel III (discussed further above), effective January 1, 2015, an institution is deemed to be “well capitalized” if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of 10% or greater, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 8% or greater, a common equity Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 6.5% or greater, and a leverage capital ratio of 5% or greater, and is not subject to a regulatory order, agreement, or directive to meet and maintain a specific capital level for any capital measure. An institution is deemed to be “adequately capitalized” if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of 8% or greater, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 6% or greater, a common equity Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of 4.5% or greater and generally a leverage capital ratio of 4% or greater. An institution is deemed to be “undercapitalized” if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of less than 8%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of less than 6%, a common equity Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of less than 4.5% or generally a leverage capital ratio of less than 4%. An institution is deemed to be “significantly undercapitalized” if it has a total risk-based capital ratio of less than 6%, a Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of less than 4%, a common equity Tier 1 risk-based capital ratio of less than 3% or a leverage capital ratio of less than 3%. An institution is deemed to be “critically undercapitalized” if it has a ratio of tangible equity (as defined in the regulations) to total assets that is equal to or less than 2%.

 

“Undercapitalized” institutions are subject to growth, capital distribution (including dividend), and other limitations, and are required to submit a capital restoration plan. An institution’s compliance with such a plan is required to be guaranteed by any company that controls the undercapitalized institution in an amount equal to the lesser of 5% of the bank’s total assets when deemed undercapitalized or the amount necessary to achieve the status of adequately capitalized. If an undercapitalized institution fails to submit an acceptable plan, it is treated as if it is “significantly undercapitalized.” Significantly undercapitalized institutions are subject to one or more additional restrictions including, but not limited to, a regulatory order requiring them to sell sufficient voting stock to become adequately capitalized; requirements to reduce total assets, cease receipt of deposits from correspondent banks, or dismiss directors or officers; and restrictions on interest rates paid on deposits, compensation of executive officers, and capital distributions by the parent holding company.

 

Beginning 60 days after becoming “critically undercapitalized,” critically undercapitalized institutions also may not make any payment of principal or interest on certain subordinated debt, extend credit for a highly leveraged transaction, or enter into any material transaction outside the ordinary course of business. In addition, subject to a narrow exception, the appointment of a receiver is required for a critically undercapitalized institution within 270 days after it obtains such status.

 

Branching

Maryland law provides that, with the approval of the Commissioner, Maryland banks may establish branches within Maryland and may establish branches in other states by any means permitted by the laws of such state or by federal law. The Federal Reserve Board may approve interstate branching by merger by state member banks in any state that did not opt out and de novo in states that specifically allow for such branching.

 

Dividend Limitations

Maryland banks may only pay dividends from undivided profits or, with the prior approval of the Commissioner, their surplus in excess of 100% of required capital stock. Maryland banks are further prohibited from declaring a dividend on its shares of common stock until its surplus fund equals the amount of required capital stock or, if the surplus fund does not equal the amount of capital stock, in an amount in excess of 90% of net earnings.

 

  19  

 

 

Without the approval of the Federal Reserve Board, a state member bank may not declare or pay a dividend if the total of all dividends declared during the year exceeds its net income during the current calendar year and retained net income for the prior two years. The Bank is further prohibited from making a capital distribution if it would be undercapitalized after payment of the dividend within the meaning of the prompt corrective action regulations discussed above.

 

Insurance of Deposit Accounts

Under the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation’s risk-based assessment system, insured institutions are assigned to one of four risk categories based on supervisory evaluations, regulatory capital levels and certain other factors, with less risky institutions paying lower assessments. An institution’s assessment rate depends upon the category to which it is assigned. The initial base assessment rate ranges from five to 35 basis points. The rate schedules will automatically adjust in the future when the Deposit Insurance Fund reaches certain milestones. No institution may pay a dividend if in default of the federal deposit insurance assessment.

 

Insurance of deposits may be terminated by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation upon a finding that the institution has engaged in unsafe or unsound practices, is in an unsafe or unsound condition to continue operations or has violated any applicable law, regulation, rule, order or condition imposed by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or its prudential banking regulator. The management of the Bank does not know of any practice, condition or violation that might lead to termination of deposit insurance.

 

Reserve Requirements

Under Federal Reserve Board regulations, the Bank is required to maintain non-interest earning reserves against their transaction accounts (primarily Negotiable Order of Withdrawal (NOW) and regular checking accounts). The regulations generally provide that reserves be maintained against aggregate transaction accounts as follows for 2015: a 3% reserve ratio was assessed on net transaction accounts up to and including $103.6 million; a 10% reserve ratio is applied above $103.6 million. The first $14.5 million of otherwise reservable balances (subject to adjustments by the Federal Reserve Board) are exempted from the reserve requirements. The amounts are adjusted annually and, for 2016, will require a 3% ratio for up to $110.2 million and an exemption of $15.2 million. At December 31, 2015, the Bank met applicable Federal Reserve Board reserve requirements.

 

Transactions with Affiliate

A state member bank is limited in the amount of “covered transactions” with any affiliate. All such transactions must also be on terms substantially the same, or at least as favorable, to the Bank or subsidiary as those provided to a non-affiliate. The term “covered transaction” includes the making of loans, purchase of assets, issuance of a guarantee and similar types of transactions. Certain covered transactions, such as loans to affiliates, must meet collateral requirements. At December 31, 2015, we had no transactions with affiliates.

 

Loans to directors, executive officers and principal stockholders of a state member bank must be made on substantially the same terms as those prevailing for comparable transactions with persons who are not executive officers, directors, principal stockholders or employees of the bank. Loans to any executive officer, director and principal stockholder together with all other outstanding loans to such person and affiliated interests generally may not exceed 15% of the Bank’s unimpaired capital and surplus and all loans to such persons may not exceed the institution’s unimpaired capital and unimpaired surplus. Loans to directors, executive officers and principal stockholders, and their respective affiliates, in excess of the greater of $25,000 or 5% of capital and surplus, or any loans cumulatively aggregating $500,000 or more, must be approved in advance by a majority of the board of directors of the bank with any “interested” director not participating in the voting. State member banks are prohibited from paying the overdrafts of any of their executive officers or directors unless payment is made pursuant to a written, pre-authorized interest-bearing extension of credit plan that specifies a method of repayment or transfer of funds from another account at the bank. In addition, loans to executive officers may not be made on terms more favorable than those afforded other borrowers and are restricted as to type, amount and terms of credit.

 

Enforcement

The Commissioner has extensive enforcement authority over Maryland banks. Such authority includes the ability to issue cease and desist orders and civil money penalties and to remove directors or officers. The Commissioner may also take possession of a Maryland bank whose capital is impaired and seek to have a receiver appointed by a court.

 

  20  

 

 

The Federal Reserve Board has primary federal enforcement responsibility over state banks under its jurisdiction, including the authority to bring enforcement action against all “institution-related parties,” including stockholders, and any attorneys, appraisers and accountants who knowingly or recklessly participate in wrongful action likely to have an adverse effect on an institution. Formal enforcement action may range from the issuance of capital directive or a cease and desist order for the removal of officers and/or directors, receivership, conservatorship or termination of deposit insurance. Civil money penalties cover a wide range of violations and actions, and range up to $25,000 per day or even up to $1 million per day (in the most egregious cases). Criminal penalties for most financial institution crimes include fines of up to $1 million and imprisonment for up to 30 years.

 

Other Regulations

The Bank’s operations are also subject to federal laws applicable to credit transactions, including the:

 

  · Truth-In-Lending Act, governing disclosures of credit terms to consumer borrowers;

 

  · Home Mortgage Disclosure Act of 1975, requiring financial institutions to provide information to enable the public and public officials to determine whether a financial institution is fulfilling its obligation to help meet the housing needs of the community it serves;

 

  · Equal Credit Opportunity Act, prohibiting discrimination on the basis of race, creed or other prohibited factors in extending credit;

 

  · Fair Credit Reporting Act of 1978, governing the use and provision of information to credit reporting agencies; and

 

  · Fair Debt Collection Act, governing the manner in which consumer debts may be collected by collection agencies; and rules and regulations of the various federal agencies charged with the responsibility of implementing such federal laws.

 

The operations of the Bank also are subject to laws such as the:

 

  · Right to Financial Privacy Act, which imposes a duty to maintain confidentiality of consumer financial records and prescribes procedures for complying with administrative subpoenas of financial records;

 

  · Electronic Funds Transfer Act and Regulation E promulgated thereunder, which govern automatic deposits to and withdrawals from deposit accounts and customers’ rights and liabilities arising from the use of automated teller machines and other electronic banking services; and

 

  · Check Clearing for the 21st Century Act (also known as “Check 21”), which gives “substitute checks,” such as digital check images and copies made from that image, the same legal standing as the original paper check.

 

  21  

 

 

Management

 

Chief Officers

Our executive officers are elected by the Board of Directors and serve at the Board’s discretion. Executive officers of the Bank also serve as executive officers of the Company. The executive officers of the Company are as follows:

 

Michael L. Middleton, 68, is Executive Chairman of the Company and the Bank. Mr. Middleton joined the Bank in 1973 and served in various management positions until 1979 when he became President of the Bank, which he served as until 2010. He remained President of the Company until May 2012. Mr. Middleton has over 40 years of banking experience. Before joining the Bank, Mr. Middleton was employed by KMPG-Peat Marwick. Mr. Middleton is a member of the Maryland Association of Certified Public Accountants and holds a Masters of Business Administration from the University of Maryland. He also attended the Harvard Business School Program on Negotiation. From 1996 to 2004, Mr. Middleton served on the Board of Directors of the FHLB of Atlanta, serving as Chairman of the Board in 2004. Mr. Middleton served on the Board of Directors of the Federal Reserve Bank, Baltimore Branch, from 2004 to 2009. He completed his term as Chairman of the Maryland Bankers Association in June 2013 and is a trustee and former Chairman of the Board for the College of Southern Maryland, serves on the Advisory Board of the Robert H. Smith School of Business Center for Financial Policy and he completed his term as Vice Chairman of the Federal Reserve’s Community Depository Advisory Council (CDIAC) in October 2015. He also serves on several philanthropic and civic boards.

 

William J. Pasenelli, 57, is a Director and President and Chief Executive of the Company and Bank. Mr. Pasenelli joined the Bank as Chief Financial Officer in 2000 and was named President of the Bank in 2010 and President of the Company in May 2012. He relinquished the position of Chief Financial Officer of the Bank in March 2013. Before joining the Bank, Mr. Pasenelli had been Chief Financial Officer of Acacia Federal Savings Bank, Annandale, Virginia, since 1987. Mr. Pasenelli has over 20 years of banking experience. Mr. Pasenelli is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants, the Greater Washington Society of Certified Public Accountants and other civic groups. Mr. Pasenelli is a graduate of the National School of Banking and holds a Bachelor of Arts from Duke University. He also attended the Harvard Business School Program on Negotiation.

 

Gregory C. Cockerham, 61, joined the Bank in 1988. He serves as the Bank’s Executive Vice President—Chief Lending Officer of the Company and the Bank. Before joining the Bank, he was Vice President of Maryland National Bank. Mr. Cockerham has over 35 years of banking experience. Mr. Cockerham serves as former Chairman of the College of Southern Maryland Foundation and is the past Chairman of the Maryland Title Center. He presently serves as the Potomac Baptist Associate Finance Chair, is a Paul Harris Fellow and Foundation Chair with the Rotary Club of Charles County and serves on various civic boards. Mr. Cockerham is a Maryland Bankers School graduate and holds a Bachelor of Science from West Virginia University. He also attended the Harvard Business School Program on Negotiation.

 

James M. Burke, 47, joined the Bank in 2006. He serves as the Bank’s Executive Vice President—Chief Risk Officer of the Company and the Bank. Before his appointment as Executive Vice President in 2007, he served as the Bank’s Senior Credit Officer. Before joining the Bank, Mr. Burke served as Executive Vice President and Senior Loan Officer of Mercantile Southern Maryland Bank. Mr. Burke has over 20 years of banking experience. Mr. Burke is the former Chairman of the Board of Directors of University of Maryland Charles Regional Medical Center and is active in other civic groups. Mr. Burke is a Maryland Bankers School graduate and holds a Bachelor of Arts from High Point College. He is also a graduate of the East Carolina Advanced School of Commercial Lending and attended the Harvard Business School Program on Negotiation.

 

James F. Di Misa, 56, joined the Bank in 2006. He serves as Executive Vice President—Chief Operating Officer of the Company and the Bank. Before joining the Bank, Mr. Di Misa served as Executive Vice President of Mercantile Southern Maryland Bank. Mr. Di Misa has over 30 years of banking experience. Mr. Di Misa is Chairman of the Board of Trustees for the Maryland Bankers School and a member of several other civic and professional groups. Mr. Di Misa is a Stonier Graduate School of Banking graduate and holds a Masters of Business Administration from Mount St. Mary’s College and a Bachelor of Science from George Mason University. He also attended the Harvard Business School Program on Negotiation.

 

  22  

 

 

Todd L. Capitani, 49, joined the Bank in 2009. He serves as Executive Vice President—Chief Financial Officer of the Company and the Bank. Before joining the Bank, Mr. Capitani served as a Senior Finance Manager at Deloitte Consulting and as Chief Financial Officer at Ruesch International, Inc. Mr. Capitani has over 25 years of experience in corporate finance, controllership and external audit. Mr. Capitani is a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and other civic groups. Mr. Capitani is a Certified Public Accountant and holds a Bachelor of Arts from the University of California at Santa Barbara. He also attended the Harvard Business School Program on Negotiation and the Yale School of Management Strategic Leadership Conference.

 

Christy M Lombardi , 39 , joined the Bank in 1998. She serves as Executive Vice President—Chief Administrative Officer of the Company and the Bank. Ms. Lombardi is responsible for administrative and corporate governance matters for the Company, and oversees human resources and shareholder relations. Ms. Lombardi has 20 years of banking experience. She serves as Chair for the Calvert County Chamber of Commerce Board of Directors, the Advisory Board of the Maryland Banker’s Association Council of Professional Women in Banking and Finance and on the Southern Maryland Workforce Development Board. She is a Maryland Bankers School graduate and holds a Masters in Management from University of Maryland University College as well as a Masters in Business Administration. Ms. Lombardi also attended the Harvard Business School Program on Negotiation.

 

  23  

 

 

Item 1A. Risk Factors

 

Risks

 

An investment in shares of our common stock involves various risks. Our business, financial condition and results of operations could be harmed by any of the following risks or by other risks that have not been identified or that we may believe are immaterial or unlikely. The value or market price of our common stock could decline due to any of these risks, and you may lose all or part of your investment. The risks discussed below also include forward-looking statements, and our actual results may differ substantially from those discussed in these forward-looking statements .

 

Our increased emphasis on commercial lending may expose us to increased lending risks.

 

At December 31, 2015 and 2014, our loan portfolio consisted of $613.5 million, or 66.8%, and $561.1 million, or 64.3%, respectively, of commercial real estate loans, $67.2 million, or 7.3% and $73.6 million, or 8.4%, respectively of commercial business loans and $29.9 million, or 3.3% and $26.2 million, or 3.0%, respectively, of commercial equipment loans. We intend to maintain our emphasis on these types of loans. These types of loans generally expose a lender to greater risk of non-payment and loss and require a commensurately higher loan loss allowance than one- to four-family residential mortgage loans because repayment of the loans often depends on the successful operation of the property and the income stream of the borrowers. Such loans typically involve larger loan balances compared to one- to four-family residential mortgage loans. Commercial business and equipment loans expose us to additional risks since they typically are made on the basis of the borrower’s ability to make repayments from the cash flows of the borrower’s business and are secured by non-real estate collateral that may depreciate over time. Also, many of our commercial borrowers have more than one loan outstanding with us. Consequently, an adverse development with respect to one loan or one credit relationship can expose us to a significantly greater risk of loss compared to an adverse development with respect to a one- to four-family residential mortgage loan. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, $5.8 million, or 51.4% and $5.7 million, or 55.5%, respectively, of our non-accrual loans of $11.4 million and $10.3 million, respectively, consisted of commercial loans.

 

Our provision for loan losses has been elevated during the last five years and we may be required to make further increases in our provision for loan losses and to charge-off additional loans in the future. Further, our allowance for loan losses may prove to be insufficient to absorb losses in our loan portfolio.

 

For the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, we recorded a provision for loan losses of $1.4 million and $2.7 million, respectively. We also recorded net loan charge-offs of $1.4 million and $2.3 million for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Our non-accrual loans, OREO and accruing TDRs aggregated $34.0 million, or 2.98% of total assets and $29.4 million, or 2.71% of total assets, respectively, at December 31, 2015 and 2014. Additionally, loans that were classified as either special mention and substandard were $33.6 million and $52.2 million, respectively, at December 31, 2015 and 2014. We had $861,000 in loans classified as doubtful and no loans classified as loss at December 31, 2015. We had no loans classified as doubtful or loss at December 31, 2014. If the economy and/or the real estate market weakens, more of our classified loans may become non-performing and we may be required to take additional provisions to increase our allowance for loan losses for these assets as the value of the collateral may be insufficient to pay any remaining net loan balance, which could have a negative effect on our results of operations. We maintain an allowance for loan losses to provide for loans in our portfolio that may not be repaid in their entirety. We believe that our allowance for loan losses is maintained at a level adequate to absorb probable losses inherent in our loan portfolio as of the corresponding balance sheet date. However, our allowance for loan losses may not be sufficient to cover actual loan losses, and future provisions for loan losses could materially adversely affect our operating results.

 

In evaluating the adequacy of our allowance for loan losses, we consider numerous quantitative factors, including our historical charge-off experience, growth of our loan portfolio, changes in the composition of our loan portfolio and the volume of delinquent, non-accrual and classified loans, TDRs and foreclosed real estate. In addition, we use information about specific borrower situations, including their financial position and estimated collateral values, to estimate the risk and amount of loss for those borrowers. Finally, we also consider many qualitative factors, including general and economic business conditions, anticipated duration of the current business cycle, current general market collateral valuations, trends apparent in any of the factors we take into account and other matters, which are, by nature, more subjective and fluid. Our estimates of the risk of loss and amount of loss on any loan are complicated by the significant uncertainties surrounding our borrowers’ abilities to successfully execute their business models through changing economic environments, competitive challenges and other factors. Because of the degree of uncertainty and susceptibility of these factors to change, our actual losses may vary from our current estimates.

 

  24  

 

 

Our regulators, as an integral part of their examination process, periodically review our allowance for loan losses and may require us to increase our allowance for loan losses by recognizing additional provisions for loan losses charged to expense, or to decrease our allowance for loan losses by recognizing loan charge-offs. Any such additional provisions for loan losses or charge-offs, as required by our regulators, could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

 

If we do not effectively manage our credit risk, we may experience increased levels of non-performing loans, charge-offs and delinquencies, which would require additional increases in our provision for loan losses.

 

There are risks inherent in making any loan, including risks inherent in dealing with individual borrowers, risks of non-payment, risks resulting from uncertainties as to the future value of collateral and cash flows available to service debt and risks resulting from changes in economic and market conditions. Our credit risk approval and monitoring procedures may not reduce these credit risks, and they cannot be expected to completely eliminate our credit risks. If the overall economic climate in the United States, generally, or our market areas, specifically, fails to improve, or even if it does improve, our borrowers may experience difficulties in repaying their loans, and the level of non-performing loans, charge-offs and delinquencies could rise and require further increases in the provision for loan losses, which would cause our net income and return on equity to decrease.

 

Non-performing and classified assets take significant time to resolve and adversely affect our results of operations and financial condition, and could result in further losses in the future.

 

At December 31, 2015 and 2014, our non-accrual loans totaled $11.4 million, or 1.24% of our loan portfolio and $10.3 million, or 1.18% of our loan portfolio, respectively. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, our non-accrual loans, OREO and accruing TDRs totaled $34.0 million, or 2.98% of total assets and $29.4 million, or 2.71% of total assets, respectively. Our non-performing assets adversely affect our net income in various ways. We do not accrue interest income on non-accrual loans or foreclosed properties, thereby adversely affecting our net income and returns on assets and equity, increasing our loan administration costs and adversely affecting our efficiency ratio. When we take collateral in foreclosure and similar proceedings, we are required to mark the collateral to its then fair market value, less estimated selling costs, which may result in a loss. These non-performing loans and foreclosed properties also increase our risk profile and the amount of capital our regulators believe is appropriate to maintain in light of such risks. The resolution of non-performing assets requires significant time commitments from management and can be detrimental to the performance of their other responsibilities. If we experience increases in non-performing loans and non-performing assets, our net interest income will be negatively impacted and our loan administration costs could increase, each of which could have an adverse effect on our net income and related ratios, such as return on assets and equity.

 

At December 31, 2015 and 2014 our total classified assets were $43.3 million and $54.0 million, respectively. While we continue to accrue interest income on classified loans that are performing, classified loans and other classified assets may negatively impact profitability by requiring additional management attention and regular monitoring. Increased monitoring of these assets by management may impact our management’s ability to focus on opportunistic growth, potentially adversely impacting future profitability.

 

Our residential mortgage loans and home equity loans expose us to a risk of loss due to declining real estate values.

 

At December 31, 2015 and 2014, $150.0 million, or 16.3%, of our total loan portfolio, and $152.8 million, or 17.5%, of our total loan portfolio, respectively, consisted of one- to four-family residential mortgage loans. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, $21.7 million, or 2.4%, of our total loan portfolio and $21.5 million, or 2.5%, of our total loan portfolio, respectively, consisted of home equity loans and lines of credit. Declines in the housing market could result in declines in real estate values in our market area. A decline in real estate values could cause some of our mortgage and home equity loans to be inadequately collateralized, which would expose us to a greater risk of loss if we seek to recover on defaulted loans by selling the real estate collateral.

 

  25  

 

 

Negative developments in the financial industry, the domestic and international credit markets, and the economy in general pose significant challenges for our industry and us and could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

Negative developments that began in the latter half of 2007 and that have continued since then in the global credit and securitization markets have resulted in unprecedented volatility and disruption in the financial markets, a general economic downturn and a tepid economic recovery, both nationally and in our primary markets. As a result, commercial as well as consumer loan portfolio performances deteriorated at many institutions and have not fully recovered, and the competition for deposits and quality loans has increased significantly. In addition, the values of real estate collateral supporting many commercial loans and home mortgages have declined and may continue to decline. As a result, we may face the following risks:

 

• Economic conditions that negatively affect housing prices and the job market may cause the credit quality of our loan portfolios to deteriorate;

 

• Market developments that affect consumer confidence may cause adverse changes in payment patterns by our customers, causing increases in delinquencies and default rates on loans and other credit facilities;

 

• The processes that we use to estimate our allowance for loan losses and reserves may no longer be reliable because they rely on judgments, such as forecasts of economic conditions, that may no longer be capable of accurate estimation;

 

• The value of our securities portfolio may decline; and

 

• We face increased regulation of our industry, and the costs of compliance with such regulation may increase.

 

These conditions or similar ones may continue to persist or worsen, causing us to experience continuing or increased adverse effects on our business, financial condition, results of operations and the price of our common stock.

 

Changes in interest rates could reduce our net interest income and earnings.

 

Our largest component of earnings is net interest income, which could be negatively affected by changes in interest rates. Changing interest rates impact customer actions and may limit the options available to the Company to maximize earnings or increase the costs to minimize risk. We do not have control over market interest rates and the Company’s focus to mitigate potential earnings risk centers on controlling the composition of our assets and liabilities.

 

Our net interest income is the interest we earn on loans and investments less the interest we pay on our deposits and borrowings. Our net interest margin is net interest income divided by average interest-earning assets. Changes in interest rates could adversely affect our net interest margin and, as a result, our net interest income. Although the yield we earn on our assets and our funding costs tend to move in the same direction in response to changes in interest rates, one can rise or fall faster than the other, causing our net interest margin to increase or decrease. Our liabilities tend to be shorter in duration than our assets, so they may adjust faster in response to changes in interest rates. As a result, when interest rates rise, our funding costs may rise faster than the yield we earn on our assets, causing our net interest margin to contract until the yield catches up. Changes in the slope of the “yield curve”—or the spread between short-term and long-term interest rates—could also reduce our net interest margin. Normally, the yield curve is upward sloping, meaning short-term rates are lower than long-term rates. Because our liabilities tend to be shorter in duration than our assets, when the yield curve flattens or inverts, we could experience pressure on our net interest margin as our cost of funds increases relative to the yield we can earn on our assets. Our procedures for managing exposure to falling net interest income involve modeling possible scenarios of interest rate increases and decreases to interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities.

 

Changes in interest rates also can affect: (1) our ability to originate loans; (2) the value of our interest-earning assets; (3) our ability to obtain and retain deposits in competition with other available investment alternatives; and (4) the ability of our borrowers to repay their loans, particularly adjustable or variable rate loans.

 

  26  

 

 

Monetary policies and regulations of the Federal Reserve could adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

In addition to being affected by general economic conditions, our earnings and growth are affected by the policies of the Federal Reserve. An important function of the Federal Reserve is to regulate the money supply and credit conditions. Among the instruments used by the Federal Reserve to implement these objectives are open market operations in U.S. government securities, adjustments of the discount rate and changes in reserve requirements against bank deposits. These instruments are used in varying combinations to influence overall economic growth and the distribution of credit, bank loans, investments and deposits. Their use also affects interest rates charged on loans or paid on deposits. The monetary policies and regulations of the Federal Reserve have had a significant effect on the operating results of commercial banks in the past and are expected to continue to do so in the future. The effects of such policies upon our business, financial condition and results of operations cannot be predicted.

 

Our financial condition and results of operations could be negatively affected if we fail to effectively execute our strategic plan or manage the growth called for in our strategic plan.

 

Among other things, our strategic plan currently calls for reducing the amount of our non-performing assets, growing assets through commercial lending and generating transaction deposit accounts to reduce our funding costs and improve our net interest margin. Our ability to increase profitability in accordance with this plan will depend on a variety of factors including the identification of desirable business opportunities, competitive responses from financial institutions in our market area and our ability to manage liquidity and funding sources. While we believe we have the management resources and internal systems in place to successfully manage our strategic plan, opportunities may not be available and that the strategic plan may not be successful or effectively managed.

 

Although we do not have any current definitive plans to do so, other than what we have already disclosed regarding a planned new brank in Fredericksburg in early 2016, in implementing our strategic plan we may expand into additional communities or attempt to strengthen our position in our current markets through opportunistic acquisitions of whole banks or branch locations. To the extent that we undertake acquisitions, we are likely to experience the effects of higher operating expenses relative to operating income from the new operations, which may have an adverse effect on our levels of reported net income, return on average equity and return on average assets. Other effects of engaging in such growth strategies may include potential diversion of our management’s time and attention and general disruption to our business. We may be able to adequately and profitably manage anticipated growth.

 

We are a community bank and our ability to maintain our reputation is critical to the success of our business and the failure to do so may materially adversely affect our performance.

 

We are a community bank, and our reputation is one of the most valuable components of our business. As such, we strive to conduct our business in a manner that enhances our reputation. This is done, in part, by recruiting, hiring and retaining employees who share our core values of being an integral part of the communities we serve, delivering superior service to our customers and caring about our customers and associates. If our reputation is negatively affected, by the actions of our employees or otherwise, our business and, therefore, our operating results may be adversely affected.

 

Our asset valuation may include methodologies, estimations and assumptions that are subject to differing interpretations and could result in changes to asset valuations that may materially adversely affect our results of operations or financial condition.

 

We must use estimates, assumptions, and judgments when financial assets and liabilities are measured and reported at fair value. Assets and liabilities carried at fair value inherently result in a higher degree of financial statement volatility. Fair values and the information used to record valuation adjustments for certain assets and liabilities are based on quoted market prices and/or other observable inputs provided by independent third-party sources, when available. When such third-party information is not available, we estimate fair value primarily by using cash flows and other financial modeling techniques utilizing assumptions such as credit quality, liquidity, interest rates and other relevant inputs. Changes in underlying factors, assumptions, or estimates in any of these areas could materially impact our future financial condition and results of operations.

 

During periods of market disruption, including periods of significantly rising or high interest rates, rapidly widening credit spreads or illiquidity, it may be difficult to value certain of our assets if trading becomes less frequent and market data becomes less observable. There may be certain asset classes that were in active markets with significant observable data that become illiquid due to the current financial environment. In such cases, certain asset valuations may require more subjectivity and management judgment. As such, valuations may include inputs and assumptions that are less observable or require greater estimation.

 

  27  

 

 

Strong competition within our market area could hurt our profits and slow growth.

 

We face intense competition both in making loans and attracting deposits. Our competition for loans and deposits includes banks, savings institutions, mortgage banking companies, credit unions and non-banking financial institutions. We compete with regional and national financial institutions that have a substantial presence in our market area, many of which have greater liquidity, higher lending limits, greater access to capital, more established market recognition and more resources and collective experience than us. Furthermore, tax-exempt credit unions operate in our market area and aggressively price their products and services to a large portion of the market. This competition may make it more difficult for us to originate new loans and may force us to offer higher deposit rates than we currently offer. Price competition for loans and deposits might result in lower interest rates earned on our loans and higher interest rates paid on our deposits, which would reduce net interest income. Our profitability depends upon our continued ability to compete successfully in our market area.

 

If the value of real estate in our market area were to decline, a significant portion of our loan portfolio could become under-collateralized, which could have a material adverse effect on us.

 

Declines in local economic conditions could adversely affect the value of the real estate collateral securing our loans. A decline in property values would diminish our ability to recover on defaulted loans by selling the real estate collateral, making it more likely that we would suffer losses on defaulted loans. Additionally, a decrease in asset quality could require additions to our allowance for loan losses through increased provisions for loan losses, which would hurt our profits. Real estate values are affected by various factors in addition to local economic conditions, including, among other things, changes in general or regional economic conditions, governmental rules or policies and natural disasters.

 

We may be adversely affected by economic conditions in our market area, which is significantly dependent on federal government and military employment, as well as national and international economic conditions.

 

Our marketplace is primarily in the counties of Charles, Calvert, St. Mary’s and Anne Arundel, Maryland and neighboring communities, and the Fredericksburg area of Virginia. Many, if not most, of our customers live and/or work in those counties or in the greater Washington, DC metropolitan area. Because our services are concentrated in this market, we are affected by the general economic conditions in the greater Washington, DC area. Changes in the economy may influence the growth rate of our loans and deposits, the quality of the loan portfolio and loan and deposit pricing. A significant decline in economic conditions caused by inflation, recession, unemployment or other factors beyond our control could decrease the demand for banking products and services generally and/or impair the ability of existing borrowers to repay their loans, which could negatively affect our financial condition and performance.

 

A significant portion of the population in our market area is affiliated with or employed by the federal government or at military facilities located in the area. As a result, a downturn in federal government or military employment could have a negative impact on local economic conditions and real estate collateral values, and could also negatively affect the Company’s profitability. The impact on the economy has been moderated by the presence of federal government agencies and defense facilities. However, the possibility of large cuts to the defense budget hampered economic expansion in recent years and the effect of the sequestration negatively impacted employment.

 

  28  

 

 

We operate in a highly regulated environment and we may be adversely affected by changes in laws and regulations.

 

The Company and the Bank are subject to extensive regulation, supervision and examination as noted in the “ Supervision and Regulation” section of this report. The regulation and supervision by the Maryland Commissioner, the Federal Reserve and the FDIC are not intended to protect the interests of investors in The Community Financial Corporation common stock. Regulatory authorities have extensive discretion in their supervisory and enforcement activities, including the imposition of restrictions on our operations, the classification of our assets and determination of the level of our allowance for loan losses. Any change in such regulation and oversight, whether in the form of regulatory policy, regulations, legislation or supervisory action, may have a material impact on our operations.

 

Regulation of the financial services industry is undergoing major changes and future legislation could increase our cost of doing business or harm our competitive position.

 

The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the “Dodd-Frank Act”) has created a significant shift in the way financial institutions operate. The key effects of the Dodd-Frank Act on our business are:

 

• Changes to regulatory capital requirements;

 

• Creation of new government regulatory agencies (such as the Financial Stability Oversight Council, which oversees systemic risk, and the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau, which develops and enforces rules for bank and non-bank providers of consumer financial products);

 

• Potential limitations on federal preemption;

 

• Changes to deposit insurance assessments;

 

• Regulation of debit interchange fees we earn;

 

• Changes in retail banking regulations, including potential limitations on certain fees we may charge; and

 

• Changes in regulation of consumer mortgage loan origination and risk retention.

 

In addition, the Dodd-Frank Act restricts the ability of banks to engage in certain proprietary trading or to sponsor or invest in private equity or hedge funds. The Dodd-Frank Act also contains provisions designed to limit the ability of insured depository institutions, their holding companies and their affiliates to conduct certain swaps and derivatives activities and to take certain principal positions in financial instruments.

 

Certain changes resulting from the Dodd-Frank Act may impact the profitability of our business activities, require changes to certain of our business practices, impose upon us more stringent capital, liquidity and leverage requirements or otherwise adversely affect our business. These changes may also require us to invest significant management attention and resources to evaluate and make any changes necessary to comply with new statutory and regulatory requirements. Failure to comply with the requirements may negatively impact our results of operations and financial condition.

 

Any future legislative changes could have a material impact on our profitability, the value of assets held for investment or collateral for loans. Future legislative changes could require changes to business practices or force us to discontinue businesses and potentially expose us to additional costs, liabilities, enforcement action and reputational risk.

 

New capital rules generally require insured depository institutions and their holding companies to hold more capital. The impact of the new rules on our financial condition and operations is uncertain but could be materially adverse.

 

New capital rules adopted by the Federal Reserve substantially amended the regulatory risk-based capital rules applicable to us. The rules phase in over several years between 2015 and 2019. The rules apply to the Company as well as to the Bank. Beginning in the first quarter of 2015, our minimum capital requirements were (i) a common Tier 1 equity ratio of 4.5%, (ii) a Tier 1 capital (common Tier 1 capital plus Additional Tier 1 capital) of 6% (up from 4%) and (iii) a total capital ratio of 8% (the current requirement). Our leverage ratio requirement will remain at the 4% level. Beginning in 2016, a capital conservation buffer will phase in over three years, ultimately resulting in a requirement of 2.5% on top of the common Tier 1, Tier 1 and total capital requirements, resulting in a required common Tier 1 equity ratio of 7%, a Tier 1 ratio of 8.5%, and a total capital ratio of 10.5%. Failure to satisfy any of these three capital requirements will result in limits on paying dividends, engaging in share repurchases and paying discretionary bonuses. These limitations will establish a maximum percentage of eligible retained income that could be utilized for such actions.

 

  29  

 

 

 

We are periodically subject to examination and scrutiny by a number of banking agencies and, depending upon the findings and determinations of these agencies, we may be required to make adjustments to our business that could adversely affect us.

 

Federal and state banking agencies periodically conduct examinations of our business, including compliance with applicable laws and regulations. If, as a result of an examination, a federal banking agency was to determine that the financial condition, capital resources, asset quality, asset concentration, earnings prospects, management, liquidity, sensitivity to market risk or other aspects of any of our operations has become unsatisfactory, or that we or our management is in violation of any law or regulation, it could take a number of different remedial actions as it deems appropriate. These actions include the power to enjoin “unsafe or unsound” practices, to require affirmative actions to correct any conditions resulting from any violation or practice, to issue an administrative order that can be judicially enforced, to direct an increase in our capital, to restrict our growth, to change the asset composition of our portfolio or balance sheet, to assess civil monetary penalties against our officers or directors, to remove officers and directors and, if it is concluded that such conditions cannot be corrected or there is an imminent risk of loss to depositors, to terminate our deposit insurance. If we become subject to such regulatory actions, our business, results of operations and reputation may be negatively impacted.

 

The Company is a bank holding company and its sources of funds necessary to meet its obligations are limited.

 

The Company is a bank holding company, and its operations are primarily conducted by the Bank, which is subject to significant federal and state regulation. Cash available to pay dividends to our common and preferred stockholders, pay our obligations and meet our debt service requirements is derived primarily from our existing cash flow sources, dividends received from the Bank, or a combination thereof. Future dividend payments by the Bank to us will require generation of future earnings by the Bank and are subject to certain regulatory guidelines. If the Bank is unable to pay dividends to us, we may not have the resources or cash flow to pay or meet all of our obligations.

 

The Bank became subject to increased internal control reporting under FDIC regulations in 2014. If it cannot favorably assess the effectiveness of its internal controls over financial reporting or if its independent registered public accounting firm is unable to provide an unqualified attestation report on the Bank’s internal controls, we may be subject to additional regulatory scrutiny .

 

The Bank’s total assets exceeded $1.0 billion at December 31, 2014 and it became subject to further reporting requirements under the rules of the FDIC for fiscal year 2014. Pursuant to these rules, management was required to prepare a report that contained an assessment by management of the Bank’s effectiveness of internal control structure and procedures for financial reporting as of the end of such fiscal year. The Bank was also required to obtain an independent public accountant’s attestation report concerning its internal control structure over financial reporting. The rules that must be met for management to assess the Bank’s internal controls over financial reporting are complex, and require significant documentation, testing and possible remediation. The effort to comply with regulatory requirements relating to internal controls will likely cause us to incur increased expenses. We also may encounter problems or delays in completing the implementation of any changes necessary to make a favorable assessment of the Bank’s internal controls over financial reporting. In addition, in connection with the attestation process, the Bank may encounter problems or delays in completing the implementation of any requested improvements or receiving a favorable attestation from its independent registered public accounting firm. If the Bank cannot favorably assess the effectiveness of its internal controls over financial reporting, or if its independent registered public accounting firm is unable to provide an unqualified attestation report on the Bank’s internal controls, investor confidence and the price of our common stock could be adversely affected and we may be subject to additional regulatory scrutiny.

 

Provisions of our articles of incorporation, bylaws and Maryland law, as well as state and federal banking regulations, could delay or prevent a takeover of us by a third party.

 

Provisions in our articles of incorporation and bylaws and Maryland corporate law could delay, defer or prevent a third party from acquiring us, despite the possible benefit to our shareholders, or otherwise adversely affect the price of our common stock. These provisions include: supermajority voting requirements for certain business combinations; the election of directors to staggered terms of three years; and advance notice requirements for nominations for election to our board of directors and for proposing matters that shareholders may act on at shareholder meetings. In addition, we are subject to Maryland laws, including one that prohibits us from engaging in a business combination with any interested shareholder for a period of five years from the date the person became an interested shareholder unless certain conditions are met. These provisions may discourage potential takeover attempts, discourage bids for our common stock at a premium over market price or adversely affect the market price of, and the voting and other rights of the holders of, our common stock. These provisions could also discourage proxy contests and make it more difficult for shareholders to elect directors other than the candidates nominated by our Board.

 

  30  

 

We rely on other companies to provide key components of our business infrastructure.

 

Third party vendors provide key components of our business infrastructure such as core data processing systems, internet connections, network access and fund distribution. While we have selected these third party vendors carefully, we cannot control their actions. Any problems caused by these third parties, including those which result from their failure to provide services for any reason or their poor performance of services, could adversely affect our ability to deliver products and services to its customers and otherwise to conduct its business. Replacing these third party vendors could also entail significant delay and expense.

 

We are dependent on our information technology and telecommunications systems and third-party servicers, and systems failures, interruptions or breaches of security could have a material adverse effect on us.

 

Our business is dependent on the successful and uninterrupted functioning of our information technology and telecommunications systems and third-party servicers. The failure of these systems, or the termination of a third-party software license or service agreement on which any of these systems is based, could interrupt our operations. Because our information technology and telecommunications systems interface with and depend on third-party systems, we could experience service denials if demand for such services exceeds capacity or such third-party systems fail or experience interruptions. If significant, sustained or repeated, a system failure or service denial could compromise our ability to operate effectively, damage our reputation, result in a loss of customer business, and/or subject us to additional regulatory scrutiny and possible financial liability, any of which could have a material adverse effect on us.

 

In addition, we provide our customers with the ability to bank remotely, including over the Internet and the telephone. The secure transmission of confidential information over the Internet and other remote channels is a critical element of remote banking. Despite instituted safeguards and monitoring, our network could be vulnerable to unauthorized access, computer viruses, phishing schemes and other security breaches. We may be required to spend significant capital and other resources to protect against the threat of security breaches and computer viruses, or to alleviate problems caused by security breaches or viruses. To the extent that our activities or the activities of our customers involve the storage and transmission of confidential information, physical and cyber security breaches and viruses could expose us to claims, regulatory scrutiny, litigation and other possible liabilities. Any inability to prevent security breaches or computer viruses could also cause existing customers to lose confidence in our systems and could materially and adversely affect us.

 

The laws that regulate our operations are designed for the protection of depositors and the public, not our shareholders.

 

The federal and state laws and regulations applicable to our operations give regulatory authorities extensive discretion in connection with their supervisory and enforcement responsibilities, and generally have been promulgated to protect depositors and the Deposit Insurance Fund and not for the purpose of protecting shareholders. These laws and regulations can materially affect our future business. Laws and regulations now affecting us may be changed at any time, and the interpretation of such laws and regulations by bank regulatory authorities is also subject to change. We can give no assurance that future changes in laws and regulations or changes in their interpretation will not adversely affect our business. Legislative and regulatory changes may increase our cost of doing business or otherwise adversely affect us and create competitive advantages for non-bank competitors.

 

We are subject to a variety of operational risks, environmental, legal and compliance risks, and the risk of fraud or theft by employees or outsiders, which may adversely affect our business and results of operations.

 

We are exposed to many types of operational risks, including reputational risk, legal and compliance risk, the risk of fraud or theft by employees or outsiders, and unauthorized transactions by employees or operational errors, including clerical or record-keeping errors or those resulting from faulty or disabled computer, telecommunications systems, cyber security breaches and other disruptive problems caused by the Internet or other users. Negative public opinion can result from our actual or alleged conduct in any number of activities, including lending practices, corporate governance and acquisitions and from actions taken by government regulators and community organizations in response to those activities. Negative public opinion can adversely affect our ability to attract and keep customers and can expose us to litigation and regulatory action. Actual or alleged conduct by the Bank can also result in negative public opinion about our other businesses.

 

  31  

 

If personal, non-public, confidential or proprietary information of customers in our possession were to be misappropriated, mishandled or misused, we could suffer significant regulatory consequences, reputational damage and financial loss. Such mishandling or misuse could include, for example, erroneously providing such information to parties who are not permitted to have the information, either by fault of our systems, employees, or counterparties, or the interception or inappropriate acquisition of such information by third parties.

 

Because the nature of the financial services business involves a high volume of transactions, certain errors may be repeated or compounded before they are discovered and successfully rectified. Our necessary dependence upon automated systems to record and process transactions and our large transaction volume may further increase the risk that technical flaws or employee tampering or manipulation of those systems will result in losses that are difficult to detect. We also may be subject to disruptions of our operating systems arising from events that are wholly or partially beyond our control (for example, computer viruses or electrical or telecommunications outages, or natural disasters, disease pandemics or other damage to property or physical assets) which may give rise to disruption of service to customers and to financial loss or liability. We are further exposed to the risk that our external vendors may be unable to fulfill their contractual obligations (or will be subject to the same risk of fraud or operational errors by their respective employees as we are) and to the risk that our (or our vendors’) business continuity and data security systems prove to be inadequate. The occurrence of any of these risks could result in our diminished ability to operate our business (for example, by requiring us to expend significant resources to correct the defect), as well as potential liability to clients, reputational damage and regulatory intervention, which could adversely affect our business, financial condition or results of operations, perhaps materially.

 

We face a risk of noncompliance and enforcement action with the Bank Secrecy Act and other anti-money laundering statutes and regulations.

 

The federal Bank Secrecy Act, the Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act of 2001 (the “PATRIOT Act”) and other laws and regulations require financial institutions, among other duties, to institute and maintain effective anti-money laundering programs and file suspicious activity and currency transaction reports as appropriate. The federal Financial Crimes Enforcement Network, established by the U.S. Treasury Department to administer the Bank Secrecy Act, is authorized to impose significant civil money penalties for violations of those requirements and has recently engaged in coordinated enforcement efforts with the individual federal banking regulators, as well as the U.S. Department of Justice, Drug Enforcement Administration and Internal Revenue Service. Federal and state bank regulators also have begun to focus on compliance with Bank Secrecy Act and anti-money laundering regulations. If our policies, procedures and systems are deemed deficient or the policies, procedures and systems of the financial institutions that we may acquire in the future are deficient, we would be subject to liability, including fines and regulatory actions such as restrictions on our ability to pay dividends and the necessity to obtain regulatory approvals to proceed with certain aspects of our business plan, including our acquisition plans, which would negatively impact our business, financial condition and results of operations. Failure to maintain and implement adequate programs to combat money laundering and terrorist financing could also have serious reputational consequences for us. 

 

Security breaches and other disruptions could compromise our information and expose us to liability, which would cause our business and reputation to suffer.

 

In the ordinary course of our business, we collect and store sensitive data, including our proprietary business information and that of our customers, suppliers and business partners; and personally identifiable information of our customers and employees. The secure processing, maintenance and transmission of this information is critical to our operations and business strategy. We, our customers, and other financial institutions with which we interact, are subject to ongoing, continuous attempts to penetrate key systems by individual hackers, organized criminals, and in some cases, state-sponsored organizations. Information security risks for financial institutions have generally increased in recent years in part because of the proliferation of new technologies, the use of the Internet and telecommunications technologies to conduct financial transactions, and the increased sophistication and activities of organized crime, hackers, terrorists, activists, and other external parties. Despite our security measures and monitoring, our information technology and infrastructure may be vulnerable to attacks by hackers or breached due to employee error, malfeasance or other disruptions. Any such breach could compromise our networks and the information stored there could be accessed, publicly disclosed, lost or stolen. Any such unauthorized access, disclosure or other loss of information could result in significant costs to us, which may include fines and penalties, potential liabilities from governmental or third party investigations, proceedings or litigation, legal, forensic and consulting fees and expenses, costs and diversion of management attention required for investigation and remediation actions, and the negative impact on our reputation and loss of confidence of our customers and others, any of which could have a material adverse impact on our business, revenues, financial condition and competitive position. As cyber threats continue to evolve, we may be required to spend significant capital and other resources to protect against the threat of security breaches and computer viruses, or to alleviate problems caused by security breaches or viruses.

 

  32  

 

Exiting or entering new lines of business or new products and services may subject us to additional risk .

 

From time to time, we may exit an existing line of business or implement new lines of business or offer new products and services within existing lines of business. There are substantial risks and uncertainties associated with these efforts. When exiting a line of business or product we may have difficulty replacing the revenue stream and may have to take certain actions to make up for the line of business or product. For example, we recently discontinued the origination of residential mortgage loans and instead now purchase residential mortgage loans for our loan portfolio from other sources. If those sources are not available or the cost for such purchases increases our results of operations may be adversely affected. We also may face increased credit risk with respect to purchased loans relative to the credit risks we faced in connection with the origination of loans. In developing and marketing new lines of business and/or new products and services, we may invest significant time and resources. Initial timetables for the introduction and development of new lines of business and/or new products or services may not be achieved and price and profitability targets may not prove feasible. External factors, such as compliance with regulations, competitive alternatives, and shifting market preferences, may also impact the successful implementation of a new line of business and/or a new product or service. Furthermore, any new line of business and/or new product or service could have a significant impact on the effectiveness of our system of internal controls. Failure to successfully manage these risks in the development and implementation of new lines of business and/or new products or services could have a material adverse effect on our business and, in turn, our financial condition and results of operations.

 

To remain competitive, we must keep pace with technological change.

 

Financial products and services have become increasingly technology-driven. Our ability to meet the needs of our customers competitively, and in a cost-efficient manner, is dependent on the ability to keep pace with technological advances and to invest in new technology as it becomes available. Many of our competitors have greater resources to invest in technology than we do and may be better equipped to market new technology-driven products and services. The ability to keep pace with technological change is important, and the failure to do so could have a material adverse impact on our business and therefore on our financial condition and results of operations.

 

The amount of interest payable on our 6.25% Fixed to Floating Rate Subordinated Notes due 2025 will vary after February 15, 2020.

 

The interest rate on our 6.25% Fixed to Floating Rate Subordinated Notes due 2025 will vary after February 15, 2020. From and including the issue date of such notes but excluding February 15, 2020, the notes will bear interest at a fixed rate of 6.25% per year. From and including February 15, 2020, to but excluding the maturity date, the notes will bear interest at an annual floating rate equal to the three-month LIBOR plus 479 basis points for any interest period. If interest rates rise, the cost of our subordinated notes may increase thereby negatively affecting our net income.

 

  33  

 

  

Item 1B. Unresolved Staff Comments

Not applicable.

 

Item 2. Properties

The Bank maintains its main office and operations center in Waldorf, Maryland, in addition to its branch offices in Lexington Park, Leonardtown, La Plata, Dunkirk, Bryans Road, Waldorf, Charlotte Hall, Prince Frederick and Lusby, Maryland and one branch in Fredericksburg, Virginia. The Bank is expected to open a second branch in downtown Fredericksburg, Virginia during the first quarter of 2016. The Bank owns all of its branches except for the Dunkirk, Maryland branch, the Fredericksburg Central Park, Virginia branch and the land on which the Waldorf, Charlotte Hall, Prince Frederick and Lusby, Maryland branches are located. In addition, the Bank maintains five loan production offices (“LPOs”) in La Plata, Prince Frederick, Leonardtown and Annapolis, Maryland; and Fredericksburg, Virginia. The Leonardtown and Fredericksburg LPOs are co-located with branches. Lease expiration dates range from 2017 to 2035 with renewal options of 5 to 10 years. The total net book value of the properties at December 31, 2015 and 2014 was $17.3 million and $17.8 million, respectively, which included $13.1 million and $12.2 million, respectively, related to buildings and improvements.

 

Item 3. Legal Proceedings

Neither the Company, the Bank, nor any subsidiary is engaged in any legal proceedings of a material nature at the present time. From time to time, the Bank is a party to legal proceedings in the ordinary course of business.

 

Item 4. Mine Safety Disclosures

Not applicable.

 

  34  

 

 

PART II

 

Item 5 - Market for Registrant’s Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities

 

Market Price and Dividends on Registrant’s and Related Stockholder Matters.

Market Information

The following table sets forth high and low bid quotations reported for the Company’s common stock for each quarter during 2015 and 2014 and the dividends declared per share for common stock. These quotes reflect inter-dealer prices without retail mark-up, mark-down or commission and may not necessarily reflect actual transactions.

 

Quarter Ended   High     Low     Dividends 
Per Share
 
                   
December 31, 2015   $ 24.00     $ 20.25     $ 0.10  
September 30, 2015     24.60       19.18       0.10  
June 30, 2015     23.77       19.75       0.10  
March 31, 2015     20.35       18.41       0.10  
December 31, 2014     21.50       19.56       0.10  
September 30, 2014     23.75       20.21       0.10  
June 30, 2014     23.96       20.55       0.10  
March 31, 2014     24.80       19.38       0.10  

 

Holders

The common stock of the Company is traded on the NASDAQ Stock Exchange (Symbol: TCFC). The number of stockholders of record of the Company at March 3, 2016 was 518.

 

Dividends

During 2015 and 2014, the Company declared and paid four quarters of dividends at $0.10 per share. The Board of Directors considers on a quarterly basis the feasibility of paying a cash dividend to its stockholders. Under the Company’s general practice, dividends, if declared during the quarter, are paid prior to the end of the subsequent quarter.

 

The Company’s ability to pay dividends is governed by the policies and regulations of the Federal Reserve Board (the “FRB”), which prohibits the payment of dividends under certain circumstances dependent on the Company’s financial condition and capital adequacy. The Company’s ability to pay dividends is also dependent on the receipt of dividends from the Bank.

 

Federal regulations impose certain limitations on the payment of dividends and other capital distributions by the Bank. The Bank’s ability to pay dividends is governed by the Maryland Financial Institutions Code and the regulations of the FRB. Under the Maryland Financial Institutions Code, a Maryland bank (1) may only pay dividends from undivided profits or, with prior regulatory approval, its surplus in excess of 100% of required capital stock and, (2) may not declare dividends on its common stock until its surplus funds equals the amount of required capital stock, or if the surplus fund does not equal the amount of capital stock, in an amount in excess of 90% of net earnings.

 

Without the approval of the FRB, a state member bank may not declare or pay a dividend if the total of all dividends declared during the year exceeds its net income during the current calendar year and retained net income for the prior two years. The Bank is further prohibited from making a capital distribution if it would not be adequately capitalized thereafter. In addition, the Bank may not make a capital distribution that would reduce its net worth below the amount required to maintain the liquidation account established for the benefit of its depositors at the time of its conversion to stock form.

 

  35  

 

On September 22, 2011, the U.S. Department of Treasury purchased $20.0 million of the Company’s Series C Preferred Stock under the Small Business Lending Fund. On February 13, 2015, the Company’s federal banking regulator approved the repayment of SBLF by the Company. The Company used proceeds from a $23 million dollar subordinated debt offering closed on February 6, 2015 to redeem all $20 million of the Company’s outstanding preferred stock issued under the SBLF program. The Company paid $23,000 and $200,000, respectively, in preferred dividends for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

Stock Performance Graph

The following graph and table show the cumulative total return on the common stock of the Company over the last five years, compared with the cumulative total return of a broad stock market index (the NASDAQ Capital Market Composite), and a narrower index of the NASDAQ Bank Index. Cumulative total return on the stock or the index equals the total increase in value since December 31, 2010, assuming reinvestment of all dividends paid into the stock or the index.

 

The graph and table were prepared assuming that $100 was invested on December 31, 2010, in the common stock and the securities included in the indexes

 

 

Source: Bloomberg   Year Ended  
Index   12/31/2010     12/30/2011     12/31/2012     12/31/2013     12/31/2014     12/31/2015  
The Community Financial Corporation     100.00       95.65       104.45       138.63       137.03       145.16  
NASDAQ Bank Index     100.00       89.54       106.15       149.99       157.21       170.98  
NASDAQ Capital Market Composite     100.00       77.02       87.44       119.44       112.75       93.63  

 

  36  

 

 

Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities

Not applicable.

 

Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer

On September 25, 2008, the Company announced a repurchase program (‘’2008 repurchase plan”) under which it would repurchase up to 5% of its outstanding common stock or approximately 147,435 shares. The program will continue until it is completed. On May 4, 2015, the Board of Directors approved a successor repurchase plan (“2015 repurchase plan”) that will commence upon the completion of the 2008 repurchase plan. The 2015 repurchase plan authorizes the repurchase of up to 250,000 shares of outstanding common stock. The 2015 repurchase plan will continue until it is completed or terminated by the Company’s Board of Directors. During the quarter ended December 31, 2015, the remaining 43,923 shares were repurchased under the 2008 repurchase program. As of December 31, 2015, 228,940 shares were available to be repurchased under the 2015 repurchase program

 

The following schedules show the repurchases during the three months ended December 31, 2015.

 

                (c)        
                Total Number        
                of Shares     (d)  
                Purchased     Maximum  
    (a)           as Part of     Number of Shares  
    Total     (b)     Publicly     that May Yet Be  
    Number of     Average     Announced Plans     Purchased Under  
    Shares     Price Paid     or     the Plans or  
Period   Purchased     per Share     Programs     Programs  
2008 Repurchase Plan                             43,923  
October 1-31, 2015     25,000     $ 21.20       25,000       18,923  
November 1-30, 2015     18,923       21.24       18,923       -  
December 1-31, 2015     -       -       -       -  
Total     43,923     $ 21.22       43,923       -  
                                 
2015 Repurchase Plan                             250,000  
October 1-31, 2015     -     $ -       -       250,000  
November 1-30, 2015     -       -       -       250,000  
December 1-31, 2015     21,060       21.24       21,060       228,940  
Total     21,060     $ 21.24       21,060       228,940  

 

  37  

 

 

Item 6 - Selected Financial Data

 

SUMMARY OF SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA

The following table shows selected historical consolidated financial data for the Company as of and for each of the five years ended December 31, 2015, which has been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements. You should read this table together with our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this Annual 10-K report.

 

    At or for the Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
                               
FINANCIAL CONDITION DATA                                        
Total assets   $ 1,143,332     $ 1,082,878     $ 1,023,824     $ 981,639     $ 983,480  
Loans receivable, net     909,200       862,409       799,130       747,641       710,089  
Investment securities     144,536       126,445       134,648       159,825       195,344  
Deposits     906,899       869,384       821,295       820,231       827,253  
Borrowings     91,617       76,672       70,476       61,527       60,577  
Junior subordinated debentures     12,000       12,000       12,000       12,000       12,000  
Subordinated notes - 6.25%     23,000       -       -       -       -  
Stockholders’ equity—preferred     -       20,000       20,000       20,000       20,000  
Stockholders’ equity—common     99,783       96,559       90,730       59,047       55,454  
                                         
OPERATING DATA                                        
Interest and dividend income   $ 43,873     $ 41,759     $ 39,678     $ 40,293     $ 39,959  
Interest expenses     7,345       6,698       7,646       10,604       13,121  
Net interest income (NII)     36,528       35,061       32,032       29,689       26,838  
Provision for loan losses     1,433       2,653       940       2,529       4,087  
NII after provision for loan losses     35,095       32,408       31,092       27,160       22,751  
Noninterest income     3,299       4,093       4,174       4,410       4,193  
Noninterest expenses     28,418       26,235       24,844       23,804       22,249  
Income before income taxes     9,976       10,266       10,422       7,766       4,695  
Income taxes     3,633       3,776       3,771       2,776       1,534  
Net income     6,343       6,490       6,651       4,990       3,161  
Preferred stock dividends declared     23       200       200       200       672  
Income available to common shares   $ 6,320     $ 6,290     $ 6,451     $ 4,790     $ 2,489  
                                         
COMMON SHARE DATA                                        
Basic earnings per common share   $ 1.36     $ 1.35     $ 1.90     $ 1.57     $ 0.83  
Diluted earnings per common share     1.35       1.35       1.88       1.57       0.82  
Dividends declared per common share     0.40       0.40       0.40       0.40       0.40  
Book value per common share (1)     21.48       20.53       19.52       19.34       18.32  
Common shares outstanding at end of period     4,645,429       4,702,715       4,647,407       3,052,416       3,026,557  
Basic weighted average common shares     4,639,700       4,646,424       3,402,432       3,043,039       3,016,286  
Diluted weighted average common shares     4,676,748       4,655,127       3,426,793       3,055,362       3,052,810  

 

  38  

 

 

    At or for the Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
                               
KEY OPERATING RATIOS                                        
Return on average assets     0.58 %     0.63 %     0.69 %     0.52 %     0.35 %
Return on average total equity     6.21       5.69       7.49       6.42       4.33  
Return on average common equity     6.33       6.69       9.38       8.29       4.47  
Interest rate spread     3.48       3.55       3.45       3.18       3.05  
Net interest margin     3.60       3.68       3.56       3.31       3.21  
Efficiency ratio (2)     71.35       67.00       68.62       69.81       71.70  
Common dividend payout ratio     29.41       29.63       21.05       25.48       48.78  
Non-interest expense to average assets     2.60       2.56       2.56       2.47       2.46  
Avg. int-earning assets to avg. int-bearing liabilities     117.71       118.83       114.57       111.56       110.11  
                                         
SELECTED ASSET QUALITY DATA                                        
Gross loans   $ 918,894     $ 872,129     $ 808,240     $ 756,552     $ 718,540  
Classified assets     43,346       54,022       56,880       58,595       79,638  
Allowance for loan losses     8,540       8,481       8,138       8,247       7,655  
Nonperforming loans (>=90 Days) (3)     10,740       10,263       11,170       8,717       9,511  
Non-accrual loans (4)     11,433       10,263       15,451       13,141       9,511  
Accruing troubled debt restructures (TDRs) (5)     13,133       13,249       4,364       4,515       11,113  
Other Real Estate Owned (OREO)     9,449       5,883       6,797       6,891       5,029  
                                         
SELECTED ASSET QUALITY RATIOS                                        
Average total equity to average total assets     9.35 %     11.11 %     9.16 %     8.07 %     8.06 %
Classified assets to total assets     3.79       4.99       5.56       5.97       8.10  
Classified assets to risk-based capital     30.19       39.30       43.11       59.02       83.89  
Allowance for loan losses to total loans     0.93       0.97       1.01       1.09       1.07  
Allowance for loan losses to nonperforming loans     79.52       82.64       72.86       94.78       80.49  
Net charge-offs to avg. outstanding loans     0.16       0.28       0.14       0.27       0.61  
Nonperforming loans to total loans     1.17       1.18       1.38       1.15       1.32  
Non-accrual loans to total loans     1.24       1.18       1.91       1.74       1.32  
Non-accrual loans and TDRs to total loans     2.67       2.70       2.45       2.33       2.87  
Non-accrual loans and OREO to total assets     1.83       1.49       2.17       2.04       1.48  
Non-accrual loans, OREO and TDRs to total assets     2.98       2.71       2.60       2.50       2.61  
OTHER DATA                                        
Number of:                                        
Full-time equivalent employees     171       172       165       160       143  
Full-service offices     12       12       11       11       10  
Loan Production Offices     5       5       4       n/a       n/a  
REGULATORY CAPITAL RATIOS (consolidated)                                        
Tier 1 capital to average assets     10.01 %     12.24 %     12.50 %     9.39 %     9.17 %
Tier 1 common capital to risk-weighted assets     10.16       n/a       n/a       n/a       n/a  
Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets     11.38       14.26       14.66       11.76       11.65  
Total risk-based capital to risk-weighted assets     14.58       15.21       15.62       12.84       12.69  

 

 

 

(1) The Company had no intangible assets as of the dates indicated. Thus, tangible book value per share is the same as book value per share for each of the periods indicated.

 

(2) Efficiency ratio is noninterest expense divided by the sum of net interest income and noninterest income.

 

(3) Nonperforming loans include all loans that are 90 days or more delinquent.

 

(4) Non-accrual loans include all loans that are 90 days or more delinquent and loans that are non-accrual due to the operating results or cash flows of a customer.

 

(5) TDR loans include both non-accrual and accruing performing loans. All TDR loans are included in the calculation of asset quality financial ratios. Non-accrual TDR loans are included in the non-accrual balance and accruing TDR loans are included in the accruing TDR balance.

 

  39  

 

Item 7 - Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This report contains forward-looking statements that are based on assumptions and may describe future plans, strategies and expectations of The Community Financial Corporation (the “Company”) and Community Bank of the Chesapeake (the “Bank”). These forward-looking statements are generally identified by use of the words “believe,” “expect,” “intend,” “anticipate,” “estimate,” “project” or similar expressions.

 

The Company and the Bank’s ability to predict results or the actual effect of future plans or strategies is inherently uncertain. Factors that could have a material adverse effect on the operations of the Company and its subsidiaries include, but are not limited to, changes in interest rates, national and regional economic conditions, legislative and regulatory changes, monetary and fiscal policies of the U.S. government, including policies of the U.S. Treasury and the Federal Reserve Board, the quality and composition of the loan or investment portfolios, demand for loan products, deposit flows, competition, demand for financial services in the Company and the Bank’s market area, changes in real estate market values in the Company and the Bank’s market area, changes in relevant accounting principles and guidelines and cyber security risks. These risks and uncertainties should be considered in evaluating forward-looking statements and undue reliance should not be placed on such statements. Except as required by applicable law or regulation, the Company does not undertake, and specifically disclaims any obligation, to release publicly the result of any revisions that may be made to any forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances after the date of the statements or to reflect the occurrence of anticipated or unanticipated events.

 

Critical Accounting Policies

Critical accounting policies are defined as those that involve significant judgments and uncertainties and could potentially result in materially different results under different assumptions and conditions. The Company considers its determination of the allowance for loan losses, the determination of other-than-temporarily impaired securities, the valuation of foreclosed real estate and the valuation of deferred tax assets to be critical accounting policies.

 

The Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and the general practices of the United States banking industry. Application of these principles requires management to make estimates, assumptions and judgments that affect the amounts reported in the financial statements and accompanying notes. These estimates, assumptions and judgments are based on information available as of the date of the financial statements. Accordingly, as this information changes, the financial statements could reflect different estimates, assumptions and judgments. Certain policies inherently have a greater reliance on the use of estimates, assumptions and judgments and, as such, have a greater possibility of producing results that could be materially different than originally reported.

 

Estimates, assumptions and judgments are necessary when assets and liabilities are required to be recorded at fair value, when a decline in the value of an asset not carried on the financial statements at fair value warrants an impairment write-down or valuation reserve to be established or when an asset or liability needs to be recorded contingent upon a future event. Carrying assets and liabilities at fair value inherently results in more financial statement volatility. The fair values and the information used to record valuation adjustments for certain assets and liabilities are based either on quoted market prices or are provided by other third-party sources, when available. When these sources are not available, management makes estimates based upon what it considers to be the best available information.

 

Allowance for Loan Losses

The allowance for loan losses is an estimate of the losses that exist in the loan portfolio. The allowance is based on two principles of accounting: (1) Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) Topic 450 “Contingencies,” which requires that losses be accrued when they are probable of occurring and are estimable and (2) FASB ASC 310 “Receivables,” which requires that losses be accrued when it is probable that the Company will not collect all principal and interest payments according to the contractual terms of the loan. The loss, if any, is determined by the difference between the loan balance and the value of collateral, the present value of expected future cash flows and values observable in the secondary markets.

 

The allowance for loan loss balance is an estimate based upon management’s evaluation of the loan portfolio. The allowance is comprised of a specific and a general component. The specific component consists of management’s evaluation of certain classified and non-accrual loans and their underlying collateral. Management assesses the ability of the borrower to repay the loan based upon all information available. Loans are examined to determine a specific allowance based upon the borrower’s payment history, economic conditions specific to the loan or borrower and other factors that would impact the borrower’s ability to repay the loan on its contractual basis. Depending on the assessment of the borrower’s ability to pay and the type, condition and value of collateral, management will establish an allowance amount specific to the loan.

 

  40  

 

Management uses a risk scale to assign grades to commercial real estate, construction and land development, commercial loans and commercial equipment loans. Commercial loan relationships with an aggregate exposure to the Bank of $750,000 or greater are risk rated. Residential first mortgages, home equity and second mortgages and consumer loans are monitored on an ongoing basis based on borrower payment history. Consumer loans and residential real estate loans are classified as unrated unless they are part of a larger commercial relationship that requires grading or are troubled debt restructures or nonperforming loans with an Other Assets Especially Mentioned or higher risk rating due to a delinquent payment history.

 

The Company’s commercial loan portfolio is periodically reviewed by regulators and independent consultants engaged by management.

 

In establishing the general component of the allowance, management analyzes non-impaired loans in the portfolio including changes in the amount and type of loans. This analysis reviews trends by portfolio segment in charge-offs, delinquency, classified loans, loan concentrations and the rate of portfolio segment growth. Qualitative factors also include an assessment of the current regulatory environment, the quality of credit administration and loan portfolio management and national and local economic trends. Based upon this analysis a loss factor is applied to each loan category and the Bank adjusts the loan loss allowance by increasing or decreasing the provision for loan losses.

 

Management has significant discretion in making the judgments inherent in the determination of the allowance for loan losses, including the valuation of collateral, assessing a borrower’s prospects of repayment and in establishing loss factors on the general component of the allowance. Changes in loss factors have a direct impact on the amount of the provision and on net income. Errors in management’s assessment of the global factors and their impact on the portfolio could result in the allowance not being adequate to cover losses in the portfolio, and may result in additional provisions. At December 31, 2015, the allowance for loan losses was $8.5 million or 0.93% of total loans. An increase or decrease in the allowance could result in a charge or credit to income before income taxes that materially impacts earnings. For additional information regarding the allowance for loan losses, refer to Notes 1 and 6 of the Consolidated Financial Statements and the discussion under the caption “Provision for Loan Losses” below.

 

Other-Than-Temporary-Impairment (“OTTI”)

Debt securities are evaluated quarterly to determine whether a decline in their value is other-than-temporary. The term “other-than-temporary” is not necessarily intended to indicate a permanent decline in value. It means that the prospects for near-term recovery of value are not necessarily favorable, or that there is a lack of evidence to support fair values equal to, or greater than, the carrying value of the investment. Accounting guidance indicates that the amount of other-than-temporary impairment that is recognized through earnings for debt securities is determined by comparing the present value of the expected cash flows to the amortized cost of the security. The discount rate used to determine the credit loss is the expected book yield on the security. The Company does not evaluate declines in the value of securities of Government Sponsored Enterprises (“GSEs”) or investments backed by the full faith and credit of the United States government (e.g. US Treasury Bills), for other-than-temporary impairment. For additional information regarding OTTI, refer to Notes 1 and 5 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Other Real Estate Owned (“OREO”)

The Company maintains a valuation allowance on its other real estate owned. As with the allowance for loan losses, the valuation allowance on OREO is based on FASB ASC 450 “Contingencies,” as well as the accounting guidance on impairment of long-lived assets. These statements require that the Company establish a valuation allowance when it has determined that the carrying amount of a foreclosed asset exceeds its fair value. Fair value of a foreclosed asset is measured by the cash flows expected to be realized from its subsequent disposition. These cash flows are reduced for the costs of selling or otherwise disposing of the asset.

 

In estimating the cash flows from the sale of OREO, management must make significant assumptions regarding the timing and amount of cash flows. For example, in cases where the real estate acquired is undeveloped land, management must gather the best available evidence regarding the market value of the property, including appraisals, cost estimates of development and broker opinions. Due to the highly subjective nature of this evidence, as well as the limited market, long time periods involved and substantial risks, cash flow estimates are highly subjective and subject to change. Errors regarding any aspect of the costs or proceeds of developing, selling or otherwise disposing of foreclosed real estate could result in the allowance being inadequate to reduce carrying costs to fair value and may require an additional provision for valuation allowances. For additional information regarding OREO, refer to Notes 1 and 8 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

  41  

 

Deferred Tax Assets

The Company accounts for income taxes in accordance with FASB ASC 740, “Income Taxes,” which requires that deferred tax assets and liabilities be recognized using enacted tax rates for the effect of temporary differences between the book and tax bases of recorded assets and liabilities. FASB ASC 740 requires that deferred tax assets be reduced by a valuation allowance if it is more likely than not that some portion or the entire deferred tax asset will not be realized.

 

The Company periodically evaluates the ability of the Company to realize the value of its deferred tax assets.  If the Company were to determine that it was not more likely than not that the Company would realize the full amount of the deferred tax assets, it would establish a valuation allowance to reduce the carrying value of the deferred tax asset to the amount it believes would be realized. The factors used to assess the likelihood of realization are the Company’s forecast of future taxable income and available tax-planning strategies that could be implemented to realize the net deferred tax assets.

 

Failure to achieve forecasted taxable income might affect the ultimate realization of the net deferred tax assets.  Factors that may affect the Company’s ability to achieve sufficient forecasted taxable income include, but are not limited to, the following: increased competition, a decline in net interest margin, a loss of market share, decreased demand for financial services and national and regional economic conditions. 

 

The Company’s provision for income taxes and the determination of the resulting deferred tax assets and liabilities involve a significant amount of management judgment and are based on the best information available at the time. The Company operates within federal and state taxing jurisdictions and is subject to audit in these jurisdictions. For additional information regarding income taxes and deferred tax assets, refer to Notes 1 and 12 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

OVERVIEW

Community Bank of the Chesapeake (the “Bank”) is headquartered in Southern Maryland with branches located in Maryland and Virginia. The Bank is a wholly owned subsidiary of The Community Financial Corporation. The Bank conducts business through its main office in Waldorf, Maryland, and 11 branch offices in Waldorf, Bryans Road, Dunkirk, Leonardtown, La Plata, Charlotte Hall, Prince Frederick, Lusby, California, Maryland; and King George and Fredericksburg, Virginia. The Company opened a branch in Fredericksburg, Virginia in July 2014. The Company’s second branch in Fredericksburg is scheduled to open in downtown during the first quarter of 2016. In addition, the Company maintains five loan production offices (“LPOs”) in La Plata, Prince Frederick, Leonardtown and Annapolis, Maryland; and Fredericksburg, Virginia. The Leonardtown and Fredericksburg LPOs are co-located with branches.

 

The Bank opened its LPO in Fredericksburg, Virginia during August 2013. The Fredericksburg Virginia area market is comparable in size to our legacy Southern Maryland footprint. During the second quarter of 2014, we continued to execute the Bank’s growth strategy and added seasoned lenders and support staff to expand into the city of Annapolis and surrounding Anne Arundel County. We opened the Annapolis LPO in October 2014. We are optimistic that our returns on these investments will continue to increase shareholder value.

 

In October 2013, the Company issued 1,591,300 shares of common stock at a price of $18.75 per share resulting in net proceeds of $27.4 million after commissions and related offering expenses. In addition, the Company listed its stock on the NASDAQ Stock Exchange and began trading on the exchange September 27, 2013 under the ticker symbol “TCFC.”

 

The Bank has increased assets through loan production. The Bank believes that its ability to offer fast, flexible, local decision-making will continue to attract significant new business relationships. The Bank focuses its business generation efforts on targeting small and medium sized commercial businesses with revenues between $5.0 million and $35.0 million as well as local municipal agencies and not-for-profits. The Bank’s marketing is also directed towards increasing its balances of transaction deposit accounts, which are all deposit accounts other than certificates of deposit. The Bank believes that increases in these account types will lessen the Bank’s dependence on higher-cost funding, such as certificates of deposit and borrowings. Although management believes that this strategy will increase financial performance over time, increasing the balances of certain products, such as commercial lending and transaction accounts, may also increase the Bank’s noninterest expense. The Bank recognizes that certain lending and deposit products increase the possibility of losses from credit and other risks. During 2015, the Company made a number of strategic decisions to meet our longer-term objectives of increased profitability and increase shareholder value. The Company continued to execute its plans to improve asset quality and to increase transaction deposits. The following is a summary of progress made during 2015:

 

  42  

 

· Improved asset quality – The Company has been working in an increasingly assertive manner to reduce its classified assets and will continue to move non-performing or substandard credits that are not likely to become performing or passing credits in a reasonable timeframe off the balance sheet. The Company is encouraging existing classified customers to obtain financing with other lenders or enforcing its contractual rights. Management believes this strategy is in the best long-term interest of the Company.

 

As of December 31, 2015 total loan delinquency at 1.27% of loans was in line with the Company’s peers. In addition, total classified assets, consisting primarily of classified loans and OREO, were $43.3 million at December 31, 2015, a reduction of $10.7 million, or approximately 19.8% from $54.0 million as of December 31, 2014. Total classified assets as a percentage of assets and risk-based capital decreased from 5.0% and 39.3%, respectively, at December 31, 2014 to 3.8% and 30.2%, respectively, at December 31, 2015. During the fourth quarter of 2015, the Company reduced its classified loans by $3.5 million. The majority of the fourth quarter reduction in classified loans resulted in a transfer to OREO of $2.7 million of developed real estate. The Company is optimistic that these properties will be sold in the near term based on the current valuation, the existing market and tenant occupancy.

 

· Increased transaction deposits – The Company continued to increase transaction deposits to compliment interest-earning asset growth. Our efforts center on providing products and services that serve small and midsize businesses and municipal customers. This has been the primary reason for the decrease in the Company’s funding costs. Since 2011, our deposit costs have decreased 96 basis points from 1.43% for the year ended December 31, 2011 to 0.47% for the three months ended December 31, 2015. Average transaction deposits for the year ended December 31, 2015 increased $65.4 million, or 15.5%, to $488.2 million compared to the prior year. Transaction deposits have increased from 44.9% of total deposits at December 31, 2011 to 58.6% of total deposits at December 31, 2015. The Company will use time deposits and wholesale funding to supplement interest-earning asset growth as needed.

 

· Controlled the growth of expenses – The Company’s noninterest expenses for 2015, excluding OREO charges and an insurance settlement claim adjustment, were $27.2 million which represents a $1.3 million, or 5.1%, increase over the comparable $25.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2014. With these adjustments, noninterest expense as a percentage of average assets decreased three basis points from 2.52% for the year ended December 31, 2014 to 2.49% for the year ended December 31, 2015.

 

Employee compensation and other operating expenses have grown over the last several years due to the Company’s expanding footprint and the increased cost of compliance and regulation. The Company controlled the growth of salary and benefit costs in 2015 with the remodeling of our retail centers and the restructuring of our branch organization. Additionally, management realigned incentives to more closely correlate with Company performance.

 

· Invested in infrastructure – During 2015, the Company invested in software and professional services to support the Company’s continued growth. These investments included capabilities to manage enterprise risks, interest rate risks, vendor risk management, customer information risks and cyber security risks.

 

· Exited underwriting residential mortgages and established third-party relationships to purchase residential mortgages - The Company exited the residential mortgage origination line of business in April 2015 and has established third party sources to fund its residential whole loan portfolio. The third party sources will allow the Company to maintain a well-diversified residential portfolio while addressing the credit needs of the communities in its footprint. The Company continues to underwrite non-owner occupied residential mortgages.

 

· Sold an unprofitable branch - The Company agreed to sell its King George, Virginia branch building and equipment to InFirst Federal Credit Union. The transaction closed on January 28, 2016. Operating results for the year ended December 31, 2015 reflect a one-time $426,000 pre-tax provision for the loss on the transaction with a $0.05 impact to earnings per share. The elimination of the estimated direct annual operating costs of the King George branch will have an immediate accretive impact on earnings per share in 2016 with the earn back period of less than 10 months.

 

  43  

 

· Executed plans to open a branch in downtown Fredericksburg in early 2016 - The Company’s second branch in Fredericksburg is scheduled to open in downtown during the first quarter of 2016. The Company believes that this second branch will enhance its deposit gathering in this market and complement the strong loan growth experienced in the Fredericksburg market during 2014 and 2015.

 

· The Company proactively refinanced preferred stock issued under the Small Business Lending Fund (“SBLF”) program - On February 6, 2015 the Company issued $23.0 million of unsecured 6.25% fixed to floating rate subordinated notes due 2025 (“subordinated notes”). On February 13, 2015, the Company used proceeds of the offering to redeem all $20 million of the Company’s outstanding preferred stock issued under the Small Business Lending Fund (“SBLF”) program. The subordinated notes qualified as tier 2 regulatory capital and replaced SBLF tier 1 capital. The Company decided to issue the subordinated notes during 2015 because of the scheduled increase in the after-tax SBLF dividend rate to 9% in March 2016. The short-term impact for 2016 was increased interest expense of $1.3 million; however, the Company believed it was prudent to issue the subordinated notes before the SBLF dividends were scheduled to increase.

 

Economy

The U.S. economy continued to grow slowly throughout 2015 and 2014. Gross domestic product grew at an annual rate of one percent during the fourth quarter of 2015, which was half of the growth posted during the third quarter of 2015. It appears that an economic slowdown is a distinct possibility during 2016. The Federal Reserve has indicated through its survey of the Board of Governors that up to four rate increases are planned for 2016. This may depend on whether a further softening in the economy continues. The Federal Reserve is more likely to implement its estimated rate rises if inflationary factors present themselves, which appears less likely at this point. During the beginning of 2016, due to a number world events and market disruptions, many economists reduced their forecasts for 2016 rate hikes from four down to two.

 

Medium-term interest rates have fallen since the fourth quarter of 2015, with the ten year U.S. Treasury rate as of February 25, 2016 ending at 1.71%. This is down from 2.27% at December 31, 2015 and 2.17% at December 31, 2014. The five year U.S. Treasury rate as of February 25, 2016 was 1.16%. This is down from 1.76% at December 31, 2015 and 1.65% at December 31, 2014. These lower medium-term interest rates were due to market adjustments at the beginning of 2016 and a flight to quality in U.S. Treasury securities, as economic weaknesses have continued in Europe and the Far East. In addition, depressed prices for commodities have impacted economies globally. The main issue for the Company with regard to depressed medium-term interest rates is the potential impact on loan pricing as loans reprice in our portfolio.

 

The impact of slower economic growth on the Southern Maryland, Annapolis, Maryland and Fredericksburg, Virginia areas has been moderated by the presence of federal government agencies and defense facilities. Further, the private sector that supports our footprint has continued to grow at a pace faster than other parts of the country. In addition, the Bank’s market expansion has enabled the Company to grow the loan portfolio in the present environment and was able to produce good organic growth in deposits during 2014 and 2015. Even through the difficult economic environment, the Bank’s capital levels and asset quality have remained strong

 

  44  

 

 

COMPARISON OF RESULTS OF OPERATIONS FOR THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2015 AND 2014

 

Earnings Summary

Net income available to common shareholders for 2015 was stable compared to the prior year increasing $30,000 to $6.3 million, or 0.5%, compared to 2014. Diluted earnings per share (“EPS”) were $1.36 in 2015, an increase of $0.01 compared to 2014. The Company’s return on average assets was 0.58% in 2015, a decrease of five basis points from 2014. The Company’s return on average common stockholders' equity was 6.33% in 2015, a decrease of 36 basis points from 2014.

 

Pretax operating income decreased $290,000 to $10.0 million in 2015 compared to $10.3 million in 2014.

 

The small decrease in operating income in 2015 was primarily due to the following:

 

· Noninterest income decreased $794,000 to $3.3 million for 2015 compared to 2014. The sale of the King George, Virginia branch, lower gains on mortgage loan sales due to the Bank exiting the residential mortgage origination line of business and a reduction on gains on the sale of OREO. These reductions in noninterest income were partially offset by increased service charge and BOLI income

 

· Noninterest expense increased $2.2 million, or 8.3%, to $28.4 million for 2015 compared to 2014. The largest impact on the growth of expenses was an increase in OREO charges and an insurance settlement claim adjustment. Employee compensation, data processing and professional fees increased to support the growth of the Bank and increased compliance costs. Specifically, professional fees increased to support the February 2015 subordinated notes issuance and infrastructure investments in enterprise risks, interest rate risks, vendor risk management, customer information risks and cyber security risks.

 

The Company’s noninterest expenses for 2015, excluding OREO charges and the title insurance settlement claim adjustment, were $27.2 million which represents a $1.3 million, or 5.1%, increase over the comparable $25.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2014. With these adjustments, noninterest expense as a percentage of average assets decreased three basis points from 2.52% for the year ended December 31, 2014 to 2.49% for the year ended December 31, 2015.

 

The increased expenses were partially offset by the following positive increases to revenues:

 

· Net interest income was $36.5 million in 2015 an increase of $1.5 million, or 4.2%, compared to 2014.

 

o Interest income increased $2.1 million. The increase was driven by increased loan average balances. The Bank increased average net loan balances $54.8 million to $874.2 million in 2015 from $819.4 million in 2014. Loan volume was partially offset by yield declines.

 

o Interest expense increased $647,000 which partially offset increased interest income. The primary reason for the increase related to the $23.0 million 6.25% subordinated notes issued during the first quarter of 2015. Continued progress in continuing to add transaction deposits mitigated some of the impact of the increased interest expense associated with the subordinated notes. Overall deposit cost decreased by eight basis points to 0.48% compared to the prior year.

  

· The provision for loan losses decreased $1.2 million to $1.4 million in 2015 due primarily to improvements to baseline charge-off factors for the periods used to evaluate the adequacy of the allowance as well as improvements in other qualitative factors, such as reductions in classified assets.

 

A more detailed analysis comparing the results of operations for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014 follows.

 

  45  

 

 

Net Interest Income

The primary component of the Company’s net income is its net interest income, which is the difference between income earned on assets and interest paid on the deposits and borrowings used to fund them. Net interest income is affected by the difference between the yields earned on the Company’s interest-earning assets and the rates paid on interest-bearing liabilities, as well as the relative amounts of such assets and liabilities. Net interest income, divided by average interest-earning assets, represents the Company’s net interest margin.

 

Net interest income increased to $36.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to $35.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2014. The net interest margin was 3.60% for the year ended December 31, 2015, an eight basis point decrease from 3.68% for the year ended December 31, 2014. The decrease in net interest margin was largely the result of additional interest expense related to the subordinated notes issued during the first quarter of 2015.

The following table shows the components of net interest income and the dollar and percentage changes for the periods presented.

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands )   2015     2014     $ Change     % Change  
Interest and Dividend Income                                
Loans, including fees   $ 41,386     $ 39,475     $ 1,911       4.8 %
Taxable interest and dividends on investment securities     2,473       2,270       203       8.9 %
Interest on deposits with banks     14       14       -       0.0 %
Total Interest and Dividend Income     43,873       41,759       2,114       5.1 %
                                 
Interest Expenses                                
Deposits     4,152       4,586       (434 )     (9.5 )%
Short-term borrowings     37       12       25       208.3 %
Long-term debt     3,156       2,100       1,056       50.3 %
Total Interest Expenses     7,345       6,698       647       9.7 %
                                 
Net Interest Income (NII)   $ 36,528     $ 35,061     $ 1,467       4.2 %

 

Interest and dividend income increased by $2.1 million to $43.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to $41.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2014, primarily due to increased income from the growth in the average balance of loans. Interest and dividend income on loans increased $2.6 million due to growth of $54.8 million in the average balance of loans from $819.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 to $874.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2015. Interest and dividend income on investments increased $203,000 during 2015 compared to the prior year as average interest-earning investment balances increased $4.7 million and average yields increased from 1.70% to 1.79%. These increases to interest income were partially offset by decreased income from reduced yields on loans. Average loan yields declined nine basis points from 4.82% for the year ended December 31, 2014 to 4.73% for the year ended December 31, 2015, which resulted in a decrease in interest income of $684,000.

 

Interest expense increased $647,000 to $7.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to the year ended December 31, 2014 due primarily to an increase in interest expense related to the subordinated notes issued during the first quarter of 2015. The average cost of total interest-bearing liabilities was 0.85% for the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to 0.83% for the year ended December 31, 2014. During the year ended December 31, 2015, interest expense increased $1.3 million due to the subordinated note issuance and larger short-term debt balances and $119,000 due to increased average balances of interest-bearing transaction deposit accounts compared to the same twelve months of 2014. Additionally, interest expense increased $35,000 on money market accounts, as rates increased modestly from 0.27% to 0.28%. The increases to interest expense were partially offset by reductions of $228,000 due to lower average balances of long-term debt and time deposits and $594,000 due to net decreases in rates paid on time deposits and long-term debt. The average rate paid on debt, which includes long-term debt, TRUPS, subordinated notes, and short-term borrowings, increased from 2.32% for the year ended December 31, 2014 to 2.77% for the year ended December 31, 2015.

 

  46  

 

The Company continued to make progress in reducing overall deposit costs by increasing transaction deposits as a percentage of overall deposits. Average transaction accounts as a percentage of average deposits increased from 52.0% for the year ended December 31, 2014 to 56.4% for the year ended December 31, 2015. Deposit costs declined eight basis points from 0.56% for the year ended December 31, 2014 to 0.48% for the year ended December 31, 2015. Average transaction deposits for the year ended December 31, 2015 increased $65.4 million, or 15.5%, to $488.2 million compared to $422.9 million for the comparable period in 2014. The increase in average transaction deposits included growth in average noninterest bearing demand deposits of $19.7 million, or 19.6%, from $100.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 to $120.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2015. The Company is less dependent on time deposits for funding. In the current year, the progress in continuing to add transaction deposits has mitigated some of the impact of the increased interest expense associated with the subordinated notes.

 

Changes in the components of net interest income due to changes in average balances of assets and liabilities and to changes caused by changes in interest rates are presented in the rate volume analysis included below. The table below presents information on average balances and rates for deposits.

 

    For the Years Ended December 31,        
    2015     2014  
    Average     Average     Average     Average  
(dollars in thousands)   Balance     Rate     Balance     Rate  
Savings   $ 44,963       0.10 %   $ 40,104       0.10 %
Interest-bearing demand and money market accounts     322,717       0.28 %     281,960       0.27 %
Certificates of deposit     378,179       0.85 %     389,641       0.97 %
Total interest-bearing deposits     745,859       0.56 %     711,705       0.64 %
Noninterest-bearing demand deposits     120,527               100,783          
    $ 866,386       0.48 %   $ 812,488       0.56 %

 

The table below sets forth certain information regarding changes in interest income and interest expense of the Bank for the periods indicated. For each category of interest-earning asset and interest-bearing liability, information is provided on changes attributable to (1) changes in volume (changes in volume multiplied by old rate); and (2) changes in rate (changes in rate multiplied by old volume). Changes in rate-volume (changes in rate multiplied by the change in volume) have been allocated to changes due to volume.

 

    Year Ended December, 2015  
    compared to Year Ended  
    December 31, 2014  
          Due to        
dollars in thousands   Volume     Rate     Total  
                   
Interest income:                        
Loan portfolio (1)   $ 2,595     $ (684 )   $ 1,911  
Investment securities, federal funds                        
sold and interest bearing deposits     84       119       203  
Total interest-earning assets   $ 2,679     $ (565 )   $ 2,114  
                         
Interest-bearing liabilities:                        
Savings     5       -       5  
Interest-bearing demand and money market accounts     114       35       149  
Certificates of deposit     (97 )     (491 )     (588 )
Long-term debt     (131 )     (100 )     (231 )
Short-term debt     25       -       25  
Subordinated notes     1,290       -       1,290  
Guaranteed preferred beneficial interest                        
in junior subordinated debentures     -       (3 )     (3 )
Total interest-bearing liabilities   $ 1,206     $ (559 )   $ 647  
Net change in net interest income   $ 1,473     $ (6 )   $ 1,467  

 

(1) Average balance includes non-accrual loans

 

  47  

 

 

The following table presents information on the average balances of the Company’s interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities and interest earned or paid thereon for the past two fiscal years. There are no tax equivalency adjustments.

 

    For the Years Ended December 31,  
          2015                 2014        
                Average                 Average  
    Average           Yield/     Average           Yield/  
dollars in thousands   Balance     Interest     Cost     Balance     Interest     Cost  
Assets                                                
Interest-earning assets:                                                
Loan portfolio (1)   $ 874,186     $ 41,386       4.73 %   $ 819,381     $ 39,475       4.82 %
Investment securities, federal funds sold and interest-bearing deposits     139,256       2,487       1.79 %     134,552       2,284       1.70 %
Total Interest-Earning Assets     1,013,442       43,873       4.33 %     953,933       41,759       4.38 %
Cash and cash equivalents     12,192                       11,979                  
Other assets     67,272                       60,530                  
Total Assets   $ 1,092,906                     $ 1,026,442                  
                                                 
Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity                                                
Interest-bearing liabilities:                                                
Savings   $ 44,963     $ 45       0.10 %   $ 40,104     $ 40       0.10 %
Interest-bearing demand and money market accounts     322,717       904       0.28 %     281,960       755       0.27 %
Certificates of deposit     378,179       3,203       0.85 %     389,641       3,791       0.97 %
Long-term debt     68,924       1,557       2.26 %     74,714       1,788       2.39 %
Short-term debt     13,463       37       0.27 %     4,344       12       0.28 %
Subordinated Notes     20,732       1,290       6.22 %     -       -       0.00 %
Guaranteed preferred beneficial interest in junior subordinated debentures     12,000       309       2.58 %     12,000       312       2.60 %
                                                 
Total Interest-Bearing Liabilities     860,978       7,345       0.85 %     802,763       6,698       0.83 %
                                                 
Noninterest-bearing demand deposits     120,527                       100,783                  
Other liabilities     9,244                       8,898                  
Stockholders' equity     102,157                       113,997                  
Total Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity   $ 1,092,906                     $ 1,026,441                  
                                                 
Net interest income           $ 36,528                     $ 35,061          
                                                 
Interest rate spread                     3.48 %                     3.55 %
Net yield on interest-earning assets                     3.60 %                     3.68 %
Ratio of average interest-earning assets to average interest bearing liabilities                     117.71 %                     118.83 %
                                                 
Cost of funds                     0.75 %                     0.74 %
Cost of deposits                     0.48 %                     0.56 %
Cost of debt                     2.77 %                     2.32 %

 

(1) Average balance includes non-accrual loans

 

  48  

 

 

Provision for Loan Losses

The following table shows the dollar and percentage changes for the provision for loan losses for the periods presented.

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands )   2015     2014     $ Change     % Change  
Provision for loan losses   $ 1,433     $ 2,653     $ (1,220 )     (46.0 )%

 

The provision for loan losses decreased $1.2 million to $1.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to $2.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2014. Net charge-offs decreased $936,000 from $2.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 to $1.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2015. The effects of these charge-offs were mitigated by improvements to baseline charge-off factors for the periods used to evaluate the adequacy of the allowance as well as improvements in other qualitative factors, such as reductions in classified assets.

 

In 2014 greater than 50% of net charge-offs were the result of concessions granted on two loan relationships during the fourth quarter of 2014. As a result of these concessions, the Bank determined that the loans were TDRs. As such, the loans became impaired and were evaluated for impairment in accordance with Bank policy. The first loan relationship, which totaled $8.6 million, consisted of commercial real estate and construction loans. The borrower agreed to provide additional collateral to cover most of the deficiency determined as a result of the impairment analysis and the Bank charged-off $500,000 in principal. The carrying value of the loans at December 31, 2015 and 2014 were $8.1 million and $8.2 million, respectively. The second loan relationship, which totaled approximately $3.8 million, consisted of construction and land development and commercial loans. As a result of the concessions granted and the impairment analysis, the Bank charged-off $843,000 and took 11 finished residential lots into other real estate owned (“OREO”). At December 31, 2015 and 2014, the carrying value of the loans and the OREO were $1.4 million and $1.9 million, respectively and $486,000 and $757,000, respectively.

 

See further discussion of the provision under the caption “Asset Quality” in the Comparison of Financial Condition section of Management’s Discussion and Analysis.

 

Noninterest Income

The following table shows the components of noninterest income and the dollar and percentage changes for the periods presented.

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands )   2015     2014     $ Change     % Change  
Noninterest Income                                
Loan appraisal, credit, and miscellaneous charges   $ 315     $ 368     $ (53 )     (14.4 )%
Gain on sale of asset     19       7       12       171.4 %
Net (losses) gains on sale of OREO     (20 )     322       (342 )     (106.2 )%
Net (losses) gains on sale of investment securities     4       19       (15 )     (78.9 )%
Loss on premises and equipment held for sale     (426 )     -       (426 )     n/a  
Income from bank owned life insurance     815       671       144       21.5 %
Service charges     2,488       2,213       275       12.4 %
Gain on sale of loans held for sale     104       493       (389 )     (78.9 )%
Total Noninterest Income   $ 3,299     $ 4,093     $ (794 )     (19.4 )%

 

Noninterest income decreased by $794,000 for the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to the year ended December 31, 2014 primarily due to a decrease in income from residential loan sales, a reduction in OREO gains on disposals, and the one-time expense to record a provision for the loss on the sale of the King George, Virginia branch building and equipment. The reduction in loans held for sale reflected the Company’s exit from residential loan origination line of business during the second quarter of 2015 and there were no loans sales during the last six months of 2015.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2015, the Bank recognized $20,000 in losses on the sale of OREO which consisted of the sale of eight properties for net proceeds of $1.2 million. During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Bank recognized $322,000 in gains on the sale of OREO which consisted of the sale of eight properties for net proceeds of $3.7 million, which included the financing of $1.0 million on a residential subdivision that was transferred from OREO to loans during the fourth quarter of 2014. The contracted sale price of $1.4 million on the residential subdivision qualified for full accrual sales treatment under ASC Topic 360-20-40 “Property Plant and Equipment – Derecognition”.

 

  49  

 

The Company agreed to sell its King George, Virginia branch building and equipment to InFirst Federal Credit Union. The transaction closed on January 28, 2016. Operating results for the year ended December 31, 2015 reflect a one-time $426,000 pre-tax provision for the loss on the transaction with a $0.05 impact to earnings per share. The elimination of the estimated direct annual operating costs of the King George branch will have an immediate accretive impact on earnings per share in 2016 with the earn back period of less than 10 months.

 

These reductions in noninterest income were partially offset by increased service charges and BOLI income for the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to the prior year. Service charges increased $275,000 compared to the prior year primarily due to additional product offerings offered to the Bank’s commercial customers. BOLI increased $144,000 for the comparable period because the Company made an additional investment of $7.0 million in BOLI during the third quarter of 2014.

 

Noninterest Expense

The following tables show the components of noninterest expense and the dollar and percentage changes for the periods presented.

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands )   2015     2014     $ Change     % Change  
Noninterest Expense                                
Salary and employee benefits   $ 16,366     $ 15,851     $ 515       3.2 %
Occupancy expense     2,427       2,371       56       2.4 %
Advertising     583       545       38       7.0 %
Data processing expense     2,044       1,556       488       31.4 %
Professional fees     1,323       1,129       194       17.2 %
Depreciation of furniture, fixtures, and equipment     810       753       57       7.6 %
Telephone communications     188       185       3       1.6 %
Office supplies     157       204       (47 )     (23.0 )%
FDIC Insurance     799       709       90       12.7 %
OREO valuation allowance and expenses     1,059       386       673       174.4 %
Other     2,662       2,546       116       4.6 %
Total Noninterest Expense   $ 28,418     $ 26,235     $ 2,183       8.3 %

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     $ Change     % Change  
Compensation and Benefits   $ 16,366     $ 15,851     $ 515       3.2 %
OREO Valuation Allowance and Expenses     1,059       386       673       174.4 %
Operating Expenses     10,993       9,998       995       10.0 %
Total Noninterest Expense   $ 28,418     $ 26,235     $ 2,183       8.3 %

 

For the year ended December 31, 2015, noninterest expense increased 8.3%, or $2.2 million, to $28.4 million from $26.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2014. The Company’s noninterest expense of $28.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2015 included OREO expenses of $1.1 million and a $200,000 reduction in an insurance settlement claim receivable. The Company’s noninterest expense for 2015, excluding OREO charges and the insurance settlement claim, was $27.2 million which represents a $1.3 million, or 5.1%, increase over the comparable $25.9 million for the year end December 31, 2014.

 

Noninterest expense as a percentage of average assets for the year ended December 31, 2015 was 2.60% compared to 2.56% for the year ended December 31, 2014. The Company’s ratio decreased three basis points during 2015, excluding OREO charges and the insurance settlement claim adjustment, to 2.49% for the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to 2.52% for the year ended December 31, 2014. Compensation and benefits increased 3.2% or $515,000 compared to the same period in the prior year. The Company has controlled the growth of salary and benefit costs by restructuring our branch organization and better aligning incentives with Company performance. The Company is continuing to work to slow the growth of noninterest expenses as a percentage of average assets based on current expansion plans and a greater ability to increase efficiencies as a result of our larger asset size.

 

  50  

 

The Company’s efficiency ratio for the year ended December 31, 2015 was 71.35% compared to 67.00% for the year ended December 31, 2014. Excluding the impact of the one-time loss provision on the sale of the King George branch, OREO expenses, OREO gains and losses and the insurance claim, the adjusted efficiency ratio for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014 was 67.44% and 66.57%, respectively.

 

Income Tax Expense

For the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Company recorded income tax expense of $3.6 million and $3.8 million, respectively. The Company’s effective tax rates for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014 were 36.42% and 36.78%, respectively. The decrease in the effective tax rate was the result of tax-exempt income being relatively higher to total income for 2015 compared to 2014.

 

  51  

 

 

COMPARISON OF RESULTS OF OPERATIONS FOR THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2014 AND 2013

 

Earnings Summary

Net income available to common shareholders for 2014 was stable compared to the prior year decreasing $161,000 to $6.3 million, or 2.5%, compared to 2013. Diluted earnings per share (“EPS”) were $1.35 in 2014, a decrease of $0.53 compared to 2013. The decrease in EPS was the result of the fourth quarter 2013 capital raise previously discussed. The Company’s return on average assets was 0.63% in 2014, a decrease of six basis points from 2013. The Company’s return on average common stockholders' equity was 6.69% in 2014, a decrease of 269 basis points from 2013.

 

Pretax operating income decreased $156,000 to $10.3 million in 2014 compared to 2013.

 

The decreased income in 2014 was primarily due to the following:

 

· The provision for loan losses increased $1.7 million to $2.7 million in 2014 due primarily to increases related to specific credits and increased average loan balances. The overall credit quality of our loan portfolio improved after charge-offs were taken and other workout strategies were exercised for challenging credits. At year end, this resulted in lower levels of classified loans and assets compared to the prior year. The general allowance as a percentage of gross loans increased in 2014 to 0.92% from 0.89% in 2013. During the same time frame the specific allowance decreased 7 basis point to 0.05% as a result of charge-offs and specific work out strategies.

 

· Noninterest income decreased $81,000 to $4.1 million for 2014 compared to 2013. Lower gains on mortgage loans sales and service charge income were partially offset by increases in gains on the sale of OREO.

 

· Noninterest expense increased $1.4 million, or 5.6%, to $26.2 million for 2014 compared to 2013. Employee compensation, occupancy expense and data processing increased to support the growth of the Bank and increased compliance costs. These increases were partially offset by a decrease in costs for FDIC insurance and OREO. The Company’s efficiency ratio improved from 68.62% for 2013 to 67.00% for 2014 and non-interest expense as a percentage of average assets remained flat at 2.56% for both years.

 

The increased expenses were partially offset by the following positive trends:

 

· Net interest income was $35.1 million in 2014, an increase of $3.0 million, or 9.5%, compared to 2013.

 

o Interest income increased $2.1 million. The increase was driven by increased loan average balances. The Bank increased average net loan balances $72.7 million to $838.1 million for the fourth quarter of 2014 from $765.4 million for the fourth quarter of 2013. Increased loan volume was partially offset by yield declines. Average loan yields decreased 20 basis points from 5.02% for 2013 to 4.82% for 2014.

 

o Interest expense decreased $948,000. This was primarily due to a decrease in the cost of funds compared to the prior year. The Bank continued to develop core deposit relationships and increased transaction deposits as it re-priced maturing time deposits. Higher cost time deposits were partially replaced with lower cost transaction and time deposits. In addition, the Bank continued to decrease its deposit costs on transaction accounts. The Bank completed the year with a $48.1 million increase in total deposits to $869.4 million. Transaction accounts increased to 56% at December 2014 from 53% and 51% at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

 

A more detailed analysis comparing the results of operations for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 follows.

 

Net Interest Income

The primary component of the Company’s net income is its net interest income, which is the difference between income earned on assets and interest paid on the deposits and borrowings used to fund them. Net interest income is affected by the difference between the yields earned on the Company’s interest-earning assets and the rates paid on interest-bearing liabilities, as well as the relative amounts of such assets and liabilities. Net interest income, divided by average interest-earning assets, represents the Company’s net interest margin.

 

  52  

 

Net interest income increased to $35.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to $32.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2013. The net interest margin was 3.68% for the year ended December 31, 2014, a 12 basis point increase from 3.56% for the year ended December 31, 2013. The increase was largely the result of an increase in loan average balances during 2014 compared to 2013. The growth in loan balances is directly attributable to the Bank continuing to be an important commercial lender in our legacy Southern Maryland footprint while adding greater than $80 million in new loans in the newer Fredericksburg, Virginia market. In addition, the Company’s cost of funds decreased in 2014. This decrease began during 2012 as certificates of deposit re-priced and rates declined on money market accounts. The average cost of total interest-bearing liabilities decreased 14 basis points from 0.97% for 2013 to 0.83% for 2014. Lastly, cost of deposits has decreased over the last several years because the composition of deposits has changed from reliance upon time deposits to lower cost transaction, both interest-bearing and noninterest bearing, demand deposits. Changes in the components of net interest income due to changes in average balances of assets and liabilities and to changes caused by changes in interest rates are presented in the rate volume analysis included below.

 

The following table shows the components of net interest income and the dollar and percentage changes for the periods presented.

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands )   2014     2013     $ Change     % Change  
Interest and Dividend Income                                
Loans, including fees   $ 39,475     $ 37,196     $ 2,279       6.1 %
Taxable interest and dividends on investment securities     2,270       2,466       (196 )     (7.9 )%
Interest on deposits with banks     14       16       (2 )     (12.5 )%
Total Interest and Dividend Income     41,759       39,678       2,081       5.2 %
                                 
Interest Expenses                                
Deposits     4,586       5,581       (995 )     (17.8 )%
Short-term borrowings     12       14       (2 )     (14.3 )%
Long-term debt     2,100       2,051       49       2.4 %
Total Interest Expenses     6,698       7,646       (948 )     (12.4 )%
                                 
Net Interest Income (NII)   $ 35,061     $ 32,032     $ 3,029       9.5 %

 

Interest and dividend income increased by $2.1 million to $41.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2014, compared to $39.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2013. Growth in the average balance of loans and, to a lesser extent, investment yields were partially offset by decreases in yields on loans and average investment balances. Interest and dividend income increased $3.8 million due to growth of $78.0 million in the average balance of loans from $741.4 million to $819.4 million and $187,000 due to higher investment yields. This increase was partially offset by a decrease of $1.5 million in interest income from a reduction in loan yields. Average loan yields declined 20 basis points from 5.02% for the year ended December 31, 2013 to 4.82% for the year ended December 31, 2014. Interest and dividend income was further reduced $385,000 as average interest-earning investment balances decreased $22.6 million from $157.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 to $134.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2014.

 

The cost of funds continued to decrease as certificates of deposit re-price and lower rates are offered on money market accounts. The average cost of total interest-bearing liabilities decreased 14 basis points from 0.97% for year ended December 31, 2013 to 0.83% for the year ended December 31, 2014. Deposit costs decreased 15 basis points from 0.71% to 0.56% during the same timeframe. Additionally, the increase in average noninterest bearing demand deposits of $13.2 million contributed to the decline in funding costs with average balances increasing from $87.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 to $100.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2014.

 

Interest expense decreased $948,000 to $6.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to $7.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 due primarily to a reduction in the cost of funds on interest-bearing liabilities; as interest expense decreased $1.1 million due to a decrease in rates. This was principally achieved by a decrease in the average rates paid on certificates of deposits and money market accounts, which declined from 1.19% and 0.33%, respectively, for the year ended December 31, 2013 to 0.97% and 0.27%, respectively, for the year ended December 31, 2014. The Company has been successful in increasing its core deposits and reducing its cost of funds in the low interest rate environment over the last several years. In addition, the average rate paid on debt, which includes long-term debt, subordinated debentures and short-term borrowings, decreased from 2.42% to 2.32% for the comparable period. Interest expense was also reduced $30,000 due to a decline in average certificate of deposit balances of $3.1 million from $392.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 to $389.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2014. These reductions were partially offset by increases in interest expense due to larger average balances for interest-bearing transaction accounts and debt. Interest expense increased $38,000 due to a $15.7 million increase in average interest-bearing transaction accounts from $306.4 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 to $322.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2014. Interest expense increased $137,000 due to a $5.8 million increase in average debt balances from $85.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 to $91.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2014.

 

  53  

 

 

The table below presents information on average balances and rates for deposits

 

    For the Years Ended December 31,  
    2014     2013  
    Average     Average     Average     Average  
(dollars in thousands)   Balance     Rate     Balance     Rate  
Savings   $ 40,104       0.10 %   $ 37,540       0.10 %
Interest-bearing demand and money market accounts     281,960       0.27 %     268,832       0.33 %
Certificates of deposit     389,641       0.97 %     392,675       1.19 %
Total interest-bearing deposits     711,705       0.64 %     699,047       0.80 %
Noninterest-bearing demand deposits     100,783               87,649          
    $ 812,488       0.56 %   $ 786,696       0.71 %

 

The table below sets forth certain information regarding changes in interest income and interest expense of the Bank for the periods indicated. For each category of interest-earning asset and interest-bearing liability, information is provided on changes attributable to (1) changes in volume (changes in volume multiplied by old rate); and (2) changes in rate (changes in rate multiplied by old volume). Changes in rate-volume (changes in rate multiplied by the change in volume) have been allocated to changes due to volume.

 

    Year Ended December 31, 2014  
    compared to Year Ended  
    December 31, 2013  
    Due to  
dollars in thousands   Volume     Rate     Total  
                   
Interest income:                        
Loan portfolio (1)   $ 3,758     $ (1,479 )   $ 2,279  
Investment securities, federal funds                        
sold and interest bearing deposits     (385 )     187       (198 )
Total interest-earning assets   $ 3,373     $ (1,292 )   $ 2,081  
                         
Interest-bearing liabilities:                        
Savings     3       (1 )     2  
Interest-bearing demand and money market accounts     35       (166 )     (131 )
Certificates of deposit     (30 )     (836 )     (866 )
Long-term debt     137       (95 )     42  
Short-term debt     -       (2 )     (2 )
Guaranteed preferred beneficial interest in junior subordinated debentures     -       7       7  
Total interest-bearing liabilities   $ 145     $ (1,093 )   $ (948 )
Net change in net interest income   $ 3,228     $ (199 )   $ 3,029  

 

(1) Average balance includes non-accrual loans

 

  54  

 

 

The following table presents information on the average balances of the Company’s interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities and interest earned or paid thereon for the past two fiscal years. There are no tax equivalency adjustments.

 

    For the Years Ended December 31,  
          2014                 2013        
                Average                 Average  
    Average           Yield/     Average           Yield/  
dollars in thousands   Balance     Interest     Cost     Balance     Interest     Cost  
Assets                                                
Interest-earning assets:                                                
Loan portfolio (1)   $ 819,381     $ 39,475       4.82 %   $ 741,369     $ 37,196       5.02 %
Investment securities, federal funds sold and interest-bearing deposits     134,552       2,284       1.70 %     157,211       2,482       1.58 %
Total Interest-Earning Assets     953,933       41,759       4.38 %     898,580       39,678       4.42 %
Cash and cash equivalents     11,979                       13,028                  
Other assets     60,530                       57,455                  
Total Assets   $ 1,026,442                     $ 969,063                  
                                                 
Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity                                                
Interest-bearing liabilities:                                                
Savings   $ 40,104     $ 40       0.10 %   $ 37,540     $ 38       0.10 %
Interest-bearing demand and money market accounts     281,960       755       0.27 %     268,832       886       0.33 %
Certificates of deposit     389,641       3,791       0.97 %     392,675       4,657       1.19 %
Long-term debt     74,714       1,788       2.39 %     68,996       1,746       2.53 %
Short-term debt     4,344       12       0.28 %     4,278       14       0.33 %
Guaranteed preferred beneficial interest                                                
in junior subordinated debentures     12,000       312       2.60 %     12,000       305       2.54 %
                                                 
Total Interest-Bearing Liabilities     802,763       6,698       0.83 %     784,321       7,646       0.97 %
                                                 
Noninterest-bearing demand deposits     100,783                       87,649                  
Other liabilities     8,898                       8,318                  
Stockholders' equity     113,998                       88,775                  
Total Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity   $ 1,026,442                     $ 969,063                  
                                                 
Net interest income           $ 35,061                     $ 32,032          
                                                 
Interest rate spread                     3.55 %                     3.45 %
Net yield on interest-earning assets                     3.68 %                     3.56 %
Ratio of average interest-earning assets to average interest bearing liabilities                     118.83 %                     114.57 %
                                                 
Cost of funds                     0.74 %                     0.88 %
Cost of deposits                     0.56 %                     0.71 %

 

(1) Average balance includes non-accrual loans

 

  55  

 

 

Provision for Loan Losses

The following table shows the dollar and percentage changes for the provision for loan losses for the periods presented.

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands )   2014     2013     $ Change     % Change  
Provision for loan losses   $ 2,653     $ 940     $ 1,713       182.2 %

 

The provision for loan losses increased $1.7 million from the comparable period in 2013 to $2.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 and reflected an increase in net-charge-offs offset by a decrease in the specific allowance of nonperforming loans. The provision for loan losses increased in 2014 due primarily to increases related to specific credits and increased average loan balances. The specific allowance is based on management’s estimate of realizable value for particular loans and has decreased as specific credits have been resolved through a return to performance, charge-offs, additions to other real estate owned, or the sale of non-performing and classified loans. Net charge-offs increased $1.3 million from $1.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 to $2.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2014, primarily due to the two loan relationships discussed below.

 

In the fourth quarter of 2014, the Bank granted concessions on two loan relationships, each of which was classified as substandard. As a result of these concessions, the Bank determined that the loans were TDRs. As such, the loans became impaired and were evaluated for impairment in accordance with Bank policy. The first loan relationship, which totaled $8.6 million, consisted of commercial real estate and construction loans. The borrower agreed to provide additional collateral to cover most of the deficiency determined as a result of the impairment analysis and the Bank charged-off $500,000 in principal. The carrying value of the loans at December 31, 2014 was $8.2 million. The second loan relationship, which totaled approximately $3.8 million, consisted of construction and land development and commercial loans. As a result of the concessions granted and the impairment analysis, the Bank charged-off $843,000 and took 11 finished residential lots into other real estate owned (“OREO”). At December 31, 2014, the carrying value of the loans and the OREO was $1.9 million and $757,000, respectively. Both loan relationships were current and making payments in accordance with their original contract terms before the restructuring occurred. Accordingly, the two loan relationships remained on accrual status at December 31, 2014. As a result of these classifications, total accruing TDRs increased to $13.2 million at December 31, 2014 from $4.4 million at December 31, 2013. Total nonaccrual loans and OREO at December 31, 2014 were $10.3 million and $5.9 million, respectively, as compared to $15.5 million and $6.8 million, respectively, at December 31, 2013, representing a decrease of $5.2 million and $0.9 million, respectively. Additionally, total classified assets declined $2.9 million from $56.9 million at December 31, 2013 to $54.0 million at December 31, 2014.

 

See further discussion of the provision under the caption “Asset Quality” in the Comparison of Financial Condition section of Management’s Discussion and Analysis.

 

Noninterest Income

The following table shows the components of noninterest income and the dollar and percentage changes for the periods presented.

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands )   2014     2013     $ Change     % Change  
Noninterest Income                                
Loan appraisal, credit, and miscellaneous charges   $ 368     $ 391     $ (23 )     (5.9 )%
Gain on sale of asset     7       11       (4 )     (36.4 )%
Net gains on sale of OREO     322       179       143       79.9 %
Net gains on sale of investment securities     19       -       19       n/a  
Income from bank owned life insurance     671       620       51       8.2 %
Service charges     2,213       2,346       (133 )     (5.7 )%
Gain on sale of loans held for sale     493       627       (134 )     (21.4 )%
Total Noninterest Income   $ 4,093     $ 4,174     $ (81 )     (1.9 )%

 

Noninterest income decreased slightly during 2014 compared to the prior year as reductions in gains on the sale of loans held for sale and service charge income were partially offset by increased gains on sales of other real owned.

 

  56  

 

 

Service charge income decreased due to the Bank’s focus on transaction account acquisition. The Bank is providing more products and services to attract and retain commercial customers. In addition, the Bank continued to see a reduction in service fees due to increased regulation.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Bank recognized $322,000 in gains on the sale of OREO which consisted of the sale of eight properties for net proceeds of $3.7 million, which included the financing of $1.0 million dollars on a residential subdivision that was transferred from OREO to loans during the fourth quarter of 2014. The contracted sales price of $1.4 million on the residential subdivision qualified for full accrual sales treatment under ASC Topic 360-20-40 “Property Plant and Equipment – Derecognition”.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Bank recognized $179,000 in gains on the sale of OREO which consisted of the sale of six properties for net proceeds of $1.3 million and net losses of $46,000 and the recognition of $225,000 of previously deferred gain from an OREO property that the Bank financed during 2011 that did not initially qualify for full accrual sales treatment. The Bank utilized the cost recovery method (ASC Topic 360-20-40 “Property Plant and Equipment – Derecognition”) to account for the sale.

 

Gains on loans originated for sale in the secondary market decreased in 2014 compared to the prior year. Secondary market sales slowed during the third quarter of 2013 as a result of rising residential mortgage interest rates. The refinance market rebounded slightly during the second half of 2014 due a decrease in rates. The Bank recognized $349,000, or 70.8% of 2014 gains on loan sales, in the last six months of 2014. In 2013, secondary market sales were concentrated during the first six months of 2013, as residential mortgage refinancing slowed during the third and fourth quarters of 2013 due to rising market interest rates. The Bank recognized $516,000, or 82.3% of 2013 gains on loan sales, in the six months ended June 30, 2013.

 

Noninterest Expense

The following tables show the components of noninterest expense and the dollar and percentage changes for the periods presented.

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands )   2014     2013     $ Change     % Change  
Noninterest Expense                                
Salary and employee benefits   $ 15,851     $ 14,521     $ 1,330       9.2 %
Occupancy expense     2,371       2,139       232       10.8 %
Advertising     545       477       68       14.3 %
Data processing expense     1,556       1,289       267       20.7 %
Professional fees     1,129       1,095       34       3.1 %
Depreciation of furniture, fixtures, and equipment     753       765       (12 )     (1.6 )%
Telephone communications     185       200       (15 )     (7.5 )%
Office supplies     204       226       (22 )     (9.7 )%
FDIC Insurance     709       1,115       (406 )     (36.4 )%
OREO valuation allowance and expenses     386       787       (401 )     (51.0 )%
Other     2,546       2,230       316       14.2 %
Total Noninterest Expense   $ 26,235     $ 24,844     $ 1,391       5.6 %

 

    Years Ended December 31,              
(dollars in thousands)   2014     2013     $ Change     % Change  
Compensation and Benefits   $ 15,851     $ 14,521     $ 1,330       9.2 %
OREO Valuation Allowance and Expenses     386       787       (401 )     (51.0 )%
Operating Expenses     9,998       9,536       462       4.8 %
Total Noninterest Expense   $ 26,235     $ 24,844     $ 1,391       5.6 %

 

  57  

 

For the year ended December 31, 2014, noninterest expense increased 5.6%, or $1.4 million, to $26.2 million from $24.8 million for the comparable period in 2013. The increase was primarily due to growth in salary and employee benefits of $1.3 million to $15.9 million as the Bank added employees in 2014 to support its expansion in Fredericksburg, Virginia and Annapolis, Maryland and the surrounding markets. Occupancy and advertising expense increased compared to the same period of the prior year primarily as a result of the Company’s entrance into new markets. Additionally, salary and benefits, data processing and other expenses were impacted by the increased cost of compliance and regulation. These increased costs were partially offset by a reduction in FDIC insurance premiums and OREO related expenses. The Company’s efficiency ratio and noninterest expense as a percentage of average assets for the year ended December 31, 2014 were 67.00% and 2.56%, respectively, compared to 68.62% and 2.56%, respectively, for the year ended December 31, 2013.

 

Income Tax Expense

For the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013, the Company recorded income tax expense of $3.8 million. The Company’s effective tax rates for the years ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 were 36.78% and 36.18%, respectively. The increase in the effective tax rate was the result of tax exempt income being relatively lower to total income in 2014 than in 2013.

 

  58  

 

 

COMPARISON OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AT DECEMBER 31, 2015 AND 2014

Assets

Total assets at December 31, 2015 of $1.14 billion increased $60.5 million compared to total assets of $1.08 billion at December 31, 2014. The increase in total assets was primarily attributable to growth in securities and loans partially offset by declines in cash.

 

The following table shows the Company’s assets and the dollar and percentage changes for the periods presented.

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014     $ Change     % Change  
                         
Cash and due from banks   $ 9,059     $ 17,275     $ (8,216 )     (47.6 )%
Federal funds sold     225       965       (740 )     (76.7 )%
Interest-bearing deposits with banks     1,855       3,133       (1,278 )     (40.8 )%
Securities available for sale (AFS), at fair value     35,116       41,939       (6,823 )     (16.3 )%
Securities held to maturity (HTM), at amortized cost     109,420       84,506       24,914       29.5 %
FHLB and FRB stock - at cost     6,931       6,434       497       7.7 %
Loans receivable - net of ALLL     909,200       862,409       46,791       5.4 %
Premises and equipment, net     20,156       20,586       (430 )     (2.1 )%
Premises and equipment held for sale     2,000       -       2,000       n/a  
Other real estate owned (OREO)     9,449       5,883       3,566       60.6 %
Accrued interest receivable     3,218       3,036       182       6.0 %
Investment in bank owned life insurance     27,836       27,021       815       3.0 %
Other assets     8,867       9,691       (824 )     (8.5 )%
Total Assets   $ 1,143,332     $ 1,082,878     $ 60,454       5.6 %

 

The differences in allocations between the cash and investment categories reflect operational needs. Net loans increased $46.8 million from $862.4 million at December 31, 2014 to $909.2 million at December 31, 2015, due primarily to increases in loans for commercial real estate.

 

Details of the Company’s loan portfolio are presented below:

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2015     %     December 31, 2014     %  
                         
Commercial real estate   $ 613,479       66.76 %   $ 561,080       64.34 %
Residential first mortgages     149,967       16.32 %     152,837       17.52 %
Construction and land development     36,189       3.94 %     36,370       4.17 %
Home equity and second mortgages     21,716       2.36 %     21,452       2.46 %
Commercial loans     67,246       7.32 %     73,625       8.44 %
Consumer loans     366       0.04 %     613       0.07 %
Commercial equipment     29,931       3.26 %     26,152       3.00 %
      918,894       100.00 %     872,129       100.00 %
Less:                                
Deferred loan fees     1,154       0.13 %     1,239       0.14 %
Allowance for loan losses     8,540       0.93 %     8,481       0.97 %
      9,694               9,720          
    $ 909,200             $ 862,409          

 

  59  

 

 

Asset Quality

 

(dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)   December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014     $ Change     % Change  
                         
SELECTED ASSET QUALITY DATA                                
Gross loans   $ 918,894     $ 872,129     $ 46,765       5.4 %
Classified assets     43,346       54,022       (10,676 )     (19.8 )%
Allowance for loan losses     8,540       8,481       59       0.7 %
Nonperforming loans (>=90 Days) (1)     10,740       10,263       477       4.6 %
Non-accrual loans (2)     11,433       10,263       1,170       11.4 %
Accruing troubled debt restructures (TDRs) (3)     13,133       13,249       (116 )     (0.9 )%
Other Real Estate Owned (OREO)     9,449       5,883       3,566       60.6 %
                                 
SELECTED ASSET QUALITY RATIOS                                
Average total equity to average total assets     9.35 %     11.11 %                
Classified assets to total assets     3.79       4.99                  
Classified assets to risk-based capital     30.19       39.30                  
Allowance for loan losses to total loans at    end of period     0.93       0.97                  
Allowance for loan losses to nonperforming loans     79.52       82.64                  
Net charge-offs to avg. outstanding loans     0.16       0.28                  
Nonperforming loans to total loans     1.17       1.18                  
Non-accrual loans to total loans     1.24       1.18                  
Non-accrual loans and TDRs to total loans     2.67       2.70                  
Non-accrual loans and OREO to total assets     1.83       1.49                  
Non-accrual loans, OREO and TDRs to total assets     2.98       2.71                  

 

 

 

(1) Nonperforming loans include all loans that are 90 days or more delinquent.

 

(2) Non-accrual loans include all loans that are 90 days or more delinquent and loans that are non-accrual due to the operating results or cash flows of a customer.

 

(3) TDR loans include both non-accrual and accruing performing loans. All TDR loans are included in the calculation of asset quality financial ratios. Non-accrual TDR loans are included in the non-accrual balance and accruing TDR loans are included in the accruing TDR balance.

 

The Company has been working in an increasingly assertive manner to reduce classified loans by using approaches that maximize the Company’s contractual rights with each individual customer relationship. The objective is to move non-performing or substandard credits that are not likely to become performing or passing credits in a reasonable timeframe off the balance sheet. The Company is encouraging existing classified customers to obtain financing with other lenders or enforcing its contractual rights. Management believes this strategy is in the best long-term interest of the Company.

 

Management considers classified assets to be an important measure of asset quality. Classified assets declined as a percentage of total assets and risk-based regulatory capital and in total dollars from a high point of greater than $81.9 million at September 30, 2011. Classified assets decreased $10.7 million, or 19.8%, from $54.0 million at December 31, 2014 to $43.3 million at December 31, 2015. During the fourth quarter of 2015, the Company reduced classified loans $3.5 million to $32.8 million compared to $36.3 million at September 30, 2015. Of the $3.5 million reduction in classified loans, $2.7 million was transferred to OREO. These properties include a 21 unit apartment building, 11 condo units and a commercial property. The Company is optimistic that these properties will be sold in the near term based on the current valuation, the existing market and tenant occupancy.

 

  60  

 

 

The following is a breakdown of the Company’s classified and special mention assets at December 31, 2015, 2014, 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively:

 

Classified Assets and Special Mention Assets                  
                   
(dollars in thousands)   12/31/2015     12/31/2014     12/31/2013     12/31/2012     12/31/2011  
Classified loans                                        
Substandard   $ 31,943     $ 46,735     $ 47,645     $ 48,676     $ 68,515  
Doubtful     861       -       -       -       -  
Loss     -       -       -       -       37  
Total classified loans     32,804       46,735       47,645       48,676       68,552  
Special mention loans     1,642       5,460       9,246       6,092       -  
Total classified and special mention loans   $ 34,446     $ 52,195     $ 56,891     $ 54,768     $ 68,552  
                                         
Classified loans     32,804       46,735       47,645       48,676       68,552  
Classified securities     1,093       1,404       2,438       3,028       6,057  
Other real estate owned     9,449       5,883       6,797       6,891       5,029  
Total classified assets   $ 43,346     $ 54,022     $ 56,880     $ 58,595     $ 79,638  
                                         
Total classified assets as a  percentage of total assets     3.79 %     4.99 %     5.56 %     5.97 %     8.10 %
Total classified assets as a  percentage of Risk Based Capital     30.19 %     39.30 %     43.11 %     59.02 %     83.89 %

 

Non-accrual loans (90 days or greater delinquent and non-accrual only loans) increased $1.1 million from $10.3 million, or 1.18%, of total loans at December 31, 2014 to $11.4 million, or 1.24%, of total loans at December 31, 2015. Non-accrual only loans are loans classified as non-accrual due to customer operating results or payment history. In accordance with the Company’s policy, interest income is recognized on a cash basis for these loans. The Company had 38 non-accrual loans at December 31, 2015 compared to 31 non-accrual loans at December 31, 2014. Non-accrual loans at December 31, 2015 included $8.1 million, or 71% of non-accrual loans, attributed to 19 loans representing six customer relationships classified as substandard. Non-accrual loans at December 31, 2014 included $8.8 million, or 86% of nonperforming loans, attributed to 16 loans representing six customer relationships classified as substandard. Of these loans at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014, four loans totaling $3.8 million and $3.9 million, respectively, represented a stalled residential development project. During the second quarter of 2014, the Company deferred the collection of principal and interest to enable the project to use available funds to build units and complete the project. The stalled development project loans are considered both TDRs and non-accrual loans. At December 31, 2015, the Company had an additional three TDR loans totaling $1.7 million classified as non-accrual. At December 31, 2014, the Company had one additional TDR loan totaling $1.0 million that was non-accrual. These loans are classified solely as non-accrual loans for the calculation of financial ratios.

 

Loan delinquency (90 days or greater delinquent and 31-89 days delinquent) decreased $395,000 from $12.1 million, or 1.39% of loans, at December 31, 2014 to $11.7 million, or 1.27% of loans, at December 31, 2015. Loans 31-89 days delinquent decreased $872,000 from $1.8 million, or 0.21% of total loans, at December 31, 2014 to $948,000, or 0.10% of total loans, at December 31, 2015.

 

At December 31, 2015, the Company had 23 accruing TDRs totaling $13.1 million compared to 19 accruing TDRs totaling $13.2 million as of December 31, 2014. The Company had specific reserves of $1.3 million on nine TDRs totaling $3.6 million at December 31, 2015 and $251,000 on five TDRs totaling $2.5 million at December 31, 2014.

 

  61  

 

 

The following is a breakdown by loan classification of the Company’s TDRs at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014:

 

    December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014  
(dollars in thousands)   Dollars     Number
of Loans
    Dollars     Number
of Loans
 
                         
Commercial real estate   $ 11,897       13     $ 10,438       9  
Residential first mortgages     881       3       906       3  
Construction and land development     4,283       5       4,376       4  
Commercial loans     1,384       7       2,262       6  
Commercial equipment     123       2       154       2  
Total TDRs   $ 18,568       30     $ 18,136       24  
Less: TDRs included in non-accrual loans     (5,435 )     (7 )     (4,887 )     (5 )
Total accrual TDR loans   $ 13,133       23     $ 13,249       19  

 

The OREO balance was $9.4 million at December 31, 2015, an increase of $3.5 million compared to $5.9 million at December 31, 2014. This increase consisted of additions of $5.4 million offset by valuation allowances of $664,000 to adjust properties to current appraised values and $1.2 million in disposals. OREO carrying amounts reflect management’s estimate of the realizable value of these properties incorporating current appraised values, local real estate market conditions and related costs.

 

Non-accrual loans and OREO to total assets increased 34 basis points from 1.49% at December 31, 2014 to 1.83% at December 31, 2015. Non-accrual loans, OREO and TDRs to total assets increased 37 basis points from 2.71% at December 31, 2014 to 2.98% at December 31, 2015.

 

The allowance for loan losses was 0.93% of gross loans at December 31, 2015 and 0.97% at December 31, 2014. There was a decrease in the general component of the allowance due to changes to general allowance factors that reflect changes in historical loss, delinquency rates and general economic conditions. Management’s determination of the adequacy of the allowance is based on a periodic evaluation of the portfolio with consideration given to: overall loss experience; current economic conditions; size, growth and composition of the loan portfolio; financial condition of the borrowers; current appraised values of underlying collateral and other relevant factors that, in management’s judgment, warrant recognition in determining an adequate allowance. The specific allowance is based on management’s estimate of realizable value for particular loans. Management believes that the allowance is adequate. The Company decreased its general allowance as a percentage of gross loans 17 basis points from 0.92% at December 31, 2014 to 0.75% at December 31, 2015.

 

The following is a breakdown of the Company’s general and specific allowances as a percentage of gross loans at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014, respectively.

 

(dollar in thousands)   December 31, 2015     % of Gross
Loans
    December 31, 2014     % of Gross
Loans
 
                         
General Allowance   $ 6,932       0.75 %   $ 8,030       0.92 %
Specific Allowance     1,608       0.17 %     451       0.05 %
Total Allowance   $ 8,540       0.93 %   $ 8,481       0.97 %

 

The most important weighted factor in the Company’s allowance for loan loss methodology is the charge-off history of the loan portfolio. The historical loss experience factor is tracked over various time horizons for each portfolio segment. It is weighted as the most important factor of the general component of the allowance and has decreased as the Company’s charge-off history has improved.

 

  62  

 

 

The following table provides a six-year trend of net charge-offs as a percentage of average loans.

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011     2010  
Average loans   $ 874,186     $ 819,381     $ 741,369     $ 719,798     $ 671,242     $ 615,887  
Net charge-offs     1,374       2,309       1,049       1,937       4,101       3,736  

Net charge-offs to average loans

    0.16 %     0.28 %     0.14 %     0.27 %     0.61 %     0.61 %

 

At December 31, 2015, 99%, or $138.3 million of the asset-backed securities and agency bond portfolio was rated AAA by Standard & Poor’s or the equivalent credit rating from another major rating agency compared to 99%, or $119.8 million, at December 31, 2014. Debt securities are evaluated quarterly to determine whether a decline in their value is OTTI. No OTTI charge was recorded for the year ended December 31, 2015 and the year ended December 31, 2014, respectively. Classified securities decreased $311,000 from $1.4 million at December 31, 2014 to $1.1 million at December 31, 2015.

 

Gross unrealized losses on HTM and AFS securities decreased from $1.6 million at December 31, 2014 to $1.5 million at December 31, 2015 (see Note 5 in Consolidated Financial Statements). Gross unrealized losses at December 31, 2015 and 2014 for AFS securities were $557,000 and $830,000, respectively, of amortized cost of $35.5 million and $42.6 million, respectively. Gross unrealized losses at December 31, 2015 and 2014 for HTM securities were $941,000 and $737,000, respectively, of amortized cost of $109.4 million and $84.5 million, respectively. The change in unrealized losses was the result of changes in interest rates, while credit risks remained stable. The Bank holds over 95% of its AFS and HTM securities as asset-backed securities of GSEs, GSE agency bonds or U.S. government obligations. The Company intends to, and has the ability to, hold both AFS and HTM securities with unrealized losses until they mature, at which time the Company will receive full value for the securities. The Company believes that the AFS and HTM securities with unrealized losses will either recover in market value or be paid off as agreed.

 

Liabilities

The following table shows the Company’s liabilities and the dollar and percentage changes for the periods presented.

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014     $ Change     % Change  
Deposits                                
Non-interest-bearing deposits   $ 142,771     $ 122,195     $ 20,576       16.8 %
Interest-bearing deposits     764,128       747,189       16,939       2.3 %
Total deposits     906,899       869,384       37,515       4.3 %
Short-term borrowings     36,000       2,000       34,000       1700.0 %
Long-term debt     55,617       74,672       (19,055 )     (25.5 )%
Guaranteed preferred beneficial interest in junior subordinated debentures (TRUPs)     12,000       12,000       -       0.0 %
Subordinated notes - 6.25%     23,000       -       23,000       n/a  
Accrued expenses and other liabilities     10,033       8,263       1,770       21.4 %
Total Liabilities   $ 1,043,549     $ 966,319     $ 77,230       8.0 %

 

  63  

 

 

Deposits

Deposits increased by 4.3%, or $37.5 million to $906.9 million at December 31, 2015 compared to $869.4 million at December 31, 2014. Between 2012 and 2015, the Company increased transaction deposits, including noninterest bearing deposits, to lower its overall cost of funds. Average transaction deposits for the year ended December 31, 2015 increased $65.4 million, or 15.5%, to $488.2 million compared to $422.9 million for the comparable period in 2014. The increase in average transaction deposits included growth in average noninterest bearing demand deposits of $19.7 million, or 19.6%, from $100.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 to $120.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2015. Transaction deposits have increased from 44.9% of total deposits at December 31, 2011 to 58.6% of total deposits at December 31, 2015. Details of the Company’s deposit portfolio at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014 are presented below:

 

    December 31,  
    2015     2014  
(dollars in thousands)   Balance     %     Balance     %  
Noninterest-bearing demand   $ 142,771       15.74 %   $ 122,195       14.06 %
Interest-bearing:                                
Demand     120,918       13.33 %     108,350       12.46 %
Money market deposits     219,956       24.25 %     211,929       24.38 %
Savings     47,703       5.26 %     41,499       4.77 %
Certificates of deposit     375,551       41.41 %     385,411       44.33 %
Total interest-bearing     764,128       84.26 %     747,189       85.94 %
                                 
Total Deposits   $ 906,899       100.00 %   $ 869,384       100.00 %
                                 
Transaction accounts   $ 531,348       58.59 %   $ 483,973       55.67 %

 

The Company uses both traditional brokered deposits and reciprocal brokered deposits. Traditional brokered deposits at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014 were $49.1 million and $41.7 million, respectively. Reciprocal brokered deposits at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014 were $61.1 million and $41.6 million, respectively. The reciprocal brokered deposits have many characteristics of core deposits and are used to maximize FDIC insurance available to our customers.

 

Borrowings

Long-term debt and short-term borrowings increased $14.9 million from $76.7 million at December 31, 2014 to $91.6 million at December 31, 2015. During the year ended December 31, 2015, the Company paid off a net of $19.1 million in Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) long-term debt reducing the balance to $55.6 million at December 31, 2015. Short-term borrowings increased $34.0 million to $36.0 million at December 31, 2015. The Company uses brokered deposits and other wholesale funding to supplement funding when loan growth exceeds core deposit growth and for asset-liability management purposes.

 

The Bank uses advances from the FHLB of Atlanta to supplement the supply of funds it may lend and to meet deposit withdrawal requirements. Advances from the FHLB are secured by the Bank’s stock in the FHLB, a portion of the Bank’s loan portfolio and certain investments. Generally, the Bank’s ability to borrow from the FHLB of Atlanta is limited by its available collateral and also by an overall limitation of 30% of assets. Further, short-term credit facilities are available at the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond and other commercial banks. Long-term debt consists of adjustable-rate advances with rates based upon LIBOR, fixed-rate advances, and convertible advances. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, 100% of the Bank’s long-term debt was fixed for rate and term, as the conversion optionality of the advances have either been exercised or expired.

 

  64  

 

 

The table below sets forth information about long-term debt and short-term borrowings for the years indicated. Junior subordinated debentures of $12 million and subordinated notes of $23.0 million are not included in the below table. For more information on borrowings, see Notes 11, 16 and 17 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

    At or for the Year Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
                   
Long-term debt                        
Long-term debt outstanding at end of period   $ 55,617     $ 74,672     $ 70,476  
Weighted average rate on outstanding long-term debt     2.47 %     2.35 %     2.49 %
Maximum outstanding long-term debt of any month end     74,668       75,471       70,519  
Average outstanding long-term debt     68,924       74,714       68,996  
Approximate average rate paid on long-term debt     2.26 %     2.39 %     2.53 %
                         
Short-term borrowings                        
Short-term borrowings outstanding at end of period   $ 36,000     $ 2,000     $ -  
Weighted average rate on short-term borrowings     0.38 %     0.31 %     0.00 %
Maximum outstanding short-term borrowings at any month end     36,000       15,000       24,000  
Average outstanding short-term borrowings     13,463       4,344       4,278  
Approximate average rate paid on short-term borrowings     0.27 %     0.28 %     0.33 %

 

Stockholders’ Equity

The following table shows the Company’s equity and the dollar and percentage changes for the periods presented.

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014     $ Change     % Change  
                         
Preferred Stock at par of $1,000   $ -     $ 20,000     $ (20,000 )     (100.0 )%
Common Stock at par of $0.01     46       47       (1 )     (2.1 )%
Additional paid in capital     46,809       46,416       393       0.8 %
Retained earnings     53,495       50,936       2,559       5.0 %
Accumulated other comprehensive loss     (251 )     (378 )     127       (33.6 )%
Unearned ESOP shares     (316 )     (462 )     146       (31.6 )%
Total Stockholders' Equity   $ 99,783     $ 116,559     $ (16,776 )     (14.4 )%

 

During the year ended December 31, 2015, stockholders’ equity decreased $16.8 million to $99.8 million. The decrease in stockholders’ equity was due to the $20.0 million payoff of SBLF preferred stock as described below, quarterly common dividends paid of $1.8 million, quarterly preferred stock dividends paid of $73,000 and repurchases of common stock of $1.8 million. These decreases to capital were partially offset by increases to equity from net income of $6.3 million, net stock related activities related to stock-based compensation and the exercise of options of $497,000 and a current year decrease in accumulated other comprehensive loss of $127,000. Common stockholders' equity of $99.8 million at December 31, 2015 resulted in a book value of $21.48 per common share compared to $20.53 at December 31, 2014. The Company remains well-capitalized at December 31, 2015 with a Tier 1 capital to average assets ratio of 10.01%.

 

On February 6, 2015, the Company issued $23.0 million of unsecured 6.25% fixed to floating rate subordinated notes due 2025 (“subordinated notes”). On February 13, 2015, the Company used proceeds of the offering to redeem all $20 million of the Company’s outstanding preferred stock issued under the Small Business Lending Fund (“SBLF”) program. The subordinated notes qualify as Tier 2 regulatory capital and replaced SBLF Tier 1 capital. The balance of the net proceeds will be used for general corporate purposes, including, but not limited to, contributing capital to Community Bank of the Chesapeake, supporting organic growth, possible acquisitions of branches or other financial institutions should attractive acquisition opportunities arise and the payment of dividends. The subordinated notes will increase the Company’s cost of funds during 2015. The Company’s decision to move forward with the transaction during 2015 was based on a scheduled increase in the after-tax SBLF dividend rate to 9% in March 2016.

 

  65  

 

 

LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES

 

Capital Resources

The Company has no business other than holding the stock of the Bank and does not currently have any material funding requirements, except for the payment of dividends on common stock, and the payment of interest on subordinated debentures and subordinated notes.

 

The Company evaluates capital resources by our ability to maintain adequate regulatory capital ratios. The Company and the Bank annually update a three-year strategic capital plan. In developing its plan, the Company considers the impact to capital of asset growth, income accretion, dividends, holding company liquidity, investment in markets and people and stress testing.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2015, the Company performed an assessment using the new regulatory capital ratios and determined that the Company meets the new requirements specified in the Basel III rules upon full adoption of such requirements. In addition, our subsidiary bank made the election to continue to exclude most accumulated other comprehensive income ("AOCI") from capital in connection with its March 31, 2015 quarterly financial filing and, in effect, to retain the AOCI treatment under the prior capital rules.

 

Federal banking regulations require the Company and the Bank to maintain specified levels of capital. As of December 31, 2015, the Company and Bank were well-capitalized under the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action under the new Basel III Capital Rules. Management believes, as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, that the Company and the Bank met all capital adequacy requirements to which they were subject. See Note 18 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

Liquidity

Liquidity is our ability to meet cash demands as they arise. Such needs can develop from loan demand, deposit withdrawals or acquisition opportunities. Potential obligations resulting from the issuance of standby letters of credit and commitments to fund future borrowings to our loan customers are other factors affecting our liquidity needs. Many of these obligations and commitments are expected to expire without being drawn upon; therefore the total commitment amounts do not necessarily represent future cash requirements affecting our liquidity position.

 

Asset liquidity is provided by cash and assets which are readily marketable or which will mature in the near future. Liquid assets include cash, federal funds sold, and short-term investments in cash deposits with other banks. Liquidity is also provided by access to funding sources, which include core depositors and brokered deposits. Other sources of funds include our ability to borrow, such as purchasing federal funds from correspondent banks, sales of securities under agreements to repurchase and advances from the FHLB.

 

At December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Bank had $73.5 million and $36.3 million, respectively, in loan commitments outstanding. Certificates of deposit due within one year of December 31, 2015 and 2014 totaled $230.6 million or 61.4% and $240.6 million or 62.4%, respectively, of total certificates of deposit outstanding. If maturing deposits do not remain, the Bank will be required to seek other sources of funds, including other certificates of deposit and borrowings. Depending on market conditions, we may be required to pay higher rates on such deposits or other borrowings than we currently pay on the certificates of deposits. We believe, however, based on past experience that a significant portion of our certificates of deposit will remain with us. We have the ability to attract and retain deposits by adjusting the interest rates offered.

 

The Company’s principal sources of liquidity are cash on hand and dividends received from the Bank. The Bank is subject to various regulatory restrictions on the payment of dividends.

 

The Bank’s principal sources of funds for investment and operations are net income, deposits, sales of loans, borrowings, principal and interest payments on loans, principal and interest received on investment securities and proceeds from the maturity and sale of investment securities. Its principal funding commitments are for the origination or purchase of loans, the purchase of securities and the payment of maturing deposits. Deposits are considered the primary source of funds supporting the Bank’s lending and investment activities. The Bank also uses borrowings from the FHLB of Atlanta to supplement deposits. The amount of FHLB advances available to the Bank is limited to the lower of 30% of Bank assets or the amount supportable by eligible collateral including FHLB stock, loans and securities. In addition, the Bank has established lines of credit with the Federal Reserve Bank and commercial banks. For a discussion of these agreements including collateral see Note 11 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

  66  

 

 

The Bank’s most liquid assets are cash, cash equivalents and federal funds sold. The levels of such assets are dependent on the Bank’s operating, financing and investment activities at any given time. The variations in levels of cash and cash equivalents are influenced by deposit flows and anticipated future deposit flows.

 

Comparison for the Years Ending December 31, 2015 and 2014

Cash and cash equivalents as of December 31, 2015 totaled $11.1 million, a decrease of $10.2 million, or 47.9%, from the December 31, 2014 total of $21.4 million. The decrease in cash was primarily due to more cash used in investing activities in 2015 compared to 2014 partially offset by more cash provided by operating activities in 2015 compared to 2014. Changes to the level of cash and cash equivalents have minimal impact on operational needs as the Bank has substantial sources of funds available from other sources.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2015, all financing activities provided $51.9 million in cash compared to $52.7 million in cash provided for the same period in 2014. The Company provided $794,000 less cash for financing activities in the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to the year ended December 31, 2014. The slight decrease in cash provided for the comparable periods was primarily the result of a decrease in the rate of deposit growth of $10.6 million, a net reduction in long-term debt of $23.3 million, partially offset by net increases in short-term borrowings of $32.0 million and a net increase of $3.0 million in proceeds due to the subordinated note raise of $23.0 million offset by the SBLF payoff of $20 million. Additionally, the Company used $1.8 million in cash to repurchase common stock during 2015 and other financing activities decreased cash provided $142,000.

 

The Bank’s principal use of cash has been in investing activities including its investments in loans, investment securities and other assets. In 2015, the level of net cash used in investing increased to $74.6 million from $66.4 million in 2014. The increase in cash used in investing activity of $8.2 million in 2015 was due to a reduction in net proceeds received on security transactions of $26.6 million primarily due to more investment purchases for the year ended December 31, 2015 than the comparable period of 2014. Additionally, the Bank sold some securities during 2014. The result of these securities activities was that the Bank was a net purchaser of securities of $18.6 million in 2015 compared to a net seller of securities of $8.0 million in 2014. Additional cash of $1.1 million was used to purchase premises and equipment in the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to 2014. During the same comparable period, net proceeds from the sale of OREO and other assets decreased $2.5 million. These increases to cash used were partially offset by decreases to cash used of $22.1 million due to $7.0 million from BOLI purchased in 2014 that was not purchased in 2015 and a net increase in cash provided of $15.1 million from loan activities. The principal collected on loans increased $12.0 million from $193.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 to $205.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2015. Less cash was used to fund loans as loans originated or acquired decreased $3.1 million from $262.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 to $258.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2015.

 

Operating activities provided cash of $12.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2015 compared to $10.6 million of cash provided for the same period of 2014. Cash increased by $1.9 million primarily due to an increase in accrued expenses and other liabilities, decreases in deferred income taxes and other assets partially offset by a decrease in the provision for loan losses.

 

Comparison for the Years Ending December 31, 2014 and 2013

Cash and cash equivalents as of December 31, 2014 totaled $21.4 million, a decrease of $3.1 million, or 12.8%, from the December 31, 2013 total of $24.5 million. The decrease in cash was primarily due to more cash used in investing activities in 2014 compared to 2013 partially offset by more cash provided by financing activities in 2014 compared to 2013. Changes to the level of cash and cash equivalents have minimal impact on operational needs as the Bank has substantial sources of funds available from other sources.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2014, all financing activities provided $52.7 million in cash compared to $36.0 million in cash provided for the same period in 2013. The Company provided $16.7 million more cash for financing activities in the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to the year ended December 31, 2013 primarily due to an increase in deposits of 47.0 million. These increases to cash were partially offset by $27.4 million of net cash proceeds from the October 2013 capital raise, a decrease in net borrowings of $2.8 million. Other financing activities decreased cash provided $185,000.

 

  67  

 

 

The Bank’s principal use of cash has been in investing activities including its investments in loans, investment securities and other assets. In 2014, the level of net cash used in investing increased to $66.4 million from $31.2 million in 2013. The increase in cash used in investing activity of $35.2 million in 2014 was due to a decrease in the amount of principal collected on loans of $27.7 million and a reduction in net proceeds received on security transactions of $14.7 million compared to the prior year; security net purchases used less cash of $5.7 million which was offset by a decrease in net proceeds from the sale or maturity of securities of $20.4 million. The purchase of additional bank owned life insurance and equipment used cash of $7.0 million and $1.3 million, respectively. These uses of cash were partially offset by less cash used to fund additional loans as loans originated or acquired decreased $13.0 million from $275.0 million in 2013 to $262.0 million in 2014. Additionally, additional proceeds of $2.5 million were received on the sale of OREO and asset disposals.

 

Operating activities provided cash of $10.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2014 compared to $8.5 million of cash provided for the same period of 2013. Cash increased by $2.1 million primarily due to an increase in the provision for loan losses and decreases in deferred income taxes and other assets partially offset by a decrease in accrued expenses and other liabilities.

 

  68  

 

 

QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURE ABOUT MARKET RISK

Interest rate risk is defined as the exposure to changes in net interest income and capital that arises from movements in interest rates. Depending on the composition of the balance sheet, increasing or decreasing interest rates can negatively affect the Company’s results of operations and financial condition.

 

The Company measures interest rate risk over the short and long term. The Company measures interest rate risk as the change in net interest income (“NII’) caused by a change in interest rates over twelve and twenty-four months. The Company’s NII simulations provide information about short-term interest rate risk exposure. The Company also measures interest rate risk by measuring changes in the values of assets and liabilities due to changes in interest rates. The economic value of equity (“EVE”) is defined as the present value of future cash flows from existing assets, minus the present value of future cash flows from existing liabilities. EVE simulations reflect the interest rate sensitivity of assets and liabilities over a longer time period, considering the maturities, average life and duration of all balance sheet accounts.

 

The Board of Directors has established an interest rate risk policy, which is administered by the Bank’s Asset Liability Committee (“ALCO”). The policy establishes limits on risk, which are quantitative measures of the percentage change in NII and EVE resulting from changes in interest rates. Both NII and EVE simulations assist in identifying, measuring, monitoring and controlling interest rate risk and are used by management and the ALCO Committee to ensure that interest rate risk exposure will be maintained within Board policy guidelines. The ALCO Committee reports quarterly to the Board of Directors. Mitigating strategies are used to maintain interest rate risk within established limits.

 

The Company’s interest rate risk (“IRR”) model uses assumptions which include factors such as call features, prepayment options and interest rate caps and floors included in investment and loan portfolio contracts. Additionally, the IRR model estimates the lives and interest rate sensitivity of the Company’s non-maturity deposits. These assumptions have a significant effect on model results. The assumptions are developed primarily based upon historical behavior of Bank customers. The Company also considers industry and regional data in developing IRR model assumptions. There are inherent limitations in the Company’s IRR model and underlying assumptions. When interest rates change, actual movements of interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities, loan prepayments, and withdrawals of time and other deposits, may deviate significantly from assumptions used in the model.

 

The Company prepares a current base case and several alternative simulations at least quarterly. Current interest rates are shocked by +/- 100, 200, 300, and 400 basis points (“bp”). The Company may elect not to use particular scenarios that it determines are impractical in a current rate environment. It is management’s goal to manage the portfolios of the Bank so that net interest income at risk over a twelve-month and twenty-four month period and the economic value of equity at risk do not exceed policy guidelines at the various interest rate shock levels. Measures of net interest income at risk produced by simulation analysis are indicators of an institution’s short-term performance in alternative rate environments. The below schedule estimates the changes in net interest income over a twelve month period for parallel rate shocks:

 

Estimated Changes in Net Interest Income

 

Change in Interest Rates:     + 400 bp       + 300 bp       + 200 bp       + 100 bp       - 100 bp       - 200 bp       - 300 bp       - 400 bp  
Policy Limit     (25.00 )%     (20.00 )%     (15.00 )%     (10.00 )%     (10.00 )%     (15.00 )%     (20.00 )%     (25.00 )%
                                                                 
December 31, 2015     2.62 %     1.74 %     0.79 %     (0.20 )%     1.11 %     (0.38 )%     N/A       N/A  

 

Measures of equity value at risk indicate the ongoing economic value of the Company by considering the effects of changes in interest rates on all of the Company’s cash flows, and by discounting the cash flows to estimate the present value of assets and liabilities. The below schedule estimates the changes in the economic value of equity at parallel shocks:

 

Estimated Changes in Economic Value of Equity (EVE)

 

Change in Interest Rates:     + 400 bp       + 300 bp       + 200 bp       + 100 bp       - 100 bp       - 200 bp       - 300 bp       - 400 bp  
Policy Limit     (40.00 )%     (30.00 )%     (20.00 )%     (10.00 )%     (10.00 )%     (20.00 )%     (30.00 )%     (40.00 )%
                                                                 
December 31, 2015     (6.17 )%     (3.71 )%     (1.49 )%     (0.03 )%     (0.79 )%     (4.32 )%     N/A       N/A  

 

  69  

 

 

OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS

In the normal course of operations, we engage in a variety of financial transactions that, in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and to general practices within the banking industry, are not recorded in our financial statements. These transactions involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit, interest rate and liquidity risk. Such transactions are used primarily to manage customers’ requests for funding and take the form of loan commitments, letters of credit and lines of credit. For a discussion of these agreements, including collateral and other arrangements, see Note 13 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

For the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Company did not engage in any off-balance sheet transactions reasonably likely to have a material effect on its financial condition, results of operations or cash flows.

 

CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS

In the normal course of its business, the Bank commits to make future payments to others to satisfy contractual obligations. These obligations include commitments to repay short and long-term borrowings and commitments incurred under operating lease agreements.

 

          Payments due by period  
    Total     Less than
One Year
    One to Three
Years
    Three to
Five Years
    More Than 5
Years
 
At December 31, 2015 (In thousands)                                        
                                         
Short-term debt obligations   $ 36,000     $ 36,000     $ -     $ -     $ -  
Long-term debt obligations     55,617       5,000       30,000       10,000       10,617  
Guaranteed preferred beneficial interest in junior subordinated debentures (TRUPs)     12,000                               12,000  
Subordinated notes - 6.25%     23,000                               23,000  
Time deposits     375,551       230,559       129,073       15,919       -  
Operating lease obligations (1)     6,263       705       1,305       823       3,430  
Purchase Obligations (2)     7,364       1,886       3,937       1,541       -  
Total   $ 515,795     $ 274,150     $ 164,315     $ 28,283     $ 49,047  

 

(1) Payments are for lease of real property.
(2) Represents payments for data processing under contract based on average monthly service charges for 2015.

 

IMPACT OF INFLATION AND CHANGING PRICES

The Consolidated Financial Statements and notes thereto presented herein have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and to general practices within the banking industry, which require the measurement of financial position and operating results in terms of historical dollars without considering the changes in the relative purchasing power of money over time due to inflation. Unlike most industrial companies, nearly all of the Company’s assets and liabilities are monetary in nature. As a result, interest rates have a greater impact on the Company's performance than do the effects of general levels of inflation. Interest rates do not necessarily move in the same direction or to the same extent as the prices of goods and services.

 

  70  

 

 

Item 8 - Financial Statements and Supplementary Data

 

MANAGEMENT’S REPORT ON INTERNAL CONTROL OVER FINANCIAL REPORTING

 

The management of The Community Financial Corporation (the "Company") is responsible for the preparation, integrity and fair presentation of the financial statements included in this Annual Report. The financial statements have been prepared in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and reflect management's judgments and estimates concerning the effects of events and transactions that are accounted for or disclosed.

 

Management is also responsible for establishing and maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting. The Company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that pertain to the Company's ability to record, process, summarize and report reliable financial data. The internal control system contains monitoring mechanisms, and appropriate actions taken to correct identified deficiencies. Management believes that internal controls over financial reporting, which are subject to scrutiny by management and the Company's internal auditors, support the integrity and reliability of the financial statements. Management recognizes that there are inherent limitations in the effectiveness of any internal control system, including the possibility of human error and the circumvention or overriding of internal controls. Accordingly, even effective internal control over financial reporting can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to financial statement preparation. In addition, because of changes in conditions and circumstances, the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting may vary over time The Audit Committee of the Board of Directors (the "Committee"), is comprised entirely of outside directors who are independent of management. The Committee is responsible for the appointment and compensation of the independent auditors and makes decisions regarding the appointment or removal of members of the internal audit function. The Committee meets periodically with management, the independent auditors, and the internal auditors to ensure that they are carrying out their responsibilities. The Committee is also responsible for performing an oversight role by reviewing and monitoring the financial, accounting, and auditing procedures of the Company in addition to reviewing the Company's financial reports. The independent auditors and the internal auditors have full and unlimited access to the Audit Committee, with or without the presence of management, to discuss the adequacy of internal control over financial reporting, and any other matters which they believe should be brought to the attention of the Audit Committee.

 

Management assessed the Company's system of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2015. This assessment was conducted based on the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations ("COSO") of the Treadway Commission "Internal Control — Integrated Framework (2013)." Based on this assessment, management believes that the Company maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2015. Management's assessment concluded that there were no material weaknesses within the Company's internal control structure. There were no changes in the Company's internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rule 13a-15 under the Securities Act of 1934) during the quarter ended December 31, 2015 that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company's internal control over financial reporting.

 

The 2015 financial statements have been audited by the independent registered public accounting firm of Stegman & Company ("Stegman"). Personnel from Stegman were given unrestricted access to all financial records and related data, including minutes of all meetings of the Board of Directors and committees thereof. Management believes that all representations made to all the independent auditors were valid and appropriate. The resulting report from Stegman accompanies the financial statements. Stegman has also issued a report on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. That report has also been made a part of this Annual Report.

 

/s/ William J. Pasenelli   /s/ Todd L. Capitani
     
William J. Pasenelli   Todd L. Capitani
President and Chief Executive Officer   Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
March 10, 2016   March 10, 2016

 

  71  

 

 

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

Board of Directors and Stockholders

The Community Financial Corporation

Waldorf, Maryland

 

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of The Community Financial Corporation (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2015. We also have audited the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2015, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. The Company’s management is responsible for these consolidated financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting . Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements and an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audits.

 

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the consolidated financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall consolidated financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

 

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

 

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

 

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of The Community Financial Corporation as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, and the results of their consolidated operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2015, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Also in our opinion, The Community Financial Corporation maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2015, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (“COSO”).

 

/s/ Stegman and Company  
   
Baltimore, Maryland  
March 10, 2016  

 

  72  

 

 

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014  
Assets                
Cash and due from banks   $ 9,059     $ 17,275  
Federal funds sold     225       965  
Interest-bearing deposits with banks     1,855       3,133  
Securities available for sale (AFS), at fair value     35,116       41,939  
Securities held to maturity (HTM), at amortized cost     109,420       84,506  
Federal Home Loan Bank (FHLB) and Federal Reserve Bank (FRB) stock - at cost     6,931       6,434  
Loans receivable - net of allowance for loan losses of $8,540 and $8,481     909,200       862,409  
Premises and equipment, net     20,156       20,586  
Premises and equipment held for sale     2,000       -  
Other real estate owned (OREO)     9,449       5,883  
Accrued interest receivable     3,218       3,036  
Investment in bank owned life insurance     27,836       27,021  
Other assets     8,867       9,691  
Total Assets   $ 1,143,332     $ 1,082,878  
                 
Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity                
Liabilities                
Deposits                
Non-interest-bearing deposits   $ 142,771     $ 122,195  
Interest-bearing deposits     764,128       747,189  
Total deposits     906,899       869,384  
Short-term borrowings     36,000       2,000  
Long-term debt     55,617       74,672  
Guaranteed preferred beneficial interest in junior subordinated debentures (TRUPs)     12,000       12,000  
Subordinated notes - 6.25%     23,000       -  
Accrued expenses and other liabilities     10,033       8,263  
Total Liabilities     1,043,549       966,319  
                 
Stockholders' Equity                
Preferred Stock, Senior Non-Cumulative Perpetual, Series C - par value $1,000;  authorized and issued 20,000 at December 31, 2014 and  none at December 31, 2015     -       20,000  
Common stock - par value $.01; authorized - 15,000,000 shares; issued 4,645,429 and 4,702,715 shares, respectively     46       47  
Additional paid in capital     46,809       46,416  
Retained earnings     53,495       50,936  
Accumulated other comprehensive loss     (251 )     (378 )
Unearned ESOP shares     (316 )     (462 )
Total Stockholders' Equity     99,783       116,559  
Total Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity   $ 1,143,332     $ 1,082,878  

 

See notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

  73  

 

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands, except per share amounts )   2015     2014     2013  
Interest and Dividend Income                        
Loans, including fees   $ 41,386     $ 39,475     $ 37,196  
Taxable interest and dividends on investment securities     2,473       2,270       2,466  
Interest on deposits with banks     14       14       16  
Total Interest and Dividend Income     43,873       41,759       39,678  
                         
Interest Expense                        
Deposits     4,152       4,586       5,581  
Short-term borrowings     37       12       14  
Long-term debt     3,156       2,100       2,051  
Total Interest Expense     7,345       6,698       7,646  
                         
Net Interest Income     36,528       35,061       32,032  
Provision for loan losses     1,433       2,653       940  
Net Interest Income After Provision For Loan Losses     35,095       32,408       31,092  
                         
Noninterest Income                        
Loan appraisal, credit, and miscellaneous charges     315       368       391  
Gain on sale of asset     19       7       11  
Net (losses) gains on sale of OREO     (20 )     322       179  
Net gains on sale of investment securities     4       19       -  
Loss on premises and equipment held for sale     (426 )     -       -  
Income from bank owned life insurance     815       671       620  
Service charges     2,488       2,213       2,346  
Gain on sale of loans held for sale     104       493       627  
Total Noninterest Income     3,299       4,093       4,174  
                         
Noninterest Expense                        
Salary and employee benefits     16,366       15,851       14,521  
Occupancy expense     2,427       2,371       2,139  
Advertising     583       545       477  
Data processing expense     2,044       1,556       1,289  
Professional fees     1,323       1,129       1,095  
Depreciation of furniture, fixtures, and equipment     810       753       765  
Telephone communications     188       185       200  
Office supplies     157       204       226  
FDIC Insurance     799       709       1,115  
OREO valuation allowance and expenses     1,059       386       787  
Other     2,662       2,546       2,230  
Total Noninterest Expense     28,418       26,235       24,844  
                         
Income before income taxes     9,976       10,266       10,422  
Income tax expense     3,633       3,776       3,771  
Net Income   $ 6,343     $ 6,490     $ 6,651  
Preferred stock dividends     23       200       200  
Net Income Available to Common Stockholders   $ 6,320     $ 6,290     $ 6,451  
                         
Earnings Per Common Share                        
Basic   $ 1.36     $ 1.35     $ 1.90  
Diluted   $ 1.35     $ 1.35     $ 1.88  
Cash dividends paid per common share   $ 0.40     $ 0.40     $ 0.40  

 

See notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

  74  

 

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
                   
Net Income   $ 6,343     $ 6,490     $ 6,651  
Net unrealized holding gains (losses) arising during period, net of tax expense (benefit) of $85, $300 and $(617), respectively     131       681       (1,196 )
                         
Reclassification adjustment for losses included in  net income, net of tax benefit of  $2, $1 and $0, respectively     (4 )     (2 )     -  
Comprehensive Income   $ 6,470     $ 7,169     $ 5,455  

 

See notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

  75  

 

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

Years Ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

 

                            Accumulated              
    SBLF           Additional           Other     Unearned        
    Preferred     Common     Paid-in     Retained     Comprehensive     ESOP        
(dollars in thousands)   Stock     Stock     Capital     Earnings     Income (Loss)     Shares     Total  
                                           
                                           
Balance at January 1, 2013   $ 20,000     $ 30     $ 17,874     $ 41,987     $ 139     $ (983 )   $ 79,047  
                                                         
Comprehensive Income                                                        
Net income     -       -       -       6,651       -       -       6,651  
Unrealized holding loss on investment securities net of tax benefit of $620     -       -       -       -       (1,203 )     -       (1,203 )
Other than temporary impairment amortization on HTM securities net of tax of $3     -       -       -       -       7       -       7  
Total Comprehensive Income                                                     5,455  
                                                         
Cash dividend at $0.40 per common share     -       -       -       (1,379 )     -       -       (1,379 )
Preferred stock dividends     -       -       -       (200 )     -       -       (200 )
Proceeds from public offering     -       16       27,371       -       -       -       27,387  
Exercise of stock options     -       -       317       -       -       -       317  
Net change in unearned ESOP shares     -       -       -       -       -       320       320  
Repurchase of common stock     -       -       -       (536 )     -       -       (536 )
Stock based compensation     -       -       249       -       -       -       249  
Tax effect of exercise of stock based compensation     -       -       35       -       -       -       35  
Tax effect of the ESOP dividend     -       -       35       -       -       -       35  
Balance at December 31, 2013   $ 20,000     $ 46     $ 45,881     $ 46,523     $ (1,057 )   $ (663 )   $ 110,730  

 

  76  

 

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

Years Ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

(continued)

 

                            Accumulated              
    SBLF           Additional           Other     Unearned        
    Preferred     Common     Paid-in     Retained     Comprehensive     ESOP        
(dollars in thousands)   Stock     Stock     Capital     Earnings     Income (Loss)     Shares     Total  
                                           
Balance at January 1, 2014   $ 20,000     $ 46     $ 45,881     $ 46,523     $ (1,057 )   $ (663 )   $ 110,730  
                                                         
Comprehensive Income                                                        
Net income     -       -       -       6,490       -       -       6,490  
Unrealized holding loss on investment securities net of tax of $238     -       -       -       -       541       -       541  
Other than temporary impairment amortization on HTM securities net of tax of $61     -       -       -       -       138       -       138  
Total Comprehensive Income                                                     7,169  
                                                         
Cash dividend at $0.40 per common share     -       -       -       (1,855 )     -       -       (1,855 )
Preferred stock dividends     -       -       -       (200 )     -       -       (200 )
Dividend Reinvestment     -       -       22       (22 )     -       -       -  
Exercise of stock options     -       1       225       -       -       -       226  
Net change in unearned ESOP shares     -       -       -       -       -       201       201  
Stock based compensation     -       -       182       -       -       -       182  
Tax effect of exercise of stock based compensation     -       -       71       -       -       -       71  
Tax effect of the ESOP dividend     -       -       35       -       -       -       35  
Balance at December 31, 2014   $ 20,000     $ 47     $ 46,416     $ 50,936     $ (378 )   $ (462 )   $ 116,559  

 

  77  

 

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

Years Ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

(continued)

 

                            Accumulated              
    SBLF                       Other     Unearned        
    Preferred     Common     Paid-in     Retained     Comprehensive     ESOP        
(dollars in thousands)   Stock     Stock     Capital     Earnings     Income (Loss)     Shares     Total  
                                           
Balance at January 1, 2015   $ 20,000     $ 47     $ 46,416     $ 50,936     $ (378 )   $ (462 )   $ 116,559  
Comprehensive Income                                                        
Net Income     -       -       -       6,343       -       -       6,343  
Unrealized holding loss on investment securities net of tax of $83     -       -       -       -       127       -       127  
Total Comprehensive Income                                                     6,470  
                                                         
Cash dividend at $0.40 per common share     -       -       -       (1,843 )     -       -       (1,843 )
Preferred stock dividends     -       -       -       (73 )     -       -       (73 )
Dividend Reinvestment     -       -       42       (42 )     -       -       -  
Redemption of SBLF Loan     (20,000 )     -       -       -       -       -       (20,000 )
Net change in unearned ESOP shares     -       -       -       -       -       146       146  
Repurchase of common stock     -       (1 )     -       (1,826 )     -       -       (1,827 )
Stock Based Compensation     -       -       319       -       -       -       319  
Tax effect of the ESOP dividend     -       -       32       -       -       -       32  
Balance at December 31, 2015   $ -     $ 46     $ 46,809     $ 53,495     $ (251 )   $ (316 )   $ 99,783  

 

See notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

  78  

 

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
                   
Cash Flows from Operating Activities                        
Net income   $ 6,343     $ 6,490     $ 6,651  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash  provided by operating activities                        
Provision for loan losses     1,433       2,653       940  
Depreciation and amortization     1,439       1,299       1,274  
Provision for loss on premises held for sale     426       -       -  
Loans originated for resale     (4,192 )     (13,579 )     (23,283 )
Proceeds from sale of loans originated for sale     4,296       13,990       23,773  
Gain on sale of loans held for sale     (104 )     (493 )     (627 )
Net loss (gains) on the sale of OREO     20       (322 )     (179 )
Losses (gains) on sales of HTM investment securities     1       (11 )     -  
Gains on sales of AFS investment securities     (5 )     (8 )     -  
Gain on sale of asset     (19 )     (7 )     (11 )
Net amortization of premium/discount on investment securities     245       344       540  
Increase in OREO valuation allowance     664       234       601  
Increase in cash surrender of bank owned life insurance     (815 )     (671 )     (620 )
Increase (decrease) in deferred income tax benefit     (750 )     1,138       (117 )
Increase in accrued interest receivable     (182 )     (62 )     (70 )
Stock based compensation     319       191       216  
Decrease in deferred loan fees     85       265       307  
Increase (decrease) in accrued expenses and other liabilities     1,770       (1,060 )     489  
Decrease (increase) in other assets     1,523       242       (1,377 )
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities     12,497       10,633       8,507  
                         
Cash Flows from Investing Activities                        
Purchase of AFS investment securities     (2,084 )     (3,253 )     (13,517 )
Proceeds from redemption or principal payments of  AFS investment securities     8,986       8,111       10,476  
Purchase of HTM investment securities     (42,949 )     (16,230 )     (11,683 )
Proceeds from maturities or principal payments of  HTM investment securities     17,860       14,020       37,551  
Net increase of FHLB and FRB stock     (497 )     (842 )     (117 )
Purchase of bank owned life insurance policies     -       (7,000 )     -  
Loans originated or acquired     (258,844 )     (261,971 )     (275,037 )
Principal collected on loans     205,100       193,113       220,810  
Purchase of premises and equipment     (3,450 )     (2,355 )     (1,035 )
Proceeds from sale of OREO     1,184       3,742       1,300  
Proceeds from sale of HTM investment securities     66       4,153       -  
Proceeds from sale of AFS investment securities     -       2,056       -  
Proceeds from disposal of asset     34       20       11  
                         
Net Cash Used in Investing Activities     (74,594 )     (66,436 )     (31,241 )

 

  79  

 

 

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(continued)

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
                   
Cash Flows from Financing Activities                        
Net increase in deposits   $ 37,515     $ 48,089     $ 1,064  
Proceeds from long-term debt     -       5,000       15,000  
Payments of long-term debt     (19,055 )     (804 )     (5,051 )
Net increase in short term borrowings     34,000       2,000       (1,000 )
Exercise of stock options     -       226       317  
 Proceeds from public offering     -       -       27,387  
Proceeds from subordinated notes     23,000       -       -  
Redemption of Small Business Lending Fund Preferred Stock     (20,000 )     -       -  
Dividends paid     (1,916 )     (2,055 )     (1,579 )
Net change in unearned ESOP shares     146       201       355  
Repurchase of common stock     (1,827 )     -       (536 )
Net Cash Provided by Financing Activities     51,863       52,657       35,957  
(Decrease) Increase in Cash and Cash Equivalents   $ (10,234 )   $ (3,146 )   $ 13,223  
Cash and Cash Equivalents - January 1     21,373       24,519       11,296  
Cash and Cash Equivalents - December 31   $ 11,139     $ 21,373     $ 24,519  
                         
Supplemental Disclosures of Cash Flow Information                        
Cash paid during the period for                        
Interest   $ 6,799     $ 6,661     $ 7,648  
Income taxes   $ 3,604     $ 3,732     $ 4,069  
                         
Supplemental Schedule of Non-Cash Operating Activities                        
Issuance of common stock for payment of compensation   $ 319     $ 182     $ 249  
Transfer from loans to OREO   $ 5,436     $ 2,742     $ 1,852  
Transfer of OREO to loans   $ -     $ 1,000          
Transfer from premises and equipment to  premises and equipment held for sale   $ 2,426     $ -     $ -  

 

See notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

  80  

 

 

NOTE 1 – SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

 

Principles of Consolidation

The Consolidated Financial Statements include the accounts of The Community Financial Corporation and its wholly owned subsidiary Community Bank of the Chesapeake (the “Bank”), and the Bank’s wholly owned subsidiary Community Mortgage Corporation of Tri-County (collectively, the “Company”). All significant intercompany balances and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation. The accounting and reporting policies of the Company conform with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America and to general practices within the banking industry.

 

Reclassification

Certain reclassifications have been made in the Consolidated Financial Statements for 2014 to conform to the classification presented in 2015.

 

Nature of Operations

The Company provides a variety of financial services to individuals and businesses through its offices in Southern Maryland and Annapolis, Maryland, and Fredericksburg, Virginia. Its primary deposit products are demand, savings and time deposits, and its primary lending products are commercial and residential mortgage loans, commercial loans, construction and land development loans, home equity and second mortgages and commercial equipment loans.

 

The Bank conducts business through its main office in Waldorf, Maryland, and eleven branch offices in Waldorf, Bryans Road, Dunkirk, Leonardtown, La Plata, Charlotte Hall, Prince Frederick, Lusby, California, Maryland; and Fredericksburg, Virginia. The Company maintains five loan production offices (“LPOs”) in Annapolis, La Plata, Prince Frederick and Leonardtown, Maryland; and Fredericksburg, Virginia. The Leonardtown and Fredericksburg LPOs are co-located with branches. The Company’s second branch in Fredericksburg is scheduled to open during the first quarter of 2016.

 

The Company agreed to sell its King George, Virginia branch building and equipment to a credit union. The transaction closed in the first quarter of 2016. The Company’s 2015 operating results reflect the financial impact of the transaction. See Note 10 for additional information.

 

Use of Estimates

In preparing Consolidated Financial Statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America, management is required to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the date of the balance sheet and reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates. Material estimates that are particularly susceptible to significant change in the near term relate to the determination of the allowance for loan losses, the evaluation of other-than-temporary impairment on debt securities, and the valuation of OREO and deferred tax assets.

 

Significant Group Concentrations of Credit Risk

Most of the Company’s activities are with customers located in the Fredericksburg area of Virginia and the Southern Maryland counties of Calvert, Charles and St. Mary’s. Notes 5 and 6 discuss the types of securities and loans held by the Company. The Company does not have significant concentration in any one customer or industry.

 

Cash and Cash Equivalents

For purposes of the consolidated statements of cash flows, the Company considers all highly liquid debt instruments with original maturities of three months or less when purchased to be cash equivalents.

 

Securities

Debt securities that management has the positive intent and ability to hold to maturity are classified as held to maturity (“HTM”) and recorded at amortized cost. Securities purchased and held principally for trading in the near term are classified as “trading securities” and are reported at fair value, with unrealized gains and losses included in earnings. The Company held no trading securities for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013. Securities not classified as held to maturity or trading securities, including equity securities with readily determinable fair values, are classified as available for sale (“AFS”) and recorded at estimated fair value, with unrealized gains and losses excluded from earnings and reported in other comprehensive income.

 

  81  

 

 

Purchase premiums and discounts are recognized in interest income using the interest method over the terms of the securities. Declines in the estimated fair value of held to maturity and available for sale securities below their cost that are deemed to be other than temporary are reflected in earnings as realized losses. In estimating other than temporary impairment losses, management considers: (1) the length of time and the extent to which the fair value has been less than cost; (2) the financial condition and near term prospects of the issuer; and (3) the intent and ability of the Company to retain its investment in the issuer for a period of time sufficient to allow for any anticipated recovery in fair value. Gains and losses on the sale of securities are recorded on the trade date and are determined using the specific identification method. Investments in Federal Reserve Bank and Federal Home Loan Bank of Atlanta stocks are recorded at cost and are considered restricted as to marketability. The Bank is required to maintain investments in the Federal Reserve Bank as a condition of membership and the Federal Home Loan Bank based upon levels of borrowings.

 

Debt securities are evaluated quarterly to determine whether a decline in their value is other-than-temporary impairment (“OTTI”). The term other-than-temporary is not necessarily intended to indicate a permanent decline in value. It means that the prospects for near term recovery of value are not necessarily favorable, or that there is a lack of evidence to support fair values equal to, or greater than, the carrying value of the investment. Under accounting guidance, for recognition and presentation of other-than-temporary impairments the amount of other-than-temporary impairment that is recognized through earnings for debt securities is determined by comparing the present value of the expected cash flows to the amortized cost of the security. The discount rate used to determine the credit loss is the expected book yield on the security. The Company does not evaluate declines in the value of securities of Government Sponsored Enterprises (“GSEs”) or investments backed by the full faith and credit of the United States government (e.g. US Treasury Bills), for other-than-temporary impairment.

 

Loans Held for Sale

Residential mortgage loans intended for sale in the secondary market are carried at the lower of cost or estimated fair value, in the aggregate. Fair value is derived from secondary market quotations for similar instruments. Net unrealized losses, if any, are recognized through a valuation allowance by charges to income.

 

Residential mortgage loans held for sale are generally sold with the mortgage servicing rights retained by the Company. The carrying value of mortgage loans sold is reduced by the cost allocated to the associated servicing rights. Gains or losses on sales of mortgage loans are recognized based on the difference between the selling price and the carrying value of the related mortgage loans sold, using the specific identification method.

 

The Company exited the residential mortgage origination line of business in April 2015 for individual owner occupied residential first mortgages and established third party sources to supply its residential whole loan portfolio. The Company continues to underwrite non-owner occupied residential loans. The Company may sell certain loans forward into the secondary market at a specified price with a specified date on a best efforts basis. These forward sales are derivative financial instruments. The Company does not recognize gains or losses due to interest rate changes for loans sold forward on a best efforts basis. The Bank had no loans held for sale at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

Loans Receivable

The Company originates real estate mortgages, construction and land development loans, commercial loans and consumer loans. A substantial portion of the loan portfolio is comprised of loans throughout Southern Maryland and the Fredericksburg area of Virginia. The ability of the Company’s debtors to honor their contracts is dependent upon the real estate and general economic conditions in this area.

 

Loans that the Company has the intent and ability to hold for the foreseeable future, or until maturity or payoff, are reported at their outstanding unpaid principal balances, adjusted for the allowance for loan losses and any deferred fees or costs on originated loans. Interest income is accrued on the unpaid principal balance. Loan origination fees, net of certain direct origination costs, are deferred and recognized as an adjustment of the related loan yield using the interest method.

 

Loans are reviewed on a regular basis and are placed on non-accrual status when, in the opinion of management, the collection of additional interest is doubtful. The accrual of interest on mortgage and commercial loans is discontinued at the time the loan is 90 days delinquent unless the credit is well secured and in the process of collection. Non-accrual loans include certain loans that are current with all loan payments and are placed on non-accrual status due to customer operating results and cash flows. Non-accrual loans are evaluated for impairment on a loan-by-loan basis in accordance with the Company’s impairment methodology. Interest is recognized on non-accrual loans on a cash-basis.

 

  82  

 

 

Consumer loans are typically charged-off no later than 90 days past due. Mortgage and commercial loans are fully or partially charged-off when in management’s judgment all reasonable efforts to return a loan to performing status have occurred. In all cases, loans are placed on non-accrual or charged-off at an earlier date if collection of principal or interest is considered doubtful.

 

All interest accrued but not collected from loans that are placed on non-accrual or charged-off is reversed against interest income. The interest on these loans is accounted for on the cash-basis or cost-recovery method, until qualifying for return to accrual status. Loans are returned to accrual status when all principal and interest amounts contractually due are brought current and future payments are reasonably assured.

 

Allowance for Loan Losses and Impaired Loans

The allowance for loan losses is established as probable losses are estimated to have occurred through a provision for loan losses charged to earnings. Loan losses are charged against the allowance when management believes that the uncollectibility of a loan balance is confirmed. Subsequent recoveries, if any, are credited to the allowance.

 

The allowance for loan losses is evaluated on a regular basis by management and is based upon management’s periodic review of the collectability of the loans in light of historical experience, the composition and size of the loan portfolio, adverse situations that may affect the borrower’s ability to repay, estimated value of any underlying collateral and prevailing economic conditions. This evaluation is inherently subjective, as it requires estimates that are susceptible to significant revision as more information becomes available.

 

The allowance for loan losses consists of a general and a specific component. The general component is based upon historical loss experience and a review of qualitative risk factors by portfolio segment (See Note 5 for a description of portfolio segments). The historical loss experience factor is tracked over various time horizons for each portfolio segment. It is weighted as the most important factor of the general component of the allowance. The Company considers qualitative factors in addition to the loss experience factor. These include trends by portfolio segment in charge-offs, delinquencies, classified loans, loan concentrations and the rate of portfolio segment growth. Qualitative factors also include an assessment of the current regulatory environment, the quality of credit administration and loan portfolio management and national and local economic trends.

 

The specific component of the allowance for loan losses relates to individual impaired loans with an identified impairment loss. The Company evaluates substandard and doubtful classified loans, loans delinquent 90 days or greater, non-accrual loans and troubled debt restructured loans (“TDRs”) to determine whether a loan is impaired. A loan is considered impaired when, based on current information and events, it is probable that the Company will be unable to collect the scheduled payments of principal or interest when due according to the contractual terms of the loan agreement. Factors considered by management in determining impairment include payment status, collateral value and the probability of collecting scheduled principal and interest payments when due. Loans that experience insignificant payment delays and payment shortfalls generally are not classified as impaired. Management determines the significance of payment delays and shortfalls on a case-by-case basis, taking into consideration the circumstances surrounding the loan. These circumstances include the length of the delay, the reasons for the delay, the borrower’s payment record and the amount of the shortfall in relation to the principal and interest owed. Loans not impaired are included in the pool of loans evaluated in the general component of the allowance.

 

If a specific loan is deemed to be impaired it is evaluated for impairment. Impairment is measured on a loan-by-loan basis by either the present value of expected future cash flows discounted at the loan’s effective interest rate, the loan’s observable market price or the fair value of the collateral, if the loan is collateral dependent. An allowance is established when the discounted cash flows (or collateral value or observable market price) of the impaired loan is lower than carrying value of the loan.

 

The Company considers all TDRs to be impaired and defines TDRs as loans whose terms have been modified to provide for a reduction or a delay in the payment of either interest or principal because of deterioration in the financial condition of the borrower. A loan extended or renewed at a stated interest rate equal to the current interest rate for new debt with similar risk is not considered a TDR. Once an obligation has been classified as a TDR it continues to be considered a TDR until paid in full or until the debt is refinanced at market rates with no debt forgiveness. TDRs are evaluated for impairment on a loan-by-loan basis in accordance with the Company’s impairment methodology. The Company does not participate in any specific government or Company-sponsored loan modification programs. All restructured loan agreements are individual contracts negotiated with a borrower.

 

  83  

 

 

Servicing

Servicing assets are recognized as separate assets when rights are acquired through the purchase or sale of financial assets. Generally, purchased servicing rights are capitalized at the cost to acquire the rights. For sales of mortgage loans, a portion of the cost of originating the loan is allocated to the servicing based on relative estimated fair value. Estimated fair value is based on market prices for comparable mortgage servicing contracts, when available, or alternatively, is based on a valuation model that calculates the present value of estimated future net servicing. The valuation model incorporates assumptions that market participants would use in estimating future net servicing income, such as the cost to service, the discount rate, an inflation rate, ancillary income, prepayment speeds and default rates and losses. Capitalized servicing rights are reported in other assets and are amortized into noninterest income in proportion to, and over the period of, the estimated future net servicing income of the underlying financial assets.

 

Servicing assets are evaluated for impairment based upon the estimated fair value of the rights as compared to amortized cost. Impairment is determined by stratifying rights into tranches based on predominant risk characteristics, such as interest rate, loan type and investor type. Impairment is recognized through a valuation allowance for an individual tranche, to the extent that fair value is less than the capitalized amount for the tranche. If the Company later determines that all or a portion of the impairment no longer exists for a particular tranche, a reduction of the allowance may be recorded as an increase to income.

 

Servicing fee income is recorded for fees earned for servicing loans. The fees are based on a contractual percentage of the outstanding principal and recorded as income when earned. The amortization of mortgage servicing rights is netted against loan servicing fee income.

 

Premises and Equipment

Land is carried at cost. Premises, improvements and equipment are carried at cost, less accumulated depreciation and amortization, computed by the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets, which are as follows:

 

Buildings and Improvements: 10 to 50 years

Furniture and Equipment: three to 15 years

Automobiles: five years

 

Maintenance and repairs are charged to expense as incurred, while improvements that extend the useful life of premises and equipment are capitalized.

 

Other Real Estate Owned (“OREO”)

Assets acquired through, or in lieu of, loan foreclosure are held for sale and are initially recorded at the lower of cost or estimated fair value at the date of foreclosure, establishing a new cost basis. Subsequent to foreclosure, valuations are periodically performed by management, and the assets are carried at the lower of carrying amount or estimated fair value less the cost to sell. Revenues and expenses from operations and changes in the valuation allowance are included in noninterest expense. Gains or losses on disposition are included in noninterest income.

 

Transfers of Financial Assets

Transfers of financial assets are accounted for as sales when control over the assets has been surrendered. Control over transferred assets is deemed to be surrendered when: (1) the assets have been isolated from the Company; (2) the transferee obtains the right (free of conditions that constrain it from taking advantage of that right) to pledge or exchange the transferred assets; and (3) the Company does not maintain effective control over the transferred assets through an agreement to repurchase them before their maturity.

 

  84  

 

 

Advertising Costs

The Company expenses advertising costs as incurred.

 

Income Taxes

The Company files a consolidated federal income tax return with its subsidiaries. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are determined using the liability (or balance sheet) method. Under this method, the net deferred tax asset or liability is determined based on the tax effects of the temporary differences between the book and tax bases of the various balance sheet assets and liabilities and gives current recognition to changes in tax rates and laws and when it is considered more likely than not that deferred tax assets will be realized. It is the Company’s policy to recognize accrued interest and penalties related to unrecognized tax benefits as a component of tax expense.

 

Off Balance Sheet Credit Related Financial Instruments

In the ordinary course of business, the Company has entered into commitments to extend credit, including commitments under commercial lines of credit, letters of credit and standby letters of credit. Such financial instruments are recorded when they are funded.

 

Stock-Based Compensation

The Company has stock-based incentive arrangements to attract and retain key personnel in order to promote the success of the business. In May 2015, the 2015 Equity Compensation Plan (the “2015 plan”) was approved by shareholders, which authorizes the issuance of restricted stock, stock appreciation rights, stock units and stock options to the Board of Directors and key employees. The 2015 plan replaced the 2005 Equity Compensation Plan.

 

Compensation cost for all stock-based awards is measured at fair value on date of grant and recognized over the vesting period. Such value is recognized as expense over the service period, net of estimated forfeitures. The estimation of stock awards that ultimately vest requires judgment, and to the extent actual results or updated estimates differ from our current estimates, such amounts will be recorded as a cumulative adjustment in the period estimates are revised. The Company considers many factors when estimating expected forfeitures, including types of awards, employee class and historical experience.

 

The Company and the Bank currently maintain incentive compensation plans which provide for payments to be made in cash or other share-based compensation. The Company has accrued the full amounts due under these plans, but as of year-end, it is not possible to identify the portion that will be paid out in the form of share-based compensation.

 

Earnings Per Common Share (“EPS”)

Basic earnings per common share represent income available to common stockholders, divided by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the period. Unencumbered shares held by the Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“ESOP”) are treated as outstanding in computing earnings per share. Shares issued to the ESOP but pledged as collateral for loans obtained to provide funds to acquire the shares are not treated as outstanding in computing earnings per share.

 

Diluted earnings per share reflect additional common shares that would have been outstanding if dilutive potential common shares had been issued. Potential common shares that may be issued by the Company relate to outstanding stock options and are determined using the treasury stock method. The Company excludes from the diluted EPS calculation anti-dilutive options, because the exercise price of the options were greater than the average market price of the common shares.

 

Comprehensive Income

Accounting principles generally require that recognized revenue, expenses, gains and losses be included in net income. Certain changes in assets and liabilities, such as unrealized gains and losses on available for sale securities, are reported as components of comprehensive income as a separate statement in the Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income. Additionally, the Company discloses accumulated other comprehensive income as a separate component in the equity section of the balance sheet.

 

  85  

 

 

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2014-04 - Receivables - Troubled Debt Restructurings by Creditors (Subtopic 310-40) - Reclassification of Residential Real Estate Collateralized Consumer Mortgage Loans upon Foreclosure . The amendments clarify that an in substance repossession or foreclosure occurs, and a creditor is considered to have received physical possession of residential real estate property collateralizing a consumer mortgage loan, upon either (1) the creditor obtaining legal title to the residential real estate property upon completion of a foreclosure or (2) the borrower conveying all interest in the residential real estate to the creditor to satisfy that loan through completion of a deed in lieu of foreclosure or through a similar legal agreement. The amendments require interim and annual disclosure of both (1) the amount of foreclosed residential real estate property held by the creditor and (2) the recorded investment in consumer mortgage loans collateralized by residential real estate that are in the process of foreclosure according to local requirements of the applicable jurisdiction. ASU 2014-04 is effective for interim and annual periods beginning after December 15, 2014. The adoption of ASU 2014-04 did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

ASU 2014-09 - Revenue from Contracts with Customers (Topic 606) . ASU 2014-09 states that an entity should recognize revenue to depict the transfer of promised goods or services to customers in an amount that reflects the consideration to which the entity expects to be entitled in exchange for those goods or services. This update affects entities that enter into contracts with customers to transfer goods or services or enter into contracts for the transfer of nonfinancial assets, unless those contracts are within the scope of other standards. ASU 2014-09 is effective for fiscal years, and interim periods within those fiscal years, beginning after December 15, 2017. Early adoption is permitted, but not before the original effective date of December 15, 2016. The adoption of this guidance is not expected to have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

ASU 2014-11 - Transfers and Servicing (Topic 860) - Repurchase-to-Maturity Transactions, Repurchase Financings, and Disclosures. ASU 2014-11 requires that repurchase-to-maturity transactions be accounted for as secured borrowings consistent with the accounting for other repurchase agreements. In addition, ASU 2014-11 requires separate accounting for repurchase financings, which entails the transfer of a financial asset executed contemporaneously with a repurchase agreement from the same counterparty. ASU 2014-11 requires entities to disclose certain information about transfers accounted for as sales in transactions that are economically similar to repurchase agreements. In addition, ASU 2014-11 requires disclosures related to collateral, remaining contractual term and of the potential risks associated with repurchase agreements, securities lending transactions and repurchase-to-maturity transactions. ASU 2014-11 was effective for the Company on January 1, 2015 and did not have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

ASU 2015-05 - Customer’s Accounting for Fees Paid in a Cloud Computing Arrangement . ASU 2015-05 provides guidance to customers about whether a cloud computing arrangement includes a software license. If a cloud computing arrangement includes a software license, the customer should account for the software license element of the arrangement consistent with the acquisition of other software licenses. If a cloud computing arrangement does not include a software license, the customer should account for the arrangement as a service contract. The new guidance does not change the accounting for a customer’s accounting for service contracts. ASU No. 2015-05 is effective for interim and annual reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2015 and is not expected to have a material impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

ASU 2015-16 - Business Combinations (Topic 805) – Simplifying the Accounting for Measurement-Period Adjustments . ASU 2015-16 requires that adjustments to provisional amounts that are identified during the measurement period of a business combination be recognized in the reporting period in which the adjustment amounts are determined. Furthermore, the income statement effects of such adjustments, if any, must be calculated as if the accounting had been completed at the acquisition date. The portion of the amount recorded in current-period earnings that would have been recorded in previous reporting periods if the adjustment to the provisional amounts had been recognized as of the acquisition date. Under previous guidance, adjustments to provisional amounts identified during the measurement period are to be recognized retrospectively. ASU 2015-16 will be effective January 1, 2016 and is not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

  86  

 

 

 

ASU 2016-1 - Financial Instruments – Overall (Subtopic 825-10): Recognition and Measurement of Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities . ASU 2016-1, among other things, (i) requires equity investments, with certain exceptions, to be measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognized in net income, (ii) simplifies the impairment assessment of equity investments without readily determinable fair values by requiring a qualitative assessment to identify impairment, (iii) eliminates the requirement for public business entities to disclose the methods and significant assumptions used to estimate the fair value that is required to be disclosed for financial instruments measured at amortized cost on the balance sheet, (iv) requires public business entities to use the exit price notion when measuring the fair value of financial instruments for disclosure purposes, (v) requires an entity to present separately in other comprehensive income the portion of the total change in the fair value of a liability resulting from a change in the instrument-specific credit risk when the entity has elected to measure the liability at fair value in accordance with the fair value option for financial instruments, (vi) requires separate presentation of financial assets and financial liabilities by measurement category and form of financial asset on the balance sheet or the accompanying notes to the financial statements and (viii) clarifies that an entity should evaluate the need for a valuation allowance on a deferred tax asset related to available-for-sale. ASU 2016-1 will be effective on January 1, 2018 and is not expected to have a significant impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

 

NOTE 2 – ACCUMULATED OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

The following table presents the components of comprehensive gain (loss) for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013. The Company’s comprehensive gains and losses were solely for securities for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013.

 

    Year Ended December 31, 2015     Year Ended December 31, 2014     Year Ended December 31, 2013  
(dollars in thousands)   Before Tax     Tax Effect     Net of Tax     Before Tax     Tax Effect     Net of Tax     Before Tax     Tax Effect     Net of Tax  
Net unrealized holding gains (losses) arising during period   $ 216     $ 85     $ 131     $ 981     $ 300     $ 681     $ (1,813 )   $ (617 )   $ (1,196 )
Reclassification adjustments     (6 )     (2 )     (4 )     (3 )     (1 )     (2 )     -       -       -  
Other comprehensive  gain (loss)   $ 210     $ 83     $ 127     $ 978     $ 299     $ 679     $ (1,813 )   $ (617 )   $ (1,196 )

 

The following table presents the changes in each component of accumulated other comprehensive loss, net of tax, for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013.

 

    Year Ended 
December 31, 2015
  Year Ended 
December 31, 2014
  Year Ended 
December 31, 2013
(dollars in thousands)   Net Unrealized
Gains And Losses
  Net Unrealized
Gains And Losses
  Net Unrealized
Gains And Losses
                         
Beginning of period   $ (378 )   $ (1,057 )   $ 139  
Other comprehensive gain (loss) before reclassifications     131       681       (1,196 )
Amounts reclassified from accumulated other comprehensive income     (4 )     (2 )     -  
Net other comprehensive gain (loss)     127       679       (1,196 )
End of period   $ (251 )   $ (378 )   $ (1,057 )

 

  87  

 

 

NOTE 3 – EARNINGS PER SHARE

 

Basic earnings per common share represent income available to common shareholders, divided by the weighted average number of common shares outstanding during the period. Diluted earnings per share reflect additional common shares that would have been outstanding if dilutive potential common shares had been issued. Potential common shares that may be issued by the Company relate to outstanding stock options and are determined using the treasury stock method. As of December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, there were 21,211, 87,435 and 184,201 options, respectively, which were excluded from the calculation as their effect would be anti-dilutive, because the exercise price of the options were greater than the average market price of the common shares. The Company has not granted any stock options since 2007 and all options outstanding at December 31, 2015 were anti-dilutive. Unvested restricted stock is excluded from the calculation of basic earnings per share. At December 31, 2015 there were 37,048 unvested shares of restricted stock. Basic and diluted earnings per share have been computed based on weighted-average common and common equivalent shares outstanding as follows:

 

    Years Ended  
    December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
Net Income   $ 6,343     $ 6,490     $ 6,651  
Less: dividends paid and accrued on preferred stock     (23 )     (200 )     (200 )
Net income available to common shareholders   $ 6,320     $ 6,290     $ 6,451  
                         
Weighted average number of common shares outstanding     4,639,700       4,646,424       3,402,432  
Dilutive effect of common stock equivalents     37,048       8,703       24,361  
Weighted average number of shares used to calculate diluted EPS     4,676,748       4,655,127       3,426,793  

 

NOTE 4 – RESTRICTIONS ON CASH AND AMOUNTS DUE FROM BANKS

 

The Bank is required to maintain average balances on hand or with the Federal Reserve Bank. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, these reserve balances amounted to $797,000 and $500,000, respectively.

 

  88  

 

 

NOTE 5 – SECURITIES

 

    December 31, 2015  
    Amortized     Gross Unrealized     Gross Unrealized     Estimated  
(dollars in thousands)   Cost     Gains     Losses     Fair Value  
Securities available for sale (AFS)                                
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs                                
Residential Mortgage Backed Securities ("MBS")   $ 22     $ 4     $ -     $ 26  
Residential Collateralized Mortgage Obligations ("CMOs")     31,182       39       557       30,664  
Corporate equity securities     37       2       -       39  
Bond mutual funds     4,289       98       -       4,387  
Total securities available for sale   $ 35,530     $ 143     $ 557     $ 35,116  
                                 
Securities held to maturity (HTM)                                
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs                                
Residential MBS   $ 34,085     $ 552     $ 242     $ 34,395  
Residential CMOs     73,492       278       599       73,171  
Asset-backed securities issued by Others:                                
Residential CMOs     1,093       -       100       993  
Total debt securities held to maturity     108,670       830       941       108,559  
                                 
U.S. government obligations     750       -       -       750  
Total securities held to maturity   $ 109,420     $ 830     $ 941     $ 109,309  

 

    December 31, 2014  
    Amortized     Gross Unrealized     Gross Unrealized     Estimated  
(dollars in thousands)   Cost     Gains     Losses     Fair Value  
Securities available for sale (AFS)                                
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs                                
Residential MBS   $ 33     $ 4     $ -     $ 37  
Residential CMOs     38,294       77       830       37,541  
Corporate equity securities     37       3       -       40  
Bond mutual funds     4,199       122       -       4,321  
Total securities available for sale   $ 42,563     $ 206     $ 830     $ 41,939  
                                 
Securities held to maturity (HTM)                                
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs                                
Residential MBS   $ 19,501     $ 767     $ 45     $ 20,223  
Residential CMOs     62,683       379       580       62,482  
Asset-backed securities issued by Others:                                
Residential CMOs     1,472       -       112       1,360  
Total debt securities held to maturity     83,656       1,146       737       84,065  
                                 
U.S. government obligations     850       -       -       850  
Total securities held to maturity   $ 84,506     $ 1,146     $ 737     $ 84,915  

 

At December 31, 2015, certain asset-backed securities with an amortized cost of $21.4 million were pledged to secure certain deposits. At December 31, 2015, asset-backed securities with an amortized cost of $1.9 million were pledged as collateral for advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) of Atlanta.

 

  89  

 

 

At December 31, 2015, 99% of the asset-backed securities portfolio was rated AAA by Standard & Poor’s or the equivalent credit rating from another major rating agency. AFS asset-backed securities issued by GSEs had an average life of 4.39 years and average duration of 4.04 years and are guaranteed by their issuer as to credit risk. HTM asset-backed securities issued by GSEs had an average life of 5.07 years and average duration of 4.58 years and are guaranteed by their issuer as to credit risk.

 

At December 31, 2014, certain asset-backed securities with an amortized cost of $37.7 million were pledged to secure certain deposits. At December 31, 2014, asset-backed securities with an amortized cost of $2.3 million were pledged as collateral for advances from the Federal Home Loan Bank (“FHLB”) of Atlanta.

 

At December 31, 2014, 99% of the asset-backed securities portfolio was rated AAA by Standard & Poor’s or the equivalent credit rating from another major rating agency. AFS asset-backed securities issued by GSEs had an average life of 3.66 years and average duration of 3.41 years and are guaranteed by their issuer as to credit risk. HTM asset-backed securities issued by GSEs had an average life of 3.40 years and average duration of 3.21 years and are guaranteed by their issuer as to credit risk.

 

We believe that AFS securities with unrealized losses will either recover in market value or be paid off as agreed. The Company intends to, and has the ability to, hold these securities to maturity. We believe that the losses are the result of general perceptions of safety and creditworthiness of the entire sector and a general disruption of orderly markets in the asset class.

 

Management has the ability and intent to hold the HTM securities with unrealized losses until they mature, at which time the Company will receive full value for the securities. Because our intention is not to sell the investments and it is not more likely than not that we will be required to sell the investments before recovery of their amortized cost basis, which may be maturity, management considers the unrealized losses in the held-to-maturity portfolio to be temporary.

 

No charges related to other-than-temporary impairment were made during for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2015, the Company recognized net gains on the sale of securities of $4,000, which consisted of the sale of one HTM security with a carrying value of $67,000 and the call of an AFS agency bond with a carrying value of $2.0 million. These sales resulted in a loss of $1,000 for the HTM security and a gain of $5,000 for the AFS security. During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Company recognized net gains on the sale of securities of $19,000. The Company sold five AFS securities with aggregate carrying values of $2.1 million and 12 HTM securities with aggregate carrying values of $4.2 million, recognizing gains of $8,000 and $11,000, respectively. There were no sales of AFS and HTM securities during the year ended December 31, 2013.

 

The sale of HTM securities was permitted under ASC 320 “Investments - Debt and Equity Securities.” ASC 320 permits the sale of HTM securities for certain changes in circumstances. Securities were disposed of using the safe harbor rule that allows for the sale of HTM securities that have principal payments paid down to less than 15% of original purchased par. ASC 320 10-25-15 indicates that a sale of a debt security after a substantial portion of the principal has been collected is equivalent to holding the security to maturity. In addition, HTM securities were disposed of under ASC 320-10-25-6 due to a significant deterioration in the issues’ creditworthiness and the increase in regulatory risk weights mandated for risk-based capital purposes.

 

AFS Securities

Gross unrealized losses and estimated fair value by length of time that the individual AFS securities have been in a continuous unrealized loss position at December 31, 2015 were as follows:

 

December 31, 2015   Less Than 12     More Than 12              
    Months     Months     Total  
(dollars in thousands)   Fair Value     Unrealized
Loss
    Fair Value     Unrealized
Loss
    Fair Value     Unrealized
Losses
 
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs   $ 4,658     $ 28     $ 17,344     $ 529     $ 22,002     $ 557  

 

  90  

 

 

At December 31, 2015, the AFS investment portfolio had an estimated fair value of $35.1 million, of which $22.0 million of the securities had some unrealized losses from their amortized cost. The securities with unrealized losses were CMOs issued by GSEs.

 

AFS securities issued by GSEs are guaranteed by the issuer. Total unrealized losses on the asset-backed securities issued by GSEs were $557,000 of the portfolio amortized cost of $31.2 million. AFS asset-backed securities issued by GSEs with unrealized losses had an average life of 4.45 years and an average duration of 4.04 years. We believe that the securities will either recover in market value or be paid off as agreed.

 

Gross unrealized losses and estimated fair value by length of time that the individual AFS securities have been in a continuous unrealized loss position at December 31, 2014 were as follows:

 

December 31, 2014   Less Than 12     More Than 12              
    Months     Months     Total  
(dollars in thousands)   Fair Value     Unrealized
Loss
    Fair Value     Unrealized
Loss
    Fair Value     Unrealized
Losses
 
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs   $ 294     $ -     $ 26,856     $ 830     $ 27,150     $ 830  

 

At December 31, 2014, the AFS investment portfolio had an estimated fair value of $41.9 million, of which $27.2 million of the securities had some unrealized losses from their amortized cost. The securities with unrealized losses were CMOs issued by GSEs.

 

AFS securities issued by GSEs are guaranteed by the issuer. Total unrealized losses on the asset-backed securities issued by GSEs were $830,000 of the portfolio amortized cost of $38.3 million. AFS asset-backed securities issued by GSEs with unrealized losses had an average life of 3.77 years and an average duration of 3.46 years. We believe that the securities will either recover in market value or be paid off as agreed.

 

HTM Securities

Gross unrealized losses and estimated fair value by length of time that the individual HTM securities have been in a continuous unrealized loss position at December 31, 2015 were as follows:

 

December 31, 2015   Less Than 12     More Than 12              
    Months     Months     Total  
(dollars in thousands)   Fair Value     Unrealized
Loss
    Fair Value     Unrealized
Loss
    Fair Value     Unrealized
Losses
 
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs   $ 36,337     $ 346     $ 16,431     $ 495     $ 52,768     $ 841  
Asset-backed securities issued by other     -       -       992       100       992       100  
    $ 36,337     $ 346     $ 17,423     $ 595     $ 53,760     $ 941  

 

At December 31, 2015, the HTM investment portfolio had an estimated fair value of $109.3 million, of which $53.8 million of the securities had some unrealized losses from their amortized cost. Of these securities, $52.8 million were asset-backed securities issued by GSEs and the remaining $992,000 were asset-backed securities issued by others.

 

HTM securities issued by GSEs are guaranteed by the issuer. Total unrealized losses on the asset-backed securities issued by GSEs were $841,000 of the portfolio amortized cost of $107.6 million. HTM asset-backed securities issued by GSEs with unrealized losses had an average life of 5.42 years and an average duration of 4.78 years. We believe that the securities will either recover in market value or be paid off as agreed. The Company intends to, and has the ability to, hold these securities to maturity.

 

  91  

 

 

HTM asset-backed securities issued by others are collateralized mortgage obligation securities. The securities have credit support tranches that absorb losses prior to the tranches that the Company owns. The Company reviews credit support positions on its securities regularly. Total unrealized losses on the asset-backed securities issued by others were $100,000 of the portfolio amortized cost of $1.1 million. HTM asset-backed securities issued by others with unrealized losses have an average life of 4.04 years and an average duration of 3.29 years.

 

Gross unrealized losses and estimated fair value by length of time that the individual HTM securities have been in a continuous unrealized loss position at December 31, 2014 were as follows:

 

December 31, 2014   Less Than 12     More Than 12              
    Months     Months     Total  
(dollars in thousands)   Fair Value     Unrealized
Loss
    Fair Value     Unrealized
Loss
    Fair Value     Unrealized
Losses
 
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs   $ 14,508     $ 85     $ 21,091     $ 540     $ 35,599     $ 625  
Asset-backed securities issued by other     -       -       1,291       112       1,291       112  
    $ 14,508     $ 85     $ 22,382     $ 652     $ 36,890     $ 737  

 

At December 31, 2014, the HTM investment portfolio had an estimated fair value of $84.9 million, of which $36.9 million of the securities had some unrealized losses from their amortized cost. Of these securities, $35.6 million were asset-backed securities issued by GSEs and the remaining $1.3 million were asset-backed securities issued by others.

 

HTM securities issued by GSEs are guaranteed by the issuer. Total unrealized losses on the asset-backed securities issued by GSEs were $625,000 of the portfolio amortized cost of $82.2 million. HTM asset-backed securities issued by GSEs with unrealized losses had an average life of 3.23 years and an average duration of 3.01 years. We believe that the securities will either recover in market value or be paid off as agreed. The Company intends to, and has the ability to, hold these securities to maturity.

 

HTM asset-backed securities issued by others are collateralized mortgage obligation securities. All of the securities have credit support tranches that absorb losses prior to the tranches that the Company owns. The Company reviews credit support positions on its securities regularly. Total unrealized losses on the asset-backed securities issued by others were $112,000 of the portfolio amortized cost of $1.5 million. HTM asset-backed securities issued by others with unrealized losses have an average life of 4.27 years and an average duration of 3.62 years.

 

Maturities

The amortized cost and estimated fair value of debt securities at December 31, 2015 and 2014 by contractual maturity, are shown below. The Company has allocated the asset-backed securities into the four maturity groups listed below using the expected average life of the individual securities based on statistics provided by industry sources. Expected maturities will differ from contractual maturities because the issuers of the securities may have the right to prepay obligations without prepayment penalties.

 

    Available for Sale     Held to Maturity  
December 31, 2015         Estimated           Estimated  
    Amortized     Fair     Amortized     Fair  
(dollars in thousands)   Cost     Value     Cost     Value  
Within one year                                
Bond mutual funds   $ 4,289     $ 4,387     $ -     $ -  
U.S. government obligations     -       -       750       750  
                                 
Asset-backed securities                                
Within one year     6,075       5,975       21,850       21,828  
Over one year through five years     15,355       15,102       50,895       50,843  
Over five years through ten years     7,727       7,600       23,259       23,235  
After ten years     2,047       2,013       12,666       12,653  
Total asset-backed securities     31,204       30,690       108,670       108,559  
                                 
    $ 35,493     $ 35,077     $ 109,420     $ 109,309  

 

  92  

 

 

    Available for Sale     Held to Maturity  
December 31, 2014         Estimated           Estimated  
    Amortized     Fair     Amortized     Fair  
(dollars in thousands)   Cost     Value     Cost     Value  
Within one year                                
Bond mutual funds   $ 4,198     $ 4,320     $ -     $ -  
U.S. government obligations     -       -       850       850  
                                 
Asset-backed securities                                
Within one year     8,084       7,926       20,647       20,748  
Over one year through five years     19,708       19,323       44,575       44,793  
Over five years through ten years     8,671       8,501       14,299       14,369  
After ten years     1,865       1,829       4,135       4,155  
Total asset-backed securities     38,328       37,579       83,656       84,065  
                                 
    $ 42,526     $ 41,899     $ 84,506     $ 84,915  

 

Credit Quality of Asset-Backed Securities

The tables below present the Standard & Poor’s (“S&P”) or equivalent credit rating from other major rating agencies for AFS and HTM asset-backed securities and agency bonds issued by GSEs and others at December 31, 2015 and 2014 by carrying value. The Company considers noninvestment grade securities rated BB+ or lower as classified assets for regulatory and financial reporting. GSE asset-backed securities and GSE agency bonds with S&P AA+ ratings were treated as AAA based on regulatory guidance.

 

December 31, 2015   December 31, 2014
Credit Rating   Amount     Credit Rating   Amount  
(dollars in thousands)
AAA   $ 138,267     AAA   $ 119,762  
BBB     -     BBB     68  
BB     518     BB     695  
BB-     -     BB-     -  
B+     575     B+     -  
CCC+     -     CCC+     709  
Total   $ 139,360     Total   $ 121,234  

 

  93  

 

 

NOTE 6 – LOANS

Loans consist of the following:

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014  
             
Commercial real estate   $ 613,479     $ 561,080  
Residential first mortgages     149,967       152,837  
Construction and land development     36,189       36,370  
Home equity and second mortgages     21,716       21,452  
Commercial loans     67,246       73,625  
Consumer loans     366       613  
Commercial equipment     29,931       26,152  
      918,894       872,129  
Less:                
Deferred loan fees     1,154       1,239  
Allowance for loan losses     8,540       8,481  
      9,694       9,720  
                 
    $ 909,200     $ 862,409  

 

At December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Bank’s allowance for loan losses totaled $8.5 million, or 0.93% and 0.97%, respectively, of loan balances. Management’s determination of the adequacy of the allowance is based on a periodic evaluation of the portfolio with consideration given to the overall loss experience, current economic conditions, size, growth and composition of the loan portfolio, financial condition of the borrowers and other relevant factors that, in management’s judgment, warrant recognition in providing an adequate allowance.

 

Risk Characteristics of Portfolio Segments

The Company manages its credit products and exposure to credit losses (credit risk) by the following specific portfolio segments (classes), which are levels at which the Company develops and documents its allowance for loan loss methodology. These segments are:

 

Commercial Real Estate (“CRE”)

Commercial and other real estate projects include office buildings, retail locations, churches, other special purpose buildings and commercial construction. Commercial construction balances were 5.3% and 4.4% of the CRE portfolio at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. The Bank offers both fixed-rate and adjustable-rate loans under these product lines. The primary security on a commercial real estate loan is the real property and the leases that produce income for the real property. Loans secured by commercial real estate are generally limited to 80% of the lower of the appraised value or sales price at origination and have an initial contractual loan payment period ranging from three to 20 years.

 

Loans secured by commercial real estate are larger and involve greater risks than one-to-four family residential mortgage loans. Because payments on loans secured by such properties are often dependent on the successful operation or management of the properties, repayment of such loans may be subject to a greater extent to adverse conditions in the real estate market or the economy.

 

Residential First Mortgages

Residential first mortgage loans are generally long-term loans, amortized on a monthly basis, with principal and interest due each month. The contractual loan payment period for residential loans typically ranges from ten to 30 years. The Bank’s experience indicates that real estate loans remain outstanding for significantly shorter time periods than their contractual terms. Borrowers may refinance or prepay loans at their option, without penalty. The Bank’s residential portfolio has both fixed-rate and adjustable-rate residential first mortgages.

 

  94  

 

 

The annual and lifetime limitations on interest rate adjustments may limit the increases in interest rates on these loans. There are also credit risks resulting from potential increased costs to the borrower as a result of repricing of adjustable-rate mortgage loans. During periods of rising interest rates, the risk of default on adjustable-rate mortgage loans may increase due to the upward adjustment of interest cost to the borrower. The Bank’s adjustable rate residential first mortgage portfolio was $33.6 million or 3.7% of gross loans of $918.9 million at December 31, 2015 compared to $27.4 million or 3.1% of total gross loans of $872.1 million at December 31, 2014.

 

Construction and Land Development

The Bank offers loans for the construction of one-to-four family dwellings. Generally, these loans are secured by the real estate under construction as well as by guarantees of the principals involved. In addition, the Bank offers loans to acquire and develop land, as well as loans on undeveloped, subdivided lots for home building.

 

A decline in demand for new housing might adversely affect the ability of borrowers to repay these loans. Construction and land development loans are inherently riskier than providing financing on owner-occupied real estate. The Bank’s risk of loss is affected by the accuracy of the initial estimate of the market value of the completed project as well as the accuracy of the cost estimates made to complete the project. In addition, the volatility of the real estate market has made it difficult to ensure that the valuation of land associated with these loans is accurate. During the construction phase, a number of factors could result in delays and cost overruns. If the estimate of construction costs proves to be inaccurate, the Bank may be required to advance funds beyond the amount originally committed to permit completion of the development. If the estimate of value proves to be inaccurate, a project’s value might be insufficient to assure full repayment. As a result of these factors, construction lending often involves the disbursement of substantial funds with repayment dependent, in part, on the success of the project rather than the ability of the borrower or guarantor to repay principal and interest. If the Bank forecloses on a project, there can be no assurance that the Bank will be able to recover all of the unpaid balance of, and accrued interest on, the loan as well as related foreclosure and holding costs.

 

Home Equity and Second Mortgage Loans

The Bank maintains a portfolio of home equity and second mortgage loans. These products contain a higher risk of default than residential first mortgages as in the event of foreclosure, the first mortgage would need to be paid off prior to collection of the second mortgage. This risk has been heightened as the market value of residential property has declined.

 

Commercial Loans

The Bank offers commercial loans to its business customers. The Bank offers a variety of commercial loan products including term loans and lines of credit. These loans are generally made for terms of five years or less. The Bank offers both fixed-rate and adjustable-rate loans under these product lines. When making commercial business loans, the Bank considers the financial condition of the borrower, the borrower’s payment history of both corporate and personal debt, the projected cash flows of the business, the viability of the industry in which the consumer operates, the value of the collateral, and the borrower’s ability to service the debt from income. These loans are primarily secured by equipment, real property, accounts receivable, or other security as determined by the Bank.

 

Commercial loans are made on the basis of the borrower’s ability to make repayment from the cash flows of the borrower’s business. As a result, the availability of funds for the repayment of commercial loans may depend substantially on the success of the business itself.

 

Consumer Loans

Consumer loans consist of loans secured by automobiles, boats, recreational vehicles and trucks. The Bank also makes home improvement loans and offers both secured and unsecured personal lines of credit. Consumer loans have greater risk from other loan types due to being secured by rapidly depreciating assets or the reliance on the borrower’s continuing financial stability.

 

Commercial Equipment Loans

These loans consist primarily of fixed-rate, short-term loans collateralized by a commercial customer’s equipment. When making commercial equipment loans, the Bank considers the same factors it considers when underwriting a commercial business loan. Commercial loans are of higher risk and typically are made on the basis of the borrower’s ability to make repayment from the cash flows of the borrower’s business. As a result, the availability of funds for the repayment of commercial loans may depend substantially on the success of the business itself. In the case of business failure, collateral would need to be liquidated to provide repayment for the loan. In many cases, the highly specialized nature of collateral equipment would make full recovery from the sale of collateral problematic.

 

  95  

 

 

Non-accrual and Past Due Loans

Non-accrual loans as of December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014 were as follows:

 

    December 31, 2015  
(dollars in thousands)   90 or Greater
Days
Delinquent
    Number
of Loans
    Non-accrual
Only Loans
    Number
of Loans
    Total
Non-accrual
Loans
    Total
Number
of Loans
 
                                     
Commercial real estate   $ 3,480       11     $ -       -     $ 3,480       11  
Residential first mortgages     1,948       7       -       -       1,948       7  
Construction and land development     3,555       3       -       -       3,555       3  
Home equity and second mortgages     48       3       -       -       48       3  
Commercial loans     1,361       8       693       2       2,054       10  
Commercial equipment     348       4       -       -       348       4  
    $ 10,740       36     $ 693       2     $ 11,433       38  

 

    December 31, 2014  
(dollars in thousands)   90 or Greater
Days
Delinquent
    Number
of Loans
    Non-accrual
Only Loans
    Number
of Loans
    Total
Non-accrual
Loans
    Total
Number
of Loans
 
                                     
Commercial real estate   $ 3,824       11     $ -       -     $ 3,824       11  
Residential first mortgages     533       2       -       -       533       2  
Construction and land development     3,634       2       -       -       3,634       2  
Home equity and second mortgages     399       6       -       -       399       6  
Commercial loans     1,587       6       -       -       1,587       6  
Commercial equipment     286       4       -       -       286       4  
    $ 10,263       31     $ -       -     $ 10,263       31  

 

Non-accrual loans (90 days or greater delinquent and non-accrual only loans) increased $1.1 million from $10.3 million or 1.18% of total loans at December 31, 2014 to $11.4 million or 1.24% of total loans at December 31, 2015. Non-accrual only loans are loans classified as non-accrual due to customer operating results or payment history. In accordance with the Company’s policy, interest income is recognized on a cash basis for these loans.

 

The Company had 38 non-accrual loans at December 31, 2015 compared to 31 non-accrual loans at December 31, 2014. Non-accrual loans at December 31, 2015 included $8.1 million, or 71% of non-accrual loans, attributed to 19 loans representing six customer relationships classified as substandard. Non-accrual loans at December 31, 2014 included $8.8 million, or 86% of nonperforming loans, attributed to 16 loans representing six customer relationships classified as substandard. Of these loans at December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014, four loans totaling $3.8 million and $3.9 million, respectively, represented a stalled residential development project. During the second quarter of 2014, the Company deferred the collection of principal and interest to enable the project to use available funds to build units and complete the project. The stalled development project loans are considered both troubled debt restructures (“TDRs”) and non-accrual loans. At December 31, 2015, the Company had an additional three TDR loans totaling $1.7 million classified non-accrual. At December 31, 2014, the Company had one additional TDR loan totaling $1.0 million that was non-accrual. These loans are classified solely as non-accrual loans for the calculation of financial ratios.

 

Non-accrual loans on which the recognition of interest has been discontinued, which did not have a specific allowance for impairment, amounted to $10.5 million and $9.3 million at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Interest due but not recognized on these balances at December 31, 2015 and 2014 was $953,000 and $781,000, respectively. Non-accrual loans with a specific allowance for impairment on which the recognition of interest has been discontinued amounted to $902,000 and $1.0 million at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Interest due but not recognized on these balances at December 31, 2015 and 2014 was $34,000 and $64,000, respectively.

 

  96  

 

 

An analysis of past due loans as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 was as follows:

 

    December 31, 2015  
(dollars in thousands)   Current    

31-60

Days

   

61-89

Days

    90 or Greater
Days
   

Total

Past Due

   

Total

Loan

Receivables

 
Commercial real estate   $ 609,999     $ -     $ -     $ 3,480     $ 3,480     $ 613,479  
Residential first mortgages     147,720       -       299       1,948       2,247       149,967  
Construction and land dev.     32,634       -       -       3,555       3,555       36,189  
Home equity and second mtg.     21,603       65       -       48       113       21,716  
Commercial loans     65,747       -       138       1,361       1,499       67,246  
Consumer loans     365       -       1       -       1       366  
Commercial equipment     29,138       152       293       348       793       29,931  
Total   $ 907,206     $ 217     $ 731     $ 10,740     $ 11,688     $ 918,894  

 

    December 31, 2014  
(dollars in thousands)   Current    

31-60

Days

   

61-89

Days

    90 or Greater
Days
   

Total

Past Due

   

Total

Loan

Receivables

 
Commercial real estate   $ 556,584     $ -     $ 672     $ 3,824     $ 4,496     $ 561,080  
Residential first mortgages     151,375       133       796       533       1,462       152,837  
Construction and land dev.     32,736       -       -       3,634       3,634       36,370  
Home equity and second mtg.     20,939       90       24       399       513       21,452  
Commercial loans     71,952       86       -       1,587       1,673       73,625  
Consumer loans     612       1       -       -       1       613  
Commercial equipment     25,848       17       1       286       304       26,152  
Total   $ 860,046     $ 327     $ 1,493     $ 10,263     $ 12,083     $ 872,129  

 

There were no loans greater than 90 days still accruing interest at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. 

 

Impaired Loans and Troubled Debt Restructures (“TDRs”)

Impaired loans, including TDRs, at December 31, 2015 and 2014 were as follows:

 

    December 31, 2015  
(dollars in thousands)   Unpaid
Contractual
Principal
Balance
    Recorded
Investment
With No
Allowance
    Recorded
Investment
With
Allowance
   

Total

Recorded
Investment

    Related
Allowance
    Average
Recorded
Investment
    Interest
Income
Recognized
 
                                           
Commercial real estate   $ 25,429     $ 22,634     $ 2,367     $ 25,001     $ 602     $ 25,655     $ 908  
Residential first mortgages     4,747       4,070       676       4,746       66       4,807       177  
Construction and land dev.     4,283       3,780       504       4,284       471       4,302       13  
Home equity and second mtg.     154       154       -       154       -       163       8  
Commercial loans     4,775       4,195       380       4,575       330       4,524       251  
Commercial equipment     518       338       139       477       139       491       9  
Total   $ 39,906     $ 35,171     $ 4,066     $ 39,237     $ 1,608     $ 39,942     $ 1,366  

 

  97  

 

 

    December 31, 2014  
(dollars in thousands)   Unpaid
Contractual
Principal
Balance
    Recorded
Investment
With No
Allowance
   

Recorded
Investment

With
Allowance

    Total
Recorded
Investment
    Related
Allowance
    Average
Recorded
Investment
    Interest
Income
Recognized
 
                                           
Commercial real estate   $ 31,812     $ 28,907     $ 2,622     $ 31,529     $ 97     $ 31,672     $ 1,258  
Residential first mortgages     3,407       2,526       881       3,407       76       3,426       155  
Construction and land dev.     6,402       6,102       -       6,102       -       6,474       133  
Home equity and second mtg.     708       649       -       649       -       630       19  
Commercial loans     7,587       7,030       406       7,436       155       7,196       252  
Commercial equipment     605       373       213       586       123       623       23  
Total   $ 50,521     $ 45,587     $ 4,122     $ 49,709     $ 451     $ 50,021     $ 1,840  

 

TDRs, included in the impaired loan schedules above, as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 were as follows:

 

    December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014  
(dollars in thousands)   Dollars     Number
of Loans
    Dollars     Number
of Loans
 
                         
Commercial real estate   $ 11,897       13     $ 10,438       9  
Residential first mortgages     881       3       906       3  
Construction and land development     4,283       5       4,376       4  
Commercial loans     1,384       7       2,262       6  
Commercial equipment     123       2       154       2  
Total TDRs   $ 18,568       30     $ 18,136       24  
Less: TDRs included in non-accrual loans     (5,435 )     (7 )     (4,887 )     (5 )
Total accrual TDR loans   $ 13,133       23     $ 13,249       19  

 

At December 31, 2015, the Company had 23 accruing TDRs totaling $13.1 million compared to 19 accruing TDRs totaling $13.2 million as of December 31, 2014. The Company had specific reserves of $1.3 million on nine TDRs totaling $3.6 million at December 31, 2015 and $251,000 on five TDRs totaling $2.5 million at December 31, 2014. Interest income in the amount of $508,000 and $563,000 was recognized on outstanding TDR loans for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

During the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014 the Company added 10 TDR loans totaling $3.2 million and 19 TDR loans totaling $16.6 million, respectively. TDR disposals, which included payoffs and refinancing with other institutions for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014 decreased by four loans or $2.1 million and eight loans or $2.4 million, respectively. TDR loan principal curtailment was $677,000 and $810,000 for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2015, the $3.2 million of TDRs added consisted primarily of commercial real estate loans. During the year ended December 31, 2014, $10.1 million of the $16.6 million of new TDRs added related to concessions granted on two substandard customer loan relationships described below. In the fourth quarter of 2014, the Bank granted concessions on two loan relationships, each of which was classified as substandard. As a result of these concessions, the Bank determined that the loans were TDRs. As such, the loans became impaired and were evaluated for impairment in accordance with Bank policy. The first loan relationship, which totaled $8.6 million, consisted of commercial real estate and construction loans. The borrower agreed to provide additional collateral to cover most of the deficiency determined as a result of the impairment analysis and the Bank charged-off $500,000 in principal. The carrying value of the loans at December 31, 2015 and 2014 were $8.1 million and $8.2 million, respectively. The second loan relationship, which totaled approximately $3.8 million, consisted of construction and land development and commercial loans. As a result of the concessions granted and the impairment analysis, the Bank charged-off $843,000 and took 11 finished residential lots into other real estate owned (“OREO”). At December 31, 2015 and 2014, the carrying value of the loans and the OREO were $1.4 million and $1.9 million, respectively and $486,000 and $757,000, respectively. Both loan relationships were current and making payments in accordance with their original contract terms before the restructuring occurred. Accordingly, the two loan relationships remained on accrual status at December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

  98  

 

 

Allowance for Loan Losses

The following tables detail activity in the allowance for loan losses at and for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013 and loan receivable balances at December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013. An allocation of the allowance to one category of loans does not prevent the Company’s ability to utilize the allowance to absorb losses in a different category. The loan receivables are disaggregated on the basis of the Company’s impairment methodology.

 

(dollars in thousands)   Commercial
Real Estate
    Residential
First
Mortgage
    Construction
and Land
Development
    Home
Equity and
Second Mtg.
    Commercial
Loans
    Consumer
Loans
    Commercial
Equipment
    Total  
                                                 
At and For the Year Ended December 31, 2015                                                                
                                                                 
Allowance for loan losses:                                                                
Balance at January 1,   $ 4,076     $ 1,092     $ 1,071     $ 173     $ 1,677     $ 3     $ 389     $ 8,481  
Charge-offs     (78 )     (30 )     -       (100 )     (432 )     -       (818 )     (1,458 )
Recoveries     17       1       32       -       11       -       23       84  
Provisions     (133 )     (358 )     -       69       221       (1 )     1,635       1,433  
Balance at December 31,   $ 3,882     $ 705     $ 1,103     $ 142     $ 1,477     $ 2     $ 1,229     $ 8,540  
Ending balance: individually evaluated for impairment   $ 602     $ 66     $ 471     $ -     $ 330     $ -     $ 139     $ 1,608  
Ending balance: collectively evaluated for impairment   $ 3,280     $ 639     $ 632     $ 142     $ 1,147     $ 2     $ 1,090     $ 6,932  
Loan receivables:                                                                
Ending balance   $ 613,479     $ 149,967     $ 36,189     $ 21,716     $ 67,246     $ 366     $ 29,931     $ 918,894  
Ending balance: individually evaluated for impairment   $ 25,001     $ 4,746     $ 4,284     $ 154     $ 4,575     $ -     $ 477     $ 39,237  
Ending balance: collectively evaluated for impairment   $ 588,478     $ 145,221     $ 31,905     $ 21,562     $ 62,671     $ 366     $ 29,454     $ 879,657  

 

(dollars in thousands)   Commercial
Real Estate
    Residential
First
Mortgage
    Construction
and Land
Development
    Home
Equity and
Second Mtg.
    Commercial
Loans
    Consumer
Loans
    Commercial
Equipment
    Total  
                                                 
At and For the Year Ended December 31, 2014                                                                
Allowance for loan losses:                                                                
Balance at January 1,   $ 3,525     $ 1,401     $ 584     $ 249     $ 1,916     $ 10     $ 453     $ 8,138  
Charge-offs     (350 )     (94 )     (992 )     (59 )     (1,134 )     (3 )     (10 )     (2,642 )
Recoveries     11       186       84       10       5       11       25       332  
Provisions     890       (401 )     1,395       (27 )     890       (15 )     (79 )     2,653  
Balance at December 31,   $ 4,076     $ 1,092     $ 1,071     $ 173     $ 1,677     $ 3     $ 389     $ 8,481  
Ending balance: individually evaluated for impairment   $ 97     $ 76     $ -     $ -     $ 155     $ -     $ 123     $ 451  
Ending balance: collectively evaluated for impairment   $ 3,979     $ 1,016     $ 1,071     $ 173     $ 1,522     $ 3     $ 266     $ 8,030  
Loan receivables:                                                                
Ending balance   $ 561,080     $ 152,837     $ 36,370     $ 21,452     $ 73,625     $ 613     $ 26,152     $ 872,129  
Ending balance: individually evaluated for impairment   $ 31,529     $ 3,407     $ 6,102     $ 649     $ 7,436     $ -     $ 586     $ 49,709  
Ending balance: collectively evaluated for impairment   $ 529,551     $ 149,430     $ 30,268     $ 20,803     $ 66,189     $ 613     $ 25,566     $ 822,420  

 

  99  

 

 

(dollars in thousands)   Commercial
 Real Estate
    Residential
First
Mortgage
    Construction
and Land
Development
    Home
Equity and
Second Mtg.
    Commercial
Loans
    Consumer
Loans
    Commercial
Equipment
    Total  
                                                 
At and For the Year Ended December 31, 2013                                                                
Allowance for loan losses:                                                                
Balance at January 1,   $ 4,092     $ 1,083     $ 533     $ 280     $ 1,948     $ 19     $ 292     $ 8,247  
Charge-offs     (140 )     (348 )     (36 )     (111 )     (480 )     (12 )     (35 )     (1,162 )
Recoveries     -       11       1       17       23       3       58       113  
Provisions     (427 )     655       86       63       425       -       138       940  
Balance at December 31,   $ 3,525     $ 1,401     $ 584     $ 249     $ 1,916     $ 10     $ 453     $ 8,138  
Ending balance: individually evaluated for impairment   $ 372     $ 171     $ 55     $ -     $ 304     $ -     $ 83     $ 985  
Ending balance: collectively evaluated for impairment   $ 3,153     $ 1,230     $ 529     $ 249     $ 1,612     $ 10     $ 370     $ 7,153  
Loan receivables:                                                                
Ending balance   $ 476,648     $ 159,147     $ 32,001     $ 21,692     $ 94,176     $ 838     $ 23,738     $ 808,240  
Ending balance: individually evaluated for impairment   $ 18,173     $ 3,401     $ 5,666     $ 207     $ 10,218     $ 24     $ 317     $ 38,006  
Ending balance: collectively evaluated for impairment   $ 458,475     $ 155,746     $ 26,335     $ 21,485     $ 83,958     $ 814     $ 23,421     $ 770,234  

 

Credit Quality Indicators

Credit quality indicators as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 were as follows:

 

Credit Risk Profile by Internally Assigned Grade

 

    Commercial Real Estate     Construction and Land Dev.  
(dollars in thousands)   12/31/2015     12/31/2014     12/31/2015     12/31/2014  
                         
Unrated   $ 70,661     $ 74,955     $ 4,399     $ 3,108  
Pass     519,330       451,256       27,507       27,160  
Special mention     1,095       4,383       -       -  
Substandard     22,393       30,486       3,845       6,102  
Doubtful     -       -       438       -  
Loss     -       -       -       -  
Total   $ 613,479     $ 561,080     $ 36,189     $ 36,370  

 

    Commercial Loans     Commercial Equipment  
(dollars in thousands)   12/31/2015     12/31/2014     12/31/2015     12/31/2014  
                         
Unrated   $ 11,281     $ 12,296     $ 10,074     $ 7,173  
Pass     51,569       53,844       19,610       18,517  
Special mention     -       49       -       -  
Substandard     4,110       7,436       110       462  
Doubtful     286       -       137       -  
Loss     -       -       -       -  
Total   $ 67,246     $ 73,625     $ 29,931     $ 26,152  

 

  100  

 

 

Credit Risk Profile Based on Payment Activity

 

    Residential First Mortgages     Home Equity and Second Mtg.     Consumer Loans  
(dollars in thousands)   12/31/2015     12/31/2014     12/31/2015     12/31/2014     12/31/2015     12/31/2014  
                                     
Performing   $ 148,019     $ 152,304     $ 21,668     $ 21,053     $ 366     $ 613  
Nonperforming     1,948       533       48       399       -       -  
Total   $ 149,967     $ 152,837     $ 21,716     $ 21,452     $ 366     $ 613  

 

Summary of Total Classified Loans

 

(dollars in thousands)   12/31/2015     12/31/2014  
By Internally Assigned Grade   $ 31,319     $ 44,486  
By Payment Activity     1,485       2,249  
Total Classified   $ 32,804     $ 46,735  

 

A risk grading scale is used to assign grades to commercial real estate, construction and land development, commercial loans and commercial equipment loans. Loans are graded at inception, annually thereafter when financial statements are received and at other times when there is an indication that a credit may have weakened or improved. Only commercial loan relationships with an aggregate exposure to the Bank of $750,000 or greater are subject to being risk rated.

 

Home equity and second mortgages and consumer loans are evaluated for creditworthiness in underwriting and are monitored based on borrower payment history. Residential first mortgages are evaluated for creditworthiness during credit due diligence before being purchased. Residential first mortgages, home equity and second mortgages and consumer loans are classified as unrated unless they are part of a larger commercial relationship that requires grading or are troubled debt restructures or nonperforming loans with an Other Assets Especially Mentioned (“OAEM”) or higher risk rating due to a delinquent payment history.

 

Management regularly reviews credit quality indicators as part of its individual loan reviews and on a monthly and quarterly basis. The overall quality of the Bank’s loan portfolio is assessed using the Bank’s risk grading scale, the level and trends of net charge-offs, nonperforming loans and delinquencies, the performance of troubled debt restructured loans and the general economic conditions in the Company’s geographical market. This review process is assisted by frequent internal reporting of loan production, loan quality, concentrations of credit, loan delinquencies and nonperforming and potential problem loans. Credit quality indicators and allowance factors are adjusted based on management’s judgment during the monthly and quarterly review process. Loans subject to risk ratings are graded on a scale of one to ten. The Company considers loans classified substandard, doubtful and loss as classified assets for regulatory and financial reporting.

 

Ratings 1 thru 6 - Pass

Ratings 1 thru 6 have asset risks ranging from excellent low risk to adequate. The specific rating assigned considers customer history of earnings, cash flows, liquidity, leverage, capitalization, consistency of debt service coverage, the nature and extent of customer relationship and other relevant specific business factors such as the stability of the industry or market area, changes to management, litigation or unexpected events that could have an impact on risks.

 

Rating 7 - OAEM (Other Assets Especially Mentioned) – Special Mention

These credits, while protected by the financial strength of the borrowers, guarantors or collateral, have reduced quality due to economic conditions, less than adequate earnings performance or other factors which require the lending officer to direct more than normal attention to the credit. Financing alternatives may be limited and/or command higher risk interest rates. OAEM loans are the first adversely classified assets on our watch list. These relationships will be reviewed at least quarterly.

 

  101  

 

 

Rating 8 - Substandard

Substandard assets are assets that are inadequately protected by the sound worth or paying capacity of the borrower or of the collateral pledged. These assets have a well-defined weakness or weaknesses that jeopardize the liquidation of the debt. They are characterized by the possibility that the Bank will sustain some loss if the deficiencies are not corrected. Loss potential, while existing in the aggregate amount of substandard assets, does not have to exist in individual assets classified substandard. The loans may have a delinquent history or combination of weak collateral, weak guarantor strength or operating losses. When a loan is assigned to this category the Bank may estimate a specific reserve in the loan loss allowance analysis. These assets listed may include assets with histories of repossessions or some that are non-performing bankruptcies. These relationships will be reviewed at least quarterly.

   

Rating 9 - Doubtful

Doubtful assets have many of the same characteristics of Substandard with the exception that the Bank has determined that loss is not only possible but is probable and the risk is close to certain that loss will occur. When a loan is assigned to this category the Bank will identify the probable loss and the loan will receive a specific reserve in the loan loss allowance analysis. These relationships will be reviewed at least quarterly.

 

Rating 10 – Loss

Once an asset is identified as a definite loss to the Bank, it will receive the classification of “loss”. There may be some future potential recovery; however it is more practical to write off the loan at the time of classification. Losses will be taken in the period in which they are determined to be uncollectable.

 

Maturity of Loan Portfolio

The following table sets forth certain information at December 31, 2015 and 2014 regarding the dollar amount of loans maturing in the Bank’s portfolio based on their contractual terms to maturity. Demand loans, loans having no stated schedule of repayments and no stated maturity, and overdrafts are reported as due in one year or less.

 

December 31, 2015   Due within one     Due after one year     Due more than  
(dollars in thousands)   year after     through five years from     five years from  
Description of Asset   December 31, 2015     December 31, 2015     December 31, 2015  
Real Estate Loans                        
Commercial   $ 53,502     $ 122,043     $ 437,934  
Residential first mortgage     7,417       31,614       110,936  
Construction and land development     27,609       5,025       3,555  
Home equity and second mortgage     330       1,134       20,252  
Commercial loans     67,246       -       -  
Consumer loans     200       150       16  
Commercial equipment     7,899       17,635       4,397  
Total loans   $ 164,203     $ 177,601     $ 577,090  

 

December 31, 2014   Due within one     Due after one year     Due more than  
(dollars in thousands)   year after     through five years from     five years from  
Description of Asset   December 31, 2014     December 31, 2014     December 31, 2014  
Real Estate Loans                        
Commercial   $ 114,300     $ 184,317     $ 262,463  
Residential first mortgage     21,110       58,320       73,407  
Construction and land development     26,867       9,503       -  
Home equity and second mortgage     2,238       6,926       12,288  
Commercial loans     73,625       -       -  
Consumer loans     303       275       35  
Commercial equipment     17,497       5,826       2,829  
Total loans   $ 255,940     $ 265,167     $ 351,022  

 

  102  

 

 

The following table sets forth the dollar amount of all loans due after one year from December 31, 2015 and 2014, which have predetermined interest rates and have floating or adjustable interest rates.

 

December 31, 2015                  
(dollars in thousands)         Floating or        
Description of Asset   Fixed Rates     Adjustable Rates     Total  
Real Estate Loans                        
Commercial   $ 114,570     $ 445,407     $ 559,977  
Residential first mortgage     109,041       33,509       142,550  
Construction and land development     3,555       5,025       8,580  
Home equity and second mortgage     1,806       19,580       21,386  
Commercial loans     -       -       -  
Consumer loans     166       -       166  
Commercial equipment     20,145       1,887       22,032  
    $ 249,283     $ 505,408     $ 754,691  

 

December 31, 2014                  
(dollars in thousands)         Floating or        
Description of Asset   Fixed Rates     Adjustable Rates     Total  
Real Estate Loans                        
Commercial   $ 92,367     $ 354,413     $ 446,780  
Residential first mortgage     105,082       26,645       131,727  
Construction and land development     3,859       5,644       9,503  
Home equity and second mortgage     2,362       16,852       19,214  
Commercial loans     -       -       -  
Consumer loans     310       -       310  
Commercial equipment     6,625       2,030       8,655  
    $ 210,605     $ 405,584     $ 616,189  

 

Related Party Loans

Included in loans receivable were loans made to executive officers and directors of the Bank. These loans were made in the ordinary course of business at substantially the same terms and conditions as those prevailing at the time for comparable transactions with persons not affiliated with the Bank and are not considered to involve more than the normal risk of collectability. For the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, all loans to directors and executive officers of the Bank performed according to original loan terms. Activity in loans outstanding to executive officers and directors are summarized as follows:

 

    At and For the Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
                   
Balance, beginning of period   $ 24,403     $ 16,601     $ 6,987  
Loans and additions     6,822       407       536  
Change in Directors' status     (642 )     8,953       10,077  
Repayments     (2,478 )     (1,558 )     (999 )
Balance, end of period   $ 28,105     $ 24,403     $ 16,601  

 

  103  

 

 

NOTE 7 – LOAN SERVICING

 

Loans serviced for others are not reflected in the accompanying balance sheets. The unpaid principal balances of mortgages serviced for others were $63.0 million and $68.7 million at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

Servicing loans for others generally consists of collecting mortgage payments, maintaining escrow accounts, disbursing payments to investors and foreclosure processing. Loan servicing income is recorded on an accrual basis and includes servicing fees from investors and certain charges collected from borrowers, such as late payment fees. The following table presents the activity of the mortgage servicing rights.

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
Balance, beginning of the year   $ 295     $ 306     $ 245  
Additions     31       102       174  
Amortization     (107 )     (113 )     (113 )
Balance, end of the year   $ 219     $ 295     $ 306  

 

NOTE 8 – OTHER REAL ESTATE OWNED (“OREO”)

 

OREO assets are presented net of the allowance for losses. The Company considers OREO as classified assets for regulatory and financial reporting. OREO carrying amounts reflect management’s estimate of the realizable value of these properties incorporating current appraised values, local real estate market conditions and related costs. An analysis of the activity follows.

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
Balance at beginning of year   $ 5,883     $ 6,797     $ 6,892  
Additions of underlying property     5,436       2,742       1,852  
Disposals of underlying property     (1,206 )     (2,422 )     (1,346 )
Transfers of OREO to loans     -       (1,000 )     -  
Valuation allowance     (664 )     (234 )     (601 )
Balance at end of period   $ 9,449     $ 5,883     $ 6,797  

 

During the year ended December 31, 2015, the Bank recognized $20,000 in losses on the sale of OREO which consisted of the sale of eight properties for net proceeds of $1.2 million.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Bank recognized $322,000 in gains on the sale of OREO which consisted of the sale of eight properties for net proceeds of $3.7 million, which included the financing of $1.0 million dollars on a residential subdivision that was transferred from OREO to loans during the fourth quarter of 2014. The contracted sales price of $1.4 million on the residential subdivision qualified for full accrual sales treatment under ASC Topic 360-20-40 “Property Plant and Equipment – Derecognition”.

 

During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Bank recognized $179,000 in gains on the sale of OREO which consisted of the sale of six properties for net proceeds of $1.3 million and net losses of $46,000 and the recognition of $225,000 of previously deferred gain from an OREO property that the Bank financed during 2011 that did not initially qualify for full accrual sales treatment. The Bank utilized the cost recovery method (ASC Topic 360-20-40 “Property Plant and Equipment – Derecognition”) to account for the sale.

 

  104  

 

 

Expenses applicable to OREO assets include the following.

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
Valuation allowance   $ 664     $ 234     $ 601  
Operating expenses     395       152       186  
    $ 1,059     $ 386     $ 787  

 

NOTE 9 – PREMISES AND EQUIPMENT AND HELD FOR SALE PREMISES AND EQUIPMENT

 

A summary of the cost and accumulated depreciation of premises and equipment at December 31, 2015 and 2014 follows:

 

    December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014  
             
Land   $ 4,172     $ 5,602  
Building and improvements     19,737       18,286  
Furniture and equipment     8,310       7,599  
Automobiles     382       444  
Total cost     32,601       31,931  
Less accumulated depreciation     12,445       11,345  
Premises and equipment, net   $ 20,156     $ 20,586  

 

Certain Bank facilities are leased under various operating leases. Rent expense was $701,000, $647,000 and $569,000 for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively. Future minimum rental commitments under non-cancellable operating leases are as follows at December 31, 2015:

 

(dollar in thousands)      
2016   $ 705  
2017     720  
2018     585  
2019     467  
2020     356  
Thereafter     3,430  
         
Total   $ 6,263  

 

The Company agreed to sell its King George, Virginia branch building and equipment to a credit union. The required conditions were met during the three months ended September 30, 2015 to classify the asset as held for sale (“HFS”) under FASB 360-10-45-9 which addresses accounting and reporting for long-lived assets to be disposed of by sale. FASB ASC 360-10-35-43 states that a long-lived asset classified as HFS should be measured at the lower of carrying amount or fair value less cost to sell. Based on the contracted sales price, the Company recorded an impairment of $426,000 during the third quarter of 2015. The transaction closed on January 28, 2016.

 

  105  

 

 

NOTE 10 – DEPOSITS

 

Deposits consist of the following:

 

    December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014  
Noninterest-bearing demand   $ 142,771     $ 122,195  
Interest-bearing:                
Demand     120,918       108,350  
Money market deposits     219,956       211,929  
Savings     47,703       41,499  
Certificates of deposit     375,551       385,411  
Total interest-bearing     764,128       747,189  
                 
Total Deposits   $ 906,899     $ 869,384  

 

The aggregate amount of certificates of deposit in denominations of $100,000 or more at December 31, 2015 and 2014 was $222.3 million and $216.2 million, respectively. The aggregate amount of certificates of deposit in denominations of $250,000 or more at December 31, 2015, and 2014 was $98.6 million and $83.9 million, respectively.

 

At December 31, 2015 and 2014, the scheduled contractual maturities of certificates of deposit are as follows:

 

    December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014  
Within one year   $ 230,559     $ 240,648  
Year 2     96,098       87,959  
Year 3     32,975       40,675  
Year 4     5,454       10,042  
Year 5     10,465       6,087  
    $ 375,551     $ 385,411  

 

  106  

 

 

NOTE 11 – SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS AND LONG-TERM DEBT

 

The Bank’s long-term debt and short-term borrowings consist of advances from the FHLB of Atlanta. The Bank classifies debt based upon original maturity and does not reclassify debt to short-term status during its life. Long-term debt and short-term borrowings include fixed-rate long-term advances, short-term advances, daily advances, fixed-rate convertible advances, and variable-rate convertible advances.

 

Rates and maturities on long-term advances and short-term borrowings were as follows:

 

    Fixed-     Fixed-Rate     Variable  
    Rate     Convertible     Convertible  
December 31, 2015                        
Highest rate     2.83 %     3.47 %     4.00 %
Lowest rate     0.26 %     3.47 %     4.00 %
Weighted average rate     1.07 %     3.47 %     4.00 %
Matures through     2036       2018       2020  
                         
December 31, 2014                        
Highest rate     3.99 %     3.47 %     4.00 %
Lowest rate     0.31 %     3.47 %     4.00 %
Weighted average rate     1.80 %     3.47 %     4.00 %
Matures through     2036       2018       2020  
                         

 

Average rates of long-term debt and short-term borrowings were as follows:

 

    At or for the Year Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
                   
Long-term debt                        
Long-term debt outstanding at end of period   $ 55,617     $ 74,672     $ 70,476  
Weighted average rate on outstanding long-term debt     2.47 %     2.35 %     2.49 %
Maximum outstanding long-term debt of any month end     74,668       75,471       70,519  
Average outstanding long-term debt     68,924       74,714       68,996  
Approximate average rate paid on long-term debt     2.26 %     2.39 %     2.53 %
                         
Short-term borrowings                        
Short-term borrowings outstanding at end of period   $ 36,000     $ 2,000     $ -  
Weighted average rate on short-term borrowings     0.38 %     0.31 %     0.00 %
Maximum outstanding short-term borrowings at any month end     36,000       15,000       24,000  
Average outstanding short-term borrowings     13,463       4,344       4,278  
Approximate average rate paid on short-term borrowings     0.27 %     0.28 %     0.33 %

 

The Bank’s fixed-rate debt generally consists of advances with monthly interest payments and principal due at maturity.

 

The Bank’s fixed-rate convertible long-term debt is callable by the issuer, after an initial period ranging from six months to five years. The instruments are callable at the end of the initial period. As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, all fixed-rate convertible debt has passed its call date. All advances have a prepayment penalty, determined based upon prevailing interest rates.

 

Variable convertible advances have an initial variable rate based on a discount to LIBOR. Variable convertible debt is scheduled to mature in 2020. As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, all variable convertible debt has passed its call date and is fixed at 4.0%.

 

  107  

 

 

During the year ended December 31, 2015, the Bank paid off $19.0 million of maturing long-term debt. There were no long-term advances added during the year ended December 31, 2015. During the year ended December 31, 2014, the Bank added $2.0 million and $5.0 million fixed-rate advances maturing in 2015 and 2016 at rates of 0.31% and 0.52%, respectively. Additionally, the Bank paid off a $750,000 maturing five year fixed-rate advance. During the year ended December 31, 2013, the Bank added $10.0 million and $5.0 million fixed-rate advances maturing in 2017 and 2015 at rates of 0.87% and 0.41%, respectively.

 

At December 31, 2015 and 2014, $55.6 million or 100% and $74.7 million or 100%, respectively, of the Bank’s long-term debt was fixed for rate and term, as the conversion optionality of the advances have either been exercised or expired. The contractual maturities of long-term debt were as follows at December 31, 2015 and 2014:

 

    December 31, 2015  
    Fixed-     Fixed-Rate     Variable        
(dollars in thousands)   Rate     Convertible     Convertible     Total  
                         
Due in 2016   $ 5,000     $ -     $ -     $ 5,000  
Due in 2017     20,000       -       -       20,000  
Due in 2018     -       10,000       -       10,000  
Due in 2019     -       -       -       -  
Due in 2020     -       -       10,000       10,000  
Thereafter     10,617       -       -       10,617  
    $ 35,617     $ 10,000     $ 10,000     $ 55,617  

 

    December 31, 2014  
    Fixed-     Fixed-Rate     Variable        
(dollars in thousands)   Rate     Convertible     Convertible     Total  
                         
Due in 2015   $ 19,000     $ -     $ -     $ 19,000  
Due in 2016     5,000       -       -       5,000  
Due in 2017     20,000       -       -       20,000  
Due in 2018     -       10,000       -       10,000  
Due in 2019     -       -       -       -  
Thereafter     10,672       -       10,000       20,672  
    $ 54,672     $ 10,000     $ 10,000     $ 74,672  

 

The Bank also has daily advances outstanding and short-term advances with terms of less than one year, which are classified as short-term borrowings. Daily advances are repayable at the Bank’s option at any time and are re-priced daily. Daily advances were $7.0 million at December 31, 2015. There were no daily advances outstanding at December 31, 2014. The Bank had short-term advances of $29.0 million and $2.0 million, respectively, at December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

Under the terms of an Agreement for Advances and Security Agreement with Blanket Floating Lien (the “Agreement”), the Bank maintains collateral with the FHLB consisting of one-to four-family residential first mortgage loans, second mortgage loans, commercial real estate and securities. The Agreement limits total advances to 30% of assets, which were $332.8 million and $312.2 million at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

At December 31, 2015, $365.4 million of loans and securities were pledged or in safekeeping at the FHLB. Loans and securities are subject to collateral eligibility rules and are adjusted for market value and collateral value factors to arrive at lendable collateral values. At December 31, 2015, FHLB lendable collateral was valued at $277.2 million. At December 31, 2015, the Bank had total lendable pledged collateral at the FHLB of $165.8 million of which $74.2 million was available to borrow in addition to outstanding advances of $91.6 million. Unpledged lendable collateral was $111.4 million, bringing total available borrowing capacity to $185.6 million at December 31, 2015.

 

  108  

 

 

At December 31, 2014, $345.0 million of loans and securities were pledged or in safekeeping at the FHLB. Loans and securities are subject to collateral eligibility rules and are adjusted for market value and collateral value factors to arrive at lendable collateral values. At December 31, 2014, FHLB lendable collateral was valued at $265.3 million. At December 31, 2014, the Bank had total lendable pledged collateral at the FHLB of $188.0 million of which $111.3 million was available to borrow in addition to outstanding advances of $76.7 million. Unpledged lendable collateral was $77.3 million, bringing total available borrowing capacity to $188.6 million at December 31, 2014.

 

Additionally, the Bank has established a short-term credit facility with the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond under its Borrower in Custody program. The Bank had segregated collateral sufficient to draw $7.2 million and $10.8 million under this agreement at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. In addition, the Bank has established short-term credit facilities with other commercial banks totaling $12.0 million at December 31, 2015 and 2014. No amounts were outstanding under the Borrower in Custody or commercial lines at December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

NOTE 12 – INCOME TAXES

 

Allocation of federal and state income taxes between current and deferred portions is as follows:

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
Current                        
Federal   $ 3,255     $ 2,005     $ 3,043  
State     1,128       699       845  
      4,383       2,704       3,888  
                         
Deferred                        
Federal     (643 )     926       (94 )
State     (107 )     146       (23 )
      (750 )     1,072       (117 )
Income Tax Expense   $ 3,633     $ 3,776     $ 3,771  

 

The reasons for the differences between the statutory federal income tax rate and the effective tax rates are summarized as follows:

 

    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
    Amount     Percent of
Pre-Tax
Income
    Amount     Percent of
Pre-Tax
Income
    Amount     Percent of
Pre-Tax
Income
 
Expected income tax expense at  federal tax rate   $ 3,392       34.00 %   $ 3,490       34.00 %   $ 3,544       34.00 %
State taxes net of federal benefit     647       6.49 %     604       5.88 %     577       5.54 %
Nondeductible expenses     40       0.40 %     39       0.38 %     35       0.34 %
Nontaxable income     (398 )     (3.99 )%     (345 )     (3.36 )%     (340 )     (3.26 )%
Other     (48 )     (0.48 )%     (12 )     (0.12 )%     (45 )     (0.43 )%
                                                 
    $ 3,633       36.42 %   $ 3,776       36.78 %   $ 3,771       36.18 %

 

  109  

 

 

The net deferred tax assets in the accompanying balance sheets include the following components:

 

    December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014  
Deferred tax assets                
Deferred fees   $ 168     $ -  
Allowance for loan losses     3,369       3,346  
Deferred compensation     2,332       2,181  
OREO valuation allowance & expenses     507       308  
Unrealized loss on investment securities     163       246  
Other     442       228  
      6,981       6,309  
Deferred tax liabilities                
FHLB stock dividends     156       156  
Depreciation     56       51  
      212       207  
                 
Net Deferred Tax Assets   $ 6,769     $ 6,102  

 

Retained earnings at December 31, 2015 and 2014 included approximately $1.2 million of bad debt deductions allowed for federal income tax purposes (the “base year tax reserve”) for which no deferred income tax has been recognized. If, in the future, this portion of retained earnings is used for any purpose other than to absorb bad debt losses, it would create income for tax purposes only and income taxes would be imposed at the then prevailing rates. The unrecorded income tax liability on the above amount was approximately $463,000 at December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

The Company does not have uncertain tax positions that are deemed material and did not recognize any adjustments for unrecognized tax benefits. The Company’s policy is to recognize interest and penalties on income taxes as a component of tax expense. The Company is no longer subject to U.S. Federal tax examinations by tax authorities for years before 2012.

 

NOTE 13 – COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

 

The Bank is party to financial instruments with off-balance-sheet risk in the normal course of business to meet the financing needs of its customers. These financial instruments are commitments to extend credit. These instruments may, but do not necessarily, involve, to varying degrees, elements of credit and interest rate risk in excess of the amount recognized on the balance sheets. The Bank’s exposure to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by the other party to the financial instrument is represented by the contractual amount of those instruments. The Bank uses the same credit policies in making commitments as it does for on-balance-sheet loans receivable.

 

As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Bank had outstanding loan commitments of approximately $73.5 million and $36.3 million, respectively.

 

Standby letters of credit are conditional commitments issued by the Bank to guarantee the performance of a customer to a third party. These guarantees are issued primarily to support construction borrowing arrangements. The credit risk involved in issuing letters of credit is essentially the same as that involved in extending loan facilities to customers. The Bank holds cash or a secured interest in real estate as collateral to support those commitments for which collateral is deemed necessary. Standby letters of credit outstanding amounted to $21.4 million and $16.9 million at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. In addition to the commitments noted above, customers had approximately $128.8 million and $114.7 million available under lines of credit at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

  110  

 

 

NOTE 14 – STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION

 

The Company has stock-based incentive arrangements to attract and retain key personnel. In May 2015, the 2015 Equity Compensation Plan (the “2015 plan”) was approved by shareholders, which authorizes the issuance of restricted stock, stock appreciation rights, stock units and stock options to the Board of Directors and key employees. Compensation expense for service-based awards is recognized over the vesting period. Performance-based awards are recognized based on a vesting schedule and the probability of achieving goals specified at the time of the grant. The 2015 plan replaced the 2005 Equity Compensation Plan.

 

Stock-based compensation expense totaled $319,000, $191,000 and $216,000 for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively, which consisted of grants of restricted stock and restricted stock units. Stock-based compensation for the years ended December 31, 2013 included director compensation of $3,000 for stock granted in lieu of cash compensation.

 

All outstanding options were fully vested at December 31, 2015 and 2014. The Company has not granted any stock options since 2007. The fair value of the Company’s outstanding employee stock options is estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option pricing model. The Company estimates expected market price volatility and expected term of the options based on historical data and other factors.

 

The exercise price for options granted is set at the discretion of the committee administering the Plan, but is not less than the market value of the shares as of the date of grant. An option’s maximum term is 10 years and the options vest at the discretion of the committee.  

 

The following tables below summarize outstanding and exercisable options at December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

          Weighted       Weighted-
Average
 
          Average     Aggregate     Contractual Life  
          Exercise     Intrinsic     Remaining In  
(dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)   Shares     Price     Value     Years  
                         
Outstanding at January 1, 2015     87,436     $ 23.60     $ -          
Expired     (66,225 )     22.29                  
                                 
Outstanding at December 31, 2015     21,211     $ 27.70     $ -       1.0  
                                 
Exercisable at December 31, 2015     21,211     $ 27.70     $ -       1.0  

 

          Weighted           Weighted-
Average
 
          Average     Aggregate     Contractual Life  
          Exercise     Intrinsic     Remaining In  
(dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)   Shares     Price     Value     Years  
                         
Outstanding at January 1, 2014     159,517     $ 20.12     $ 347          
Exercised     (45,163 )     15.89       207          
Forfeited     (26,918 )     15.89                  
Outstanding at December 31, 2014     87,436     $ 23.60     $ -       1.4  
                                 
Exercisable at December 31, 2014     87,436     $ 23.60     $ -       1.4  

 

Options outstanding are all currently exercisable and are summarized as follows: 

 

Shares Outstanding     Weighted Average   Weighted Average  
December 31, 2015     Remaining Contractual Life   Exercise Price  
  21,211     1 year   $ 27.70  

 

  111  

 

 

The aggregate intrinsic value of outstanding stock options and exercisable stock options was $0 at December 31, 2015 and 2014 because all options outstanding were anti-dilutive. Aggregate intrinsic value represents the difference between the Company’s closing stock price on the last trading day of the period, which was $20.96 and $20.07 per share at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively, and the exercise price multiplied by the number of options outstanding.

 

The Company has outstanding restricted stock and stock units granted in accordance with the Plan. The following tables summarize the unvested restricted stock awards and units outstanding at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

    Restricted Stock  
    Number of
Shares
    Weighted
Average Grant
Date Fair Value
 
             
Nonvested at January 1, 2015     29,472     $ 20.83  
Granted     28,040       18.63  
Vested     (20,464 )     19.62  
                 
Nonvested at December 31, 2015     37,048     $ 19.83  

 

    Restricted Stock     Restricted Stock Units  
    Number of
Shares
    Weighted
Average Grant
Date Fair Value
    Number of
Units
    Fair Value  
                         
Nonvested at January 1, 2014     16,832     $ 17.86       4,210     $ 20.71  
Granted     33,460       21.35       -       -  
Vested     (20,820 )     19.26       (4,210 )     20.28  
                                 
Nonvested at December 31, 2014     29,472     $ 20.83       -     $ -  

 

NOTE 15 – EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS

 

The Company has an Employee Stock Ownership Plan (“ESOP”) that covers substantially all its employees. Employees qualify to participate after one year of service and vest in allocated shares after three years of service. The ESOP acquires stock of The Community Financial Corporation by purchasing shares. Dividends on ESOP shares are recorded as a reduction of retained earnings. Contributions are made at the discretion of the Board of Directors. ESOP contributions recognized for the years ended 2015, 2014 and 2013 totaled $129,000, $141,000 and $262,000, respectively. As of December 31, 2015 and 2014, the ESOP held 214,819 and 205,612 allocated shares and 19,044 and 29,362 unallocated shares. The approximate market values of the shares were $4.9 million and $4.7 million, respectively as of December 31, 2015 and 2014. The estimated value was determined using the Company’s closing stock price of $20.96 and $20.07 per share as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

The ESOP has promissory notes with the Company of $316,000 and $489,000 at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. The promissory notes were originated for the purchase of TCFC common stock for the benefit of the participants in the Plan. Loan terms are at prime rate plus one-percentage point and amortize over seven (7) years. As principal is repaid, common shares are allocated to participants based on the participant account allocation rules described in the Plan. The Bank is a guarantor of the ESOP debt with the Company.

 

The Company also has a 401(k) plan. The Company matches a portion of the employee contributions. This ratio is determined annually by the Board of Directors. In 2015, 2014 and 2013, the Company matched one-half of the first 8% of the employee’s contribution. Employees who have completed six months of service are covered under this defined contribution plan. Employee’s vest in the Company’s matching contributions after three years of service. Contributions are determined at the discretion of the Board of Directors. For the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, the expense recorded for this plan totaled $332,000, $324,000 and $336,000, respectively.

 

  112  

 

 

The Company has a separate nonqualified retirement plan for non-employee directors. Directors are eligible for a maximum benefit of $3,500 a year for ten years following retirement from the Board of Community Bank of the Chesapeake. The maximum benefit is earned at 15 years of service as a non-employee director. Full vesting occurs after two years of service. Expense recorded for this plan was $22,000, $21,000 and $20,000 for the years ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

In addition, the Company has established individual supplemental retirement plans and life insurance benefits for certain key executives and officers of the Bank. These plans and benefits provide a retirement income payment for 15 years from the date of the employee’s expected retirement date. The payments are set at the discretion of the Board of Directors and vesting occurs ratably from the date of employment to the expected retirement date. Expense recorded for this plan totaled $519,000, $441,000 and $395,000 for 2015, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

 

  113  

 

 

NOTE 16 – GUARANTEED PREFERRED BENEFICIAL INTEREST IN JUNIOR SUBORDINATED DEBENTURES (“TRUPs”)

 

On June 15, 2005, Tri-County Capital Trust II (“Capital Trust II”), a Delaware business trust formed, funded and wholly owned by the Company, issued $5.0 million of variable-rate capital securities in a private pooled transaction. The variable rate is based on the 90-day LIBOR rate plus 1.70%. The Trust used the proceeds from this issuance, along with the $155,000 for Capital Trust II’s common securities, to purchase $5.2 million of the Company’s junior subordinated debentures. The interest rate on the debentures and the trust preferred securities is variable and adjusts quarterly. These capital securities qualify as Tier I capital and are presented in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as “Guaranteed Preferred Beneficial Interests in Junior Subordinated Debentures.” Both the capital securities of Capital Trust II and the junior subordinated debentures are scheduled to mature on June 15, 2035, unless called by the Company.

 

On July 22, 2004, Tri-County Capital Trust I (“Capital Trust I”), a Delaware business trust formed, funded and wholly owned by the Company, issued $7.0 million of variable-rate capital securities in a private pooled transaction. The variable rate is based on the 90-day LIBOR rate plus 2.60%. The Trust used the proceeds from this issuance, along with the Company’s $217,000 capital contribution for Capital Trust I’s common securities, to purchase $7.2 million of the Company’s junior subordinated debentures. The interest rate on the debentures and the trust preferred securities is variable and adjusts quarterly. These debentures qualify as Tier I capital and are presented in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as “Guaranteed Preferred Beneficial Interests in Junior Subordinated Debentures.” Both the capital securities of Capital Trust I and the junior subordinated debentures are scheduled to mature on July 22, 2034, unless called by the Company.

 

NOTE 17 – SUBORDINATED NOTES

 

On February 6, 2015 the Company issued $23.0 million of unsecured 6.25% fixed to floating rate subordinated notes due February 15, 2025 (“subordinated notes”). On February 13, 2015, the Company used proceeds of the offering to redeem all $20 million of the Company’s outstanding preferred stock issued under the Small Business Lending Fund (“SBLF”) program. The subordinated notes qualify as Tier 2 regulatory capital and replaced SBLF Tier 1 capital. The subordinated notes are not listed on any securities exchange or included in any automated dealer quotation system and there is no market for the notes. The notes are unsecured obligations and are subordinated in right of payment to all existing and future senior debt, whether secured or unsecured. The notes are not guaranteed obligations of any of the Company’s subsidiaries.

 

Interest will accrue at a fixed per annum rate of 6.25% from and including the issue date to but excluding February 15, 2020. From and including February 15, 2020 to but excluding the maturity date interest will accrue at a floating rate equal to the three-month LIBOR plus 479 basis points. Interest is payable on the notes on February 15 and August 15 of each year, commencing August 15, 2015, through February 15, 2020, and thereafter February 15, May 15, August 15 and November 15 of each year through the maturity date or earlier redemption date.

 

The subordinated notes may be redeemed in whole or in part on February 15, 2020 or on any scheduled interest payment date thereafter and upon the occurrence of certain special events. The redemption price is equal to 100% of the principal amount of the subordinated notes to be redeemed plus accrued and unpaid interest to the date of redemption. Any partial redemption will be made pro rata among all holders of the subordinated notes. The subordinated notes are not subject to repayment at the option of the holders. The subordinated notes may be redeemed at any time, if (1) a change or prospective change in law occurs that could prevent the Company from deducting interest payable on the notes for U.S. federal income tax purposes, (2) a subsequent event occurs that precludes the notes from being recognized as Tier 2 Capital for regulatory capital purposes, or (3) the Company is required to register as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.

 

  114  

 

 

NOTE 18 – REGULATORY CAPITAL

 

On January 1, 2015, the Company and Bank became subject to the new Basel III Capital Rules with full compliance with all of the final rule's requirements phased in over a multi-year schedule, to be fully phased-in by January 1, 2019. In July 2013, the Company’s primary federal regulator, the Federal Reserve, published final rules (the “Basel III Capital Rules”) establishing a new comprehensive capital framework for U.S. banking organizations. The rules implement the Basel Committee’s December 2010 framework known as “Basel III” for strengthening international capital standards as well as certain provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act. The Basel III Capital Rules substantially revise the risk-based capital requirements applicable to bank holding companies and depository institutions compared to the previous U.S. risk-based capital rules. The Basel III Capital Rules define the components of capital and address other issues affecting the numerator in banking institutions’ regulatory capital ratios. The Basel III Capital Rules also address risk weights and other issues affecting the denominator in banking institutions’ regulatory capital ratios and replace the existing risk-weighting approach with a more risk-sensitive approach. The Basel III Capital Rules also implement the requirements of Section 939A of the Dodd-Frank Act to remove references to credit ratings from the federal banking agencies’ rules.

 

The rules include a new common equity Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets minimum ratio of 4.5%, raise the minimum ratio of Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets from 4.0% to 6.0%, require a minimum ratio (“Min. Ratio”) of Total Capital to risk-weighted assets of 8.0%, and require a minimum Tier 1 leverage ratio of 4.0%. A new capital conservation buffer (“CCB”) is also established above the regulatory minimum capital requirements. This capital conservation buffer will be phased-in beginning January 1, 2016 at 0.625% of risk-weighted assets and increase each subsequent year by an additional 0.625% until reaching its final level of 2.5% on January 1, 2019. Strict eligibility criteria for regulatory capital instruments were also implemented under the final rules. The final rules also revise the definition and calculation of Tier 1 capital, Total Capital, and risk-weighted assets.

 

As of December 31, 2015, the Company and Bank were well-capitalized under the regulatory framework for prompt corrective action under the new Basel III Capital Rules. Management believes, as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, that the Company and the Bank met all capital adequacy requirements to which they were subject. The Company’s and the Bank’s actual regulatory capital amounts and ratios are presented in the following table.

 

Regulatory Capital and Ratios         The Company     The Bank  
(dollars in thousands)         December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014     December 31, 2015     December 31, 2014  
                               
Common Equity         $ 99,783     $ 96,559     $ 132,571     $ 126,838  
Preferred Stock -SBLF           -       20,000       -       -  
Total Stockholders' Equity           99,783       116,559       132,571       126,838  
AOCI Losses (Gains)           251       378       251       378  
Common Equity Tier 1 Capital           100,034       116,937       132,822       127,216  
TRUPs           12,000       12,000       -       -  
Tier 1 Capital           112,034       128,937       132,822       127,216  
Allowable Reserve for Credit Losses and Other Tier 2 Adjustments           8,540       8,537       8,540       8,537  
Subordinated Notes           23,000       -       -       -  
Tier 2 Capital         $ 143,574     $ 137,474     $ 141,362     $ 135,753  
                                       
Risk-Weighted Assets ("RWA")         $ 984,614     $ 903,931     $ 982,347     $ 902,136  
                                       
Average Assets ("AA")         $ 1,118,843     $ 1,053,424     $ 1,116,576     $ 1,051,627  
    2019 Regulatory
 Min. Ratio + CCB (1)
                         
Common Tier 1 Capital to RWA (2)     7.00 %   10.16 %   n/a %     13.52 %     n/a %
Tier 1 Capital to RWA     8.50     11.38       14.26       13.52       14.10  
Tier 2 Capital to RWA     10.50     14.58     15.21       14.39       15.05  
Tier 1 Capital to AA (Leverage)     n/a     10.01     12.24       11.90       12.10  

 

(1) These are the fully phased-in ratios as of January 1, 2019 that include the minimum capital ratio ("Min. Ratio") + the capital conservation buffer ("CCB"). The phase-in period is more fully described in the footnote above.

 

(2) The Common Tier 1 ratio became effective for regulatory reporting purposes when the Company and the Bank became subject to the new Basel III Capital Rules during the three months ended March 31, 2015.

 

  115  

 

 

NOTE 19 – FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS

 

The Company adopted FASB ASC Topic 820, “Fair Value Measurements” and FASB ASC Topic 825, “The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities” , which provides a framework for measuring and disclosing fair value under generally accepted accounting principles. FASB ASC Topic 820 requires disclosures about the fair value of assets and liabilities recognized in the balance sheet in periods subsequent to initial recognition, whether the measurements are made on a recurring basis (for example, available for sale investment securities) or on a nonrecurring basis (for example, impaired loans).

 

FASB ASC Topic 820 defines fair value as the exchange price that would be received for an asset or paid to transfer a liability (an exit price) in the principal or most advantageous market for the asset or liability in an orderly transaction between market participants on the measurement date. FASB ASC Topic 820 also establishes a fair value hierarchy, which requires an entity to maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs when measuring fair value.

 

The Company utilizes fair value measurements to record fair value adjustments to certain assets and to determine fair value disclosures. Securities available for sale are recorded at fair value on a recurring basis. Additionally, from time to time, the Company may be required to record at fair value other assets on a nonrecurring basis such as loans held for investment and certain other assets. These nonrecurring fair value adjustments typically involve application of lower of cost or market accounting or write-downs of individual assets.

 

Under FASB ASC Topic 820, the Company groups assets and liabilities at fair value in three levels, based on the markets in which the assets and liabilities are traded and the reliability of the assumptions used to determine the fair value. These hierarchy levels are:

 

Level 1 inputs - Unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities that the entity has the ability to access at the measurement date.

 

Level 2 inputs - Inputs other than quoted prices included in Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly or indirectly. These might include quoted prices for similar assets and liabilities in active markets, and inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the asset or liability, such as interest rates and yield curves that are observable at commonly quoted intervals.

 

Level 3 inputs - Unobservable inputs for determining the fair values of assets or liabilities that reflect an entity’s own assumptions about the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the assets or liabilities.

 

Transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy are recognized on the actual date of the event or circumstances that caused the transfer, which generally coincides with the Company’s monthly or quarterly valuation process.

  

There were no transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy and the Company had no Level 3 fair value assets or liabilities for the years ended December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively.

 

Following is a description of valuation methodologies used for assets and liabilities recorded at fair value:

 

Securities Available for Sale

Investment securities available for sale are recorded at fair value on a recurring basis. Fair value measurement is based upon quoted prices, if available. If quoted prices are not available, fair values are measured using independent pricing models or other model-based valuation techniques such as the present value of future cash flows, adjusted for the security’s credit rating, prepayment assumptions and other factors such as credit loss assumptions. Level 1 securities include those traded on an active exchange, such as the New York Stock Exchange, Treasury securities that are traded by dealers or brokers in active over-the-counter markets and money market funds. Level 2 securities include mortgage-backed securities issued by government sponsored entities (“GSEs”), municipal bonds and corporate debt securities. Securities classified as Level 3 include asset-backed securities in less liquid markets.

 

  116  

 

 

Loans Receivable

The Company does not record loans at fair value on a recurring basis, however, from time to time, a loan is considered impaired and an allowance for loan loss is established. Loans for which it is probable that payment of interest and principal will not be made in accordance with the contractual terms of the loan are considered impaired. Management estimates the fair value of impaired loans using one of several methods, including the collateral value, market value of similar debt, enterprise value, liquidation value and discounted cash flows. Impaired loans not requiring a specific allowance represent loans for which the fair value of expected repayments or collateral exceed the recorded investment in such loans. At December 31, 2015 and 2014, substantially all of the impaired loans were evaluated based upon the fair value of the collateral. In accordance with FASB ASC 820, impaired loans where an allowance is established based on the fair value of collateral (loans with impairment) require classification in the fair value hierarchy. When the fair value of the collateral is based on an observable market price or a current appraised value, the Company records the loan as nonrecurring Level 2. When an appraised value is not available or management determines the fair value of the collateral is further impaired below the appraised value and there is no observable market price, the Company records the loan as nonrecurring Level 3.

 

Premises and Equipment Held For Sale

Premises and equipment are adjusted to fair value upon transfer of the assets to held for sale. Subsequently, premises and equipment held for sale are carried at the lower of carrying value or fair value. Fair value is based upon independent market prices, appraised value of the collateral or management’s estimation of the value of the collateral. When the fair value of the collateral is based on an observable market price (e.g., contracted sales price) or a current appraised value, the Company records the assets as nonrecurring Level 2. When an appraised value is not available or management determines the fair value of the collateral is further impaired below the appraised value and there is no observable market price, the Company records the asset at nonrecurring Level 3.

 

Other Real Estate Owned (“OREO”)

OREO is adjusted for fair value upon transfer of the loans to foreclosed assets. Subsequently, OREO is carried at the lower of carrying value and fair value. Fair value is based upon independent market prices, appraised value of the collateral or management’s estimation of the value of the collateral. When the fair value of the collateral is based on an observable market price or a current appraised value, the Company records the foreclosed asset as nonrecurring Level 2. When an appraised value is not available or management determines the fair value of the collateral is further impaired below the appraised value and there is no observable market price, the Company records the foreclosed asset at nonrecurring Level 3.

 

Assets and Liabilities Recorded at Fair Value on a Recurring Basis

The tables below present the recorded amount of assets as of December 31, 2015 and December 31, 2014 measured at fair value on a recurring basis.

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2015  
Description of Asset   Fair Value     Level 1     Level 2     Level 3  
Available for sale securities                                
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs                                
CMOs   $ 30,664     $ -     $ 30,664     $ -  
MBS     26       -       26       -  
Corporate equity securities     39       -       39       -  
Bond mutual funds     4,387       -       4,387       -  
Total available for sale securities   $ 35,116     $ -     $ 35,116     $ -  

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2014  
Description of Asset   Fair Value     Level 1     Level 2     Level 3  
Available for sale securities                                
Asset-backed securities issued by GSEs                                
CMOs   $ 37,541     $ -     $ 37,541     $ -  
MBS     37       -       37       -  
Corporate equity securities     40       -       40       -  
Bond mutual funds     4,321       -       4,321       -  
Total available for sale securities   $ 41,939     $ -     $ 41,939     $ -  

 

  117  

 

 

Assets and Liabilities Measured at Fair Value on a Nonrecurring Basis

The Company may be required from time to time to measure certain assets at fair value on a nonrecurring basis in accordance with U.S. GAAP. These include assets that are measured at the lower of cost or market that were recognized at fair value below cost at the end of the period. Assets measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis as of December 31, 2015 and 2014 are included in the tables below.

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2015  
Description of Asset   Fair Value     Level 1     Level 2     Level 3  
Loans with impairment                                
Commercial real estate   $ 1,765     $ -     $ 1,765     $ -  
Residential first mortgages     610       -       610       -  
Construction and land development     33       -       33       -  
Commercial loans     50       -       50       -  
Total loans with impairment   $ 2,458     $ -     $ 2,458     $ -  
                                 
Premises and equipment held for sale   $ 2,000     $ -     $ 2,000     $ -  
                                 
Other real estate owned   $ 9,449     $ -     $ 9,449     $ -  

 

(dollars in thousands)   December 31, 2014  
Description of Asset   Fair Value     Level 1     Level 2     Level 3  
Loans with impairment                                
Commercial real estate   $ 2,524     $ -     $ 2,524     $ -  
Residential first mortgage     805       -       805       -  
Commercial loans     251       -       251       -  
Commercial equipment     90       -       90       -  
Total loans with impairment   $ 3,670     $ -     $ 3,670     $ -  
                                 
Other real estate owned   $ 5,883     $ -     $ 5,883     $ -  

 

Loans with impairment have unpaid principal balances of $4.0 million and $4.1 million at December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively, and include impaired loans with a specific allowance.

 

NOTE 20 – FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

 

The estimated fair value amounts have been determined by the Company using available market information and appropriate valuation methodologies. However, considerable judgment is required to interpret market data to develop the estimates of fair value. Accordingly, the estimates presented herein are not necessarily indicative of the amounts the Company could realize in a current market exchange. The use of different market assumptions and/or estimation methodologies may have a material effect on the estimated fair value amounts. Therefore, any aggregate unrealized gains or losses should not be interpreted as a forecast of future earnings or cash flows. Furthermore, the fair values disclosed should not be interpreted as the aggregate current value of the Company.

 

Valuation Methodology

Investment securities - Fair values are based on quoted market prices or dealer quotes. If a quoted market price is not available, fair value is estimated using quoted market prices for similar securities.

 

FHLB and FRB stock – Fair values are at cost, which is the carrying value of the securities.

 

Investment in bank owned life insurance (“BOLI”) – Fair values are at cash surrender value.

 

  118  

 

 

Loans receivable - For conforming residential first-mortgage loans, the market price for loans with similar coupons and maturities was used. For nonconforming loans with maturities similar to conforming loans, the coupon was adjusted for credit risk. Loans that did not have quoted market prices were priced using the discounted cash flow method. The discount rate used was the rate currently offered on similar products. Loans priced using the discounted cash flow method included residential construction loans, commercial real estate loans and consumer loans.

 

Loans held for sale – Fair values are derived from secondary market quotations for similar instruments. There were no loans held for sale at December 31, 2015 and 2014.

 

Deposits - The fair value of checking accounts, saving accounts and money market accounts were the amount payable on demand at the reporting date.

 

Time certificates - The fair value was determined using the discounted cash flow method. The discount rate was equal to the rate currently offered on similar products.

 

Long-term debt and short-term borrowings - These were valued using the discounted cash flow method. The discount rate was equal to the rate currently offered on similar borrowings.

 

Guaranteed preferred beneficial interest in junior subordinated securities (TRUPs) - These were valued using discounted cash flows. The discount rate was equal to the rate currently offered on similar borrowings.

 

Subordinated notes - These were valued using discounted cash flows. The discount rate was equal to the rate currently offered on similar borrowings.

 

Off-balance sheet instruments - The Company charges fees for commitments to extend credit. Interest rates on loans for which these commitments are extended are normally committed for periods of less than one month. Fees charged on standby letters of credit and other financial guarantees are deemed to be immaterial and these guarantees are expected to be settled at face amount or expire unused. It is impractical to assign any fair value to these commitments.

 

The Company’s estimated fair values of financial instruments are presented in the following tables.

 

December 31, 2015               Fair Value Measurements  
Description of Asset (dollars in thousands)   Carrying
Amount
    Fair Value     Level 1     Level 2     Level 3  
Assets                                        
Investment securities - AFS   $ 35,116     $ 35,116     $ -     $ 35,116     $ -  
Investment securities - HTM     109,420       109,309       750       108,559       -  
FHLB and FRB Stock     6,931       6,931       -       6,931       -  
Loans Receivable     909,200       913,506       -       913,506       -  
Investment in BOLI     27,836       27,836       -       27,836       -  
Liabilities                                        
Savings, NOW and money market accounts   $ 531,348     $ 531,348     $ -     $ 531,348     $ -  
Time deposits     375,551       375,376       -       375,376       -  
Long-term debt     55,617       56,987       -       56,987       -  
Short term borrowings     36,000       36,000       -       36,000       -  
TRUPs     12,000       8,400       -       8,400       -  
Subordinated notes     23,000       23,000       -       23,000       -  

 

  119  

 

 

December 31, 2014               Fair Value Measurements  
Description of Asset (dollars in thousands)   Carrying
Amount
    Fair Value     Level 1     Level 2     Level 3  
Assets                                        
Investment securities - AFS   $ 41,939     $ 41,939     $ -     $ 41,939     $ -  
Investment securities - HTM     84,506       84,915       850       84,065       -  
FHLB and FRB Stock     6,434       6,434       -       6,434       -  
Loans Receivable     862,409       861,427       -       861,427       -  
Investment in BOLI     27,021       27,021       -       27,021       -  
Liabilities                                        
Savings, NOW and money market accounts   $ 483,973     $ 483,973     $ -     $ 483,973     $ -  
Time deposits     385,411       386,510       -       386,510       -  
Long-term debt     74,672       77,919       -       77,919       -  
Short term borrowings     2,000       2,000       -       2,000       -  
TRUPs     12,000       7,400       -       7,400       -  

 

At December 31, 2015 and 2014, the Company had outstanding loan commitments and standby letters of credit of $73.5 million and $36.3 million, respectively, and $21.4 million and $16.9 million, respectively. Based on the short-term lives of these instruments, the Company does not believe that the fair value of these instruments differs significantly from their carrying values.

 

The fair value estimates presented herein are based on pertinent information available to management as of December 31, 2015 and 2014, respectively. Although management is not aware of any factors that would significantly affect the estimated fair value amounts, such amounts have not been comprehensively revalued for purposes of these financial statements since that date and, therefore, current estimates of fair value may differ significantly from the amount presented herein.

 

  120  

 

 

NOTE 21 – CONDENSED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS – PARENT COMPANY ONLY

 

Balance Sheets
    December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014  
Assets                
Cash - noninterest bearing   $ 1,541     $ 1,064  
Investment in wholly owned subsidiaries     132,943       127,210  
Other assets     1,895       1,423  
Total Assets   $ 136,379     $ 129,697  
                 
Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity                
Current liabilities   $ 1,224     $ 766  
Guaranteed preferred beneficial interest in junior subordinated debentures     12,372       12,372  
Subordinated notes - 6.25%     23,000       -  
Total Liabilities     36,596       13,138  
                 
Stockholders' Equity                
Preferred Stock - Series C     -       20,000  
Common stock     46       47  
Additional paid in capital     46,809       46,416  
Retained earnings     53,495       50,936  
Accumulated other comprehensive loss     (251 )     (378 )
Unearned ESOP shares     (316 )     (462 )
Total Stockholders’ Equity     99,783       116,559  
                 
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity   $ 136,379     $ 129,697  

 

Condensed Statements of Income
                   
    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
Interest and Dividend Income                        
Dividends from subsidiary   $ 2,775     $ 3,500     $ -  
Interest income     51       6       46  
Interest expense     1,599       312       305  
Net Interest Income (Expense)     1,227       3,194       (259 )
Miscellaneous expenses     (1,421 )     (1,427 )     (825 )
Income (Loss) before income taxes and equity in                        
undistributed net income of subsidiary     (194 )     1,767       (1,084 )
Federal and state income tax benefit     1,009       589       368  
Equity in undistributed net income of subsidiary     5,528       4,134       7,367  
Net Income   $ 6,343     $ 6,490     $ 6,651  
  Preferred stock dividends     23       200       200  
Net Income Available to Common Shareholders   $ 6,320     $ 6,290     $ 6,451  

 

  121  

 

 

Condensed Statements of Cash Flows
    Years Ended December 31,  
(dollars in thousands)   2015     2014     2013  
Cash Flows from Operating Activities                        
   Net income   $ 6,343     $ 6,490     $ 6,651  
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities                        
Equity in undistributed earnings of subsidiary     (5,528 )     (4,134 )     (7,367 )
Stock based compensation     139       191       216  
(Increase) Decrease in other assets     (284 )     (259 )     1,730  
Decrease (Increase) deferred income tax benefit     23       162       (26 )
(Decrease) Increase in current liabilities     459       (145 )     67  
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities     1,152       2,305       1,271  
                         
Cash Flows from Financing Activities                        
Dividends paid     (1,916 )     (2,055 )     (1,579 )
   Proceeds from public offering     -       -       27,387  
Downstream of capital to subsidiary     (78 )     (15 )     (27,474 )
   Proceeds from Subordinated Notes     23,000       -       -  
   Redemption of Small Business Lending Fund Preferred Stock     (20,000 )     -       -  
Exercise of stock options     -       226       317  
Net change in ESOP loan     146       201       355  
Repurchase of common stock     (1,827 )     -       (536 )
Net Cash Used in Financing Activities     (675 )     (1,643 )     (1,530 )
Increase (Decrease) in Cash     477       662       (259 )
Cash at Beginning of Year     1,064       402       661  
Cash at End of Year   $ 1,541     $ 1,064     $ 402  

 

  122  

 

 

NOTE 22 – QUARTERLY FINANCIAL COMPARISON (Unaudited)

 

    2015  
    Fourth     Third     Second     First  
(dollars in thousands)   Quarter     Quarter     Quarter     Quarter  
                         
Interest and dividend income   $ 11,208     $ 11,002     $ 10,935     $ 10,728  
Interest expense     1,860       1,918       1,902       1,665  
Net interest income     9,348       9,084       9,033       9,063  
Provision for loan losses     362       501       392       178  
Net interest income after provision     8,986       8,583       8,641       8,885  
                                 
Noninterest income     909       466       962       962  
Noninterest expense     7,556       7,031       6,888       6,943  
                                 
Income before income taxes     2,339       2,018       2,715       2,904  
Provision for income taxes     811       735       1,004       1,083  
Net Income (NI)   $ 1,528     $ 1,283     $ 1,711     $ 1,821  
Preferred stock dividends     -       -       -       23  
NI Available to Common Stockholders   $ 1,528     $ 1,283     $ 1,711     $ 1,798  
                                 
Earnings Per Common Share 1                                
Basic   $ 0.33     $ 0.28     $ 0.37     $ 0.38  
Diluted   $ 0.33     $ 0.27     $ 0.37     $ 0.38  

 

    2014  
    Fourth     Third     Second     First  
(dollars in thousands)   Quarter     Quarter     Quarter     Quarter  
                         
Interest and dividend income   $ 10,663     $ 10,667     $ 10,254     $ 10,175  
Interest expense     1,610       1,663       1,684       1,741  
Net interest income     9,053       9,004       8,570       8,434  
Provision for loan losses     1,502       385       563       203  
Net interest income after provision     7,551       8,619       8,007       8,231  
                                 
Noninterest income     1,225       1,118       855       895  
Noninterest expense     6,652       6,485       6,767       6,331  
                                 
Income before income taxes     2,124       3,252       2,095       2,795  
Provision for income taxes     579       1,363       760       1,074  
Net Income (NI)   $ 1,545     $ 1,889     $ 1,335     $ 1,721  
Preferred stock dividends     50       50       50       50  
NI Available to Common Stockholders   $ 1,495     $ 1,839     $ 1,285     $ 1,671  
                                 
Earnings Per Common Share 1                                
Basic   $ 0.32     $ 0.40     $ 0.28     $ 0.36  
Diluted   $ 0.32     $ 0.39     $ 0.28     $ 0.36  

 

  123  

 

 

    2013  
    Fourth     Third     Second     First  
(dollars in thousands)   Quarter     Quarter     Quarter     Quarter  
                         
Interest and dividend income   $ 10,112     $ 9,975     $ 9,750     $ 9,841  
Interest expense     1,732       1,873       2,018       2,023  
Net interest income     8,380       8,102       7,732       7,818  
Provision for loan losses     300       286       200       154  
Net interest income after provision     8,080       7,816       7,532       7,664  
                                 
Noninterest income     797       1,119       1,069       1,189  
Noninterest expense     6,348       6,245       6,107       6,144  
                                 
Income before income taxes     2,529       2,690       2,494       2,709  
Provision for income taxes     885       987       909       990  
Net Income (NI)   $ 1,644     $ 1,703     $ 1,585     $ 1,719  
Preferred stock dividends     50       50       50       50  
NI Available to Common Stockholders   $ 1,594     $ 1,653     $ 1,535     $ 1,669  
                                 
Earnings Per Common Share 1                                
Basic   $ 0.35     $ 0.55     $ 0.51     $ 0.55  
Diluted   $ 0.35     $ 0.55     $ 0.51     $ 0.54  

 

(1) Earnings per share are based upon quarterly results and, when added, may not total the annual earnings per share amounts. In October 2013, the Company issued 1,591,300 shares of common stock at a price of $18.75 per share resulting in net proceeds of $27.4 million after commissions and related offering expenses. The additional shares outstanding impacted year to year comparability of per share earnings beginning with fourth quarter 2013 results.

 

  124  

 

 

Item 9.  Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure

 

None.

 

Item 9A.  Controls and Procedures

 

(a) Disclosure Controls and Procedures

 

The Company’s management, including the Company’s principal executive officer and principal financial officer, have evaluated the effectiveness of the Company’s “disclosure controls and procedures,” as such term is defined in Rule 13a-15(e) promulgated under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, (the “Exchange Act”). Based upon their evaluation, the principal executive officer and principal financial officer concluded that, as of the end of the period covered by this report, the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective for the purpose of ensuring that the information required to be disclosed in the reports that the Company files or submits under the Exchange Act with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) (1) is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms, and (2) is accumulated and communicated to the Company’s management, including its principal executive and principal financial officers, as appropriate to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.

 

(b) Internal Controls Over Financial Reporting

 

Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting is provided at Item 8 in this 10K.

 

(c) Changes to Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

 

Except as indicated herein, there were no changes in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting during the three months ended December 31, 2015 that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

Item 9B. Other Information

 

Not applicable.

 

PART III

 

Item 10.  Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance

 

For information concerning the Company’s directors, the information contained under the section captioned “Items to be voted on by Stockholders- Item  1 – Election of Directors” in the Company’s definitive proxy statement for the Company’s 2016 Annual Meeting of Stockholders (the “Proxy Statement”) is incorporated herein by reference. For information concerning the executive officers of the Company, see “Item 1 – Business – Executive Officers of the Registrant” under Part I of this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

 

For information regarding compliance with Section 16(a) of the Exchange Act, the cover page of this Annual Report on Form 10-K and the information contained under the section captioned “Other Information Relating to Directors and Executive Officers Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance” in the Proxy Statement are incorporated herein by reference.

 

For information concerning the Company’s code of ethics, the information contained under the section captioned “Corporate Governance – Code of Ethics” in the Proxy Statement is incorporated by reference. A copy of the code of ethics and business conduct is filed as Exhibit 14 hereto.

 

  125  

 

 

For information regarding the audit committee and its composition and the audit committee financial expert, the section captioned “Corporate Governance – Committees of the Board of Directors – Audit Committee” in the Proxy Statement is incorporated by reference.

 

Item 11.  Executive Compensation

 

For information regarding executive compensation, the information contained under the sections captioned “Executive Compensation” and “Directors’ Compensation” in the Proxy Statement is incorporated herein by reference.

 

Item 12.  Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters

 

(a) Security Ownership of Certain Owners

The information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to the section captioned “Principal Holders of Voting Securities” in the Proxy Statement.

 

(b) Security Ownership of Management

Information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to the section captioned “Principal Holders of Voting Securities” in the Proxy Statement.

 

(c) Changes in Control

Management of the Company knows of no arrangements, including any pledge by any person of securities of the Company, the operation of which may, at a subsequent date, result in a change in control of the registrant.

 

(d) Equity Compensation Plan Information 

The Company’s Tri-County 2005 Equity Compensation Plan was terminated in May 2015 and replaced with the the 2015 Equity Compensation Plan (the “2015 plan”), The 2015 plan was approved by shareholders, which authorizes the issuance of restricted stock, stock appreciation rights, stock units and stock options to the Board of Directors and key employees. The following table sets forth certain information with respect to the remaining options from the 2005 Equity Compensation Plan as of December 31, 2015.

 

    (a)     (b)     (c )  
Plan Category   Number of securities
to be issued upon
exercise of
outstanding options,
warrants, and rights
    Weighted average
exercise price of
outstanding options,
warrants, and rights
    Number of securities
remaining available
for future issuance
under equity
compensation plans
(excluding securities
reflected in column
(a)
 
Equity plans approved by security holders     21,211     $ 27.70       -  

 

  126  

 

 

Item 13.  Certain Relationships, Related Transactions and Director Independence

 

The information regarding certain relationships and related transactions, the section captioned “Other Information Relating to Directors and Executive Officers – Policies and Procedures for Approval and Related Parties Transactions and Relationships and Transactions with the Company and the Bank” in the Proxy Statement is incorporated herein by reference.

 

For information regarding director independence, the section captioned “Proposal 1 – Election of Directors” in the Proxy Statement is incorporated by reference.

 

Item 14. Principal Accountant Fees and Services

 

The information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to the section captioned “Audit Related Matters – Audit Fees” and “— an Pre-Approval of Services by the Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm” in the Proxy Statement.

 

PART IV

 

Item 15.  Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules

(a)   List of Documents Filed as Part of this Report

(1)  Financial Statements .  The following consolidated financial statements and notes related thereto are incorporated by reference from Item 8 hereof:

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2015 and 2014

Consolidated Statements of Income for the Years Ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the Years Ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2015, 2014 and 2013

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

(2)   Financial Statement Schedules .   All schedules for which provision is made in the applicable accounting regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission are omitted because of the absence of conditions under which they are required or because the required information is included in the consolidated financial statements and related notes thereto.

 

  127  

 

 

(3)  Exhibits .   The following is a list of exhibits filed as part of this Annual Report on Form 10-K and is also the Exhibit Index.

 

Exhibit
 No
  Description   Incorporated by Reference to
         
3.1   Articles of Incorporation of Tri-County Financial Corporation   Form S-4 (Registration No. 333-31287).
         
3.2   Articles of Amendment to Articles of Incorporation of Tri-County Financial Corporation   Form 8-K as filed on May 14, 2012
         
3.3   Articles of Amendment to Articles of Incorporation of Tri-County Financial Corporation   Form 8-K as filed on August 27, 2010
         
3.4   Amended and Restated Bylaws of The Community Financial Corporation   Form 8-K as filed on February 10, 2016.
         
4.1   Amended and Restated Articles Supplementary establishing Senior Non-cumulative Perpetual Preferred Stock, Series C, of Tri-County Financial Corporation   Form 8-K as filed on September 23, 2011
         
4.2   Form of Subordinated Indenture between The Community Financial Corporation and Wilmington Trust, National Association, as Trustee   Form 8-K as filed on February 4, 2015
         
4.3   Form of First Supplemental Indenture between The Community Financial Corporation and Wilmington Trust, National Association, as Trustee   Form 8-K as filed on February 4, 2015
         
4.4   Form of Global Note to represent the 6.25% Fixed to Floating Rate Subordinated Notes due 2025 (included in Exhibit 4.3)   Form 8-K as filed on February 4, 2015
         
10.1*   Tri-County Financial Corporation 1995 Stock Option and Incentive Plan, as amended   Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2000 as filed on March 30, 2001.
         
10.2*   Tri-County Financial Corporation 1995 Stock Option Plan for Non-Employee Directors, as amended   Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2000 as filed on March 30, 2001.
         
10.3*   Employment Agreement with Michael L. Middleton   Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2006 as filed on November 14, 2006.
         
10.4*   Community Bank of the Chesapeake Executive Incentive Compensation Plan, as amended and restated   Form 8-K as filed on February 10, 2016.
         
10.5*   Community Bank of the Chesapeake Retirement Plan for Directors, as amended and restated  

 

  128  

 

 

10.6*   Split Dollar Agreements with Michael L. Middleton   Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2000 as filed on March 30, 2001.
         
10.7*   Split Dollar Agreement with William J. Pasenelli   Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2001 as filed on April 1, 2002.
         
10.8*   Salary Continuation Agreement with Michael L. Middleton, dated September 6, 2003   Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2003 as filed on March 26, 2004.
         
10.9*   First Amendment to the Salary Continuation Agreement, dated September 6, 2003, with Michael L. Middleton   Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2008 as filed on March 9, 2009.
         
10.10*   Tri-County Financial Corporation 2005 Equity Compensation Plan   Definitive Proxy Statement as filed on April 11, 2005
         
10.11*   Amendment No. 1 to the Tri-County Financial Corporation 2005 Equity Compensation Plan   Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2007 as filed on November 13, 2007.
         
10.12*   Community Bank of the Chesapeake Executive Deferred Compensation Plan, as amended and restated    
         
10.13*   Amended and Restated Employment Agreement by and among Community Bank of Tri-County, William J. Pasenelli and Tri-County Financial Corporation, as guarantor   Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2007 as filed on May 11, 2007.
         
10.14*   First Amendment to the Employment Agreement, dated April 20, 2007, with William J. Pasenelli   Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013 as filed on August 14, 2013

 

10.15*   Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated January 1, 2011 and First Amendment to the Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated January 1, 2011, with William J. Pasenelli   Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013 as filed on August 14, 2013
         
10.16*   Amended and Restated Employment Agreement by and among Community Bank of Tri-County, Gregory C. Cockerham and Tri-County Financial Corporation, as guarantor   Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2007 as filed on May 11, 2007.
         
10.17*   Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated January 1, 2011 and First Amendment to the Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated January 1, 2011, with Gregory C. Cockerham   Form 10-Q for the quarter ended June 30, 2013 as filed on August 14, 2013
         
10.18*   Salary Continuation Agreement with Gregory C. Cockerham, dated August 21, 2006   Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2006 as filed on November 14, 2006.
         
10.19*   First Amendment to the Salary Continuation Agreement, dated August 21, 2006, with Gregory C. Cockerham   Form 10-K/A for the year ended December 31, 2008 as filed on April 20, 2009.

 

  129  

 

 

10.20*   Second Amendment to the Salary Continuation Agreement, dated August 21, 2006, with Gregory C. Cockerham   Form 10-K/A for the year ended December 31, 2008 as filed on April 20, 2009.
         
10.21*   Salary Continuation Agreement with William J. Pasenelli, dated August 21, 2006   Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2006 as filed on November 14, 2006.
         
10.22*   First Amendment to the Salary Continuation Agreement, dated August 21, 2006, with William J. Pasenelli   Form 10-K/A for the year ended December 31, 2008 as filed on April 20, 2009.
         
10.23*   Second Amendment to the Salary Continuation Agreement, dated August 21, 2006, with William J. Pasenelli   Form 10-K/A for the year ended December 31, 2008 as filed on April 20, 2009.
         
10.24*   Securities Purchase Agreement dated September 22, 2011, between Tri-County Financial Corporation and the Secretary of the United States Department of the Treasury   Form 8-K as filed on September 23, 2011
         
10.25*   Repurchase Letter dated September 22, 2011 between Tri-County Financial Corporation and the United States Department of the Treasury with respect to the Series A Preferred Stock and Series B Preferred Stock   Form 8-K as filed on September 23, 2011
         
10.26*   Form of Letter Agreement between Tri-County Financial Corporation and each of Michael L. Middleton, Gregory C. Cockerham and William J. Pasenelli   Form 8-K as filed on September 23, 2011

 

10.27*   Salary Continuation Agreement between Gregory C. Cockerham and Community Bank of Tri-County, dated September 6, 2003, as amended on December 22, 2008   Form 10-K/A for the year ended December 31, 2008 as filed on April 20, 2009.
         
10.28*   Salary Continuation Agreement between William J. Pasenelli and Community Bank of Tri-County, dated September 6, 2003, as amended on June 11, 2004 and December 22, 2008   Form 10-K/A for the year ended December 31, 2008 as filed on April 20, 2009.
         
10.29*   Employment Agreement with Michael L. Middleton dated July 1, 2014   Form 10-K/A for the year ended December 31, 2014 as filed on March 17, 2015.
         
10.30*   Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated November 1, 2014 with William J. Pasenelli   Form 10-K/A for the year ended December 31, 2014 as filed on March 17, 2015.
         
10.31*   Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated November 1, 2014 with Gregory C. Cockerham   Form 10-K/A for the year ended December 31, 2014 as filed on March 17, 2015.

 

  130  

 

 

10.32*   The Community Financial Corporation 2015 Equity Compensation Plan   Definitive Proxy Statement as filed on March 25, 2015.
         
10.33*   Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated January 1, 2011, with Todd L. Capitani, as amended    
         
10.34*   Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated January 1, 2011, with James Burke, as amended    
         
10.35*   Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated November 1, 2014, with Todd L. Capitani    
         
10.36*   Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated November 1, 2014, with James Burke    
         
10.37*   Split Dollar Agreement with Todd L. Capitani dated March 3, 2011    
         
10.38*   Split Dollar Agreement with James Burke dated March 15, 2011    
         
10.39*   Employment Agreement with Todd L. Capitani dated April 23, 2013    
         
10.40*   Employment Agreement James Burke dated April 20, 2007, as amended on November 24, 2008 and April 23, 2013    
         
10.41*   Salary Continuation Agreement between James M. Burke and Community Bank of Tri-County, dated August 21, 2006, as amended on April 13, 2007 and December 30, 2007    
         
10.42*   Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement, dated January 1, 2011, with Michael L. Middleton    
         

10.43*

 

  Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement between Community Bank of Tri-County and Michael L. Middleton dated January 12, 2004    
         
10.44*   Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement between Community Bank of Tri-County and William J. Pasenelli dated January 12, 2004    
         
10.45*   Split Dollar Agreement with William J. Pasenelli dated March 15, 2011    
         
14.0   Code of Ethics    
         
21.0   List of Subsidiaries    

 

  131  

 

 

23.1   Consent of Stegman & Company    
         
31.1   Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Executive Officer    
         
31.2   Rule 13a-14(a)/15d-14(a) Certification of Chief Financial Officer    
         
32.0   Section 1350 Certification of Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial Officer and Chief Accounting Officer    
         
101.0   The following materials from the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2015, formatted in XBRL (Extensible Business Reporting Language): (i) the Consolidated Balance Sheets, (ii) the Consolidated Statements of Income and Comprehensive Income, (iii) the Consolidated Statements of Changes In Stockholders’ Equity, (iv) the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows and (v) the Notes in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

 

 

(*)            Management contract or compensating arrangement.

 

(b) Exhibits .   The exhibits required by Item 601 of Regulation S-K are either filed as part of this Annual Report on Form 10-K or incorporated by reference herein.

 

(c) Financial Statements and Schedules Excluded From Annual Report .   There are no other financial statements and financial statement schedules which were excluded from this Annual Report pursuant to Rule 14a-3(b)(1) which are required to be included herein.

 

  132  

 

 

SIGNATURES

 

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

  THE COMMUNITY FINANCIAL CORPORATION
     
Date: March 10, 2016 By: /s/ William J. Pasenelli
    William J. Pasenelli
    President and Chief Executive Officer
    (Duly Authorized Representative)

 

Pursuant to the requirement of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

By: /s/ Michael L. Middleton   By: /s/ William J. Pasenelli
  Michael L. Middleton     William J. Pasenelli
  Director, Executive Chairman     Director, President and Chief Executive Officer
        (Principal Executive Officer)
         
  Date: March 10, 2016     Date: March 10, 2016
         
By: /s/ Todd L. Capitani   By: /s/ Austin J. Slater, Jr.
  Todd L. Capitani     Austin J. Slater, Jr.
  Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer     Director
  (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)      
         
  Date: March 10, 2016     Date: March 10, 2016
         
By: /s/Louis P. Jenkins, Jr   By: /s/ James R. Shepherd
  Louis P. Jenkins, Jr.     James R. Shepherd
  Director     Director
         
  Date: March 10, 2016     Date: March 10, 2016
         
By: /s/ Philip T. Goldstein   By: /s/ Joseph V. Stone, Jr.
  Philip T. Goldstein     Joseph V. Stone, Jr.
  Director     Director
         
  Date: March 10, 2016     Date: March 10, 2016
         
By: /s/ Mary Todd Peterson   By: /s/ M. Arshed Javaid
  Mary Todd Peterson     M. Arshed Javaid
  Director     Director
         
  Date: March 10, 2016     Date: March 10, 2016

 

  133  

 

Exhibit 10.5

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF THE CHESAPEAKE
RETIREMENT PLAN FOR DIRECTORS

(As amended and restated)

 

This amended, restated and renamed “Community Bank of the Chesapeake Retirement Plan for Directors” (the “Plan”) is adopted by the Community Bank of the Chesapeake for the benefit of directors. The purpose of the Plan is to provide a retirement benefit and to offer participants an opportunity to elect to defer the receipt of compensation pursuant to section 451 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”). The Plan provides benefits only to independent contractors and, thus, is exempt from the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (“ERISA”).

 

ARTICLE I
Definitions

 

1.1 “Agreement” shall mean the Deferred Compensation Agreement attached hereto as Exhibit A.

 

1.2 “Bank” shall mean Community Bank of the Chesapeake, or any successor thereto.

 

1.3 “Beneficiary” shall mean the Participant’s beneficiary designated pursuant to Article V of the Plan.

 

1.4 “Benefit Percentage” shall be determined based on the Participant’s completed calendar years of service on the Board as a non-employee Director, whether before or after the Effective Date, and shall be determined according to the following schedule:

 

Participant’s
Full Years of Service
  Participant’s
Benefit Percentage
 
Less than 5     0 %
5 to 9     33-1/3 %
10 to 14     66-2/3 %
15 or More     100 %

 

1.5 “Board” shall mean the Board of Directors of the Bank.

 

1.6 “Cause” shall mean removal of a Director from service due to the following:

 

(i)   indictment for, or conviction of, a criminal offense involving dishonesty or breach of trust resulting in a potential or actual penalty of imprisonment for one year or more;

 

(ii)   the issuance by a banking agency of a cease and desist order for conduct involving dishonesty or breach of trust that is final and not subject to appeal; or

 

(iii)   a finding by a regulatory agency whose decision is final of a violation of any law, rule or regulation governing banking, securities, commodities or insurance, or any final cease and desist order issued by a banking, securities, commodities or insurance regulatory agency.

 

  1  

 

 

1.7 “Change in Control” means the occurrence of a change in the ownership or effective control of the Company, or a change in the ownership of a substantial portion of the assets of the Company, each as defined in Treas. Reg. section 1.409A-3(i)(5). In addition, for purposes of vesting only, “Change in Control” also shall mean the occurrence of any of the following:

 

(i)   Merger: The Company merges into or consolidates with another corporation, or merges another corporation into the Company and as a result less than a majority of the combined voting power of the resulting corporation immediately after the merger or consolidation is held by persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately before the merger or consolidation;

 

(ii)   Acquisition of Significant Share Ownership: A report on Schedule 13D or another form or schedule (other than Schedule 13G) is filed or is required to be filed under Sections 13(d) or 14(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, if the schedule discloses that the filing person or persons acting in concert has or have become the beneficial owner(s) of 25% or more of a class of the Company’s voting securities, but this clause (b) shall not apply to beneficial ownership of Company voting shares held in a fiduciary capacity by an entity of which the Company directly or indirectly beneficially owns fifty percent (50%) or more of its outstanding voting securities;

 

(iii)  Change in Composition of the Board of Directors: During any period of two consecutive years, individuals who constitute the Company’s Board of Directors at the beginning of the two-year period cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Company’s Board of Directors; provided, however, that for purposes of this clause (iii) each director who is first elected by the board (or first nominated by the board for election by the stockholders) by a vote of at least three-fourths (3/4) of the directors who were directors at the beginning of the period shall be deemed to have been a director at the beginning of the two-year period; or

 

(iv)  Sale of Assets: The Company sells to a third party all or substantially all of its assets.

 

1.8 “Code” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.9 “Company” shall mean The Community Financial Corporation, or any successor thereto.

 

1.10 “Deferral Account” or “Account” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 5.2 of Article V of the Plan.

 

1.11 “Designation Date” means the date or dates as of which a designation of deemed investment directions by an individual pursuant to Section 5.5, or any change in a prior designation of deemed investment directions by an individual pursuant to Section 5.5, shall become effective. The Designation Dates in any Plan Year shall be designated by the Bank.

 

1.12 “Director” shall mean a non-employee member of the Board of Directors of the Bank and/or the Company.

 

  2  

 

 

1.13 “Disability” means a Director’s inability to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment which can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than twelve (12) months.

 

1.14 “Effective Date” shall have the meaning set forth in Article XVIII.

 

1.15 “Participant” means anyone who is a Director at any time on or after the Effective

Date.

 

1.16 “Return on Equity (ROE)” means net income available to common shareholders divided by common equity, as determined by the Bank, in its sole discretion, in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).

 

1.17 “Separation (or Separates) from Service” means the date there is a good-faith and complete termination of the contract to provide director services (i.e., the Participant does not anticipate any continued director services, a renewal of a contract to provide director services, and does not anticipate that he or she will become an employee).

 

1.18 “Plan” shall mean this Community Bank of Tri-county Retirement Plan for Directors.

 

1.19 “Surviving Spouse” shall mean the spouse of a Director at the time of the Director’s death, provided the Director and spouse are not then legally separated or divorced.

 

1.20 “Valuation Date” means the last day of each Plan Year quarter and any other date that the Bank, in its sole discretion, designates as a Valuation Date.

 

1.21 “Vested Percentage” shall be determined based on the number of the Participant’s full years of service as a non-employee Director, and shall be determined according to the following schedule:

 

Participant’s   Participant’s  
Full Years of Service   Vested Percentage  
Less than 1     33-1/3 %
1     66-2/3 %
2 or more     100 %

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant’s Vested Percentage shall increase to 100% in the event he Separates from Service for any reason after attaining age 72 or incurring a Disability, as determined by the Board.

 

ARTICLE II
Retirement Benefits

 

2.1 In the event of a Participant’s Separation from Service for any reason other than Cause, death or Disability, the Participant shall be entitled to receive an annual benefit for ten (10) years in an amount equal to the product of (i) the Participant’s Benefit Percentage, (ii) the Participant’s Vested Percentage, and (iii) $3,500 (subject to adjustment by the Board) (the “Retirement Benefits”).

 

  3  

 

 

The Retirement Benefits due under this Article shall begin on the first day of the second month following the date of the Participant’s Separation from Service, and shall thereafter be made on the annual anniversary dates of the initial payment date. Except as provided in Article IV, no Retirement Benefits shall be payable hereunder after the death of the Participant.

 

2.2 Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, no Retirement Benefits shall be payable under this Article II following a Participant’s termination of service for Cause.

 

2.3 Unless otherwise addressed pursuant to an agreement between a Participant and the Company and/or the Bank in effect at the time of a Change in Control, Retirement Benefits payable under Article II of the Plan in connection with a Change in Control (as described in Article X) shall be reduced to the extent necessary to ensure compliance with Section 280G of the Code, as amended, or any successor thereto.

 

ARTICLE III
Disability Benefits

 

3.1 In the event that a Participant experiences a Separation from Service due to Disability, the Participant shall receive an annual benefit for ten years in an amount equal to the product of (i) the Benefit Percentage and (ii) $3,500 (subject to adjustment by the Board) as of the 1st day of the year in which the Participant experiences a Separation from Service due to Disability (the “Disability Benefits”). The Disability Benefits due under this Article III shall begin on the first day of the second month following the date of the Participant’s Separation from Service, and shall thereafter be made on the annual anniversary dates of the initial payment date. Except as provided in Article IV, no Disability Benefits shall be payable hereunder after the death of the Participant.

 

ARTICLE IV
Death Benefit

 

4.1 In the event that a Participant dies before collecting any of the benefits provided under Articles II or III, the Participant’s Surviving Spouse, or if none, the Participant’s estate, shall be entitled to receive a lump sum payment having a present value equal to five (5) times the annual amount that the Participant would have received under Article II if the Participant had both Separated from Service on the date of death and had a Vested Percentage equal to 100% (the “Death Benefit”). Payment of the Death Benefit shall be made on or before the first day of the second month following the date of the Participant’s death.

 

4.2 In the event that a Participant dies after commencing to receive the benefits provided under Article II or III, the Participant’s Surviving Spouse, or if none, the Participant’s estate, shall be entitled to receive a lump sum payment having a present value equal to the payments that the Participant would have received if the Participant had survived to collect all benefits that would have been paid under Article II or III, as applicable, from the date of the Participant’s death through the date on which the Participant would have received the 10th annual payment otherwise payable under Article II or III, as applicable. Payment of the death benefit described under this Section 4.2 shall be made on or before the first day of the second month following the date of the Participant’s death.

 

  4  

 

 

ARTICLE V
Deferred Compensation

 

This Article of the Plan establishes a voluntary deferred compensation program for Participants, subject to the terms and conditions set forth below.

 

5.1 Subject to the remaining paragraphs of this Section 5.1 and in accordance with rules established by the Bank, a Participant may elect to defer director fees which are due to be earned and which would otherwise be paid to the Participant, in any fixed periodic dollar amounts or percentages designated by the Participant. Amounts so deferred will be considered a Participant’s “Compensation Deferrals.” Except as provided below, a Participant shall make such election(s) under this paragraph with respect to a coming Plan Year during the period beginning on the November 1 and ending on the December 31 of the prior calendar year, or during such other period as might be established by the Bank, which period ends no later than the December 31 preceding the Plan Year in which the services giving rise to the Compensation to be deferred are to be performed.

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, in the case of the first Plan Year in which an eligible individual initially becomes eligible to participate (as described in Treas. Reg. section 1.409A-2(a)(7)), the individual may make an irrevocable election, no later than thirty (30) days after the date he initially becomes eligible to participate, to defer director fees relating to services to be performed after the election.

 

After the deadline for making a deferral election for a Plan Year (as set forth above) has passed, the Participant may not change or revoke his or her Compensation Deferral election until the following Plan Year, except to the extent permitted by the Bank and under Code section 409A upon a disability, unforeseeable emergency (as described in Section 5.3), or a hardship distribution pursuant to section 1.401(k)-1(d)(3) of the Treasury Regulations. For purposes of this paragraph only, “disability” means any medically determinable physical or mental impairment resulting in the Participant’s inability to perform the duties of his or her position or any substantially similar position, where such impairment can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than six months.

 

Deferral elections, once made, shall continue in effect for subsequent calendar years unless a Participant files a new Agreement prior to December 31 of the year prior to the calendar year in which the change will take place. A subsequent deferral election will only become effective as of the following January 1st.

 

5.2 Deferred amounts shall be credited by the Bank and the Company as of the end of each calendar quarter, in accordance with the Participant’s deferral election under the Agreement. The deferred amounts shall be credited to a bookkeeping account (“Deferral Account”) established in the name of each Participant, in accordance with the terms of the Participant’s deferral election. Each Participant’s Deferral Account will separately account for credits, debits and earnings and losses, as described in this Article V. Participants shall be 100% vested in their Deferral Accounts at all times.

 

  5  

 

 

5.3 Pursuant to Section 5.5, each Participant shall have the right to direct the Bank as to how amounts in his or her Deferral Account shall be deemed to be invested. The Bank shall invest the account maintained on behalf of a Participant pursuant to the directions the Bank has received from that Participant. As of each Valuation Date, the Participant’s Deferral Account will be credited or debited to reflect the Participant’s deemed investment.

 

5.4 A distribution to a Participant or his or her Beneficiary or Beneficiaries shall be charged to the Participant’s Deferral Account as of the date of the distribution. Amounts shall be charged on a pro rata basis against the investment options in which the Participant’s Deferral Account is deemed to be invested.

 

5.5 Subject to such limitations as may from time to time be required by law, imposed by the Bank or the Trustee (if any) or contained elsewhere in the Plan, and subject to such operating rules and procedures as may be imposed from time to time by the Bank or the Trustee (if any), prior to, and effective for, each Designation Date, each Participant may communicate to the Bank a direction as to how his or her Deferral Account should be deemed to be invested among the Plan’s deemed investment options. The direction shall designate the percentage of the Participant’s Deferral Account to be deemed to be invested in each investment option, and shall become effective subject to the following rules and procedures.

 

(a)          Any initial or subsequent deemed investment direction shall be in writing, on a form supplied by and filed with the Bank (or in any other manner prescribed by the Bank), and shall be effective as soon as practicable after the filing.

 

(b)          All amounts credited to the Participant’s Deferral Account shall be deemed to be invested in accordance with the then effective deemed investment direction, and as of the effective date of any new deemed investment direction, all or a portion of the Participant’s Deferral Account at that date shall be reallocated among the designated deemed investment options according to the new deemed investment directions, until a subsequent deemed investment direction is filed and becomes effective.

 

(c)          If the Bank receives a deemed investment direction which it finds is incomplete, unclear or improper, the Participant’s deemed investment direction then in effect shall remain in effect (or, in the case of a deficiency in an initial deemed investment direction, the Participant shall be deemed to have filed no deemed investment direction) until the next Designation Date, unless the Bank provides for, and permits the application of, corrective action before that time.

 

(d)          If the Bank possesses at any time directions as to the deemed investment of less than all of a Participant’s Deferral Account, the Participant shall be considered to have directed that the undesignated portion of the Deferral Account be deemed to be invested in any investment option selected by the Bank, and the Bank shall not be liable for the investment option(s) it selects.

 

(e)          Each Participant, as a condition to his or her participation hereunder, agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Bank and its agents and representatives from any losses or damages of any kind relating to the deemed investment of the Participant’s Deferral Account.

 

(f)          Each reference in this Section to a Participant shall be deemed to include, where applicable, a reference to a Beneficiary.

 

  6  

 

 

(g)          In addition to the investment options selected by the Bank as being available under the Plan, each Participant may elect that all or a portion of his or her Deferral Account be credited or debited, as applicable, as of the end of each calendar quarter (or as soon as administratively practicable) by an amount equal to the consolidated Return on Equity (“ROE”) of the Company, which rate shall be adjusted as of each Valuation Date.

 

5.6 A Participant’s Deferral Account shall be paid in the form of (1) a lump sum distribution or (2) equal installments over a period from one to 10 years, as elected by the Participant at the time he initially submits an Agreement or in accordance with Section 5.8. Payment shall commence by the December 31 of the Plan Year during which the Participant Separates from Service (or, if later, by the 15th day of the third calendar month following the Separation from Service), or on the date designated by the Participant in the Agreement at the time he initially submits an Agreement or in accordance with Section 5.8. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant’s Deferral Account will be paid to the Participant (or his Beneficiary or estate) in a lump sum following the effective date of a Change in Control, as described in Article X.

 

5.7 Upon the death of a Participant prior to receipt of all benefits payable under this Article, then such payment(s) shall be made in accordance with the Participant’s distribution election to the Beneficiary designated by the Participant in his or her Agreement (and in the absence of a validly designated Beneficiary, to the Participant’s estate).

 

5.8 Agreements made hereunder shall be prospective only and shall be irrevocable with respect to amounts deferred pursuant to the Agreement. Participants may not change a previously submitted distribution election, unless such change is made in accordance with Section 409A of the Code (i.e., the Participant may irrevocably elect to change his or her above-described election (or deemed election) by submitting the proper election form to the Bank at least 12 months prior to the date on which the distribution is to be made (or commence) and delaying the distribution (or commencement of distributions) at least five full calendar years from the previously scheduled distribution date). Any election to change the distribution under this paragraph shall not take effect until at least twelve (12) months after the date on which the election is made. Any such change in election may not result in an acceleration of any payment. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant may at any time and from time to time (i) change the Beneficiary designated in paragraph 3 of the Agreement, and/or (ii) change the deferral amounts for a subsequent calendar year in accordance with Section 5.1 of the Plan.

 

ARTICLE VI
Source and Form of Benefits

 

6.1 The Plan shall constitute an unfunded, unsecured promise to provide benefits in the future, to the extent such benefits become payable. Benefits shall be paid from the general assets of the Bank or Company, and no person shall, by virtue of this Plan, have any interest in such assets (other than as an unsecured creditor). In the event that a trust is established as described herein at Article IX, the trustee of such trust shall inform the Board annually prior to the commencement of each fiscal year as to the manner in which such trust assets shall be invested.

 

  7  

 

 

ARTICLE VII
Assignment

 

7.1 Except as otherwise provided by this Plan, it is agreed that neither the Participant, nor any other person or persons, shall have any right to commute, sell, assign, transfer, encumber, pledge or otherwise convey the right to receive any benefits under this Plan.

 

ARTICLE VIII
No Retention of Services

 

8.1 The benefits payable under this Plan shall be independent of, and in addition to, any other compensation payable to a Participant, whether fees, bonus, retirement income under employee benefit plans sponsored or maintained by the Bank or the Company, or otherwise. This Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract of employment between the Bank or the Company and any Participant.

 

ARTICLE IX
Rights of Participants

 

9.1 The rights of the Participants under this Plan shall be solely those of unsecured creditors. In the event that the Bank or the Company establish an irrevocable trust in connection with the Plan (“Trust”), the trust assets shall remain at all times subject to claims by their general creditors in accordance with applicable law. Any such trust shall be intended to be treated as a “grantor trust” under the Code and the establishment of a trust or the utilization of any existing trust for Plan benefits, as applicable, shall not be intended to cause any Participant to realize current income on amounts contributed thereto, and any trust shall be so interpreted.

 

ARTICLE X
Automatic Cash-Out Upon a Change in Control

 

10.1 The provisions of this Article shall supersede any provisions of this Plan to the contrary. In the event of a Change in Control (as defined for purposes of vesting) while a Participant is serving as a Director, the Participant’s Vested Percentage shall become 100%. In the event of a Change in Control (as defined for purposes of distribution), the present value of the Participant’s vested benefits shall be due and payable to the Participant (or, in the event of his death, his Surviving Spouse (for benefits pursuant to Article II of the Plan) or designated Beneficiary (for benefits pursuant to Article V of the Plan), or, if none, to his estate) in one lump sum payment within 10 days following such Change in Control. In the event of a Change in Control (as defined for purposes of distribution) after a Participant terminates service, the present value of any benefits not yet paid to the Participant (or his Surviving Spouse, designated Beneficiary or his estate, as applicable, in the event of his death) shall be due and payable to the Participant (or his Surviving Spouse, designated Beneficiary or estate, as applicable in the event of his death) in one lump-sum payment within ten (10) days following the Change in Control.

 

  8  

 

 

ARTICLE XI
Reorganization

 

11.1 The Bank agrees that it will not merge or consolidate into any other corporation or organization, or permit its business activities to be taken over by any other organization, unless and until the succeeding or continuing corporation or other organization shall expressly assume the rights and obligations of the parties as herein set forth. The Bank further agrees that it will not cease its business activities or terminate its existence, other than as heretofore set forth in this paragraph, without having made adequate provision for the fulfillment of obligations under the Plan.

 

ARTICLE XII
Amendment and Termination

 

12.1 Subject to Code section 409A, the Board may amend or terminate the Plan at any time; provided, however, that no amendment or termination shall, without the written consent of the affected Participants, alter or impair any rights of Participants under the Plan.

 

ARTICLE XIII

Governing Law

 

13.1 This Plan shall be construed and governed in all respects under and by the laws of the State of Maryland, except where those laws are preempted by the laws of the United States. If any provision of this Plan shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions hereof shall continue to be fully effective.

 

ARTICLE XIV
Headings

 

14.1 Headings and subheadings in this Plan are inserted for convenience of reference only and constitute no part of this Plan.

 

ARTICLE XV
Gender

 

15.1 This Plan shall be construed, where required, so that the masculine gender includes the feminine.

 

ARTICLE XVI
Interpretation of the Plan

 

16.1 The Board shall have sole and absolute discretion to administer, construe, and interpret the Plan, and the decisions of the Board shall be conclusive and binding on all affected parties.

 

  9  

 

 

ARTICLE XVII
Legal Fees

 

17.1 In the event any dispute shall arise between a Participant and the Bank or the Company as to the terms or interpretation of this Plan, whether instituted by formal legal proceedings or otherwise, including any action taken by a Participant to enforce the terms of this Plan or in defending against any action taken by the Bank or the Company, the Bank or the Company shall reimburse the Participant for all costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising from such dispute, proceedings or actions: provided that the Participant shall return such amounts to the Bank or Company if he fails to obtain a final judgment by a court of competent jurisdiction (or a settlement of such dispute, proceedings, or actions) substantially in his favor. Such reimbursements to a Participant shall be paid within 10 days of the Participant furnishing written evidence, which may be in the form, among other things, of a canceled check or receipt, of any costs or expenses incurred by the Participant. Any such request for reimbursement by a Participant shall be made no more frequently than at 30 day intervals. Notwithstanding the preceding, to the extent such reimbursements to the Participant constitute deferred compensation subject to Code section 409A, the following rules apply: (a) The right to reimbursement shall be available for the lifetime of the Participant, (b) the amount of expenses eligible for reimbursement during one calendar year may not affect the expenses eligible for reimbursement in any other calendar year, and (c) the reimbursement of an eligible expense shall be made on or before the last day of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the expense was incurred.

 

ARTICLE XVIII
Effective Date; Section 409A Compliance

 

18.1 The effective date of the amendment and restatement of the Plan is January 1, 2015. Unless terminated earlier in accordance with Article XII, this Plan shall remain in effect during the term of service of the Participants and until all benefits payable hereunder have been made. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, the Plan and Agreements issued under the Plan shall be interpreted in accordance with, and incorporate the terms and conditions required by, Section 409A of the Code, together with any guidance issued thereunder, including guidance issued after the effective date of the Plan. The Board reserves the right, in its discretion, to adopt such amendments to the Plan and other policies and procedures (including amendments, policies and procedures with retroactive effect), or to take any other actions the Board determines to be necessary or appropriate to comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code.

 

  10  

 

 

Exhibit 10.12

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF THE CHESAPEAKE

EXECUTIVE DEFERRED COMPENSATION PLAN

(as amended and restated)

 

The purpose of the Community Bank of the Chesapeake Executive Deferred Compensation Plan (hereinafter referred to as the “Plan”) is to aid in retaining and attracting individuals of exceptional ability by providing them an opportunity to defer the payment of their current compensation to a later date, in accordance with the terms of the Plan. The original effective date of the Plan was January 1, 2007. However, the Plan document has been amended and restated to reflect the change in the name of the Bank, formerly Community Bank of Tri-County, and the Company, formerly Tri-County Financial Corporation and to reflect certain design changes.

 

ARTICLE I
Definitions

 

1.1 “Agreement” shall mean the Deferred Compensation Agreement attached hereto as Exhibit A.

 

1.2 “Bank” means the Community Bank of the Chesapeake, or any successor thereto.

 

1.3 “Beneficiary” shall mean the Participant’s beneficiary designated pursuant to Article 4 of the Plan.

 

1.4 “Board of Directors” shall mean the Board of Directors of the Bank.

 

1.5 “Change in Control” means the occurrence of a change in the ownership or effective control of the Company, or a change in the ownership of a substantial portion of the assets of the Company, each as defined in Treas. Reg. section 1.409A-3(i)(5).

 

1.6 “Code” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.7 “Company” shall mean The Community Financial Corporation, or any successor thereto.

 

1.8 “Compensation” shall mean base salary paid to a Participant during the applicable Plan Year.

 

1.9 “Deferral Account” or “Account” shall mean the bookkeeping account to which amounts deferred under the Plan are credited in accordance with Article III of the Plan.

 

1.10 “Designation Date” means the date or dates as of which a designation of deemed investment directions by an individual pursuant to Section 3.5, or any change in a prior designation of deemed investment directions by an individual pursuant to Section 3.5, shall become effective. The Designation Dates in any Plan Year shall be designated by the Bank.

 

1.11 “Effective Date” shall have the meaning set forth in Article XVI.

 

1.12 “Participant” means a vice president of the Bank or above who is designated by the Board of Directors as a Plan Participant, as described in Section 2.1.

 

1.13 “Plan” shall mean this Community Bank of the Chesapeake Executive Deferred Compensation Plan.

 

1.14 “Plan Year” means a twelve month period commencing January 1st and ending the following December 31st.

 

   

 

 

1.15 “Return on Equity (ROE)” means net income available to common shareholders divided by common equity, as determined by the Bank, in its sole discretion, in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).

 

1.16 “Separation from Service” means the Participant’s “separation from service,” within the meaning of Code section 409A, treating as a Separation from Service an anticipated permanent reduction in the level of bona fide services to be performed by the Participant to 20% or less of the average level of bona fide services performed by the Participant over the immediately preceding 36 month period (or the full period during which the Participant performed services for the Bank, if that is less than 36 months).

 

1.17 “Valuation Date” means the last day of each Plan Year quarter and any other date that the Bank, in its sole discretion, designates as a Valuation Date.

 

ARTICLE II
Eligibility And Deferral Elections

 

2.1 Eligibility to participate in the Plan is limited to vice presidents of the Bank and above who are determined by the Bank to be members of a select group of management or highly compensated employees and who are designated by the Board of Directors to be Participants under the Plan.

 

2.2 Subject to the remaining paragraphs of this Section 2.2 and in accordance with rules established by the Bank, a Participant may elect to defer Compensation which is due to be earned and which would otherwise be paid to the Participant, in any fixed periodic dollar amounts or percentages designated by the Participant. Amounts so deferred will be considered a Participant’s “Compensation Deferrals.” Except as provided below, a Participant shall make such election(s) under this paragraph with respect to a coming Plan Year during the period beginning on the November 1 and ending on the December 31 of the prior calendar year, or during such other period as might be established by the Bank, which period ends no later than the December 31 preceding the Plan Year in which the services giving rise to the Compensation to be deferred are to be performed.

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, in the case of the first Plan Year in which an eligible employee initially becomes eligible to participate (as described in Treas. Reg. section 1.409A-2(a)(7)), the employee may make an irrevocable election, no later than thirty (30) days after the date he initially becomes eligible to participate, to defer Compensation relating to services to be performed after the election.

 

After the deadline for making a deferral election for a Plan Year (as set forth above) has passed, the Participant may not change or revoke his or her Compensation Deferral election until the following Plan Year, except to the extent permitted by the Bank and under Code section 409A upon a disability, unforeseeable emergency (as described in Section 5.3), or a hardship distribution pursuant to section 1.401(k)-1(d)(3) of the Treasury Regulations. For purposes of this paragraph only, “disability” means any medically determinable physical or mental impairment resulting in the Participant’s inability to perform the duties of his or her position or any substantially similar position, where such impairment can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than six months.

 

Compensation Deferrals shall be credited to the Deferral Account of the deferring Participant.

 

2.3 Deferral elections pursuant to Section 3.2, once made, shall continue in effect for subsequent Plan Years unless a Participant files a new Agreement prior to December 31 of the Plan Year prior to the Plan Year in which the change will take place. A subsequent deferral election will only become effective as of the following January 1 st .

 

  2  

 

 

ARTICLE III

Deferred Compensation

 

3.1 Compensation Deferrals shall be credited by the Bank and the Company to the Deferral Account established in the name of each Participant, in accordance with the terms of the Participant’s deferral election under the Agreement. Participants shall be 100% vested in their Deferral Accounts at all times. Compensation Deferrals shall be withheld from each regularly scheduled payroll in approximately equal amounts (or as otherwise specified by the Plan Administrator). Compensation Deferrals shall be credited to the Deferral Account as soon as administratively feasible following the time such amounts would otherwise have been paid to a Participant . Notwithstanding the foregoing, Compensation Deferrals begin crediting of gains and losses subject to Section 3.5 on the last day of the calendar quarter in which the amounts were deferred.

 

3.2 Pursuant to Section 3.5, each Participant shall have the right to direct the Bank as to how amounts in his or her Plan Account shall be deemed to be invested. The Bank shall invest the account maintained on behalf of a Participant pursuant to the directions the Bank has received from that Participant. As of each Valuation Date, the Participant’s Account will be credited or debited to reflect the Participant’s deemed investment.

 

3.3 A distribution to a Participant or his or her Beneficiary or Beneficiaries shall be charged to the Participant’s Account as of the date of the distribution. Amounts shall be charged on a pro rata basis against the investment options in which the Participant’s Account is deemed to be invested.

 

3.4 A separate bookkeeping account under the Plan shall be established and maintained by the Bank to reflect the Account for each Participant. Each account will separately account for credits, debits and earnings and losses, as described in this Article III.

 

3.5 Subject to such limitations as may from time to time be required by law, imposed by the Bank or the Trustee (if any) or contained elsewhere in the Plan, and subject to such operating rules and procedures as may be imposed from time to time by the Bank or the Trustee (if any), prior to, and effective for, each Designation Date, each Participant may communicate to the Bank a direction as to how his or her Account should be deemed to be invested among the Plan’s deemed investment options. The direction shall designate the percentage of the Participant’s Account to be deemed to be invested in each investment option, and shall become effective subject to the following rules and procedures.

 

(a)          Any initial or subsequent deemed investment direction shall be in writing, on a form supplied by and filed with the Bank (or in any other manner prescribed by the Bank), and shall be effective as soon as practicable after the filing. Any subsequent deemed investment direction shall be effective the first day of the following quarter (or as soon as practicable thereafter).

 

(b)          All amounts credited to the Participant’s Account shall be deemed to be invested in accordance with the then effective deemed investment direction, and as of the effective date of any new deemed investment direction, all or a portion of the Participant’s Account at that date shall be reallocated among the designated deemed investment options according to the new deemed investment directions, until a subsequent deemed investment direction is filed and becomes effective.

 

  3  

 

 

(c)          If the Bank receives a deemed investment direction which it finds is incomplete, unclear or improper, the Participant’s deemed investment direction then in effect shall remain in effect (or, in the case of a deficiency in an initial deemed investment direction, the Participant shall be deemed to have filed no deemed investment direction) until the next Designation Date, unless the Bank provides for, and permits the application of, corrective action before that time.

 

(d)          If the Bank possesses at any time directions as to the deemed investment of less than all of a Participant’s Account, the Participant shall be considered to have directed that the undesignated portion of the Account be deemed to be invested in any investment option selected by the Bank, and the Bank shall not be liable for the investment option(s) it selects.

 

(e)          Each Participant, as a condition to his or her participation hereunder, agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Bank and its agents and representatives from any losses or damages of any kind relating to the deemed investment of the Participant’s Account.

 

(f)          Each reference in this Section to a Participant shall be deemed to include, where applicable, a reference to a Beneficiary.

 

(g)          In addition to the investment options selected by the Bank as being available under the Plan, each Participant may elect that all or a portion of his or her Deferral Account be credited or debited, as applicable, as of the end of each calendar quarter (or as soon as administratively practicable) by an amount equal to the consolidated Return on Equity (“ROE”) of the Company, which rate shall be adjusted as of each Valuation Date.

 

ARTICLE IV
Distributions

 

4.1 Upon any Separation from Service, a Participant’s Deferral Account shall be distributed in the form of (1) a lump sum or (2) equal installments over a period from one to 10 years, as elected by the Participant at the time the Participant initially submits an Agreement or in accordance with Section 4.3. Subject to Section 5.2, payment shall be made or commence by the December 31 of the Plan Year during which the Participant experiences a Separation from Service (or, if later, by the 15th day of the third calendar month following the Separation from Service), or on the date designated by the Participant in the Agreement at the time he initially submits an Agreement or in accordance with Section 4.3. Notwithstanding anything in the Plan or an Agreement to the contrary, however, a Participant’s Deferral Account will be paid to the Participant (or his Beneficiary or estate) in a lump sum as soon as practicable following the effective date of a Change in Control.

 

4.2 Upon the death of a Participant prior to receipt of all benefits payable under this Article IV, payment(s) shall be made in accordance with the Participant’s distribution election to the Beneficiary designated by the Participant in his or her Agreement (and, in the absence of a validly designated Beneficiary, to the Participant’s estate).

 

4.3 Agreements made hereunder shall be prospective only and shall be irrevocable with respect to amounts deferred pursuant to the Agreement. Participants may not change a previously submitted distribution election, unless such change is made in accordance with Section 409A of the Code (i.e., the Participant may irrevocably elect to change his or her above-described election (or deemed election) by submitting the proper election form to the Bank at least 12 months prior to the date on which the distribution is to be made (or commence) and delaying the distribution (or commencement of distributions) at least five full calendar years from the previously scheduled distribution date). Any election to change the distribution under this paragraph shall not take effect until at least twelve (12) months after the date on which the election is made. Any such change in election may not result in an acceleration of any payment. . Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant may at any time and from time to time (i) change the Beneficiary designated in paragraph 3 of the Agreement, and/or (ii) change the deferral amounts for a subsequent calendar year in accordance with Article II of this Plan.

 

  4  

 

 

ARTICLE V
Source and Form of Benefits

 

5.1 The Plan shall constitute an unfunded, unsecured promise to provide benefits in the future, to the extent such benefits become payable. Benefits shall be paid from the general assets of the Bank or Company, and no person shall, by virtue of this Plan, have any interest in such assets (other than as an unsecured creditor). In the event that a trust is established as described herein at Article VIII, the trustee of such trust shall inform the Board of Directors annually prior to the commencement of each fiscal year as to the manner in which such trust assets shall be invested.

 

5.2 Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, to the extent required by Section 409A of the Code and the regulations issued thereunder, benefits payable under the Plan due to Separation from Service to any Participant who is a “specified employee” for purposes of Section 409A of the Code shall be delayed for a period of six months from the Participant’s Separation from Service.

 

ARTICLE VI
Assignment

 

6.1 Except as otherwise provided by this Plan, it is agreed that neither the Participant, nor any other person or persons, shall have any right to commute, sell, assign, transfer, encumber, pledge or otherwise convey the right to receive any benefits under this Plan.

 

ARTICLE VII
No Retention of Services

 

7.1 The Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract of employment between the Bank or the Company and any Participant.

 

ARTICLE VIII
Rights of Participants

 

8.1 The rights of the Participants under this Plan shall be solely those of unsecured creditors. In the event that the Bank or the Company establish an irrevocable trust in connection with the Plan (“Trust”), the trust assets shall remain at all times subject to claims by their general creditors in accordance with applicable law. Any such trust shall be intended to be treated as a “grantor trust” under the Code and the establishment of a trust or the utilization of any existing trust for Plan benefits, as applicable, shall not be intended to cause any Participant to realize current income on amounts contributed thereto, and any trust shall be so interpreted.

 

ARTICLE IX
Reorganization

 

9.1 The Bank agrees that it will not merge or consolidate into any other corporation or organization, or permit its business activities to be taken over by any other organization, unless and until the succeeding or continuing corporation or other organization shall expressly assume the rights and obligations of the parties as herein set forth. The Bank further agrees that it will not cease its business activities or terminate its existence, other than as heretofore set forth in this paragraph, without having made adequate provision for the fulfillment of obligations under the Plan.

 

  5  

 

 

ARTICLE X
Amendment and Termination

 

10.1 Subject to Code section 409A, the Board of Directors may amend or terminate the Plan at any time; provided, however, that no amendment or termination shall, without the written consent of the affected Participants, alter or impair any rights of Participants under the Plan.

 

ARTICLE XI
Governing Law

 

11.1 This Plan shall be construed and governed in all respects under and by the laws of the State of Maryland, except where those laws are preempted by the laws of the United States. If any provision of this Plan shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions hereof shall continue to be fully effective.

 

ARTICLE XII
Headings

 

12.1 Headings and subheadings in this Plan are inserted for convenience of reference only and constitute no part of this Plan.

 

ARTICLE XIII
Gender

 

13.1 This Plan shall be construed, where required, so that the masculine gender includes the feminine.

 

ARTICLE XIV
Interpretation of the Plan

 

14.1 The Board of Directors shall have sole and absolute discretion to administer, construe, and interpret the Plan, and the decisions of the Board of Directors shall be conclusive and binding on all affected parties.

 

ARTICLE XV
Legal Fees

 

15.1 In the event any dispute shall arise between a Participant and the Bank or the Company as to the terms or interpretation of this Plan, whether instituted by formal legal proceedings or otherwise, including any action taken by a Participant to enforce the terms of this Plan or in defending against any action taken by the Bank or the Company, the Bank or the Company shall reimburse the Participant for all costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising from such dispute, proceedings or actions: provided that the Participant shall return such amounts to the Bank or Company if he fails to obtain a final judgment by a court of competent jurisdiction (or a settlement of such dispute, proceedings, or actions) substantially in his favor. Such reimbursements to a Participant shall be paid within 10 days of the Participant furnishing written evidence, which may be in the form, among other things, of a canceled check or receipt, of any costs or expenses incurred by the Participant. Any such request for reimbursement by a Participant shall be made no more frequently than at 30 day intervals. Notwithstanding the preceding, to the extent such reimbursements to the Participant constitute deferred compensation subject to Code section 409A, the following rules apply: (a) The right to reimbursement shall be available for the lifetime of the Participant, (b) the amount of expenses eligible for reimbursement during one calendar year may not affect the expenses eligible for reimbursement in any other calendar year, and (c) the reimbursement of an eligible expense shall be made on or before the last day of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the expense was incurred.

 

  6  

 

 

ARTICLE XVI
Effective Date; Section 409A Compliance

 

16.1 The effective date of the amendment and restatement of this Plan is January 1, 2015. Unless terminated earlier in accordance with Article X, this Plan shall remain in effect until all benefits payable hereunder have been made.

 

16.2 Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, however, the Plan and Agreements issued under the Plan shall be interpreted in accordance with, and incorporate the terms and conditions required by, Section 409A of the Code, together with any guidance issued thereunder, including guidance issued after the effective date of the Plan. The Board of Directors reserves the right, in its discretion, to adopt such amendments to the Plan and other policies and procedures (including amendments, policies and procedures with retroactive effect), or to take any other actions it determines to be necessary or appropriate to comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code.

 

ARTICLE XVII
Claims Procedures

 

17.1 This Section 17.1 is based on final regulations issued by the Department of Labor and published in the Federal Register on November 21, 2000 and codified at section 2560.503-1 of the Department of Labor Regulations. If any provision of this Section 17.1 conflicts with the requirements of those regulations, the requirements of those regulations will prevail.

 

(a)          Initial Claim. A Participant or Beneficiary (hereinafter referred to as a “Claimant”) who believes he is entitled to any Plan benefit under this Plan may file a claim with the Bank. The Bank shall review the claim itself or appoint an individual or an entity to review the claim.

 

The Claimant shall be notified within ninety (90) days after the claim is filed whether the claim is allowed or denied, unless the Claimant receives written notice from the Bank or appointee of the Bank prior to the end of the ninety (90) day period stating that special circumstances require an extension of the time for decision, such extension not to extend beyond the day which is one hundred eighty (180) days after the day the claim is filed.

 

If the Bank denies a claim, it must provide to the Claimant, in writing or by electronic communication:

 

(i)          The specific reasons for the denial;

 

(ii)         A reference to the Plan provision upon which the denial is based;

 

(iii)        A description of any additional information or material that the Claimant must provide in order to perfect the claim;

 

  7  

 

 

(iv)        An explanation of why such additional material or information is necessary;

 

(v)         Notice that the Claimant has a right to request a review of the claim denial and information on the steps to be taken if the Claimant wishes to request a review of the claim denial; and

 

(vi)        A statement of the Claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) following a denial on review of the initial denial.

 

(b)          Review Procedures. A request for review of a denied claim must be made in writing to the Bank within sixty (60) days after receiving notice of denial. The decision upon review will be made within sixty (60) days after the Bank’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than one hundred twenty (120) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial sixty (60) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

The reviewer shall afford the Claimant an opportunity to review and receive, without charge, all relevant documents, information and records and to submit issues and comments in writing to the Bank. The reviewer shall take into account all comments, documents, records and other information submitted by the Claimant relating to the claim regardless of whether the information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

Upon completion of its review of an adverse initial claim determination, the Bank will give the Claimant, in writing or by electronic notification, a notice containing:

 

(i)          its decision;

 

(ii)         the specific reasons for the decision;

 

(iii)        the relevant Plan provisions on which its decision is based;

 

(iv)        a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and without charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information in the Plan’s files which is relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits;

 

(v)         a statement describing the Claimant’s right to bring an action for judicial review under ERISA section 502(a); and

 

(vi)        if an internal rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion was relied upon in making the adverse determination on review, a statement that a copy of the rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion will be provided without charge to the Claimant upon request.

 

(c)          Calculation of Time Periods. For purposes of the time periods specified in this Section, the period of time during which a benefit determination is required to be made begins at the time a claim is filed in accordance with the Plan procedures without regard to whether all the information necessary to make a decision accompanies the claim. If a period of time is extended due to a Claimant’s failure to submit all information necessary, the period for making the determination shall be tolled from the date the notification is sent to the Claimant until the date the Claimant responds.

 

  8  

 

 

(d)          Failure of Plan to Follow Procedures. If the Plan fails to follow the claims procedures required by this Section, a Claimant shall be deemed to have exhausted the administrative remedies available under the Plan and shall be entitled to pursue any available remedy under ERISA section 502(a) on the basis that the Plan has failed to provide a reasonable claims procedure that would yield a decision on the merits of the claim.

 

(e)          Failure of Claimant to Follow Procedures. A Claimant’s compliance with the foregoing provisions of this Article XVII is a mandatory prerequisite to the Claimant’s right to commence any legal action with respect to any claim for benefits under the Plan.

 

  9  

 

 

Exhibit 10.33

 

SUPPLEMENTAL EXECUTIVE RETIREMENT PLAN

 

THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 1st day of January, 2011, by and between Community Bank of TRI-County, a banking corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, hereinafter referred to as the “Plan Sponsor”, and Todd Capitani, hereinafter referred to as the “Participant’.

 

WITNESSETH

 

WHEREAS, it is the consensus of the Board that the Participant’s services to the Plan Sponsor in the past have been of exceptional merit and have constituted an invaluable contribution to the general welfare of the Plan Sponsor bringing it to its present status of operating efficiency, and its present position in its field of activity; and,

 

WHEREAS, the experience of the Participant, his knowledge of the affairs of the Plan Sponsor, his reputation and contacts in the industry are so valuable that assurance of his continued services is essential for the future growth and profits of the Plan Sponsor and it is in the best interests of the Plan Sponsor to arrange terms of continued employment for the Participant so as to reasonably assure his remaining in the Plan Sponsor’s employment during his lifetime or until the age of retirement; and,

 

WHEREAS, it is the desire of the Plan Sponsor that his services be retained as herein provided; and,

 

WHEREAS, the Participant is willing to continue in the employ of the Plan Sponsor provided the Plan Sponsor agrees to pay to his beneficiaries certain benefits in accordance with the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth; and,

 

WHEREAS, the Plan Sponsor intends that the Plan shall at all times be administered and interpreted in such a manner as to constitute an unfunded nonqualified deferred compensation plan for tax purposes and for purposes of Title I of ERISA. This Plan is not intended to qualify for favorable tax treatment pursuant to IRC Section 401(a) of the Code or any successor section or statute. This Plan is intended to comply with IRC Section 409A as created under The American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 (the “Jobs Act of 2004”). It is both anticipated and expected that the terms and provisions of this Plan may need to be amended in the future to assure continued compliance. The Plan Sponsor and the Participant acknowledge that fact and agree to take any and all steps necessary to operate the plan in “good faith” based on their current understanding of the regulations;

 

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of services performed in the past and to be performed in the future as well as of the mutual promises and covenants herein contained, it is agreed as follows:

 

ARTICLE 1
DEFINITIONS

 

DEFINITION OF TERMS. Certain words and phrases are defined when first used in later Articles of this Plan. Whenever any words are used herein in the masculine, they shall be construed as though they were in the feminine in all cases where they would so apply; and whenever any words are used herein in the singular or in the plural, they shall be construed as though they were used in the plural or the singular, as the case may be, in all cases where they would so apply. For the purpose of this Plan, unless otherwise clearly apparent from the context, the following phrases or terms shall have the following indicated meanings:

 

  Page 1 of 17

 

 

1.1           “Accrued Benefit” shall mean the portion of the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit that has accrued as of the applicable date of reference, with respect to services performed by the Participant beginning on January 1, 2011, as calculated for purposes of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and recorded on the books of the Plan Sponsor.

 

1.2           “Applicable Guidance” shall mean, as the context requires, Code § 409A and the Final Treasury Regulations issued thereunder, or other written Treasury or IRS guidance regarding or affecting Code § 409A.

 

1.3           “Beneficiary” shall mean the person or persons, natural or otherwise, designated in writing by a Participant in accordance with Article 5 before his death to receive Plan benefits in the event of the Participant’s death.

 

1.4           “Board” shall mean the board of directors of the Plan Sponsor, unless specifically noted otherwise.

 

1.5           “Cause” shall mean any of the following acts or circumstances: (1) willful destruction by the Participant of property of the Plan Sponsor having a material value to the Plan Sponsor; (ii) fraud, embezzlement, theft, or comparable dishonest activity committed by the Participant (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iii) the Participant’s conviction of or entering a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any crime constituting a felony or any misdemeanor involving fraud, dishonesty, or moral turpitude (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iv) the Participant’s breach, neglect, refusal, or failure to materially discharge the Participant’s duties (other than due to physical or mental illness) commensurate with the Participant’s title and function or the Participant’s failure to comply with the lawful directions of a senior managing officer of the Plan Sponsor in any such case that is not cured within fifteen (15) days after the Participant has received written notice thereof from such senior managing officer; or (v) any willful misconduct by the Participant which may cause substantial economic or reputation injury to the Plan Sponsor, including, but not limited to, sexual harassment.

 

1.6           “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of a Change in Control event, within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5) and described in any of subparagraph (a), (b), or (c), (collectively referred to as “Change in Control Events”), or any combination of the Change in Control Events. To constitute a Change in Control Event with respect to the Participant or Beneficiary, the Change in Control Event must relate to: (i) the corporation for whom the Participant is performing services at the time of the Change in Control Event; (ii) the corporation that is liable for the payment of the deferred compensation (or all corporations liable for the payment if more than one corporation is liable); or (iii) a corporation that is a majority shareholder of a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii), or any corporation in a chain of corporations in which each corporation is a majority shareholder of another corporation in the chain, ending in a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii).

 

(a)            Change in Ownership. A Change in Ownership occurs if a person, or a group of persons acting together, acquires more than fifty percent (50%) of the stock of the corporation, measured by voting power or value. Incremental increases in ownership by a person or group that already owns fifty percent (50%) of the corporation do not result in a Change of Ownership, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(v).

 

(b)            Change in Effective Control. A Change in Effective Control occurs if, over a twelve (12) month period: (i) a person or group acquires stock representing thirty percent (30%) of the voting power of the corporation; or (ii) a majority of the members of the board of directors of the ultimate parent corporation is replaced by directors not endorsed by the persons who were members of the board before the new directors’ appointment, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(vi).

 

  Page 2 of 17

 

 

(c)             Change in Ownership of a Substantial Portion of Corporate Assets. A Change in Control based on the sale of assets occurs if a person or group acquires Forty percent (40%) or more of the gross fair market value of the assets of a corporation over a twelve (12) month period. No change in control results pursuant to this Article (c) if the assets are transferred to certain entities controlled directly or indirectly by the shareholders of the transferring corporation, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(vii).

 

1.7           “Claimant” shall mean a person who believes that he or she is being denied a benefit to which he or she is entitled hereunder.

 

1.8           “Code” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.9           “Disability” shall mean a condition of the Participant whereby he or she either: (i) is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, or (ii) is, by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Plan Sponsor. The Administrator will determine whether the Participant has incurred a Disability based on its own good faith determination and may require the Participant to submit to reasonable physical and mental examinations for this purpose. The Participant will also be deemed to have incurred a Disability if determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration, Railroad Retirement Board, or in accordance with a disability insurance program, provided that the definition of disability applied under such disability insurance program complies with the requirements of Treasury Regulation §1.409A-3(i)(4) and authoritative guidance.

 

1.10         “Effective Date” shall mean the date specified on the first page of this Plan.

 

1.11          “Eligible Employee” shall mean for any Plan Year (or applicable portion of a Plan Year), an Employee who is determined by the Plan Sponsor, or its designee, to be a Participant under the Plan. If the Plan Sponsor determines that an Employee first becomes an Eligible Employee during a Plan Year, the Plan Sponsor shall notify the individual in writing of its determination and of the date during the Plan Year on which the individual shall first become a Plan Participant.

 

1.12         “Employee” shall mean a person providing services to the Plan Sponsor in the capacity of a common law Employee of the Plan Sponsor.

 

1.13         “ERISA” shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as it may be amended from time to time.

 

1.14         “Normal Retirement Age” shall mean the date the Participant attains age 65.

 

1.15         “Normal Retirement Benefit” shall mean an annual benefit payment in the amount of Sixty Three Thousand Six Hundred and Seventy Nine dollars ($63,679) for a period of Fifteen (15) years.

 

1.16        “Participant” shall mean any Eligible Employee: (i) who is selected to participate in this Plan, or, (ii) a former Eligible Employee who continues to be entitled to a benefit under this Plan.

 

1.17         “Plan” shall mean this Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan Agreement, all Election Forms, the Trust, (if any), and any other written documents relevant to the Plan. For purposes of applying Code § 409A requirements, this Plan is a non-account balance plan under Treasury Regulation §1.409-1(c)(2)(i)(A).

 

  Page 3 of 17

 

 

1.18         “Plan Administrator” or “Administrator” shall be a committee designated by the Plan Sponsor. If a Participant is part of a group of persons designated as a committee or Plan Administrator, then the Participant may not participate in any activity or decision relating solely to his or her individual benefits under this Plan. Matters solely affecting the applicable Participant will be resolved by the remaining committee members.

 

1. 19         “Plan Sponsor” shall mean the person or entity: (i) receiving the services of the Participant; and (ii) all persons with whom such person or entity would be considered a single employer under the parent-subsidiary rules of Code §414(b) or §414(c).

 

1.20         “Plan Year” shall mean, for the first Plan Year, the period beginning on the Effective Date of the Plan and ending December 31 of such calendar year, and thereafter, a twelve (12) month period beginning January 1 of each calendar year and continuing through December 31 of such calendar year.

 

1.21         “Section 409A” shall mean Section 409A of the Code and the Treasury Regulations and other Applicable Guidance issued under that Section.

 

1.22         “Separation from Service” shall mean the occurrence of a Participant’s death, retirement, or “other termination of employment” (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(1)(ii)) with the Plan Sponsor (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(3)). However, a Separation from Service shall not occur if the Participant is on military leave, sick leave, or other bona fide leave of absence if the period of such leave does not exceed six months, or if longer, so long as the Participant retains a right to reemployment with the Plan Sponsor under an applicable statute or by contract.

 

1.23          “Specified Employee” shall mean that the Participant also satisfies the definition of a “key employee” as such term is defined in Code §416(i) (without regard to Section 416(1)(5)). However, the Participant is not a Specified Employee unless any stock of the Plan Sponsor is publicly traded on an established securities market or otherwise, as defined in Code §1.897-1(m). If the Participant is a key employee at any time during the twelve (12) months ending on the identification date (see below), the Participant is a Specified Employee for the twelve (12) month period commencing on the first day of the fourth month following the identification date. For purposes of this Article, the identification date is December 31. The determination of the Participant as a Specified Employee shall be made by the Administrator in accordance with IRC Section 416(i), the “specified employee” requirements of Section 409A, and Treasury Regulations.

 

1.24         “Taxable Year” shall mean the twelve (12) consecutive month period ending each December 31.

 

1.25         “Treasury Regulations” shall mean regulations promulgated by the Internal Revenue Service for the U.S. Department of the Treasury, as they may be amended from time to time.

 

1.26         “Trust” shall mean one or more trusts that may be established in accordance with the terms of this Plan.

 

ARTICLE 2
Selection, Enrollment, Eligibility

 

2.1           Selection by Plan Sponsor. Participation in the Plan shall be limited to a select group of management or highly compensated employees of the Plan Sponsor, as determined by the Plan Sponsor in its sole and absolute discretion. The initial group of Eligible Employees shall become Participants on the Effective Date. Any Eligible Employee selected as a Plan Participant after the Effective Date, shall become a Participant on a date determined by the Plan Sponsor.

 

  Page 4 of 17

 

 

2.2          Re-Employment. If a Participant who incurs a Separation from Service is subsequently re-employed, he or she may, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Plan Administrator, become a Participant in accordance with the provisions of the Plan.

 

2.3           Enrollment Requirements. As a condition of participation, each selected Employee shall complete, execute, and return to the Plan Administrator all form(s) required by the Plan Administrator and within the time specified by the Plan Administrator. In addition, the Plan Administrator shall establish such other enrollment requirements as it determines necessary or advisable.

 

2.4          Eligibility; Commencement of Participation. Provided that an Employee selected to participate in the Plan has met all enrollment requirements set forth in the Plan and required by the Plan Administrator, the Employee shall commence participation in the Plan on the date the Plan is executed by the Plan Sponsor.

 

2.5           Termination of Participation. If the Plan Administrator determines in good faith that a Participant no longer qualifies as a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees, as membership in such group is determined in accordance with Section 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of ERISA, the Plan Administrator shall cease further benefit accruals hereunder.

 

ARTICLE 3
BENEFITS

 

3.1         Normal Retirement Benefit. If the Participant remains in the service of the Plan Sponsor until reaching his Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be entitled to his Normal Retirement Benefit. The annual installments shall commence to be paid on the on the first day of the second month following the Participant’s Separation from Service. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the first day of the seventh month following Separation from Service.

 

3.2         Death Prior to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant should die while actively employed by the Plan Sponsor at any time after the date of this Plan but prior to his Normal Retirement Age, the Plan Sponsor will pay the Accrued Benefit in fifteen (15) equal annual installments to the Participant’s Beneficiary. The payments shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant dies.

 

3.3         Death Subsequent to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant dies while receiving payments, but prior to receiving the fifteen (15) annual installment payments due and owing hereunder, the unpaid balance of the payments shall continue to be paid to the Participant’s Beneficiary for the balance of the fifteen (15) annual installments.

 

3.4         Disability Benefit. In the event the Participant becomes Disabled prior to the date the Participant dies or experiences a Separation from Service, and prior to the date of a Change in Control, the Participant shall be entitled to receive his Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of determination of Disability. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the month following the Participant’s sixty-fifth (65th) birthday or death (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in fifteen (15) equal annual installments.

 

  Page 5 of 17

 

 

3.5           Separation from Service Benefit. If the Participant experiences a Separation from Service prior to Normal Retirement Age, death, Disability, or as described in the second paragraph of Section 3.6, then the Participant shall be entitled to a benefit equal to the Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of Separation from Service. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or dies (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in fifteen (15) equal annual installments. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the later of (i) the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or (ii) the first day of the seventh month following Separation from Service (except in the case of a Separation from Service due to death).

 

3.6         Change in Control Benefit. In the event there is a Change in Control prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, the Participant shall become 100% vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit. Subject to the paragraph below, the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant attains Normal Retirement Age or dies, whichever is first to occur.

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, if the Participant experiences a Separation from Service within 24 months following the Change in Control, the following provisions apply. The Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the Participant’s Separation from Service (or, if the Participant is a Specified Employee, on the first day of the seventh month following the Participant’s Separation from Service). In lieu of receiving the Normal Retirement Benefit in fifteen (15) annual installments, the Participant may elect to receive the Normal Retirement Benefit pursuant to this Section 3.6 in the form of (i) a lump sum, (ii) equal annual installments over two (2) years, or (iii) equal annual installments over five (5) years. Any election by the Participant pursuant to this Section 3.6 must be submitted to the Plan Sponsor by the Effective Date, or within thirty (30) days thereafter.

 

3.7           Termination for Cause. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, if the Plan Sponsor terminates the Participant’s employment for “Cause”, then the Participant shall not be entitled to any benefits under the terms of this Plan.

 

3.8          Prohibition on Acceleration of Payments. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, neither the Plan Sponsor nor a Participant may accelerate the time or schedule of any payment or amount scheduled to be paid under this Plan, except that the Plan Sponsor, in its discretion, may accelerate payments as permitted by Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(j)(4). The Plan Sponsor shall deny any change made to an election if the Plan Sponsor determines that the change violates the requirements of authoritative guidance.

 

3.9          Subsequent Changes in the Time or Form of Payment. If permitted by the Plan Sponsor, a Participant may elect to change the time or form of payments (collectively, “payment elections”), provided the following conditions are met:

 

(i)          Such change will not take effect until at least twelve (12) months after the date on which the new payment election is made and approved by the Plan Administrator;

 

(ii)         If the change of payment election relates to a payment based on Separation from Service, or if the payment is at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the change of payment election must result in payment being deferred for a period of not less than five (5) years from the date such payment would otherwise have been paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, five (5) years from the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid);

 

(iii)        If the change of payment election relates to a payment at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the Participant or Plan Sponsor must make the change of payment election not less than twelve (12) months before the date the payment is scheduled to be paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, twelve (12) months before the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid).

 

  Page 6 of 17

 

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, to the extent permitted under Section 409A and by the Plan Sponsor, the Participant may elect the timing and manner of distributions during 2008 (except that a Participant cannot in 2008 change payment elections with respect to payments that the Participant would otherwise receive in 2008, or make an election that causes payments scheduled for subsequent years to be made in 2008), and such election shall not be treated as a change in the form and timing of payment or an acceleration of payment under Section 409A.

 

3.10         Delay in Payment by Plan Sponsor.

 

(a)          A payment may be delayed to a date after the designated payment date under any of the circumstances described below, and the provision will not fail to meet the requirements of establishing a permissible payment event. The delay in the payment will not constitute a subsequent deferral election, so long as the Plan Sponsor treats all payments to similarly situated Participants on a reasonably consistent basis.

 

(i)           Payments subject to Section 162(m). A payment may be delayed to the extent that the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that if the payment were made as scheduled, the Plan Sponsor’s deduction with respect to such payment would not be permitted due to the application of Code §162(m). If a payment is delayed, such payment must be made either:

 

(1)         during the Participant’s first Taxable Year in which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates, or should reasonably anticipate, that if the payment is made during such year, the deduction of such payment will not be barred by application of Code §162(m) or,

 

(2)         during the period beginning with the date of the Participant’s Separation from Service and ending on the later of the last day of the Taxable Year of the Plan Sponsor in which the Participant separates from service or the 15th day of the third month following the Participant’s Separation from Service. Where any scheduled payment to a specific Participant in the Plan Sponsor’s Taxable Year is delayed in accordance with this Article, the delay in payment will be treated as a subsequent deferral election unless all scheduled payments to the Participant that could be delayed in accordance with this Article are also delayed. Where the payment is delayed to a date on or after the Participant’s Separation from Service, the payment will be considered a payment upon a Separation from Service for purposes of the rules under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(2) (payments to specified employees upon a separation from service) and, the 6 month delay rule will apply for Specified Employees.

 

(ii)          Payments that would violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law. A payment may be delayed where the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law provided that the payment is made at the earliest date at which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will not cause such violation. The making of a payment that would cause inclusion in gross income or the application of any penalty provision or other provision of the Internal Revenue Code is not treated as a violation of applicable law.

 

(iii)          Other events and conditions. The Plan Sponsor may delay a payment upon such other events and conditions as the Commissioner of the IRS may prescribe.

 

  Page 7 of 17

 

 

(iv)      Not withstanding the above, a payment may be delayed where the payment would jeopardize the ability of the Plan Sponsor to continue as a going concern.

 

(b)           Treatment of Payment as Made on Designated Payment Date. Each payment under this Plan is deemed made on the required payment date even if the payment is made after such date, provided the payment is made by the latest of: (i) the end of the calendar year in which the payment is due; (ii) the 15th day of the third calendar month following the payment due date; (iii) in case the Plan Sponsor cannot calculate the payment amount on account of administrative impracticality which is beyond the Participant’s control (or the control of the Participant’s estate), in the first calendar year in which payment is practicable; (iv) in case the Plan Sponsor does not have sufficient funds to make the payment without jeopardizing the Plan Sponsor’s solvency, in the first calendar year in which the Plan Sponsor’s funds are sufficient to make the payment.

 

3.11         Unsecured General Creditor Status of Participant:

 

(a)          Payment to the Participant or any Beneficiary hereunder shall be made from assets which shall continue, for all purposes, to be part of the general, unrestricted assets of the Plan Sponsor and no person shall have any interest in any such asset by virtue of any provision of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligation hereunder shall be an unfunded and unsecured promise to pay money in the future. To the extent that any person acquires a right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor under the provisions hereof, such right shall be no greater than the right of any unsecured general creditor of the Plan Sponsor and no such person shall have or acquire any legal or equitable right, interest, or claim in or to any property or assets of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(b)          In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies insuring the life of a Participant or employee, to allow the Plan Sponsor to recover or meet the cost of providing benefits, in whole or in part, hereunder, no Participant or Beneficiary shall have any rights whatsoever in said policy or the proceeds therefrom. The Plan Sponsor or the Trustee of the Trust (if any) shall be the primary owner and beneficiary of any such insurance policy or property and shall possess and may exercise all incidents of ownership therein. No insurance policy with regard to any director, “highly compensated employee”, or “highly compensated individual” as defined in IRS Section 101(j) shall be acquired before satisfying the Section 101(j) “Notice and Consent” requirements.

 

(c)          In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies on the life of a Participant as provided for above, then all of such policies shall be subject to the claims of the creditors of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(d)          If the Plan Sponsor chooses to obtain insurance on the life of a Participant in connection with its obligations under this Plan, the Participant hereby agrees to take such physical examinations and to truthfully and completely supply such information as may be required by the Plan Sponsor or the insurance company designated by the Plan Sponsor.

 

3.12         Facility of Payment. If a distribution is to be made to a minor, or to a person who is otherwise incompetent, then the Plan Administrator may make such distribution: (i) to the legal guardian, or if none, to a parent of a minor payee with whom the payee maintains his or her residence; or (ii) to the conservator or administrator or, if none, to the person having custody of an incompetent payee. Any such distribution shall fully discharge the Plan Sponsor and the Plan Administrator from further liability on account thereof.

 

  Page 8 of 17

 

 

3.13          Excise Tax Limitation. In the event that any payment or benefit (within the meaning of Code §280G(b)(2) of the Code) to the Participant or for the Participant’s benefit paid or payable or distributed or distributable (including, but not limited to, the acceleration of the time for the vesting or payment of such benefit or payment) pursuant to the terms of this Plan or otherwise in connection with, or arising out of, the Participant’s employment with the Plan Sponsor or any of its Affiliates or a Change in Control within the meaning of Code §280G of the Code (a “Payment” or “Payments”), would be subject to the excise tax imposed by Code §4999 of the Code (the “Excise Tax”), then the Payments shall be increased in an amount necessary to provide for the payment of the excise tax imposed by Code § 4999 (the “Section 4999 Limit”). Any payment made to the Participant under this Section 3.13 shall be made no later than the end of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant remits the related taxes.

 

ARTICLE 4
Vesting and Taxes

 

4.1           Vesting. The Participant shall be vested at all times in his Accrued Benefit. Upon attainment of Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.2           Acceleration of Vesting. If, prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, there is a Change in Control of the Plan Sponsor, then the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.3          FICA, Withholding and Other Taxes:

 

(a)          When a Participant becomes vested in a portion of his Normal Retirement Benefit, the Plan Sponsor shall withhold from the Participant’s cash compensation in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor, the Participant’s share of FICA and other employment taxes on such vested Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

(b)          Distributions. The Plan Sponsor, or trustee of the Trust, shall withhold from any payments made to a Participant or Beneficiary under this Plan all federal, state and local income, employment and other taxes required to be withheld by the Plan Sponsor in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor or the trustee of the Trust in compliance with applicable tax withholding requirements.

 

ARTICLE 5
BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION

 

5.1           Designation of Beneficiaries.

 

(a)           The Participant may designate any person or persons (who may be named contingently or successively) to receive any benefits payable under the Plan upon the Participant’s death, and the designation may be changed from time to time by the Participant by filing a new designation. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the Participant and shall be in the form prescribed by the Administrator, and shall be effective only when filed in writing with the Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime.

 

(b)           In the absence of a valid Beneficiary designation, or if, at the time any benefit payment is due to a Beneficiary, there is no living Beneficiary validly named by the Participant, the Plan Sponsor shall pay the benefit payment to the Participant’s spouse, if then living, and if the spouse is not then living to the Participant’s then living descendants, if any, per stirpes, and if there are no living descendants, to the Participant’s estate. In determining the existence or identity of anyone entitled to a benefit payment, the Plan Sponsor may rely conclusively upon information supplied by the Participant’s personal representative, executor, or administrator.

 

  Page 9 of 17

 

 

(c)           If a question arises as to the existence or identity of anyone entitled to receive a death benefit payment under the Plan, or if a dispute arises with respect to any death benefit payment under the Plan, the Plan Sponsor may distribute the payment to the Participant’s estate without liability for any tax or other consequences, or may take any other action which the Plan Sponsor deems to be appropriate.

 

5.2          Information to be Furnished by Participants and Beneficiaries; Inability to Locate Participants or Beneficiaries. Any communication, statement, or notice addressed to the Participant or to a Beneficiary at his or her last post office address as shown on the Plan Sponsor’s records shall be binding on the Participant or Beneficiary for all purposes of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to search for any Participant or Beneficiary beyond the sending of a registered letter to the last known address.

 

ARTICLE 6
ADMINISTRATION

 

6.1           Administrator Duties. The Administrator shall be responsible for the management, operation, and administration of the Plan. The Administrator shall act at meetings by affirmative vote of a majority of its members. Any action permitted to be taken at a meeting may be taken without a meeting if, prior to such action, a unanimous written consent to the action is signed by all members and such written consent is filed with the minutes of the proceedings of the Administrator, provided, however that no member may vote or act upon any matter which relates solely to the Participant. The chair, or any other member or members of the Administrator designated by the chair, may execute any certificate or other written direction on behalf of the Administrator. When making a determination or calculation, the Administrator shall be entitled to rely on information furnished by the Participant or the Plan Sponsor. No provision of this Plan shall be construed as imposing on the Administrator any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law, or any duty similar to any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law.

 

6.2          Administrator Authority. The Administrator shall enforce this Plan in accordance with its terms, shall be charged with the general administration of this Plan, and shall have all powers necessary to accomplish its purposes, including, but not by way of limitation, the following:

 

(a)           To construe and interpret the terms and provisions of this Plan;

 

(b)           To compute and certify the amount and kind of benefits payable to the Participant and their Beneficiaries; to determine the time and manner in which such benefits are paid; and to determine the amount of any withholding taxes to be deducted;

 

(c)           To maintain all records that may be necessary for the administration of this Plan;

 

(d)           To provide for the disclosure of all information and the filing or provision of all reports and statements to the Participant, Beneficiaries, and governmental agencies as shall be required by law;

 

(e)           To make and publish such rules for the regulation of this Plan and procedures for the administration of this Plan as are not inconsistent with the terms hereof;

 

(f)           To administer this Plan’s claims procedures;

 

(g)           To approve election forms and procedures for use under this Plan; and

 

  Page 10 of 17

 

 

(h)            To appoint a plan record keeper or any other agent, and to delegate to them such powers and duties in connection with the administration of this Plan as the Administrator may from time to time prescribe.

 

6.3          Binding Effect of Decision. The decision or action of the Administrator with respect to any question arising out of or in connection with the administration, interpretation, and application of this Plan and the rules and regulations promulgated hereunder shall be final and conclusive and binding upon all persons having any interest in this Plan.

 

6.4          Compensation, Expenses, and Indemnity. The Administrator shall serve without compensation for services rendered hereunder. The Administrator is authorized at the expense of the Plan Sponsor to employ such legal counsel and/or Plan record keeper as it may deem advisable to assist in the performance of its duties hereunder. Expense and fees in connection with the administration of this Plan shall be paid by the Plan Sponsor.

 

6.5          Plan Sponsor Information. To enable the Administrator to perform its functions, the Plan Sponsor shall supply full and timely information to the Administrator, on all matters relating to the compensation of the Participant, the date and circumstances of the Disability, death, or Separation from Service of the Participant, and such other pertinent information as the Administrator may reasonably require.

 

6.6           Periodic Statements. Under procedures established by the Administrator, Participant shall be provided a statement of his Accrued Benefit on an annual basis.

 

ARTICLE 7
CLAIMS PROCEDURE

 

7.1           Claims Procedures. This Section 7.1 is based on final regulations issued by the Department of Labor and published in the Federal Register on November 21, 2000 and codified at section 2560.503 1 of the Department of Labor Regulations. If any provision of this Section 8.4 conflicts with the requirements of those regulations, the requirements of those regulations will prevail.

 

(a)           Initial Claim. A Participant or Beneficiary who believes he or she is entitled to any Benefit (a “Claimant”) under this Plan may file a claim with the Administrator. The Administrator will review the claim itself or appoint another individual or entity to review the claim.

 

(i)           Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability. If the claim is for a benefit other than a disability benefit, the Claimant will be notified within ninety (90) days after the claim is filed whether the claim is allowed or denied, unless the Claimant receives written notice from the Administrator or appointee of the Administrator before the end of the ninety (90) day period stating that special circumstances require an extension of the time for decision, such extension not to extend beyond the day which is one hundred eighty (180) days after the day the claim is filed.

 

(ii)          Disability Benefit Claims. In the case of a benefits claim that requires a determination by the Plan Administrator of a Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will notify the Claimant of the Plan’s adverse benefit determination within a reasonable period of time, but not later than forty-five (45) days after receipt of the claim. If, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, the Plan Administrator needs additional time to process a claim, the Claimant will be notified, within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator receives the claim, of those circumstances and of when the Plan Administrator expects to make its decision but not beyond seventy-five (75) days. If, prior to the end of the extension period, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, a decision cannot be rendered within that extension period, the period for making the determination may be extended for up to one hundred five (105) days, provided that the Plan Administrator notifies the Claimant of the circumstances requiring the extension and the date as of which the Plan expects to render a decision. The extension notice will specifically explain the standards on which entitlement to a disability benefit is based, the unresolved issues that prevent a decision on the claim and the additional information needed from the Claimant to resolve those issues, and the Claimant will be afforded at least forty-five (45) days within which to provide the specified information.

 

  Page 11 of 17

 

 

(iii)         Manner and Content of Denial of Initial Claims. If the Plan Administrator denies a claim, it must provide to the Claimant, in writing or by electronic communication: 

 

(A)       The specific reasons for the denial;

 

(B)       A reference to the Plan provision or insurance contract provision upon which the denial is based;

 

(C)       A description of any additional information or material that the Claimant must provide in order to perfect the claim;

 

(D)       An explanation of why such additional material or information is necessary;

 

(E)        Notice that the Claimant has a right to request a review of the claim denial and information on the steps to be taken if the Claimant wishes to request a review of the claim denial; and

 

(F)         A statement of the participant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) following a denial on review of the initial denial.

 

  In addition, in the case of a denial of disability benefits on the basis of the Plan Administrator’s independent determination of the Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will provide a copy of any rule, guideline, protocol, or other similar criterion relied upon in making the adverse determination (or a statement that the same will be provided upon request by the Claimant and without charge).

 

(b)           Review Procedures.

 

(i)           Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability. Except for claims requiring an independent determination of a Participant’s disability status, a request for review of a denied claim must be made in writing to the Plan Administrator within sixty (60) days after receiving notice of denial. The decision upon review will be made within sixty (60) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than one hundred twenty (120) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial sixty (60) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

The reviewer will afford the Claimant an opportunity to review and receive, without charge, all relevant documents, information and records and to submit issues and comments in writing to the Plan Administrator. The reviewer will take into account all comments, documents, records and other information submitted by the Claimant relating to the claim regardless of whether the information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

(ii)          Disability Benefit Claims. In addition to having the right to review documents and submit comments as described in (i) above, a Claimant whose claim for disability benefits requires an independent determination by the Plan Administrator of the Participant’s disability status has at least one hundred eighty (180) days following receipt of a notification of an adverse benefit determination within which to request a review of the initial determination. In such cases, the review will meet the following requirements:

 

  Page 12 of 17

 

 

(A)         The Plan will provide a review that does not afford deference to the initial adverse benefit determination and that is conducted by an appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan who did not make the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal, nor is a subordinate of the individual who made the determination.

 

(B)         The appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan will consult with a health care professional who has appropriate training and experience in the field of medicine involved in the medical judgment before making a decision on review of any adverse initial determination based in whole or in part on a medical judgment. The professional engaged for purposes of a consultation in the preceding sentence will not be an individual who was consulted in connection with the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal or the subordinate of any such individual.

 

(C)         The Plan will identify to the Claimant the medical or vocational experts whose advice was obtained on behalf of the Plan in connection with the review, without regard to whether the advice was relied upon in making the benefit review determination.

 

(D)         The decision on review will be made within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than ninety (90) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial forty-five (45) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

(iii)         Manner and Content of Notice of Decision on Review. Upon completion of its review of an adverse initial claim determination, the Plan Administrator will give the Claimant, in writing or by electronic notification, a notice containing:

 

(A)         its decision;

 

(B)         the specific reasons for the decision;

 

(C)         the relevant Plan provisions or insurance contract provisions on which its decision is based;

 

(D)         a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and without charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information in the Plan’s files which is relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits;

 

(E)         a statement describing the Claimant’s right to bring an action for judicial review under ERISA section 502(a); and

 

(F)         if an internal rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion was relied upon in making the adverse determination on review, a statement that a copy of the rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion will be provided without charge to the Claimant upon request.

 

(c)           Calculation of Time Periods. For purposes of the time periods specified in this Section, the period of time during which a benefit determination is required to be made begins at the time a claim is filed in accordance with the Plan procedures without regard to whether all the information necessary to make a decision accompanies the claim. If a period of time is extended due to a Claimant’s failure to submit all information necessary, the period for making the determination shall be tolled from the date the notification is sent to the Claimant until the date the Claimant responds.

 

(d)           Failure of Plan to Follow Procedures. If the Plan fails to follow the claims procedures required by this Section 7.1, a Claimant shall be deemed to have exhausted the administrative remedies available under the Plan and shall be entitled to pursue any available remedy under ERISA section 502(a) on the basis that the Plan has failed to provide a reasonable claims procedure that would yield a decision on the merits of the claim.

 

  Page 13 of 17

 

 

(e)           Failure of Claimant to Follow Procedures. A Claimant’s compliance with the foregoing provisions of this Section 7.1 is a mandatory prerequisite to the Claimant’s right to commence any legal action with respect to any claim for benefits under the Plan.

 

7.2           Arbitration of Claims. All claims or controversies arising out of or in connection with this Plan shall, subject to the initial review provided for in the foregoing provisions of this Article, be resolved through arbitration. Except as otherwise mutually agreed to by the parties, any arbitration shall be administered under and by the Judicial Arbitration & Mediation Services, Inc. (“JAMS”), in accordance with the JAMS procedures then in effect. The arbitration shall be held in the JAMS office nearest to where the Claimant is or was last employed by the Plan Sponsor or at a mutually agreeable location.

 

ARTICLE 8
AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

 

8.1          Amendment. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to amend this Plan at any time to comply with Section 409A and other Applicable Guidance or for any other purpose, provided that such amendment will not cause the Plan to violate the provisions of Section 409A. Except to the extent necessary to bring this Plan into compliance with Section 409A, no amendment or modification shall be effective to decrease the value or vested percentage of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit in existence at the time an amendment or modification is made to the Plan.

 

8.2           Plan Termination. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to terminate this Plan in accordance with one of the following, subject to the restrictions imposed by Section 409A and authoritative guidance:

 

                  (a)          Corporate Dissolution or Bankruptcy. This Plan may be terminated within twelve (12) months of a corporate dissolution taxed under Code § 331, or with the approval of a Plan Sponsor bankruptcy court pursuant to 11 U.S.C. Section 503(b)(1)(A), and distributions may then be made to the Participant provided that the amounts payable under this Plan are included in the Participants’ gross income in the latest of:

 

(i)           The calendar year in which the Plan termination occurs;

 

(ii)          The calendar year in which the amount is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; or

 

(iii)         The first calendar year in which the payment is administratively practicable.

 

                  (b)          Change in Control. This Plan may be terminated within the thirty (30) days preceding or the twelve (12) months following a Change in Control. This Plan will then be treated as terminated only if all substantially similar arrangements sponsored by the Plan Sponsor are terminated so that all participants in all similar arrangements are required to receive all amounts of compensation deferred under the terminated arrangements within twelve (12) months of the date of termination of the arrangements.

 

                  (c)          Discretionary Termination. The Plan Sponsor may also terminate this Plan and make distributions provided that:

 

  Page 14 of 17

 

 

(i)           All plans sponsored by the Plan Sponsor that would be aggregated with any terminated arrangements under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(c) are terminated;

 

(ii)          No payments, other than payments that would be payable under the terms of this plan if the termination had not occurred, are made within twelve (12) months of this plan termination;

 

(iii)         All payments are made within twenty-four (24) months of this plan termination; and

 

(iv)          Neither the Plan Sponsor nor any of its affiliates adopts a new plan that would be aggregated with any terminated plan if the same Participant participated in both arrangements at any time within three (3) years following the date of termination of this Plan.

 

(v)           The termination does not occur proximate to a downturn in the financial health of the Plan Sponsor.

 

ARTICLE 9
THE TRUST

 

9.1           Establishment of Trust. The Plan Sponsor may establish a grantor trust (the ‘Trust”), of which the Plan Sponsor is the grantor, within the meaning of subpart E, part I, subchapter J, subtitle A of the Code, to pay benefits under this Plan. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, all benefits payable under this Plan to a Participant shall be paid directly by the Plan Sponsor from the Trust. To the extent such benefits are not paid from the Trust, the benefits shall be paid from the general assets of the Plan Sponsor. The Trust, (if any), shall be a grantor trust which conforms to the terms of the model trust as described in IRS Revenue Procedure 92-64, I.R.B. 1992-33, as same may be amended or modified from time to time. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, the assets of the Trust will be subject to the claims of the Plan Sponsor’s creditors in the event of its insolvency. Except as may otherwise be provided under the Trust, the Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to set aside, earmark, or escrow any funds or other assets to satisfy its obligations under this Plan, and the Participant and/or his or her designated Beneficiaries shall not have any property interest in any specific assets of the Plan Sponsor other than the unsecured right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor, as provided in this Plan.

 

9.2           Interrelationship of the Plan and the Trust. The provisions of this Plan shall govern the rights of a Participant to receive distributions pursuant to this Plan. The provisions of the Trust (if established) shall govern the rights of the Participant and the creditors of the Plan Sponsor to the assets transferred to the Trust. The Plan Sponsor and each Participant shall at all times remain liable to carry out its obligations under this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligations under this Plan may be satisfied with Trust assets distributed pursuant to the terms of the Trust.

 

9.3          Contribution to the Trust. Amounts may be contributed by the Plan Sponsor to the Trust at the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor.

 

ARTICLE 10
MISCELLANEOUS

 

10.1          Validity. In case any provision of this Plan shall be illegal or invalid for any reason, said illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining parts hereof, but this Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such illegal or invalid provision had never been inserted herein; except to the extent that Section 409A requires that this Section 10.1 be disregarded because it purports to nullify Plan terms that are not in compliance with Section 409A.

 

  Page 15 of 17

 

 

10.2          Nonassignability. Neither any Participant nor any other person shall have any right to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage, or otherwise encumber, transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amounts, if any, payable hereunder, or any part hereof, which are, and all rights to which are expressly declared to be, unassignable and non-transferable. No part of the amounts payable shall, prior to actual payment, be subject to seizure, attachment, garnishment (except to the extent the Plan Sponsor may be required to garnish amounts from payments due under this Plan pursuant to applicable law), or sequestration for the payment of any debts, judgments, alimony, or separate maintenance owed by a Participant or any other person, be transferable by operation of law in the event of a Participant’s or any other person’s bankruptcy or insolvency, or be transferable to a spouse as a result of a property settlement or otherwise. If any Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest is adjudicated bankrupt or purports to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage or otherwise encumber transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amount, if any, payable hereunder, or any part thereof, the Plan Administrator, in its discretion, may cancel such distribution or payment (or any part thereof) to or for the benefit of such Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest in such manner as the Plan Administrator shall direct.

 

10.3          Not a Contract of Employment. The terms and conditions of this Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract of employment between the Plan Sponsor and the Participant. Nothing in this Plan shall be deemed to give a Participant the right to be retained in the service of the Plan Sponsor as an employee or otherwise or to interfere with the right of the Plan Sponsor to discipline or discharge the Participant at any time.

 

10.4          Unclaimed Benefits. In the case that the Plan Administrator is unable to locate the Participant or Beneficiary to whom a benefit is payable, such Plan benefit shall be forfeited to the Plan Sponsor upon the Plan Administrator’s determination. Notwithstanding the foregoing, payment may be made to a Participant, and that payment will be treated as made upon the date specified under the Plan, if the Participant provides notice to the Plan Sponsor within ninety (90) days of the latest date upon which the payment could have been timely made in accordance with the terms of the Plan and Section 409A, and if not paid, if the Participant takes further enforcement measures within one-hundred eighty (180) days after such latest date.

 

10.5          Governing Law. Subject to ERISA, the provisions of this Plan shall be construed and interpreted according to the internal laws of the State of Maryland without regard to its conflicts of laws principles.

 

10.6          Notice. Any notice, consent or demand required or permitted to be given under the provisions of this Plan shall be in writing and shall be signed by the party giving or making the same. If such notice, consent, or demand is mailed, it shall be sent by United States certified mail, postage prepaid, addressed to the addressee’s last known address as shown on the records of the Plan Sponsor. The date of such mailing shall be deemed the date of notice consent or demand. Any person may change the address to which notice is to be sent by giving notice of the change of address in the manner aforesaid.

 

10.7          Coordination with Other Benefits. The benefits provided for a Participant and Participant’s Beneficiary under this Plan are in addition to any other benefits available to such Participant under any other plan or program for employees of the Plan Sponsor. This Plan shall supplement and shall not supersede, modify, or amend any other such plan or program except as may otherwise be expressly provided herein.

 

10.8          Compliance. A Participant shall have no right to receive payment with respect to the Participant’s Accrued Benefit until all legal and contractual obligations of the Plan Sponsor relating to establishment of the Plan and the making of such payments shall have been complied with in full.

 

  Page 16 of 17

 

 

10.9          Compliance with Section 409A and Authoritative Guidance. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, all provisions of this Plan, including but not limited to the definitions of terms, elections to defer, and distributions, shall be made in accordance with and shall comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. The Plan Sponsor will amend the terms of this Plan retroactively, if necessary, to the extent required to comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. No election made by a Participant hereunder, and no change made by a Participant to a previous election, shall be accepted by the Plan Sponsor if the Plan Sponsor determines that acceptance of such election or change could violate any of the requirements of Section 409A or the authoritative guidance. This Plan and any accompanying forms shall be interpreted in accordance with, and incorporate the terms and conditions required by, Section 409A and the authoritative guidance, including, without limitation, any such Treasury Regulations or other guidance that may be issued after the date hereof.

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Plan Sponsor has signed this Plan document as of the Effective Date.

 

WITNESS:   FOR THE PLAN SPONSOR:
     
/s/ Laura Hewitt   /s/ William J. Pasenelli
(third party witness)   (Bank officer other than Participant)
     
Laura Hewitt   William J. Pasenelli
(print name)   (print name)
     
DATE:   PARTICIPANT:
     
May 6, 2011   /s/ Todd Capitani
    (signature)
     
    Todd Capitani
    (Todd Capitani)

 

  Page 17 of 17

 

 

Amendment Number One
Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan

 

THIS AMENDMENT, made and entered into as of [date], by and between Community Bank of Tri-County (the “Bank”) and Todd Capitani, an executive of the Bank (the “Participant”).

 

WHEREAS, the Bank entered into a Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement (the “Agreement”) the Participant as of January 1, 2011; and

 

WHEREAS, the Agreement provides the Participant with supplemental retirement benefits following the Participant’s separation from service under certain circumstances; and

 

WHEREAS, Section 3.13 of the Agreement provides the Participant with an additional benefit if any benefits under the Agreement or otherwise become subject to an excise tax under Section 4999 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), in connection with a change in control; and

 

WHEREAS, the parties to the Agreement desire to eliminate the tax indemnification provided by Section 3.13 of the Agreement and, instead, limit benefits otherwise subject to an excise tax under Section 4999 of the Code.

 

ACCORDINGLY, the Agreement is amended by deleting Section 3.13 of the Agreement and replacing it with the following new Section 3.13:

 

3.13 Excise Tax Limitation. Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, any payment due under this Agreement shall be reduced in a manner and to the extent so that no payments made under this Agreement, when aggregated with any other payments to be made to the Participant, shall be an “excess parachute payment” in accordance with Section 280G of the Code and be subject to the excise tax provided for under Section 4999 of the Code.”

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto each acknowledge that each has carefully read this amendment to the Agreement and executed the original on the date first set forth above.

 

    COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ William J. Pasenelli
W itness   For the Bank
     
    PARTICIPANT
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ Todd Capitani
W itness   Todd Capitani
     

 

 

Exhibit 10.34

 

SUPPLEMENTAL EXECUTIVE RETIREMENT PLAN

 

THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 1st day of January, 2011, by and between Community Bank of TRI-County, a banking corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, hereinafter referred to as the “Plan Sponsor”, and James Burke, hereinafter referred to as the “Participant”.

 

WITNESSETH

 

WHEREAS, it is the consensus of the Board that the Participant’s services to the Plan Sponsor in the past have been of exceptional merit and have constituted an invaluable contribution to the general welfare of the Plan Sponsor bringing it to its present status of operating efficiency, and its present position in its field of activity; and,

 

WHEREAS, the experience of the Participant, his knowledge of the affairs of the Plan Sponsor, his reputation and contacts in the industry are so valuable that assurance of his continued services is essential for the future growth and profits of the Plan Sponsor and it is in the best interests of the Plan Sponsor to arrange terms of continued employment for the Participant so as to reasonably assure his remaining in the Plan Sponsor’s employment during his lifetime or until the age of retirement; and,

 

WHEREAS, it is the desire of the Plan Sponsor that his services be retained as herein provided; and,

 

WHEREAS, the Participant is willing to continue in the employ of the Plan Sponsor provided the Plan Sponsor agrees to pay to his beneficiaries certain benefits in accordance with the tel. ills and conditions hereinafter set forth; and,

 

WHEREAS, the Plan Sponsor intends that the Plan shall at all times be administered and interpreted in such a manner as to constitute an unfunded nonqualified deferred compensation plan for tax purposes and for purposes of Title I of ERISA. This Plan is not intended to qualify for favorable tax treatment pursuant to IRC Section 401(a) of the Code or any successor section or statute. This Plan is intended to comply with IRC Section 409A as created under The American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 (the “Jobs Act of 2004”). It is both anticipated and expected that the terms and provisions of this Plan may need to be amended in the future to assure continued compliance. The Plan Sponsor and the Participant acknowledge that fact and agree to take any and all steps necessary to operate the plan in “good faith” based on their current understanding of the regulations;

 

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of services performed in the past and to be performed in the future as well as of the mutual promises and covenants herein contained, it is agreed as follows:

 

ARTICLE 1
DEFINITIONS

 

DEFINITION OF TERMS. Certain words and phrases are defined when first used in later Articles of this Plan. Whenever any words are used herein in the masculine, they shall be construed as though they were in the feminine in all cases where they would so apply; and whenever any words are used herein in the singular or in the plural, they shall be construed as though they were used in the plural or the singular, as the case may be, in all cases where they would so apply. For the purpose of this Plan, unless otherwise clearly apparent from the context, the following phrases or terms shall have the following indicated meanings:

 

  Page 1 of 17

 

 

1.1           “Accrued Benefit” shall mean the portion of the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit that has accrued as of the applicable date of reference, with respect to services performed by the Participant beginning on January 1, 2011, as calculated for purposes of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and recorded on the books of the Plan Sponsor.

 

1.2           “Applicable Guidance” shall mean, as the context requires, Code § 409A and the Final Treasury Regulations issued thereunder, or other written Treasury or IRS guidance regarding or affecting Code § 409A.

 

1.3           “Beneficiary” shall mean the person or persons, natural or otherwise, designated in writing by a Participant in accordance with Article 5 before his death to receive Plan benefits in the event of the Participant’s death.

 

1.4           “Board” shall mean the board of directors of the Plan Sponsor, unless specifically noted otherwise.

 

1.5           “Cause” shall mean any of the following acts or circumstances: (i) willful destruction by the Participant of property of the Plan Sponsor having a material value to the Plan Sponsor; (ii) fraud, embezzlement, theft, or comparable dishonest activity committed by the Participant (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iii) the Participant’s conviction of or entering a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any crime constituting a felony or any misdemeanor involving fraud, dishonesty, or moral turpitude (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iv) the Participant’s breach, neglect, refusal, or failure to materially discharge the Participant’s duties (other than due to physical or mental illness) commensurate with the Participant’s title and function or the Participant’s failure to comply with the lawful directions of a senior managing officer of the Plan Sponsor in any such case that is not cured within fifteen (15) days after the Participant has received written notice thereof from such senior managing officer; or (v) any willful misconduct by the Participant which may cause substantial economic or reputation injury to the Plan Sponsor, including, but not limited to, sexual harassment.

 

1.6           “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of a Change in Control event, within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5) and described in any of subparagraph (a), (b), or (c), (collectively referred to as “Change in Control Events”), or any combination of the Change in Control Events. To constitute a Change in Control Event with respect to the Participant or Beneficiary, the Change in Control Event must relate to: (i) the corporation for whom the Participant is performing services at the time of the Change in Control Event; (ii) the corporation that is liable for the payment of the deferred compensation (or all corporations liable for the payment if more than one corporation is liable); or (iii) a corporation that is a majority shareholder of a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii), or any corporation in a chain of corporations in which each corporation is a majority shareholder of another corporation in the chain, ending in a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii).

 

(a)            Change in Ownership . A Change in Ownership occurs if a person, or a group of persons acting together, acquires more than fifty percent (50%) of the stock of the corporation, measured by voting power or value. Incremental increases in ownership by a person or group that already owns fifty percent (50%) of the corporation do not result in a Change of Ownership, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(v).

 

(b)            Change in Effective Control . A Change in Effective Control occurs if, over a twelve (12) month period: (i) a person or group acquires stock representing thirty percent (30%) of the voting power of the corporation; or (ii) a majority of the members of the board of directors of the ultimate parent corporation is replaced by directors not endorsed by the persons who were members of the board before the new directors’ appointment, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(vi).

 

  Page 2 of 17

 

 

(c)            Change in Ownership of a Substantial Portion of Corporate Assets . A Change in Control based on the sale of assets occurs if a person or group acquires Forty percent (40%) or more of the gross fair market value of the assets of a corporation over a twelve (12) month period. No change in control results pursuant to this Article (c) if the assets are transferred to certain entities controlled directly or indirectly by the shareholders of the transferring corporation, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(vii).

 

1.7           “Claimant” shall mean a person who believes that he or she is being denied a benefit to which he or she is entitled hereunder.

 

1.8           “Code” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.9           “Disability” shall mean a condition of the Participant whereby he or she either: (i) is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, or (ii) is, by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Plan Sponsor. The Administrator will determine whether the Participant has incurred a Disability based on its own good faith determination and may require the Participant to submit to reasonable physical and mental examinations for this purpose. The Participant will also be deemed to have incurred a Disability if determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration, Railroad Retirement Board, or in accordance with a disability insurance program, provided that the definition of disability applied under such disability insurance program complies with the requirements of Treasury Regulation §1.409A-3(i)(4) and authoritative guidance.

 

1.10          “Effective Date” shall mean the date specified on the first page of this Plan.

 

1.11          “Eligible Employee” shall mean for any Plan Year (or applicable portion of a Plan Year), an Employee who is determined by the Plan Sponsor, or its designee, to be a Participant under the Plan. If the Plan Sponsor determines that an Employee first becomes an Eligible Employee during a Plan Year, the Plan Sponsor shall notify the individual in writing of its determination and of the date during the Plan Year on which the individual shall first become a Plan Participant.

 

1.12          “Employee” shall mean a person providing services to the Plan Sponsor in the capacity of a common law Employee of the Plan Sponsor.

 

1.13           “ERISA” shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as it may be amended from time to time.

 

1.14           “Normal Retirement Age” shall mean the date the Participant attains age 65.

 

1.15           “Normal Retirement Benefit” shall mean an annual benefit payment in the amount of Sixty Four Thousand Two Hundred and Fifty Six dollars ($64,256) for a period of Fifteen (15) years.

 

1.16           “Participant” shall mean any Eligible Employee: (i) who is selected to participate in this Plan, or, (ii) a former Eligible Employee who continues to be entitled to a benefit under this Plan.

 

1.17             “Plan” shall mean this Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan Agreement, all Election Forms, the Trust, (if any), and any other written documents relevant to the Plan. For purposes of applying Code § 409A requirements, this Plan is a non-account balance plan under Treasury Regulation §1.409-1(c)(2)(i)(A).

   

  Page 3 of 17

 

 

1.18           “Plan Administrator” or “Administrator” shall be a committee designated by the Plan Sponsor. If a Participant is part of a group of persons designated as a committee or Plan Administrator, then the Participant may not participate in any activity or decision relating solely to his or her individual benefits under this Plan. Matters solely affecting the applicable Participant will be resolved by the remaining committee members.

 

1. 19           “Plan Sponsor” shall mean the person or entity: (i) receiving the services of the Participant; and (ii) all persons with whom such person or entity would be considered a single employer under the parent-subsidiary rules of Code §414(b) or §414(c).

 

1.20           “Plan Year” shall mean, for the first Plan Year, the period beginning on the Effective Date of the Plan and ending December 31 of such calendar year, and thereafter, a twelve (12) month period beginning January 1 of each calendar year and continuing through December 31 of such calendar year.

 

1.21           “Section 409A” shall mean Section 409A of the Code and the Treasury Regulations and other Applicable Guidance issued under that Section.

 

1.22           “Separation from Service” shall mean the occurrence of a Participant’s death, retirement, or “other termination of employment” (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(1)(ii)) with the Plan Sponsor (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(3)). However, a Separation from Service shall not occur if the Participant is on military leave, sick leave, or other bona fide leave of absence if the period of such leave does not exceed six months, or if longer, so long as the Participant retains a right to reemployment with the Plan Sponsor under an applicable statute or by contract.

 

1.23           “Specified Employee” shall mean that the Participant also satisfies the definition of a “key employee” as such term is defined in Code §416(i) (without regard to Section 416(i)(5)). However, the Participant is not a Specified Employee unless any stock of the Plan Sponsor is publicly traded on an established securities market or otherwise, as defined in Code §1.897-1(m). If the Participant is a key employee at any time during the twelve (12) months ending on the identification date (see below), the Participant is a Specified Employee for the twelve (12) month period commencing on the first day of the fourth month following the identification date. For purposes of this Article, the identification date is December 31. The determination of the Participant as a Specified Employee shall be made by the Administrator in accordance with IRC Section 416(i), the “specified employee” requirements of Section 409A, and Treasury Regulations.

 

1.24           “Taxable Year” shall mean the twelve (12) consecutive month period ending each December 31.

 

1.25           “Treasury Regulations” shall mean regulations promulgated by the Internal Revenue Service for the U.S. Department of the Treasury, as they may be amended from time to time.

 

1.26           “Trust” shall mean one or more trusts that may be established in accordance with the terms of this Plan.

 

ARTICLE 2
Selection, Enrollment, Eligibility

 

2.1           Selection by Plan Sponsor. Participation in the Plan shall be limited to a select group of management or highly compensated employees of the Plan Sponsor, as determined by the Plan Sponsor in its sole and absolute discretion. The initial group of Eligible Employees shall become Participants on the Effective Date. Any Eligible Employee selected as a Plan Participant after the Effective Date, shall become a Participant on a date determined by the Plan Sponsor.

 

  Page 4 of 17

 

 

2.2           Re-Employment. If a Participant who incurs a Separation from Service is subsequently re-employed, he or she may, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Plan Administrator, become a Participant in accordance with the provisions of the Plan.

 

2.3           Enrollment Requirements. As a condition of participation, each selected Employee shall complete, execute, and return to the Plan Administrator all form(s) required by the Plan Administrator and within the time specified by the Plan Administrator. In addition, the Plan Administrator shall establish such other enrollment requirements as it determines necessary or advisable.

 

2.4            Eligibility; Commencement of Participation. Provided that an Employee selected to participate in the Plan has met all enrollment requirements set forth in the Plan and required by the Plan Administrator, the Employee shall commence participation in the Plan on the date the Plan is executed by the Plan Sponsor.

 

2.5           Termination of Participation. If the Plan Administrator determines in good faith that a Participant no longer qualifies as a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees, as membership in such group is determined in accordance with Section 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of ERISA, the Plan Administrator shall cease further benefit accruals hereunder.

 

ARTICLE 3
BENEFITS

 

3.1           Normal Retirement Benefit. If the Participant remains in the service of the Plan Sponsor until reaching his Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be entitled to his Normal Retirement Benefit. The annual installments shall commence to be paid on the on the first day of the second month following the Participant’s Separation from Service. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the first day of the seventh month following Separation from Service.

 

3.2           Death Prior to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant should die while actively employed by the Plan Sponsor at any time after the date of this Plan but prior to his Normal Retirement Age, the Plan Sponsor will pay the Accrued Benefit in fifteen (15) equal annual installments to the Participant’s Beneficiary. The payments shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant dies.

 

3.3           Death Subsequent to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant dies while receiving payments, but prior to receiving the fifteen (15) annual installment payments due and owing hereunder, the unpaid balance of the payments shall continue to be paid to the Participant’s Beneficiary for the balance of the fifteen (15) annual installments.

 

3.4           Disability Benefit. In the event the Participant becomes Disabled prior to the date the Participant dies or experiences a Separation from Service, and prior to the date of a Change in Control, the Participant shall be entitled to receive his Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of determination of Disability. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the month following the the Participants sixty-fifth (65th) birthday or death (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in fifteen (15) equal annual installments.

 

  Page 5 of 17

 

 

3.5           Separation from Service Benefit. If the Participant experiences a Separation from Service prior to Normal Retirement Age, death, Disability, or as described in the second paragraph of Section 3.6, then the Participant shall be entitled to a benefit equal to the Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of Separation from Service. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or dies (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in fifteen (15) equal annual installments. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the later of (i) the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or (ii) the first day of the seventh month following Separation from Service (except in the case of a Separation from Service due to death).

 

3.6           Change in Control Benefit. In the event there is a Change in Control prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, the Participant shall become 100% vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit. Subject to the paragraph below, the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant attains Normal Retirement Age or dies, whichever is first to occur.

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, if the Participant experiences a Separation from Service within 24 months following the Change in Control, the following provisions apply. The Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the Participant’s Separation from Service (or, if the Participant is a Specified Employee, on the first day of the seventh month following the Participant’s Separation from Service). In lieu of receiving the Normal Retirement Benefit in fifteen (15) annual installments, the Participant may elect to receive the Normal Retirement Benefit pursuant to this Section 3.6 in the form of (i) a lump sum, (ii) equal annual installments over two (2) years, or (iii) equal annual installments over five (5) years. Any election by the Participant pursuant to this Section 3.6 must be submitted to the Plan Sponsor by the Effective Date, or within thirty (30) days thereafter.

 

3.7           Termination for Cause. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, if the Plan Sponsor terminates the Participant’s employment for “Cause”, then the Participant shall not be entitled to any benefits under the terms of this Plan.

 

3.8           Prohibition on Acceleration of Payments. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, neither the Plan Sponsor nor a Participant may accelerate the time or schedule of any payment or amount scheduled to be paid under this Plan, except that the Plan Sponsor, in its discretion, may accelerate payments as permitted by Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(j)(4). The Plan Sponsor shall deny any change made to an election if the Plan Sponsor determines that the change violates the requirements of authoritative guidance.

 

3.9            Subsequent Changes in the Time or Form of Payment. If permitted by the Plan Sponsor, a Participant may elect to change the time or form of payments (collectively, “payment elections”), provided the following conditions are met:

 

(i)          Such change will not take effect until at least twelve (12) months after the date on which the new payment election is made and approved by the Plan Administrator;

 

(ii)         If the change of payment election relates to a payment based on Separation from Service, or if the payment is at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the change of payment election must result in payment being deferred for a period of not less than five (5) years from the date such payment would otherwise have been paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, five (5) years from the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid);

 

(iii)        If the change of payment election relates to a payment at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the Participant or Plan Sponsor must make the change of payment election not less than twelve (12) months before the date the payment is scheduled to be paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, twelve (12) months before the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid).

 

  Page 6 of 17

 

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, to the extent permitted under Section 409A and by the Plan Sponsor, the Participant may elect the timing and manner of distributions during 2008 (except that a Participant cannot in 2008 change payment elections with respect to payments that the Participant would otherwise receive in 2008, or make an election that causes payments scheduled for subsequent years to be made in 2008), and such election shall not be treated as a change in the form and timing of payment or an acceleration of payment under Section 409A.

 

3.10           Delay in Payment by Plan Sponsor.

 

(a)          A payment may be delayed to a date after the designated payment date under any of the circumstances described below, and the provision will not fail to meet the requirements of establishing a permissible payment event. The delay in the payment will not constitute a subsequent deferral election, so long as the Plan Sponsor treats all payments to similarly situated Participants on a reasonably consistent basis.

 

(i)           Payments subject to Section 162(m). A payment may be delayed to the extent that the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that if the payment were made as scheduled, the Plan Sponsor’s deduction with respect to such payment would not be permitted due to the application of Code §162(m). If a payment is delayed, such payment must be made either:

 

(1)   during the Participant’s first Taxable Year in which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates, or should reasonably anticipate, that if the payment is made during such year, the deduction of such payment will not be barred by application of Code §162(m) or,

 

(2)   during the period beginning with the date of the Participant’s Separation from Service and ending on the later of the last day of the Taxable Year of the Plan Sponsor in which the Participant separates from service or the 15th day of the third month following the Participant’s Separation from Service. Where any scheduled payment to a specific Participant in the Plan Sponsor’s Taxable Year is delayed in accordance with this Article, the delay in payment will be treated as a subsequent deferral election unless all scheduled payments to the Participant that could be delayed in accordance with this Article are also delayed. Where the payment is delayed to a date on or after the Participant’s Separation from Service, the payment will be considered a payment upon a Separation from Service for purposes of the rules under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(2) (payments to specified employees upon a separation from service) and, the 6 month delay rule will apply for Specified Employees.

 

(ii)          Payments that would violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law. A payment may be delayed where the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law provided that the payment is made at the earliest date at which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will not cause such violation. The making of a payment that would cause inclusion in gross income or the application of any penalty provision or other provision of the Internal Revenue Code is not treated as a violation of applicable law.

 

(iii)         Other events and conditions. The Plan Sponsor may delay a payment upon such other events and conditions as the Commissioner of the IRS may prescribe.

 

  Page 7 of 17

 

 

(iv)       Not withstanding the above, a payment may be delayed where the payment would jeopardize the ability of the Plan Sponsor to continue as a going concern.

 

(b)           Treatment of Payment as Made on Designated Payment Date. Each payment under this Plan is deemed made on the required payment date even if the payment is made after such date, provided the payment is made by the latest of: (i) the end of the calendar year in which the payment is due; (ii) the 15th day of the third calendar month following the payment due date; (iii) in case the Plan Sponsor cannot calculate the payment amount on account of administrative impracticality which is beyond the Participant’s control (or the control of the Participant’s estate), in the first calendar year in which payment is practicable; (iv) in case the Plan Sponsor does not have sufficient funds to make the payment without jeopardizing the Plan Sponsor’s solvency, in the first calendar year in which the Plan Sponsor’s funds are sufficient to make the payment.

 

3.11            Unsecured General Creditor Status of Participant:

 

(a)          Payment to the Participant or any Beneficiary hereunder shall be made from assets which shall continue, for all purposes, to be part of the general, unrestricted assets of the Plan Sponsor and no person shall have any interest in any such asset by virtue of any provision of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligation hereunder shall be an unfunded and unsecured promise to pay money in the future. To the extent that any person acquires a right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor under the provisions hereof, such right shall be no greater than the right of any unsecured general creditor of the Plan Sponsor and no such person shall have or acquire any legal or equitable right, interest, or claim in or to any property or assets of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(b)          In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies insuring the life of a Participant or employee, to allow the Plan Sponsor to recover or meet the cost of providing benefits, in whole or in part, hereunder, no Participant or Beneficiary shall have any rights whatsoever in said policy or the proceeds therefrom. The Plan Sponsor or the Trustee of the Trust (if any) shall be the primary owner and beneficiary of any such insurance policy or property and shall possess and may exercise all incidents of ownership therein. No insurance policy with regard to any director, “highly compensated employee”, or “highly compensated individual” as defined in IRS Section 101(j) shall be acquired before satisfying the Section 101(j) “Notice and Consent” requirements.

 

(c)          In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies on the life of a Participant as provided for above, then all of such policies shall be subject to the claims of the creditors of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(d)          If the Plan Sponsor chooses to obtain insurance on the life of a Participant in connection with its obligations under this Plan, the Participant hereby agrees to take such physical examinations and to truthfully and completely supply such information as may be required by the Plan Sponsor or the insurance company designated by the Plan Sponsor.

 

3.12          Facility of Payment. If a distribution is to be made to a minor, or to a person who is otherwise incompetent, then the Plan Administrator may make such distribution: (i) to the legal guardian, or if none, to a parent of a minor payee with whom the payee maintains his or her residence; or (ii) to the conservator or administrator or, if none, to the person having custody of an incompetent payee. Any such distribution shall fully discharge the Plan Sponsor and the Plan Administrator from further liability on account thereof.

 

  Page 8 of 17

 

 

3.13            Excise Tax Limitation. In the event that any payment or benefit (within the meaning of Code §280G(b)(2) of the Code) to the Participant or for the Participant’s benefit paid or payable or distributed or distributable (including, but not limited to, the acceleration of the time for the vesting or payment of such benefit or payment) pursuant to the terms of this Plan or otherwise in connection with, or arising out of, the Participant’s employment with the Plan Sponsor or any of its Affiliates or a Change in Control within the meaning of Code §280G of the Code (a “Payment” or “Payments”), would be subject to the excise tax imposed by Code §4999 of the Code (the “Excise Tax”), then the Payments shall be increased in an amount necessary to provide for the payment of the excise tax imposed by Code § 4999 (the “Section 4999 Limit”). Any payment made to the Participant under this Section 3.13 shall be made no later than the end of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant remits the related taxes.

 

ARTICLE 4
Vesting and Taxes

 

4.1           Vesting. The Participant shall be vested at all times in his Accrued Benefit. Upon attainment of Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.2           Acceleration of Vesting. If, prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, there is a Change in Control of the Plan Sponsor, then the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.3            FICA, Withholding and Other Taxes:

 

(a)          When a Participant becomes vested in a portion of his Normal Retirement Benefit, the Plan Sponsor shall withhold from the Participant’s cash compensation in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor, the Participant’s share of FICA and other employment taxes on such vested Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

(b)          Distributions. The Plan Sponsor, or trustee of the Trust, shall withhold from any payments made to a Participant or Beneficiary under this Plan all federal, state and local income, employment and other taxes required to be withheld by the Plan Sponsor in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor or the trustee of the Trust in compliance with applicable tax withholding requirements.

 

ARTICLE 5
BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION

 

5.1           Designation of Beneficiaries.

 

(a)           The Participant may designate any person or persons (who may be named contingently or successively) to receive any benefits payable under the Plan upon the Participant’s death, and the designation may be changed from time to time by the Participant by filing a new designation. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the Participant and shall be in the form prescribed by the Administrator, and shall be effective only when filed in writing with the Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime.

 

(b)           In the absence of a valid Beneficiary designation, or if, at the time any benefit payment is due to a Beneficiary, there is no living Beneficiary validly named by the Participant, the Plan Sponsor shall pay the benefit payment to the Participant’s spouse, if then living, and if the spouse is not then living to the Participant’s then living descendants, if any, per stirpes, and if there are no living descendants, to the Participant’s estate. In determining the existence or identity of anyone entitled to a benefit payment, the Plan Sponsor may rely conclusively upon information supplied by the Participant’s personal representative, executor, or administrator.

 

  Page 9 of 17

 

 

(c)           If a question arises as to the existence or identity of anyone entitled to receive a death benefit payment under the Plan, or if a dispute arises with respect to any death benefit payment under the Plan, the Plan Sponsor may distribute the payment to the Participant’s estate without liability for any tax or other consequences, or may take any other action which the Plan Sponsor deems to be appropriate.

 

5.2           Information to be Furnished by Participants and Beneficiaries; Inability to Locate Participants or Beneficiaries. Any communication, statement, or notice addressed to the Participant or to a Beneficiary at his or her last post office address as shown on the Plan Sponsor’s records shall be binding on the Participant or Beneficiary for all purposes of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to search for any Participant or Beneficiary beyond the sending of a registered letter to the last known address.

 

ARTICLE 6
ADMINISTRATION

 

6.1           Administrator Duties. The Administrator shall be responsible for the management, operation, and administration of the Plan. The Administrator shall act at meetings by affirmative vote of a majority of its members. Any action permitted to be taken at a meeting may be taken without a meeting if, prior to such action, a unanimous written consent to the action is signed by all members and such written consent is filed with the minutes of the proceedings of the Administrator, provided, however that no member may vote or act upon any matter which relates solely to the Participant. The chair, or any other member or members of the Administrator designated by the chair, may execute any certificate or other written direction on behalf of the Administrator. When making a determination or calculation, the Administrator shall be entitled to rely on information furnished by the Participant or the Plan Sponsor. No provision of this Plan shall be construed as imposing on the Administrator any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law, or any duty similar to any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law.

 

6.2           Administrator Authority. The Administrator shall enforce this Plan in accordance with its terms, shall be charged with the general administration of this Plan, and shall have all powers necessary to accomplish its purposes, including, but not by way of limitation, the following:

 

(a)           To construe and interpret the terms and provisions of this Plan;

 

(b)           To compute and certify the amount and kind of benefits payable to the Participant and their Beneficiaries; to determine the time and manner in which such benefits are paid; and to determine the amount of any withholding taxes to be deducted;

 

(c)           To maintain all records that may be necessary for the administration of this Plan;

 

(d)           To provide for the disclosure of all information and the filing or provision of all reports and statements to the Participant, Beneficiaries, and governmental agencies as shall be required by law;

 

(e)           To make and publish such rules for the regulation of this Plan and procedures for the administration of this Plan as are not inconsistent with the terms hereof;

 

(f)           To administer this Plan’s claims procedures;

 

(g)           To approve election forms and procedures for use under this Plan; and

 

  Page 10 of 17

 

 

(h)           To appoint a plan record keeper or any other agent, and to delegate to them such powers and duties in connection with the administration of this Plan as the Administrator may from time to time prescribe.

 

6.3           Binding Effect of Decision. The decision or action of the Administrator with respect to any question arising out of or in connection with the administration, interpretation, and application of this Plan and the rules and regulations promulgated hereunder shall be final and conclusive and binding upon all persons having any interest in this Plan.

 

6.4            Compensation, Expenses, and Indemnity. The Administrator shall serve without compensation for services rendered hereunder. The Administrator is authorized at the expense of the Plan Sponsor to employ such legal counsel and/or Plan record keeper as it may deem advisable to assist in the performance of its duties hereunder. Expense and fees in connection with the administration of this Plan shall be paid by the Plan Sponsor.

 

6.5           Plan Sponsor Information. To enable the Administrator to perform its functions, the Plan Sponsor shall supply full and timely information to the Administrator, on all matters relating to the compensation of the Participant, the date and circumstances of the Disability, death, or Separation from Service of the Participant, and such other pertinent information as the Administrator may reasonably require.

 

6.6           Periodic Statements. Under procedures established by the Administrator, Participant shall be provided a statement of his Accrued Benefit on an annual basis.

 

ARTICLE 7
CLAIMS PROCEDURE

 

7.1           Claims Procedures. This Section 7.1 is based on final regulations issued by the Department of Labor and published in the Federal Register on November 21, 2000 and codified at section 2560.503 1 of the Department of Labor Regulations. If any provision of this Section 8.4 conflicts with the requirements of those regulations, the requirements of those regulations will prevail.

 

(a)            Initial Claim . A Participant or Beneficiary who believes he or she is entitled to any Benefit (a “Claimant”) under this Plan may file a claim with the Administrator. The Administrator will review the claim itself or appoint another individual or entity to review the claim.

 

(i)           Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability . If the claim is for a benefit other than a disability benefit, the Claimant will be notified within ninety (90) days after the claim is filed whether the claim is allowed or denied, unless the Claimant receives written notice from the Administrator or appointee of the Administrator before the end of the ninety (90) day period stating that special circumstances require an extension of the time for decision, such extension not to extend beyond the day which is one hundred eighty (180) days after the day the claim is filed.

 

(ii)          Disability Benefit Claims . In the case of a benefits claim that requires a determination by the Plan Administrator of a Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will notify the Claimant of the Plan’s adverse benefit determination within a reasonable period of time, but not later than forty-five (45) days after receipt of the claim. If, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, the Plan Administrator needs additional time to process a claim, the Claimant will be notified, within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator receives the claim, of those circumstances and of when the Plan Administrator expects to make its decision but not beyond seventy-five (75) days. If, prior to the end of the extension period, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, a decision cannot be rendered within that extension period, the period for making the determination may be extended for up to one hundred five (105) days, provided that the Plan Administrator notifies the Claimant of the circumstances requiring the extension and the date as of which the Plan expects to render a decision. The extension notice will specifically explain the standards on which entitlement to a disability benefit is based, the unresolved issues that prevent a decision on the claim and the additional information needed from the Claimant to resolve those issues, and the Claimant will be afforded at least forty-five (45) days within which to provide the specified information.

 

  Page 11 of 17

 

 

(iii)         Manner and Content of Denial of Initial Claims . If the Plan Administrator denies a claim, it must provide to the Claimant, in writing or by electronic communication:

 

(A)         The specific reasons for the denial;

 

(B)         A reference to the Plan provision or insurance contract provision upon which the denial is based;

 

(C)         A description of any additional information or material that the Claimant must provide in order to perfect the claim;

 

(D)         An explanation of why such additional material or information is necessary;

 

(E)         Notice that the Claimant has a right to request a review of the claim denial and information on the steps to be taken if the Claimant wishes to request a review of the claim denial; and

 

(F)         A statement of the participant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) following a denial on review of the initial denial.

 

In addition, in the case of a denial of disability benefits on the basis of the Plan Administrator’s independent determination of the Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will provide a copy of any rule, guideline, protocol, or other similar criterion relied upon in making the adverse determination (or a statement that the same will be provided upon request by the Claimant and without charge).

 

(b)           Review Procedures .

 

(i)           Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability . Except for claims requiring an independent determination of a Participant’s disability status, a request for review of a denied claim must be made in writing to the Plan Administrator within sixty (60) days after receiving notice of denial. The decision upon review will be made within sixty (60) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than one hundred twenty (120) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial sixty (60) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

The reviewer will afford the Claimant an opportunity to review and receive, without charge, all relevant documents, information and records and to submit issues and comments in writing to the Plan Administrator. The reviewer will take into account all comments, documents, records and other information submitted by the Claimant relating to the claim regardless of whether the information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

(ii)          Disability Benefit Claims . In addition to having the right to review documents and submit comments as described in (i) above, a Claimant whose claim for disability benefits requires an independent determination by the Plan Administrator of the Participant’s disability status has at least one hundred eighty (180) days following receipt of a notification of an adverse benefit determination within which to request a review of the initial determination. In such cases, the review will meet the following requirements:

 

  Page 12 of 17

 

 

(A)         The Plan will provide a review that does not afford deference to the initial adverse benefit determination and that is conducted by an appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan who did not make the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal, nor is a subordinate of the individual who made the determination.

 

(B)         The appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan will consult with a health care professional who has appropriate training and experience in the field of medicine involved in the medical judgment before making a decision on review of any adverse initial determination based in whole or in part on a medical judgment. The professional engaged for purposes of a consultation in the preceding sentence will not be an individual who was consulted in connection with the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal or the subordinate of any such individual.

 

(C)         The Plan will identify to the Claimant the medical or vocational experts whose advice was obtained on behalf of the Plan in connection with the review, without regard to whether the advice was relied upon in making the benefit review determination.

 

(D)         The decision on review will be made within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than ninety (90) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial forty-five (45) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

(iii)         Manner and Content of Notice of Decision on Review . Upon completion of its review of an adverse initial claim determination, the Plan Administrator will give the Claimant, in writing or by electronic notification, a notice containing:

 

(A)         its decision;

 

(B)         the specific reasons for the decision;

 

(C)         the relevant Plan provisions or insurance contract provisions on which its decision is based;

 

(D)         a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and without charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information in the Plan’s files which is relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits;

 

(E)         a statement describing the Claimant’s right to bring an action for judicial review under ERISA section 502(a); and

 

(F)         if an internal rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion was relied upon in making the adverse determination on review, a statement that a copy of the rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion will be provided without charge to the Claimant upon request.

 

(c)           Calculation of Time Periods . For purposes of the time periods specified in this Section, the period of time during which a benefit determination is required to be made begins at the time a claim is filed in accordance with the Plan procedures without regard to whether all the information necessary to make a decision accompanies the claim. If a period of time is extended due to a Claimant’s failure to submit all information necessary, the period for making the determination shall be tolled from the date the notification is sent to the Claimant until the date the Claimant responds.

 

(d)           Failure of Plan to Follow Procedures . If the Plan fails to follow the claims procedures required by this Section 7.1, a Claimant shall be deemed to have exhausted the administrative remedies available under the Plan and shall be entitled to pursue any available remedy under ERISA section 502(a) on the basis that the Plan has failed to provide a reasonable claims procedure that would yield a decision on the merits of the claim.

 

  Page 13 of 17

 

 

(e)           Failure of Claimant to Follow Procedures . A Claimant’s compliance with the foregoing provisions of this Section 7.1 is a mandatory prerequisite to the Claimant’s right to commence any legal action with respect to any claim for benefits under the Plan.

 

7.2           Arbitration of Claims. All claims or controversies arising out of or in connection with this Plan shall, subject to the initial review provided for in the foregoing provisions of this Article, be resolved through arbitration. Except as otherwise mutually agreed to by the parties, any arbitration shall be administered under and by the Judicial Arbitration & Mediation Services, Inc. (“JAMS”), in accordance with the JAMS procedures then in effect. The arbitration shall be held in the JAMS office nearest to where the Claimant is or was last employed by the Plan Sponsor or at a mutually agreeable location.

 

ARTICLE 8
AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

 

8.1            Amendment. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to amend this Plan at any time to comply with Section 409A and other Applicable Guidance or for any other purpose, provided that such amendment will not cause the Plan to violate the provisions of Section 409A. Except to the extent necessary to bring this Plan into compliance with Section 409A, no amendment or modification shall be effective to decrease the value or vested percentage of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit in existence at the time an amendment or modification is made to the Plan.

 

8.2           Plan Termination. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to terminate this Plan in accordance with one of the following, subject to the restrictions imposed by Section 409A and authoritative guidance:

 

(a)          Corporate Dissolution or Bankruptcy. This Plan may be terminated within twelve (12) months of a corporate dissolution taxed under Code § 331, or with the approval of a Plan Sponsor bankruptcy court pursuant to 11 U.S.C. Section 503(b)(1)(A), and distributions may then be made to the Participant provided that the amounts payable under this Plan are included in the Participants’ gross income in the latest of:

 

(i)           The calendar year in which the Plan termination occurs;

 

(ii)          The calendar year in which the amount is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; or

 

(iii)         The first calendar year in which the payment is administratively practicable.

 

(b)          Change in Control. This Plan may be terminated within the thirty (30) days preceding or the twelve (12) months following a Change in Control. This Plan will then be treated as terminated only if all substantially similar arrangements sponsored by the Plan Sponsor are terminated so that all participants in all similar arrangements are required to receive all amounts of compensation deferred under the terminated arrangements within twelve (12) months of the date of termination of the arrangements.

 

(c)          Discretionary Termination. The Plan Sponsor may also terminate this Plan and make distributions provided that:

 

  Page 14 of 17

 

 

(i)           All plans sponsored by the Plan Sponsor that would be aggregated with any terminated arrangements under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(c) are terminated;

 

(ii)          No payments, other than payments that would be payable under the terms of this plan if the termination had not occurred, are made within twelve (12) months of this plan termination;

 

(iii)         All payments are made within twenty-four (24) months of this plan termination; and

 

(iv)         Neither the Plan Sponsor nor any of its affiliates adopts a new plan that would be aggregated with any terminated plan if the same Participant participated in both arrangements at any time within three (3) years following the date of termination of this Plan.

 

(v)          The termination does not occur proximate to a downturn in the financial health of the Plan Sponsor.

 

ARTICLE 9
THE TRUST

 

9.1           Establishment of Trust. The Plan Sponsor may establish a grantor trust (the “Trust”), of which the Plan Sponsor is the grantor, within the meaning of subpart E, part I, subchapter J, subtitle A of the Code, to pay benefits under this Plan. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, all benefits payable under this Plan to a Participant shall be paid directly by the Plan Sponsor from the Trust. To the extent such benefits are not paid from the Trust, the benefits shall be paid from the general assets of the Plan Sponsor. The Trust, (if any), shall be a grantor trust which conforms to the terms of the model trust as described in IRS Revenue Procedure 92-64, I.R.B. 1992-33, as same may be amended or modified from time to time. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, the assets of the Trust will be subject to the claims of the Plan Sponsor’s creditors in the event of its insolvency. Except as may otherwise be provided under the Trust, the Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to set aside, earmark, or escrow any funds or other assets to satisfy its obligations under this Plan, and the Participant and/or his or her designated Beneficiaries shall not have any property interest in any specific assets of the Plan Sponsor other than the unsecured right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor, as provided in this Plan.

 

9.2           Interrelationship of the Plan and the Trust. The provisions of this Plan shall govern the rights of a Participant to receive distributions pursuant to this Plan. The provisions of the Trust (if established) shall govern the rights of the Participant and the creditors of the Plan Sponsor to the assets transferred to the Trust. The Plan Sponsor and each Participant shall at all times remain liable to carry out its obligations under this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligations under this Plan may be satisfied with Trust assets distributed pursuant to the terms of the Trust.

 

9.3           Contribution to the Trust. Amounts may be contributed by the Plan Sponsor to the Trust at the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor.

 

ARTICLE 10
MISCELLANEOUS

 

10.1         Validity. In case any provision of this Plan shall be illegal or invalid for any reason, said illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining parts hereof, but this Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such illegal or invalid provision had never been inserted herein; except to the extent that Section 409A requires that this Section 10.1 be disregarded because it purports to nullify Plan terms that are not in compliance with Section 409A.

 

  Page 15 of 17

 

 

10.2         Nonassignability. Neither any Participant nor any other person shall have any right to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage, or otherwise encumber, transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amounts, if any, payable hereunder, or any part hereof, which are, and all rights to which are expressly declared to be, unassignable and non-transferable. No part of the amounts payable shall, prior to actual payment, be subject to seizure, attachment, garnishment (except to the extent the Plan Sponsor may be required to garnish amounts from payments due under this Plan pursuant to applicable law), or sequestration for the payment of any debts, judgments, alimony, or separate maintenance owed by a Participant or any other person, be transferable by operation of law in the event of a Participant’s or any other person’s bankruptcy or insolvency, or be transferable to a spouse as a result of a property settlement or otherwise. If any Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest is adjudicated bankrupt or purports to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage or otherwise encumber transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amount, if any, payable hereunder, or any part thereof, the Plan Administrator, in its discretion, may cancel such distribution or payment (or any part thereof) to or for the benefit of such Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest in such manner as the Plan Administrator shall direct.

 

10.3         Not a Contract of Employment. The terms and conditions of this Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract of employment between the Plan Sponsor and the Participant. Nothing in this Plan shall be deemed to give a Participant the right to be retained in the service of the Plan Sponsor as an employee or otherwise or to interfere with the right of the Plan Sponsor to discipline or discharge the Participant at any time.

 

10.4         Unclaimed Benefits. In the case that the Plan Administrator is unable to locate the Participant or Beneficiary to whom a benefit is payable, such Plan benefit shall be forfeited to the Plan Sponsor upon the Plan Administrator’s determination. Notwithstanding the foregoing, payment may be made to a Participant, and that payment will be treated as made upon the date specified under the Plan, if the Participant provides notice to the Plan Sponsor within ninety (90) days of the latest date upon which the payment could have been timely made in accordance with the terms of the Plan and Section 409A, and if not paid, if the Participant takes further enforcement measures within one-hundred eighty (180) days after such latest date.

 

10.5         Governing Law. Subject to ERISA, the provisions of this Plan shall be construed and interpreted according to the internal laws of the State of Maryland without regard to its conflicts of laws principles.

 

10.6         Notice. Any notice, consent or demand required or permitted to be given under the provisions of this Plan shall be in writing and shall be signed by the party giving or making the same. If such notice, consent, or demand is mailed, it shall be sent by United States certified mail, postage prepaid, addressed to the addressee’s last known address as shown on the records of the Plan Sponsor. The date of such mailing shall be deemed the date of notice consent or demand. Any person may change the address to which notice is to be sent by giving notice of the change of address in the manner aforesaid.

 

10.7         Coordination with Other Benefits. The benefits provided for a Participant and Participant’s Beneficiary under this Plan are in addition to any other benefits available to such Participant under any other plan or program for employees of the Plan Sponsor. This Plan shall supplement and shall not supersede, modify, or amend any other such plan or program except as may otherwise be expressly provided herein.

 

10.8         Compliance. A Participant shall have no right to receive payment with respect to the Participant’s Accrued Benefit until all legal and contractual obligations of the Plan Sponsor relating to establishment of the Plan and the making of such payments shall have been complied with in full.

 

  Page 16 of 17

 

 

10.9 Compliance with Section 409A and Authoritative Guidance. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, all provisions of this Plan, including but not limited to the definitions of terms, elections to defer, and distributions, shall be made in accordance with and shall comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. The Plan Sponsor will amend the terms of this Plan retroactively, if necessary, to the extent required to comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. No election made by a Participant hereunder, and no change made by a Participant to a previous election, shall be accepted by the Plan Sponsor if the Plan Sponsor determines that acceptance of such election or change could violate any of the requirements of Section 409A or the authoritative guidance. This Plan and any accompanying forms shall be interpreted in accordance with, and incorporate the terms and conditions required by, Section 409A and the authoritative guidance, including, without limitation, any such Treasury Regulations or other guidance that may be issued after the date hereof.

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Plan Sponsor has signed this Plan document as of the Effective Date.

 

WITNESS:   FOR THE PLAN SPONSOR:
     
/s/ Laura McKinnon   /s/ Gregory Cockernam
(signature)   (signature)
     
Laura McKinnon   Gregory Cockernam
(print name)   (print name)
     
DATE:   PARTICIPANT:
     
March 16, 2011   /s/ James M. Burke
    (signature)
     
    James M. Burke
    (print name)

 

  Page 17 of 17

 

 

Amendment Number One
Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan

 

THIS AMENDMENT, made and entered into as of [date], by and between Community Bank of Tri-County (the “Bank”) and James Burke, an executive of the Bank (the “Participant”).

 

WHEREAS, the Bank entered into a Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan agreement (the “Agreement”) the Participant as of January 1, 2011; and

 

WHEREAS, the Agreement provides the Participant with supplemental retirement benefits following the Participant’s separation from service under certain circumstances; and

 

WHEREAS, Section 3.13 of the Agreement provides the Participant with an additional benefit if any benefits under the Agreement or otherwise become subject to an excise tax under Section 4999 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), in connection with a change in control; and

  

WHEREAS, the parties to the Agreement desire to eliminate the tax indemnification provided by Section 3.13 of the Agreement and, instead, limit benefits otherwise subject to an excise tax under Section 4999 of the Code.

 

ACCORDINGLY, the Agreement is amended by deleting Section 3.13 of the Agreement and replacing it with the following new Section 3.13:

 

3.13 Excise Tax Limitation. Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, any payment due under this Agreement shall be reduced in a manner and to the extent so that no payments made under this Agreement, when aggregated with any other payments to be made to the Participant, shall be an “excess parachute payment” in accordance with Section 280G of the Code and be subject to the excise tax provided for under Section 4999 of the Code.”

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto each acknowledge that each has carefully read this amendment to the Agreement and executed the original on the date first set forth above.

 

    COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ William J. Pasenelli
Witness    
    PARTICIPANT
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ James Burke
Witness   James Burke

 

 

 

Exhibit 10.35

 

SUPPLEMENTAL EXECUTIVE RETIREMENT PLAN

 

2014

 

THIS AGREEMENT, is made and entered into effective as of the 1st day of November 2014 by and between Community Bank of the Chesapeake, a banking corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, hereinafter referred to as the “Plan Sponsor”, and Todd Capitani, hereinafter referred to as the “Participant”.

 

WITNESSETH

 

WHEREAS. it is the consensus of the Board that the Participant’s services to the Plan Sponsor in the past have been of exceptional merit and have constituted an invaluable contribution to the general welfare of the Plan Sponsor bringing it to its present status of operating efficiency, and its present position in its field of activity;

 

WHEREAS, the experience of the Participant, his knowledge of the affairs of the Plan Sponsor, his reputation and contacts in the industry are so valuable that assurance of his continued services is essential for the future growth and profits of the Plan Sponsor and it is in the best interests of the Plan Sponsor to arrange terms of continued employment for the Participant so as to reasonably assure his remaining in the Plan Sponsor’s employment during his lifetime or until the age of retirement;

 

WHEREAS, it is the desire of the Plan Sponsor that his services be retained as herein provided;

 

WHEREAS, the Participant is willing to continue in the employ of the Plan Sponsor provided the Plan Sponsor agrees to pay to his beneficiaries certain benefits in accordance with the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth;

 

WHEREAS, the Plan Sponsor intends that the Plan shall at all times be administered and interpreted in such a manner as to constitute an unfunded nonqualified deferred compensation plan for tax purposes and for purposes of Title I of ERISA. This Plan is not intended to qualify for favorable tax treatment pursuant to IRC Section 401(a) of the Code or any successor section or statute. This Plan is intended to comply with IRC Section 409A as created under The American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 (the “Jobs Act of 2004”). It is both anticipated and expected that the terms and provisions of this Plan may need to be amended in the future to assure continued compliance. The Plan Sponsor and the Participant acknowledge that fact and agree to take any and all steps necessary to operate the Plan in “good faith” based on their current understanding of the regulations; and

 

NOW THEREFORE; in consideration of services performed in the past and to be performed in the future as well as of the mutual promises and covenants herein contained, it is agreed as follows:

 

 

 

 

ARTICLE 1
DEFINITIONS

 

DEFINITION OF TERMS. Certain words and phrases are defined when first used in later Articles of this Plan. Whenever any words are used herein in the masculine, they shall be construed as though they were in the feminine in all cases where they would so apply; and whenever any words are used herein in the singular or in the plural, they shall be construed as though they were used in the plural or the singular, as the case may be, in all cases where they would so apply. For the purpose of this Plan, unless otherwise clearly apparent from the context, the following phrases or terms shall have the following indicated meanings:

 

1.1 “Accrued Benefit” shall mean the portion of the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit that has accrued as of the applicable date of reference, with respect to services performed by the Participant beginning on November 1, 2014, as calculated for purposes of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and recorded on the books of the Plan Sponsor.

 

1.2 “Applicable Guidance” shall mean, as the context requires, Code §409A and the Final Treasury Regulations issued thereunder, or other written Treasury or IRS guidance regarding or affecting Code §409A.

 

1.3 “Beneficiary” shall mean the person or persons, natural or otherwise, designated in writing by a Participant in accordance with Article 5 before his death to receive Plan benefits in the event of the Participant’s death.

 

1.4 “Board” shall mean the board of directors of the Plan Sponsor, unless specifically noted otherwise.

 

1.5 “Cause” shall mean any of the following acts or circumstances: (i) willful destruction by the Participant of property of the Plan Sponsor having a material value to the Plan Sponsor; (ii) fraud, embezzlement, theft, or comparable dishonest activity committed by the Participant (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iii) the Participant’s conviction of or entering a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any crime constituting a felony or any misdemeanor involving fraud, dishonesty, or moral turpitude (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iv) the Participant’s breach, neglect, refusal, or failure to materially discharge the Participant’s duties (other than due to physical or mental illness) commensurate with the Participant’s title and function or the Participant’s failure to comply with the lawful directions of a senior managing officer of the Plan Sponsor in any such case that is not cured within fifteen (15) days after the Participant has received written notice thereof from such senior managing officer; or (v) any willful misconduct by the Participant which may cause substantial economic or reputation injury to the Plan Sponsor, including, but not limited to, sexual harassment.

 

  2  
 

 

1.6 “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of a Change in Control event, within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5) and described in any of subparagraph (a), (b), or (c), (collectively referred to as “Change in Control Events”), or any combination of the Change in Control Events. To constitute a Change in Control Event with respect to the Participant or Beneficiary, the Change in Control Event must relate to: (i) the corporation for whom the Participant is performing services at the time of the Change in Control Event; (ii) the corporation that is liable for the payment of the deferred compensation (or all corporations liable for the payment if more than one corporation is liable); or (iii) a corporation that is a majority shareholder of a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii), or any corporation in a chain of corporations in which each corporation is a majority shareholder of another corporation in the chain, ending in a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii).

 

(a)   Change in Ownership. A Change in Ownership occurs if a person, or a group of persons acting together, acquires more than fifty percent (50%) of the stock of the corporation, measured by voting power or value. Incremental increases in ownership by a person or group that already owns fifty percent (50%) of the corporation do not result in a Change of Ownership, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(v).

 

(b)   Change in Effective Control. A Change in Effective Control occurs if, over a twelve (12) month period: (i) a person or group acquires stock representing thirty percent (30%) of the voting power of the corporation; or (ii) a majority of the members of the board of directors of the ultimate parent corporation is replaced by directors not endorsed by the persons who were members of the board before the new directors’ appointment, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(vi).

 

(c)   Change in Ownership of a Substantial Portion of Corporate Assets. A Change in Control based on the sale of assets occurs if a person or group acquires Forty percent (40%) or more of the gross fair market value of the assets of a corporation over a twelve (12) month period. No change in control results pursuant to this Article (c) if the assets are transferred to certain entities controlled directly or indirectly by the shareholders of the transferring corporation, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1 .409A-3 (i) (5) (vii) .

 

1.7 “Claimant” shall mean a person who believes that he or she is being denied a benefit to which he or she is entitled hereunder.

 

1.8 “Code” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.9 “Disability” shall mean a condition of the Participant whereby he or she either: (i) is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, or (ii) is, by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Plan Sponsor. The Administrator will determine whether the Participant has incurred a Disability based on its own good faith determination and may require the Participant to submit to reasonable physical and mental examinations for this purpose. The Participant will also be deemed to have incurred a Disability if determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration, Railroad Retirement Board, or in accordance with a disability insurance program, provided that the definition of disability applied under such disability insurance program complies with the requirements of Treasury Regulation §1.409A-3(i)(4) and authoritative guidance.

 

  3  
 

 

1.10 “Effective Date” shall mean the date specified on the first page of this Plan.

 

1.11 “ERISA” shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as it may be amended from time to time.

 

1.12 “Normal Retirement Age” shall mean the date the Participant attains age 65.

 

1.13 “Normal Retirement Benefit” shall mean an annual benefit payment in the amount of Ninety One Thousand Thirty Two dollars (591,032) for a period of Fifteen (15) years.

 

1.14 “Participant” shall mean Todd Capitani

 

1.15 “Plan” shall mean this Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan Agreement, all Election Forms, the Trust, (if any), and any other written documents relevant to the Plan. For purposes of applying Code §409A requirements, this Plan is a non-account balance plan under Treasury Regulation §1.409-1(c)(2)(i)(A).

 

1.16 “Plan Administrator” or “Administrator” shall be a committee designated by the Plan Sponsor. If a Participant is part of a group of persons designated as a committee or Plan Administrator, then the Participant may not participate in any activity or decision relating solely to his or her individual benefits under this Plan. Matters solely affecting the applicable Participant will be resolved by the remaining committee members.

 

1.17 “Plan Sponsor” shall mean the person or entity: (i) receiving the services of the Participant; and (ii) all persons with whom such person or entity would be considered a single employer under the parent-subsidiary rules of Code §414(b) or §414(c).

 

1.18 “Plan Year” shall mean, for the first Plan Year, the period beginning on the Effective Date of the Plan and ending December 31 of such calendar year, and thereafter, a twelve (12) month period beginning January 1 of each calendar year and continuing through December 31 of such calendar year.

 

1.19 “Section 409A” shall mean Section 409A of the Code and the Treasury Regulations and other Applicable Guidance issued under that Section.

 

1.20 “Separation from Service” shall mean the occurrence of a Participant’s death, retirement, or “other termination of employment” (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(1)(ii)) with the Plan Sponsor (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(3)). However, a Separation from Service shall not occur if the Participant is on military leave, sick leave, or other bona fide leave of absence if the period of such leave does not exceed six months, or if longer, so long as the Participant retains a right to reemployment with the Plan Sponsor under an applicable statute or by contract.

 

  4  
 

 

1.21 “Specified Employee” shall mean that the Participant also satisfies the definition of a “key employee” as such term is defined in Code §416(i) (without regard to Section 416(i)(5)). However, the Participant is not a Specified Employee unless any stock of the Plan Sponsor is publicly traded on an established securities market or otherwise, as defined in Code §1.897-1(m). If the Participant is a key employee at any time during the twelve (12) months ending on the identification date (see below), the Participant is a Specified Employee for the twelve (12) month period commencing on the first day of the fourth month following the identification date. For purposes of this Article, the identification date is December 31. The determination of the Participant as a Specified Employee shall be made by the Administrator in accordance with IRC Section 416(i), the “specified employee” requirements of Section 409A, and Treasury Regulations.

 

1.22 “Taxable Year” shall mean the twelve (12) consecutive month period ending each December 31.

 

1.23 “Treasury Regulations” shall mean regulations promulgated by the Internal Revenue Service for the U.S. Department of the Treasury, as they may be amended from time to time.

 

1.24 “Trust” shall mean one or more trusts that may be established in accordance with the terms of this Plan.

 

ARTICLE 2

SELECTION, ENROLLMENT, ELIGIBILITY

 

2.1 Selection by Plan Sponsor. Participation in the Plan shall be limited to Todd Capitani, a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees of the Plan Sponsor, as determined by the Plan Sponsor in its sole and absolute discretion.

 

2.2 Re-Employment. If a Participant who incurs a Separation from Service is subsequently re-employed, he or she may, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Plan Administrator, become a Participant in accordance with the provisions of the Plan.

 

2.3 Eligibility; Commencement of Participation. Provided that the Participant has met all enrollment requirements set forth in the Plan and required by the Plan Administrator, the Participant shall continue participation in the Plan on the date the Plan is executed by the Plan Sponsor and the Participant.

 

2.4 Termination of Participation. If the Plan Administrator determines in good faith that a Participant no longer qualifies as a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees, as membership in such group is determined in accordance with Section 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of ERISA, the Plan Administrator shall cease further benefit accruals hereunder.

 

ARTICLE 3

BENEFITS

 

3.1 Normal Retirement Benefit. If the Participant remains in the service of the Plan Sponsor until reaching his Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be entitled to his Normal Retirement Benefit. The annual installments shall commence to be paid on the on the first day of the second month following the Participant’s Separation from Service. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the first day of the seventh month following Separation from Service.

 

  5  
 

 

3.2 Death Prior to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant should die while actively employed by the Plan Sponsor at any time after the date of this Plan but prior to his Normal Retirement Age, the Plan Sponsor will pay the Accrued Benefit in fifteen (15) equal annual installments to the Participant’s Beneficiary. The payments shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant dies.

 

3.3 Death Subsequent to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant dies while receiving payments, but prior to receiving the fifteen (15) annual installment payments due and owing hereunder, the unpaid balance of the payments shall continue to be paid to the Participant’s Beneficiary for the balance of the fifteen (15) annual installments.

 

3.4 Disability Benefit. In the event the Participant becomes Disabled prior to the date the Participant dies or experiences a Separation from Service, and prior to the date of a Change in Control, the Participant shall be entitled to receive his Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of determination of Disability. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the month following the Participant’s sixty-fifth (65th) birthday or death (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in fifteen (15) equal annual installments.

 

3.5 Separation from Service Benefit. If the Participant experiences a Separation from Service prior to Normal Retirement Age, death, Disability, or as described in the second paragraph of Section 3.6, then the Participant shall be entitled to a benefit equal to the Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of Separation from Service. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or dies (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in fifteen (15) equal annual installments. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the later of (i) the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or (ii) the first day of the seventh month following Separation from Service (except in the case of a Separation from Service due to death).

 

3.6 Change in Control Benefit. In the event there is a Change in Control prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, the Participant shall become 100% vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit. Subject to the paragraph below, the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant attains Normal Retirement Age or dies, whichever is first to occur.

 

  6  
 

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, if the Participant experiences a Separation from Service within 24 months following the Change in Control, the following provisions apply. The Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the Participant’s Separation from Service (or, if the Participant is a Specified Employee, on the first day of the seventh month following the Participant’s Separation from Service). In lieu of receiving the Normal Retirement Benefit in fifteen (15) annual installments, the Participant may elect to receive the Normal Retirement Benefit pursuant to this Section 3.6 in the form of (i) a lump sum, (ii) equal annual installments over two (2) years, or (iii) equal annual installments over five (5) years. Any election by the Participant pursuant to this Section 3.6 must be submitted to the Plan Sponsor by the date the Participant initially becomes eligible to participate in the Plan.

 

3.7 Termination for Cause. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, if the Plan Sponsor terminates the Participant’s employment for “Cause”, then the Participant shall not be entitled to any benefits under the terms of this Plan.

 

3.8 Prohibition on Acceleration of Payments. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, neither the Plan Sponsor nor a Participant may accelerate the time or schedule of any payment or amount scheduled to be paid under this Plan, except that the Plan Sponsor, in its discretion, may accelerate payments as permitted by Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(j)(4). The Plan Sponsor shall deny any change made to an election if the Plan Sponsor determines that the change violates the requirements of authoritative guidance.

 

3.9 Subsequent Changes in the Time or Form of Payment. If permitted by the Plan Sponsor, a Participant may elect to change the time or form of payments (collectively, “payment elections”), provided the following conditions are met:

 

(i)    Such change will not take effect until at least twelve (12) months after the date on which the new payment election is made and approved by the Plan Administrator;

 

(ii)   If the change of payment election relates to a payment based on Separation from Service, or if the payment is at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the change of payment election must result in payment being deferred for a period of not less than five (5) years from the date such payment would otherwise have been paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, five (5) years from the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid);

 

(iii)  If the change of payment election relates to a payment at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the Participant or Plan Sponsor must make the change of payment election not less than twelve (12) months before the date the payment is scheduled to be paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, twelve (12) months before the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid).

 

  7  
 

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, to the extent permitted under Section 409A and by the Plan Sponsor, the Participant may elect the timing and manner of distributions during 2008 (except that a Participant cannot in 2008 change payment elections with respect to payments that the Participant would otherwise receive in 2008, or make an election that causes payments scheduled for subsequent years to be made in 2008), and such election shall not be treated as a change in the form and timing of payment or an acceleration of payment under Section 409A.

 

3.10 Delay in Payment by Plan Sponsor.

 

(a) A payment may be delayed to a date after the designated payment date under any of the circumstances described below, and the provision will not fail to meet the requirements of establishing a permissible payment event. The delay in the payment will not constitute a subsequent deferral election, so long as the Plan Sponsor treats all payments to similarly situated Participants on a reasonably consistent basis.

 

(i) Payments subject to Section 162(m). A payment may be delayed to the extent that the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that if the payment were made as scheduled, the Plan Sponsor’s deduction with respect to such payment would not be permitted due to the application of Code §162(m). If a payment is delayed, such payment must be made either:

 

(1)  during the Participant’s first Taxable Year in which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates, or should reasonably anticipate, that if the payment is made during such year, the deduction of such payment will not be barred by application of Code §162(m) or,

 

(2)  during the period beginning with the date of the Participant’s Separation from Service and ending on the later of the last day of the Taxable Year of the Plan Sponsor in which the Participant separates from service or the 15th day of the third month following the Participant’s Separation from Service. Where any scheduled payment to a specific Participant in the Plan Sponsor’s Taxable Year is delayed in accordance with this Article, the delay in payment will be treated as a subsequent deferral election unless all scheduled payments to the Participant that could be delayed in accordance with this Article are also delayed. Where the payment is delayed to a date on or after the Participant’s Separation from Service, the payment will be considered a payment upon a Separation from Service for purposes of the rules under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(2) (payments to specified employees upon a separation from service) and, the 6 month delay rule will apply for Specified Employees.

 

(ii) Payments that would violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law. A payment may be delayed where the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law provided that the payment is made at the earliest date at which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will not cause such violation. The making of a payment that would cause inclusion in gross income or the application of any penalty provision or other provision of the Internal Revenue Code is not treated as a violation of applicable law.

 

  8  
 

 

(iii) Other events and conditions. The Plan Sponsor may delay a payment upon such other events and conditions as the Commissioner of the IRS may prescribe.

 

(b) Treatment of Payment as Made on Designated Payment Date. Each payment under this Plan is deemed made on the required payment date even if the payment is made after such date, provided the payment is made by the latest of: (i) the end of the calendar year in which the payment is due; (ii) the 15th day of the third calendar month following the payment due date; (iii) in case the Plan Sponsor cannot calculate the payment amount on account of administrative impracticality which is beyond the Participant’s control (or the control of the Participant’s estate), in the first calendar year in which payment is practicable; (iv) in the case where the payment would jeopardize the ability of the Plan Sponsor to continue as a going concern, in the first calendar year in which the making of the payment would not have such effect.

 

3.11 Unsecured General Creditor Status of Participant:

 

(a)    Payment to the Participant or any Beneficiary hereunder shall be made from assets which shall continue, for all purposes, to be part of the general, unrestricted assets of the Plan Sponsor and no person shall have any interest in any such asset by virtue of any provision of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligation hereunder shell be an unfunded and unsecured promise to pay money in the future. To the extent that any person acquires a right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor under the provisions hereof, such right shall be no greater than the right of any unsecured general creditor of the Plan Sponsor and no such person shall have or acquire any legal or equitable right, interest, or claim in or to any property or assets of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(b)    In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies insuring the life of a Participant or employee, to allow the Plan Sponsor to recover or meet the cost of providing benefits, in whole or in part, hereunder, no Participant or Beneficiary shall have any rights whatsoever in said policy or the proceeds therefrom. The Plan Sponsor or the Trustee of the Trust (if any) shall be the primary owner and beneficiary of any such insurance policy or property and shall possess and may exercise all incidents of ownership therein. No insurance policy with regard to any director, “highly compensated employee”, or “highly compensated individual” as defined in IRS Section 101(j) shall be acquired before satisfying the Section 101(j) “Notice and Consent” requirements.

 

(c)     In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies on the life of a Participant as provided for above, then all of such policies shall be subject to the claims of the creditors of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(d)     If the Plan Sponsor chooses to obtain insurance on the life of a Participant in connection with its obligations under this Plan, the Participant hereby agrees to take such physical examinations and to truthfully and completely supply such information as may be required by the Plan Sponsor or the insurance company designated by the Plan Sponsor.

 

  9  
 

 

3.12 Facility of Payment. If a distribution is to be made to a minor, or to a person who is otherwise incompetent, then the Plan Administrator may make such distribution: (i) to the legal guardian, or if none, to a parent of a minor payee with whom the payee maintains his or her residence; or (ii) to the conservator or administrator or, if none, to the person having custody of an incompetent payee. Any such distribution shall fully discharge the Plan Sponsor and the Plan Administrator from further liability on account thereof.

 

3.13 Excise Tax Limitation. In the event that any payment or benefit (within the meaning of Code §280G(b)(2) of the Code) to the Participant or for the Participant’s benefit paid or payable or distributed or distributable (including, but not limited to, the acceleration of the time for the vesting or payment of such benefit or payment) pursuant to the terms of this Plan or otherwise in connection with, or arising out of, the Participant’s employment with the Plan Sponsor or any of its affiliates or a Change in Control within the meaning of Code §280G of the Code (a “Payment” or “Payments”), would be subject to the excise tax imposed by Code §4999 of the Code (the “Excise Tax”), then the Payments shall be increased in an amount necessary to provide for the payment of the excise tax imposed by Code § 4999 (the “Section 4999 Limit”). Any payment made to the Participant under this Section 3.13 shall be made no later than the end of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant remits the related taxes.

 

ARTICLE 4

VESTING AND TAXES

 

4.1 Vesting. The Participant shall be vested at all times in his Accrued Benefit. Upon attainment of Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.2 Acceleration of Vesting. If, prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, there is a Change in Control of the Plan Sponsor, then the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.3 FICA, Withholding and Other Taxes:

 

(a)    When a Participant becomes vested in a portion of his Normal Retirement Benefit, the Plan Sponsor shall withhold from the Participant’s cash compensation in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor, the Participant’s share of FICA and other employment taxes on such vested Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

(b)    Distributions. The Plan Sponsor, or trustee of the Trust, shall withhold from any payments made to a Participant or Beneficiary under this Plan all federal, state and local income, employment and other taxes required to be withheld by the Plan Sponsor in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor or the trustee of the Trust in compliance with applicable tax withholding requirements.

 

  10  
 

 

ARTICLE 5
BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION

 

5.1 Designation of Beneficiaries.

 

(a)    The Participant may designate any person or persons (who may be named contingently or successively) to receive any benefits payable under the Plan upon the Participant’s death, and the designation may be changed from time to time by the Participant by filing a new designation. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the Participant and shall be in the form prescribed by the Administrator, and shall be effective only when filed in writing with the Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime.

 

(b)    In the absence of a valid Beneficiary designation, or if, at the time any benefit payment is due to a Beneficiary, there is no living Beneficiary validly named by the Participant, the Plan Sponsor shall pay the benefit payment to the Participant’s spouse, if then living, and if the spouse is not then living to the Participant’s then living descendants, if any, per stirpes, and if there are no living descendants, to the Participant’s estate. In determining the existence or identity of anyone entitled to a benefit payment, the Plan Sponsor may rely conclusively upon information supplied by the Participant’s personal representative, executor, or administrator.

 

(c)    If a question arises as to the existence or identity of anyone entitled to receive a death benefit payment under the Plan, or if a dispute arises with respect to any death benefit payment under the Plan, the Plan Sponsor may distribute the payment to the Participant’s estate without liability for any tax or other consequences, or may take any other action which the Plan Sponsor deems to be appropriate.

 

5.2 Information to be Furnished by Participants and Beneficiaries; Inability to Locate Participants or Beneficiaries. Any communication, statement, or notice addressed to the Participant or to a Beneficiary at his or her last post office address as shown on the Plan Sponsor’s records shall be binding on the Participant or Beneficiary for all purposes of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to search for any Participant or Beneficiary beyond the sending of a registered letter to the last known address.

 

ARTICLE 6
ADMINISTRATION

 

6.1 Administrator Duties. The Administrator shall be responsible for the management, operation, and administration of the Plan. The Administrator shall act at meetings by affirmative vote of a majority of its members. Any action permitted to be taken at a meeting may be taken without a meeting if, prior to such action, a unanimous written consent to the action is signed by all members and such written consent is filed with the minutes of the proceedings of the Administrator, provided, however that no member may vote or act upon any matter which relates to his or her status as a Participant. The chair, or any other member or members of the Administrator designated by the chair, may execute any certificate or other written direction on behalf of the Administrator. When making a determination or calculation, the Administrator shall be entitled to rely on information furnished by the Participant or the Plan Sponsor. No provision of this Plan shall be construed as imposing on the Administrator any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law, or any duty similar to any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law.

 

  11  
 

 

6.2 Administrator Authority. The Administrator shall enforce this Plan in accordance with its terms, shall be charged with the general administration of this Plan, and shall have all powers necessary to accomplish its purposes, including, but not by way of limitation, the following:

 

(a)   To construe and interpret the terms and provisions of this Plan;

 

(b)   To compute and certify the amount and kind of benefits payable to the Participant and their Beneficiaries; to determine the time and manner in which such benefits are paid; and to determine the amount of any withholding taxes to be deducted;

 

(c)   To maintain all records that may be necessary for the administration of this Plan;

 

(d)   To provide for the disclosure of all information and the filing or provision of all reports and statements to the Participant, Beneficiaries, and governmental agencies as shall be required by law;

 

(e)   To make and publish such rules for the regulation of this Plan and procedures for the administration of this Plan as are not inconsistent with the terms hereof;

 

(f)   To administer this Plan’s claims procedures;

 

(g)   To approve election forms and procedures for use under this Plan; and

 

(h)   To appoint a plan record keeper or any other agent, and to delegate to them such powers and duties in connection with the administration of this Plan as the Administrator may from time to time prescribe.

 

6.3 Binding Effect of Decision. The decision or action of the Administrator with respect to any question arising out of or in connection with the administration, interpretation, and application of this Plan and the rules and regulations promulgated hereunder shall be final and conclusive and binding upon all persons having any interest in this Plan.

 

6.4 Compensation, Expenses, and Indemnity. The Administrator shall serve without compensation for services rendered hereunder. The Administrator is authorized at the expense of the Plan Sponsor to employ such legal counsel and/or Plan record keeper as it may deem advisable to assist in the performance of its duties hereunder. Expense and fees in connection with the administration of this Plan shall be paid by the Plan Sponsor.

 

6.5 Plan Sponsor Information. To enable the Administrator to perform its functions, the Plan Sponsor shall supply full and timely information to the Administrator, on all matters relating to the compensation of the Participant, the date and circumstances of the Disability, death, or Separation from Service of the Participant, and such other pertinent information as the Administrator may reasonably require.

 

  12  
 

 

6.6 Periodic Statements. Under procedures established by the Administrator, Participant shall be provided a statement of his Accrued Benefit on an annual basis.

 

ARTICLE 7
CLAIMS PROCEDURE

 

7.1 Claims Procedures. This Section 7.1 is based on final regulations issued by the Department of Labor and published in the Federal Register on November 21, 2000 and codified at section 2560.503-1 of the Department of Labor Regulations. If any provision of this Section 8.4 conflicts with the requirements of those regulations, the requirements of those regulations will prevail.

 

(a) Initial Claim. A Participant or Beneficiary who believes he or she is entitled to any Benefit (a “Claimant”) under this Plan may file a claim with the Administrator. The Administrator will review the claim itself or appoint another individual or entity to review the claim.

 

(i)  Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability. If the claim is for a benefit other than a disability benefit, the Claimant will be notified within ninety (90) days after the claim is filed whether the claim is allowed or denied, unless the Claimant receives written notice from the Administrator or appointee of the Administrator before the end of the ninety (90) day period stating that special circumstances require an extension of the time for decision, such extension not to extend beyond the day which is one hundred eighty (180) days after the day the claim is filed.

 

(ii) Disability Benefit Claims. In the case of a benefits claim that requires a determination by the Plan Administrator of a Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will notify the Claimant of the Plan’s adverse benefit determination within a reasonable period of time, but not later than forty-five (45) days after receipt of the claim. If, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, the Plan Administrator needs additional time to process a claim, the Claimant will be notified, within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator receives the claim, of those circumstances and of when the Plan Administrator expects to make its decision but not beyond seventy-five (75) days. If, prior to the end of the extension period, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, a decision cannot be rendered within that extension period, the period for making the determination may be extended for up to one hundred five (105) days, provided that the Plan Administrator notifies the Claimant of the circumstances requiring the extension and the date as of which the Plan expects to render a decision. The extension notice will specifically explain the standards on which entitlement to a disability benefit is based, the unresolved issues that prevent a decision on the claim and the additional information needed from the Claimant to resolve those issues, and the Claimant will be afforded at least forty-five (45) days within which to provide the specified information.

 

  13  
 

 

(iii) Manner and Content of Denial of Initial Claims. If the Plan Administrator denies a claim, it must provide to the Claimant, in writing or by electronic communication:

 

(A)   The specific reasons for the denial;

 

(B)   A reference to the Plan provision or insurance contract provision upon which the denial is based;

 

(C)   A description of any additional information or material that the Claimant must provide in order to perfect the claim;

 

(D)    An explanation of why such additional material or information is necessary;

 

(E)    Notice that the Claimant has a right to request a review of the claim denial and information on the steps to be taken if the Claimant wishes to request a review of the claim denial; and

 

(F)    A statement of the participant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) following a denial on review of the initial denial.

 

In addition, in the case of a denial of disability benefits on the basis of the Plan Administrator’s independent determination of the Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will provide a copy of any rule, guideline, protocol, or other similar criterion relied upon in making the adverse determination (or a statement that the same will be provided upon request by the Claimant and without charge).

 

(b) Review Procedures.

 

(i) Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability. Except for claims requiring an independent determination of a Participant’s disability status, a request for review of a denied claim must be made in writing to the Plan Administrator within sixty (60) days after receiving notice of denial. The decision upon review will be made within sixty (60) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than one hundred twenty (120) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial sixty (60) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

The reviewer will afford the Claimant an opportunity to review and receive, without charge, all relevant documents, information and records and to submit issues and comments in writing to the Plan Administrator. The reviewer will take into account all comments, documents, records and other information submitted by the Claimant relating to the claim regardless of whether the information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

  14  
 

 

(ii) Disability Benefit Claims. In addition to having the right to review documents and submit comments as described in (i) above, a Claimant whose claim for disability benefits requires an independent determination by the Plan Administrator of the Participant’s disability status has at least one hundred eighty (180) days following receipt of a notification of an adverse benefit determination within which to request a review of the initial determination. In such cases, the review will meet the following requirements:

 

(A)   The Plan will provide a review that does not afford deference to the initial adverse benefit determination and that is conducted by an appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan who did not make the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal, nor is a subordinate of the individual who made the determination.

 

(B)   The appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan will consult with a health care professional who has appropriate training and experience in the field of medicine involved in the medical judgment before making a decision on review of any adverse initial determination based in whole or in part on a medical judgment. The professional engaged for purposes of a consultation in the preceding sentence will not be an individual who was consulted in connection with the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal or the subordinate of any such individual.

 

(C)   The Plan will identify to the Claimant the medical or vocational experts whose advice was obtained on behalf of the Plan in connection with the review, without regard to whether the advice was relied upon in making the benefit review determination.

 

(D)   The decision on review will be made within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than ninety (90) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial forty-five (45) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

(iii) Manner and Content of Notice of Decision on Review. Upon completion of its review of an adverse initial claim determination, the Plan Administrator will give the Claimant, in writing or by electronic notification, a notice containing:

 

(A)   its decision;

 

(B)   the specific reasons for the decision;

 

(C)   the relevant Plan provisions or insurance contract provisions on which its decision is based;

 

(D)   a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and without charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information in the Plan’s files which is relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits;

 

(E)   a statement describing the Claimant’s right to bring an action for judicial review under ERISA section 502(a); and

  15  
 

 

(F)   if an internal rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion was relied upon in making the adverse determination on review, a statement that a copy of the rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion will be provided without charge to the Claimant upon request.

 

(c)    Calculation of Time Periods. For purposes of the time periods specified in this Section, the period of time during which a benefit determination is required to be made begins at the time a claim is filed in accordance with the Plan procedures without regard to whether all the information necessary to make a decision accompanies the claim. If a period of time is extended due to a Claimant’s failure to submit all information necessary, the period for making the determination shall be tolled from the date the notification is sent to the Claimant until the date the Claimant responds.

 

(d)   Failure of Plan to Follow Procedures. If the Plan fails to follow the claims procedures required by this Section 7.1, a Claimant shall be deemed to have exhausted the administrative remedies available under the Plan and shall be entitled to pursue any available remedy under ERISA section 502(a) on the basis that the Plan has failed to provide a reasonable claims procedure that would yield a decision on the merits of the claim.

 

(e)   Failure of Claimant to Follow Procedures. A Claimant’s compliance with the foregoing provisions of this Section 7.1 is a mandatory prerequisite to the Claimant’s right to commence any legal action with respect to any claim for benefits under the Plan.

 

7.2 Arbitration of Claims. All claims or controversies arising out of or in connection with this Plan shall, subject to the initial review provided for in the foregoing provisions of this Article, be resolved through arbitration. Except as otherwise mutually agreed to by the parties, any arbitration shall be administered under and by the Judicial Arbitration 86 Mediation Services, Inc. (“JAMS”), in accordance with the JAMS procedures then in effect. The arbitration shall be held in the JAMS office nearest to where the Claimant is or was last employed by the Plan Sponsor or at a mutually agreeable location.

 

ARTICLE 8
AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

 

8.1 Amendment. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to amend this Plan at any time to comply with Section 409A and other Applicable Guidance or for any other purpose, provided that such amendment will not cause the Plan to violate the provisions of Section 409A. Except to the extent necessary to bring this Plan into compliance with Section 409A, no amendment or modification shall be effective to decrease the value or vested percentage of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit in existence at the time an amendment or modification is made to the Plan.

 

8.2 Plan Termination. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to terminate this Plan in accordance with one of the following, subject to the restrictions imposed by Section 409A and authoritative guidance:

 

  16  
 

 

(a) Corporate Dissolution or Bankruptcy. This Plan may be terminated within twelve (12) months of a corporate dissolution taxed under Code § 331, or with the approval of a bankruptcy court pursuant to 11 U.S.C. Section 503(b)(1)(A), and distributions may then be made to the Participant provided that the amounts payable under this Plan are included in the Participants’ gross income in the

latest of:

 

(i)   The calendar year in which the Plan termination occurs;

 

(ii)   The first calendar year in which the amount is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; or

 

(iii)   The first calendar year in which the payment is administratively practicable.

 

(b) Change in Control. This Plan may be terminated within the thirty (30) days preceding or the twelve (12) months following a Change in Control. This Plan will then be treated as terminated only if all arrangements that are treated as having been deferred under a single plan in accordance with Applicable Guidance are terminated so that all participants in all those terminated arrangements who experienced the Change in Control event are required to receive all amounts of compensation deferred under the terminated arrangements within twelve (12) months of the date of termination of the arrangements.

 

(c) Discretionary Termination. The Plan Sponsor may also terminate this Plan and make distributions provided that:

 

(i)   All plans sponsored by the Plan Sponsor that would be aggregated with any terminated arrangements under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(c) are terminated;

 

(ii)   No payments, other than payments that would be payable under the terms of this Plan if the termination had not occurred, are made within twelve (12) months of this Plan termination;

 

(iii)   All payments are made within twenty-four (24) months of this Plan termination; and

 

(iv)   Neither the Plan Sponsor nor any of its affiliates adopts a new plan that would be aggregated with any terminated plan if the same Participant participated in both arrangements at any time within three (3) years following the date of termination of this Plan.

 

(v)   The termination does not occur proximate to a downturn in the financial health of the Plan Sponsor.

 

  17  
 

 

ARTICLE 9
THE TRUST

 

9.1 Establishment of Trust. The Plan Sponsor may establish a grantor trust (the “Trust”), of which the Plan Sponsor is the grantor, within the meaning of subpart E, part I, subchapter J, subtitle A of the Code, to pay benefits under this Plan. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, all benefits payable under this Plan to a Participant shall be paid directly by the Plan Sponsor from the Trust. To the extent such benefits are not paid from the Trust, the benefits shall be paid from the general assets of the Plan Sponsor. The Trust, (if any), shall be a grantor trust which conforms to the terms of the model trust as described in IRS Revenue Procedure 92-64, I.R.B. 1992-33, as same may be amended or modified from time to time. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, the assets of the Trust will be subject to the claims of the Plan Sponsor’s creditors in the event of its insolvency. Except as may otherwise be provided under the Trust, the Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to set aside, earmark, or escrow any funds or other assets to satisfy its obligations under this Plan, and the Participant and/ or his or her designated Beneficiaries shall not have any property interest in any specific assets of the Plan Sponsor other than the unsecured right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor, as provided in this Plan.

 

9.2 Interrelationship of the Plan and the Trust. The provisions of this Plan shall govern the rights of a Participant to receive distributions pursuant to this Plan. The provisions of the Trust (if established) shall govern the rights of the Participant and the creditors of the Plan Sponsor to the assets transferred to the Trust. The Plan Sponsor and each Participant shall at all times remain liable to carry out its obligations under this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligations under this Plan may be satisfied with Trust assets distributed pursuant to the terms of the Trust.

 

9.3 Contribution to the Trust. Amounts may be contributed by the Plan Sponsor to the Trust at the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor.

 

ARTICLE 10
MISCELLANEOUS

 

10.1 Validity. In case any provision of this Plan shall be illegal or invalid for any reason, said illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining parts hereof, but this Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such illegal or invalid provision had never been inserted herein; except to the extent that Section 409A requires that this Section 10.1 be disregarded because it purports to nullify Plan terms that are not in compliance with Section 409A.

 

10.2 Nonassignability. Neither any Participant nor any other person shall have any right to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage, or otherwise encumber, transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amounts, if any, payable hereunder, or any part hereof, which are, and all rights to which are expressly declared to be, unassignable and non-transferable. No part of the amounts payable shall, prior to actual payment, be subject to seizure, attachment, garnishment (except to the extent the Plan Sponsor may be required to garnish amounts from payments due under this Plan pursuant to applicable law), or sequestration for the payment of any debts, judgments, alimony, or separate maintenance owed by a Participant or any other person, be transferable by operation of law in the event of a Participant’s or any other person’s bankruptcy or insolvency, or be transferable to a spouse as a result of a property settlement or otherwise. If any Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest is adjudicated bankrupt or purports to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage or otherwise encumber transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amount, if any, payable hereunder, or any part thereof, the Plan Administrator, in its discretion, may cancel such distribution or payment (or any part thereof) to or for the benefit of such Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest in such manner as the Plan Administrator shall direct.

 

  18  
 

 

10.3 Not a Contract of Employment. The terms and conditions of this Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract of employment between the Plan Sponsor and the Participant. Nothing in this Plan shall be deemed to give a Participant the right to be retained in the service of the Plan Sponsor as an employee or otherwise or to interfere with the right of the Plan Sponsor to discipline or discharge the Participant at any time.

 

10.4 Unclaimed Benefits. In the case that the Plan Administrator is unable to locate the Participant or Beneficiary to whom a benefit is payable, such Plan benefit shall be forfeited to the Plan Sponsor upon the Plan Administrator’s determination. Notwithstanding the foregoing, payment may be made to a Participant, and that payment will be treated as made upon the date specified under the Plan, if the Participant provides notice to the Plan Sponsor within ninety (90) days of the latest date upon which the payment could have been timely made in accordance with the terms of the Plan and Section 409A, and if not paid, if the Participant takes further enforcement measures within one-hundred eighty (180) days after such latest date.

 

10.5 Governing Law. Subject to ERISA, the provisions of this Plan shall be construed and interpreted according to the internal laws of the State of Maryland without regard to its conflicts of laws principles.

 

10.6 Notice. Any notice, consent or demand required or permitted to be given under the provisions of this Plan shall be in writing and shall be signed by the party giving or making the same. If such notice, consent, or demand is mailed, it shall be sent by United States certified mail, postage prepaid, addressed to the addressee’s last known address as shown on the records of the Plan Sponsor. The date of such mailing shall be deemed the date of notice consent or demand. Any person may change the address to which notice is to be sent by giving notice of the change of address in the manner aforesaid.

 

10.7 Coordination with Other Benefits. The benefits provided for a Participant and Participant’s Beneficiary under this Plan are in addition to any other benefits available to such Participant under any other plan or program for employees of the Plan Sponsor. This Plan shall supplement and shall not supersede, modify, or amend any other such plan or program except as may otherwise be expressly provided herein.

 

  19  
 

 

10.8 Compliance. A Participant shall have no right to receive payment with respect to the Participant’s Accrued Benefit until all legal and contractual obligations of the Plan Sponsor relating to establishment of the Plan and the making of such payments shall have been complied with in full.

 

10.9 Compliance with Section 409A and Authoritative Guidance. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, all provisions of this Plan, including but not limited to the definitions of terms, elections to defer, and distributions, shall be made in accordance with and shall comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. The Plan Sponsor will amend the terms of this Plan retroactively, if necessary, to the extent required to comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. No election made by a Participant hereunder, and no change made by a Participant to a previous election, shall be accepted by the Plan Sponsor if the Plan Sponsor determines that acceptance of such election or change could violate any of the requirements of Section 409A or the authoritative guidance. This Plan and any accompanying forms shall be interpreted in accordance with, and incorporate the terms and conditions required by, Section 409A and the authoritative guidance, including, without limitation, any such Treasury Regulations or other guidance that may be issued after the date hereof.

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Plan Sponsor has signed this Plan document as of the Effective Date.

 

WITNESS:   FOR THE PLAN SPONSOR:
     
/s/ Felicia C. Norris     /s/ William J. Pasenelli 
(third party witness)   (Signature of Bank officer other than Participant)
     
Felicia C. Norris    William J. Pasenelli
(print name)   (print name)
     
DATE   PARTICIPANT
     
December 18, 2014    /s/ Todd Capitani
    Todd Capitani

 

  20  

 

Exhibit 10.36

 

SUPPLEMENTAL EXECUTIVE RETIREMENT PLAN

 

2014

 

THIS AGREEMENT, is made and entered into effective as of the 1st day of November 2014 by and between Community Bank of the Chesapeake, a banking corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, hereinafter referred to as the “Plan Sponsor”, and James Burke, hereinafter referred to as the “Participant”.

 

WITNESSETH

 

WHEREAS. it is the consensus of the Board that the Participant’s services to the Plan Sponsor in the past have been of exceptional merit and have constituted an invaluable contribution to the general welfare of the Plan Sponsor bringing it to its present status of operating efficiency, and its present position in its field of activity;

 

WHEREAS, the experience of the Participant, his knowledge of the affairs of the Plan Sponsor, his reputation and contacts in the industry are so valuable that assurance of his continued services is essential for the future growth and profits of the Plan Sponsor and it is in the best interests of the Plan Sponsor to arrange terms of continued employment for the Participant so as to reasonably assure his remaining in the Plan Sponsor’s employment during his lifetime or until the age of retirement;

 

WHEREAS, it is the desire of the Plan Sponsor that his services be retained as herein provided;

 

WHEREAS, the Participant is willing to continue in the employ of the Plan Sponsor provided the Plan Sponsor agrees to pay to his beneficiaries certain benefits in accordance with the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth;

 

WHEREAS, the Plan Sponsor intends that the Plan shall at all times be administered and interpreted in such a manner as to constitute an unfunded nonqualified deferred compensation plan for tax purposes and for purposes of Title I of ERISA. This Plan is not intended to qualify for favorable tax treatment pursuant to IRC Section 401(a) of the Code or any successor section or statute. This Plan is intended to comply with IRC Section 409A as created under The American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 (the “Jobs Act of 2004”). It is both anticipated and expected that the terms and provisions of this Plan may need to be amended in the future to assure continued compliance. The Plan Sponsor and the Participant acknowledge that fact and agree to take any and all steps necessary to operate the Plan in “good faith” based on their current understanding of the regulations; and

 

NOW THEREFORE; in consideration of services performed in the past and to be performed in the future as well as of the mutual promises and covenants herein contained, it is agreed as follows:

 

 

 

   

ARTICLE 1

DEFINITIONS

 

DEFINITION OF TERMS. Certain words and phrases are defined when first used in later Articles of this Plan. Whenever any words are used herein in the masculine, they shall be construed as though they were in the feminine in all cases where they would so apply; and whenever any words are used herein in the singular or in the plural, they shall be construed as though they were used in the plural or the singular, as the case may be, in all cases where they would so apply. For the purpose of this Plan, unless otherwise clearly apparent from the context, the following phrases or terms shall have the following indicated meanings:

 

1.1 “Accrued Benefit” shall mean the portion of the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit that has accrued as of the applicable date of reference, with respect to services performed by the Participant beginning on November 1, 2014, as calculated for purposes of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and recorded on the books of the Plan Sponsor.

 

1.2 “Applicable Guidance” shall mean, as the context requires, Code §409A and the Final Treasury Regulations issued thereunder, or other written Treasury or IRS guidance regarding or affecting Code §409A.

 

1.3 “Beneficiary” shall mean the person or persons, natural or otherwise, designated in writing by a Participant in accordance with Article 5 before his death to receive Plan benefits in the event of the Participant’s death.

 

1.4 “Board” shall mean the board of directors of the Plan Sponsor, unless specifically noted otherwise.

 

1.5 “Cause” shall mean any of the following acts or circumstances: (i) willful destruction by the Participant of property of the Plan Sponsor having a material value to the Plan Sponsor; (ii) fraud, embezzlement, theft, or comparable dishonest activity committed by the Participant (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iii) the Participant’s conviction of or entering a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any crime constituting a felony or any misdemeanor involving fraud, dishonesty, or moral turpitude (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iv) the Participant’s breach, neglect, refusal, or failure to materially discharge the Participant’s duties (other than due to physical or mental illness) commensurate with the Participant’s title and function or the Participant’s failure to comply with the lawful directions of a senior managing officer of the Plan Sponsor in any such case that is not cured within fifteen (15) days after the Participant has received written notice thereof from such senior managing officer; or (v) any willful misconduct by the Participant which may cause substantial economic or reputation injury to the Plan Sponsor, including, but not limited to, sexual harassment.

 

2  

 

  

1.6 “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of a Change in Control event, within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5) and described in any of subparagraph (a), (b), or (c), (collectively referred to as “Change in Control Events”), or any combination of the Change in Control Events. To constitute a Change in Control Event with respect to the Participant or Beneficiary, the Change in Control Event must relate to: (i) the corporation for whom the Participant is performing services at the time of the Change in Control Event; (ii) the corporation that is liable for the payment of the deferred compensation (or all corporations liable for the payment if more than one corporation is liable); or (iii) a corporation that is a majority shareholder of a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii), or any corporation in a chain of corporations in which each corporation is a majority shareholder of another corporation in the chain, ending in a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii).

 

(a) Change in Ownership. A Change in Ownership occurs if a person, or a group of persons acting together, acquires more than fifty percent (50%) of the stock of the corporation, measured by voting power or value. Incremental increases in ownership by a person or group that already owns fifty percent (50%) of the corporation do not result in a Change of Ownership, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(v).

 

(b) Change in Effective Control. A Change in Effective Control occurs if, over a twelve (12) month period: (i) a person or group acquires stock representing thirty percent (30%) of the voting power of the corporation; or (ii) a majority of the members of the board of directors of the ultimate parent corporation is replaced by directors not endorsed by the persons who were members of the board before the new directors’ appointment, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(vi).

 

(c) Change in Ownership of a Substantial Portion of Corporate Assets. A Change in Control based on the sale of assets occurs if a person or group acquires Forty percent (40%) or more of the gross fair market value of the assets of a corporation over a twelve (12) month period. No change in control results pursuant to this Article (c) if the assets are transferred to certain entities controlled directly or indirectly by the shareholders of the transferring corporation, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1. 409A-3(i) (5) (vii).

 

1.7 “Claimant” shall mean a person who believes that he or she is being denied a benefit to which he or she is entitled hereunder.

 

1.8 “Code” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.9 “Disability” shall mean a condition of the Participant whereby he or she either: (i) is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, or (ii) is, by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Plan Sponsor. The Administrator will determine whether the Participant has incurred a Disability based on its own good faith determination and may require the Participant to submit to reasonable physical and mental examinations for this purpose. The Participant will also be deemed to have incurred a Disability if determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration, Railroad Retirement Board, or in accordance with a disability insurance program, provided that the definition of disability applied under such disability insurance program complies with the requirements of Treasury Regulation §1.409A-3(i)(4) and authoritative guidance.

 

3  

 

  

1.10 “Effective Date” shall mean the date specified on the first page of this Plan.

 

1.11 “ERISA” shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as it may be amended from time to time.

 

1.12 “Normal Retirement Age” shall mean the date the Participant attains age 65.

 

1.13 “Normal Retirement Benefit” shall mean an annual benefit payment in the amount of Thirteen Thousand One hundred Seventy Eight dollars ($13,178) for a period of Fifteen (15) years.

 

1.14 “Participant” shall mean James Burke

 

1.15 “Plan” shall mean this Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan Agreement, all Election Forms, the Trust, (if any), and any other written documents relevant to the Plan. For purposes of applying Code §409A requirements, this Plan is a non-account balance plan under Treasury Regulation §1.409-1(c)(2)(i)(A).

 

1.16 “Plan Administrator” or “Administrator” shall be a committee designated by the Plan Sponsor. If a Participant is part of a group of persons designated as a committee or Plan Administrator, then the Participant may not participate in any activity or decision relating solely to his or her individual benefits under this Plan. Matters solely affecting the applicable Participant will be resolved by the remaining committee members.

 

1.17 “Plan Sponsor” shall mean the person or entity: (i) receiving the services of the Participant; and (ii) all persons with whom such person or entity would be considered a single employer under the parent-subsidiary rules of Code §414(b) or §414(c).

 

1.18 “Plan Year” shall mean, for the first Plan Year, the period beginning on the Effective Date of the Plan and ending December 31 of such calendar year, and thereafter, a twelve (12) month period beginning January 1 of each calendar year and continuing through December 31 of such calendar year.

 

1.19 “Section 409A” shall mean Section 409A of the Code and the Treasury Regulations and other Applicable Guidance issued under that Section.

 

1.20 “Separation from Service” shall mean the occurrence of a Participant’s death, retirement, or “other termination of employment” (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(1)(ii)) with the Plan Sponsor (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(3)). However, a Separation from Service shall not occur if the Participant is on military leave, sick leave, or other bona fide leave of absence if the period of such leave does not exceed six months, or if longer, so long as the Participant retains a right to reemployment with the Plan Sponsor under an applicable statute or by contract.

 

4  

 

  

1.21 “Specified Employee” shall mean that the Participant also satisfies the definition of a “key employee” as such term is defined in Code §416(i) (without regard to Section 416(i)(5)). However, the Participant is not a Specified Employee unless any stock of the Plan Sponsor is publicly traded on an established securities market or otherwise, as defined in Code §1.897-1(m). If the Participant is a key employee at any time during the twelve (12) months ending on the identification date (see below), the Participant is a Specified Employee for the twelve (12) month period commencing on the first day of the fourth month following the identification date. For purposes of this Article, the identification date is December 31. The determination of the Participant as a Specified Employee shall be made by the Administrator in accordance with IRC Section 416(i), the “specified employee” requirements of Section 409A, and Treasury Regulations.

 

1.22 “Taxable Year” shall mean the twelve (12) consecutive month period ending each December 31.

 

1.23 “Treasury Regulations” shall mean regulations promulgated by the Internal Revenue Service for the U.S. Department of the Treasury, as they may be amended from time to time.

 

1.24 “Trust” shall mean one or more trusts that may be established in accordance with the terms of this Plan.

 

ARTICLE 2

SELECTION, ENROLLMENT, ELIGIBILITY

 

2.1 Selection by Plan Sponsor. Participation in the Plan shall be limited to James Burke, a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees of the Plan Sponsor, as determined by the Plan Sponsor in its sole and absolute discretion.

 

2.2 Re-Employment. If a Participant who incurs a Separation from Service is subsequently re-employed, he or she may, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Plan Administrator, become a Participant in accordance with the provisions of the Plan.

 

2.3 Eligibility; Commencement of Participation. Provided that the Participant has met all enrollment requirements set forth in the Plan and required by the Plan Administrator, the Participant shall continue participation in the Plan on the date the Plan is executed by the Plan Sponsor and the Participant.

 

2.4 Termination of Participation. If the Plan Administrator determines in good faith that a Participant no longer qualifies as a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees, as membership in such group is determined in accordance with Section 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of ERISA, the Plan Administrator shall cease further benefit accruals hereunder.

 

ARTICLE 3

BENEFITS

 

3.1 Normal Retirement Benefit. If the Participant remains in the service of the Plan Sponsor until reaching his Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be entitled to his Normal Retirement Benefit. The annual installments shall commence to be paid on the on the first day of the second month following the Participant’s Separation from Service. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the first day of the seventh month following Separation from Service.

 

5  

 

  

3.2 Death Prior to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant should die while actively employed by the Plan Sponsor at any time after the date of this Plan but prior to his Normal Retirement Age, the Plan Sponsor will pay the Accrued Benefit in fifteen (15) equal annual installments to the Participant’s Beneficiary. The payments shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant dies.

 

3.3 Death Subsequent to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant dies while receiving payments, but prior to receiving the fifteen (15) annual installment payments due and owing hereunder, the unpaid balance of the payments shall continue to be paid to the Participant’s Beneficiary for the balance of the fifteen (15) annual installments.

 

3.4 Disability Benefit. In the event the Participant becomes Disabled prior to the date the Participant dies or experiences a Separation from Service, and prior to the date of a Change in Control, the Participant shall be entitled to receive his Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of determination of Disability. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the month following the Participant’s sixty-fifth (65th) birthday or death (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in fifteen (15) equal annual installments.

 

3.5 Separation from Service Benefit. If the Participant experiences a Separation from Service prior to Normal Retirement Age, death, Disability, or as described in the second paragraph of Section 3.6, then the Participant shall be entitled to a benefit equal to the Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of Separation from Service. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or dies (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in fifteen (15) equal annual installments. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the later of (i) the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or (ii) the first day of the seventh month following Separation from Service (except in the case of a Separation from Service due to death).

 

3.6 Change in Control Benefit. In the event there is a Change in Control prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, the Participant shall become 100% vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit. Subject to the paragraph below, the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant attains Normal Retirement Age or dies, whichever is first to occur.

 

6  

 

  

Notwithstanding the preceding, if the Participant experiences a Separation from Service within 24 months following the Change in Control, the following provisions apply. The Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the Participant’s Separation from Service (or, if the Participant is a Specified Employee, on the first day of the seventh month following the Participant’s Separation from Service). In lieu of receiving the Normal Retirement Benefit in fifteen (15) annual installments, the Participant may elect to receive the Normal Retirement Benefit pursuant to this Section 3.6 in the form of (i) a lump sum, (ii) equal annual installments over two (2) years, or (iii) equal annual installments over five (5) years. Any election by the Participant pursuant to this Section 3.6 must be submitted to the Plan Sponsor by the date the Participant initially becomes eligible to participate in the Plan.

 

3.7 Termination for Cause. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, if the Plan Sponsor terminates the Participant’s employment for “Cause”, then the Participant shall not be entitled to any benefits under the terms of this Plan.

 

3.8 Prohibition on Acceleration of Payments. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, neither the Plan Sponsor nor a Participant may accelerate the time or schedule of any payment or amount scheduled to be paid under this Plan, except that the Plan Sponsor, in its discretion, may accelerate payments as permitted by Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(j)(4). The Plan Sponsor shall deny any change made to an election if the Plan Sponsor determines that the change violates the requirements of authoritative guidance.

 

3.9 Subsequent Changes in the Time or Form of Payment. If permitted by the Plan Sponsor, a Participant may elect to change the time or form of payments (collectively, “payment elections”), provided the following conditions are met:

 

(i)  Such change will not take effect until at least twelve (12) months after the date on which the new payment election is made and approved by the Plan Administrator;

 

(ii) If the change of payment election relates to a payment based on Separation from Service, or if the payment is at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the change of payment election must result in payment being deferred for a period of not less than five (5) years from the date such payment would otherwise have been paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, five (5) years from the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid);

 

(iii) If the change of payment election relates to a payment at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the Participant or Plan Sponsor must make the change of payment election not less than twelve (12) months before the date the payment is scheduled to be paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, twelve (12) months before the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid).

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, to the extent permitted under Section 409A and by the Plan Sponsor, the Participant may elect the timing and manner of distributions during 2008 (except that a Participant cannot in 2008 change payment elections with respect to payments that the Participant would otherwise receive in 2008, or make an election that causes payments scheduled for subsequent years to be made in 2008), and such election shall not be treated as a change in the form and timing of payment or an acceleration of payment under Section 409A.

 

7  

 

  

3.10 Delay in Payment by Plan Sponsor.

 

(a) A payment may be delayed to a date after the designated payment date under any of the circumstances described below, and the provision will not fail to meet the requirements of establishing a permissible payment event. The delay in the payment will not constitute a subsequent deferral election, so long as the Plan Sponsor treats all payments to similarly situated Participants on a reasonably consistent basis.

 

(i) Payments subject to Section 162(m). A payment may be delayed to the extent that the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that if the payment were made as scheduled, the Plan Sponsor’s deduction with respect to such payment would not be permitted due to the application of Code §162(m). If a payment is delayed, such payment must be made either:

 

(1) during the Participant’s first Taxable Year in which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates, or should reasonably anticipate, that if the payment is made during such year, the deduction of such payment will not be barred by application of Code §162(m) or,

 

(2) during the period beginning with the date of the Participant’s Separation from Service and ending on the later of the last day of the Taxable Year of the Plan Sponsor in which the Participant separates from service or the 15th day of the third month following the Participant’s Separation from Service. Where any scheduled payment to a specific Participant in the Plan Sponsor’s Taxable Year is delayed in accordance with this Article, the delay in payment will be treated as a subsequent deferral election unless all scheduled payments to the Participant that could be delayed in accordance with this Article are also delayed. Where the payment is delayed to a date on or after the Participant’s Separation from Service, the payment will be considered a payment upon a Separation from Service for purposes of the rules under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(2) (payments to specified employees upon a separation from service) and, the 6 month delay rule will apply for Specified Employees.

 

(ii) Payments that would violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law. A payment may be delayed where the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law provided that the payment is made at the earliest date at which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will not cause such violation. The making of a payment that would cause inclusion in gross income or the application of any penalty provision or other provision of the Internal Revenue Code is not treated as a violation of applicable law.

 

8  

 

  

(iii) Other events and conditions. The Plan Sponsor may delay a payment upon such other events and conditions as the Commissioner of the IRS may prescribe.

 

(b) Treatment of Payment as Made on Designated Payment Date. Each payment under this Plan is deemed made on the required payment date even if the payment is made after such date, provided the payment is made by the latest of: (i) the end of the calendar year in which the payment is due; (ii) the 15th day of the third calendar month following the payment due date; (iii) in case the Plan Sponsor cannot calculate the payment amount on account of administrative impracticality which is beyond the Participant’s control (or the control of the Participant’s estate), in the first calendar year in which payment is practicable; (iv) in the case where the payment would jeopardize the ability of the Plan Sponsor to continue as a going concern, in the first calendar year in which the making of the payment would not have such effect.

 

3.11 Unsecured General Creditor Status of Participant:

 

(a) Payment to the Participant or any Beneficiary hereunder shall be made from assets which shall continue, for all purposes, to be part of the general, unrestricted assets of the Plan Sponsor and no person shall have any interest in any such asset by virtue of any provision of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligation hereunder shall be an unfunded and unsecured promise to pay money in the future. To the extent that any person acquires a right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor under the provisions hereof, such right shall be no greater than the right of any unsecured general creditor of the Plan Sponsor and no such person shall have or acquire any legal or equitable right, interest, or claim in or to any property or assets of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(b) In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies insuring the life of a Participant or employee, to allow the Plan Sponsor to recover or meet the cost of providing benefits, in whole or in part, hereunder, no Participant or Beneficiary shall have any rights whatsoever in said policy or the proceeds therefrom. The Plan Sponsor or the Trustee of the Trust (if any) shall be the primary owner and beneficiary of any such insurance policy or property and shall possess and may exercise all incidents of ownership therein. No insurance policy with regard to any director, “highly compensated employee”, or “highly compensated individual” as defined in IRS Section 101(j) shall be acquired before satisfying the Section 101(j) “Notice and Consent” requirements.

 

(c) In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies on the life of a Participant as provided for above, then all of such policies shall be subject to the claims of the creditors of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(d) If the Plan Sponsor chooses to obtain insurance on the life of a Participant in connection with its obligations under this Plan, the Participant hereby agrees to take such physical examinations and to truthfully and completely supply such information as may be required by the Plan Sponsor or the insurance company designated by the Plan Sponsor.

 

9  

 

  

3.12 Facility of Payment. If a distribution is to be made to a minor, or to a person who is otherwise incompetent, then the Plan Administrator may make such distribution: (i) to the legal guardian, or if none, to a parent of a minor payee with whom the payee maintains his or her residence; or (ii) to the conservator or administrator or, if none, to the person having custody of an incompetent payee. Any such distribution shall fully discharge the Plan Sponsor and the Plan Administrator from further liability on account thereof.

 

3.13 Excise Tax Limitation. In the event that any payment or benefit (within the meaning of Code §280G(b)(2) of the Code) to the Participant or for the Participant’s benefit paid or payable or distributed or distributable (including, but not limited to, the acceleration of the time for the vesting or payment of such benefit or payment) pursuant to the terms of this Plan or otherwise in connection with, or arising out of, the Participant’s employment with the Plan Sponsor or any of its affiliates or a Change in Control within the meaning of Code §280G of the Code (a “Payment” or “Payments”), would be subject to the excise tax imposed by Code §4999 of the Code (the “Excise Tax”), then the Payments shall be increased in an amount necessary to provide for the payment of the excise tax imposed by Code § 4999 (the “Section 4999 Limit”). Any payment made to the Participant under this Section 3.13 shall be made no later than the end of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant remits the related taxes.

 

ARTICLE 4

VESTING AND TAXES

 

4.1 Vesting. The Participant shall be vested at all times in his Accrued Benefit. Upon attainment of Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.2 Acceleration of Vesting. If, prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, there is a Change in Control of the Plan Sponsor, then the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.3 FICA, Withholding and Other Taxes:

 

(a) When a Participant becomes vested in a portion of his Normal Retirement Benefit, the Plan Sponsor shall withhold from the Participant’s cash compensation in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor, the Participant’s share of FICA and other employment taxes on such vested Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

(b) Distributions. The Plan Sponsor, or trustee of the Trust, shall withhold from any payments made to a Participant or Beneficiary under this Plan all federal, state and local income, employment and other taxes required to be withheld by the Plan Sponsor in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor or the trustee of the Trust in compliance with applicable tax withholding requirements.

 

10  

 

  

ARTICLE 5

BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION

 

5.1 Designation of Beneficiaries.

 

(a) The Participant may designate any person or persons (who may be named contingently or successively) to receive any benefits payable under the Plan upon the Participant’s death, and the designation may be changed from time to time by the Participant by filing a new designation. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the Participant and shall be in the form prescribed by the Administrator, and shall be effective only when filed in writing with the Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime.

 

(b) In the absence of a valid Beneficiary designation, or if, at the time any benefit payment is due to a Beneficiary, there is no living Beneficiary validly named by the Participant, the Plan Sponsor shall pay the benefit payment to the Participant’s spouse, if then living, and if the spouse is not then living to the Participant’s then living descendants, if any, per stirpes, and if there are no living descendants, to the Participant’s estate. In determining the existence or identity of anyone entitled to a benefit payment, the Plan Sponsor may rely conclusively upon information supplied by the Participant’s personal representative, executor, or administrator.

 

(c) If a question arises as to the existence or identity of anyone entitled to receive a death benefit payment under the Plan, or if a dispute arises with respect to any death benefit payment under the Plan, the Plan Sponsor may distribute the payment to the Participant’s estate without liability for any tax or other consequences, or may take any other action which the Plan Sponsor deems to be appropriate.

 

5.2 Information to be Furnished by Participants and Beneficiaries; Inability to Locate Participants or Beneficiaries. Any communication, statement, or notice addressed to the Participant or to a Beneficiary at his or her last post office address as shown on the Plan Sponsor’s records shall be binding on the Participant or Beneficiary for all purposes of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to search for any Participant or Beneficiary beyond the sending of a registered letter to the last known address.

 

ARTICLE 6

ADMINISTRATION

 

6.1 Administrator Duties. The Administrator shall be responsible for the management, operation, and administration of the Plan. The Administrator shall act at meetings by affirmative vote of a majority of its members. Any action permitted to be taken at a meeting may be taken without a meeting if, prior to such action, a unanimous written consent to the action is signed by all members and such written consent is filed with the minutes of the proceedings of the Administrator, provided, however that no member may vote or act upon any matter which relates to his or her status as a Participant. The chair, or any other member or members of the Administrator designated by the chair, may execute any certificate or other written direction on behalf of the Administrator. When making a determination or calculation, the Administrator shall be entitled to rely on information furnished by the Participant or the Plan Sponsor. No provision of this Plan shall be construed as imposing on the Administrator any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law, or any duty similar to any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law.

 

11  

 

  

6.2 Administrator Authority. The Administrator shall enforce this Plan in accordance with its terms, shall be charged with the general administration of this Plan, and shall have all powers necessary to accomplish its purposes, including, but not by way of limitation, the following:

 

(a) To construe and interpret the terms and provisions of this Plan;

 

(b) To compute and certify the amount and kind of benefits payable to the Participant and their Beneficiaries; to determine the time and manner in which such benefits are paid; and to determine the amount of any withholding taxes to be deducted;

 

(c) To maintain all records that may be necessary for the administration of this Plan;

 

(d) To provide for the disclosure of all information and the filing or provision of all reports and statements to the Participant, Beneficiaries, and governmental agencies as shall be required by law;

 

(e) To make and publish such rules for the regulation of this Plan and procedures for the administration of this Plan as are not inconsistent with the terms hereof;

 

(f) To administer this Plan’s claims procedures;

 

(g) To approve election forms and procedures for use under this Plan; and

 

(h) To appoint a plan record keeper or any other agent, and to delegate to them such powers and duties in connection with the administration of this Plan as the Administrator may from time to time prescribe.

 

6.3 Binding Effect of Decision. The decision or action of the Administrator with respect to any question arising out of or in connection with the administration, interpretation, and application of this Plan and the rules and regulations promulgated hereunder shall be final and conclusive and binding upon all persons having any interest in this Plan.

 

6.4 Compensation, Expenses, and Indemnity. The Administrator shall serve without compensation for services rendered hereunder. The Administrator is authorized at the expense of the Plan Sponsor to employ such legal counsel and/or Plan record keeper as it may deem advisable to assist in the performance of its duties hereunder. Expense and fees in connection with the administration of this Plan shall be paid by the Plan Sponsor.

 

6.5 Plan Sponsor Information. To enable the Administrator to perform its functions, the Plan Sponsor shall supply full and timely information to the Administrator, on all matters relating to the compensation of the Participant, the date and circumstances of the Disability, death, or Separation from Service of the Participant, and such other pertinent information as the Administrator may reasonably require.

 

12  

 

  

6.6 Periodic Statements. Under procedures established by the Administrator, Participant shall be provided a statement of his Accrued Benefit on an annual basis.

 

ARTICLE 7

CLAIMS PROCEDURE

 

7.1 Claims Procedures. This Section 7.1 is based on final regulations issued by the Department of Labor and published in the Federal Register on November 21, 2000 and codified at section 2560.503-1 of the Department of Labor Regulations. If any provision of this Section 8.4 conflicts with the requirements of those regulations, the requirements of those regulations will prevail.

 

(a) Initial Claim. A Participant or Beneficiary who believes he or she is entitled to any Benefit (a “Claimant”) under this Plan may file a claim with the Administrator. The Administrator will review the claim itself or appoint another individual or entity to review the claim.

 

(i) Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability. If the claim is for a benefit other than a disability benefit, the Claimant will be notified within ninety (90) days after the claim is filed whether the claim is allowed or denied, unless the Claimant receives written notice from the Administrator or appointee of the Administrator before the end of the ninety (90) day period stating that special circumstances require an extension of the time for decision, such extension not to extend beyond the day which is one hundred eighty (180) days after the day the claim is filed.

 

(ii) Disability Benefit Claims. In the case of a benefits claim that requires a determination by the Plan Administrator of a Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will notify the Claimant of the Plan’s adverse benefit determination within a reasonable period of time, but not later than forty-five (45) days after receipt of the claim. If, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, the Plan Administrator needs additional time to process a claim, the Claimant will be notified, within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator receives the claim, of those circumstances and of when the Plan Administrator expects to make its decision but not beyond seventy-five (75) days. If, prior to the end of the extension period, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, a decision cannot be rendered within that extension period, the period for making the determination may be extended for up to one hundred five (105) days, provided that the Plan Administrator notifies the Claimant of the circumstances requiring the extension and the date as of which the Plan expects to render a decision. The extension notice will specifically explain the standards on which entitlement to a disability benefit is based, the unresolved issues that prevent a decision on the claim and the additional information needed from the Claimant to resolve those issues, and the Claimant will be afforded at least forty-five (45) days within which to provide the specified information.

 

13  

 

  

(iii) Manner and Content of Denial of Initial Claims. If the Plan Administrator denies a claim, it must provide to the Claimant, in writing or by electronic communication:

 

(A) The specific reasons for the denial;

 

(B) A reference to the Plan provision or insurance contract provision upon which the denial is based;

 

(C) A description of any additional information or material that the Claimant must provide in order to perfect the claim;

 

(D) An explanation of why such additional material or information is necessary;

 

(E) Notice that the Claimant has a right to request a review of the claim denial and information on the steps to be taken if the Claimant wishes to request a review of the claim denial; and

 

(F) A statement of the participant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) following a denial on review of the initial denial.

 

In addition, in the case of a denial of disability benefits on the basis of the Plan Administrator’s independent determination of the Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will provide a copy of any rule, guideline, protocol, or other similar criterion relied upon in making the adverse determination (or a statement that the same will be provided upon request by the Claimant and without charge).

 

(b) Review Procedures.

 

(i) Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability. Except for claims requiring an independent determination of a Participant’s disability status, a request for review of a denied claim must be made in writing to the Plan Administrator within sixty (60) days after receiving notice of denial. The decision upon review will be made within sixty (60) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than one hundred twenty (120) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial sixty (60) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

The reviewer will afford the Claimant an opportunity to review and receive, without charge, all relevant documents, information and records and to submit issues and comments in writing to the Plan Administrator. The reviewer will take into account all comments, documents, records and other information submitted by the Claimant relating to the claim regardless of whether the information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

14  

 

  

(ii) Disability Benefit Claims. In addition to having the right to review documents and submit comments as described in (i) above, a Claimant whose claim for disability benefits requires an independent determination by the Plan Administrator of the Participant’s disability status has at least one hundred eighty (180) days following receipt of a notification of an adverse benefit determination within which to request a review of the initial determination. In such cases, the review will meet the following requirements:

 

(A) The Plan will provide a review that does not afford deference to the initial adverse benefit determination and that is conducted by an appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan who did not make the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal, nor is a subordinate of the individual who made the determination.

 

(B) The appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan will consult with a health care professional who has appropriate training and experience in the field of medicine involved in the medical judgment before making a decision on review of any adverse initial determination based in whole or in part on a medical judgment. The professional engaged for purposes of a consultation in the preceding sentence will not be an individual who was consulted in connection with the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal or the subordinate of any such individual.

 

(C) The Plan will identify to the Claimant the medical or vocational experts whose advice was obtained on behalf of the Plan in connection with the review, without regard to whether the advice was relied upon in making the benefit review determination.

 

(D) The decision on review will be made within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than ninety (90) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial forty-five (45) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

(iii) Manner and Content of Notice of Decision on Review. Upon completion of its review of an adverse initial claim determination, the Plan Administrator will give the Claimant, in writing or by electronic notification, a notice containing:

 

(A) its decision;

 

(B) the specific reasons for the decision;

 

(C) the relevant Plan provisions or insurance contract provisions on which its decision is based;

 

(D) a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and without charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information in the Plan’s files which is relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits;

 

(E) a statement describing the Claimant’s right to bring an action for judicial review under ERISA section 502(a); and

 

15  

 

  

(F) if an internal rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion was relied upon in making the adverse determination on review, a statement that a copy of the rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion will be provided without charge to the Claimant upon request.

 

(c) Calculation of Time Periods. For purposes of the time periods specified in this Section, the period of time during which a benefit determination is required to be made begins at the time a claim is filed in accordance with the Plan procedures without regard to whether all the information necessary to make a decision accompanies the claim. If a period of time is extended due to a Claimant’s failure to submit all information necessary, the period for making the determination shall be tolled from the date the notification is sent to the Claimant until the date the Claimant responds.

 

(d) Failure of Plan to Follow Procedures. If the Plan fails to follow the claims procedures required by this Section 7.1, a Claimant shall be deemed to have exhausted the administrative remedies available under the Plan and shall be entitled to pursue any available remedy under ERISA section 502(a) on the basis that the Plan has failed to provide a reasonable claims procedure that would yield a decision on the merits of the claim.

 

(e) Failure of Claimant to Follow Procedures. A Claimant’s compliance with the foregoing provisions of this Section 7.1 is a mandatory prerequisite to the Claimant’s right to commence any legal action with respect to any claim for benefits under the Plan.

 

7.2 Arbitration of Claims. All claims or controversies arising out of or in connection with this Plan shall, subject to the initial review provided for in the foregoing provisions of this Article, be resolved through arbitration. Except as otherwise mutually agreed to by the parties, any arbitration shall be administered under and by the Judicial Arbitration & Mediation Services, Inc. (“JAMS”), in accordance with the JAMS procedures then in effect. The arbitration shall be held in the JAMS office nearest to where the Claimant is or was last employed by the Plan Sponsor or at a mutually agreeable location.

 

ARTICLE 8

AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

 

8.1 Amendment. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to amend this Plan at any time to comply with Section 409A and other Applicable Guidance or for any other purpose, provided that such amendment will not cause the Plan to violate the provisions of Section 409A. Except to the extent necessary to bring this Plan into compliance with Section 409A, no amendment or modification shall be effective to decrease the value or vested percentage of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit in existence at the time an amendment or modification is made to the Plan.

 

8.2 Plan Termination. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to terminate this Plan in accordance with one of the following, subject to the restrictions imposed by Section 409A and authoritative guidance:

 

16  

 

  

(a) Corporate Dissolution or Bankruptcy. This Plan may be terminated within twelve (12) months of a corporate dissolution taxed under Code § 331, or with the approval of a bankruptcy court pursuant to 11 U.S.C. Section 503(b)(1)(A), and distributions may then be made to the Participant provided that the amounts payable under this Plan are included in the Participants’ gross income in the

latest of:

 

(i) The calendar year in which the Plan termination occurs;

 

(ii) The first calendar year in which the amount is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; or

 

(iii) The first calendar year in which the payment is administratively practicable.

 

(b) Change in Control. This Plan may be terminated within the thirty (30) days preceding or the twelve (12) months following a Change in Control. This Plan will then be treated as terminated only if all arrangements that are treated as having been deferred under a single plan in accordance with Applicable Guidance are terminated so that all participants in all those terminated arrangements who experienced the Change in Control event are required to receive all amounts of compensation deferred under the terminated arrangements within twelve (12) months of the date of termination of the arrangements.

 

(c) Discretionary Termination. The Plan Sponsor may also terminate this Plan and make distributions provided that:

 

(i) All plans sponsored by the Plan Sponsor that would be aggregated with any terminated arrangements under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(c) are terminated;

 

(ii) No payments, other than payments that would be payable under the terms of this Plan if the termination had not occurred, are made within twelve (12) months of this Plan termination;

 

(iii) All payments are made within twenty-four (24) months of this Plan termination; and

 

(iv) Neither the Plan Sponsor nor any of its affiliates adopts a new plan that would be aggregated with any terminated plan if the same Participant participated in both arrangements at any time within three (3) years following the date of termination of this Plan.

 

(v) The termination does not occur proximate to a downturn in the financial health of the Plan Sponsor.

 

17  

 

   

ARTICLE 9

THE TRUST

 

9.1 Establishment of Trust. The Plan Sponsor may establish a grantor trust (the “Trust”), of which the Plan Sponsor is the grantor, within the meaning of subpart E, part I, subchapter J, subtitle A of the Code, to pay benefits under this Plan. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, all benefits payable under this Plan to a Participant shall be paid directly by the Plan Sponsor from the Trust. To the extent such benefits are not paid from the Trust, the benefits shall be paid from the general assets of the Plan Sponsor. The Trust, (if any), shall be a grantor trust which conforms to the terms of the model trust as described in IRS Revenue Procedure 92-64, I.R.B. 1992-33, as same may be amended or modified from time to time. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, the assets of the Trust will be subject to the claims of the Plan Sponsor’s creditors in the event of its insolvency. Except as may otherwise be provided under the Trust, the Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to set aside, earmark, or escrow any funds or other assets to satisfy its obligations under this Plan, and the Participant and/ or his or her designated Beneficiaries shall not have any property interest in any specific assets of the Plan Sponsor other than the unsecured right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor, as provided in this Plan.

 

9.2 Interrelationship of the Plan and the Trust. The provisions of this Plan shall govern the rights of a Participant to receive distributions pursuant to this Plan. The provisions of the Trust (if established) shall govern the rights of the Participant and the creditors of the Plan Sponsor to the assets transferred to the Trust. The Plan Sponsor and each Participant shall at all times remain liable to carry out its obligations under this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligations under this Plan may be satisfied with Trust assets distributed pursuant to the terms of the Trust.

 

9.3 Contribution to the Trust. Amounts may be contributed by the Plan Sponsor to the Trust at the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor.

 

ARTICLE 10

MISCELLANEOUS

 

10.1 Validity. In case any provision of this Plan shall be illegal or invalid for any reason, said illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining parts hereof, but this Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such illegal or invalid provision had never been inserted herein; except to the extent that Section 409A requires that this Section 10.1 be disregarded because it purports to nullify Plan terms that are not in compliance with Section 409A.

 

10.2 Nonassignability. Neither any Participant nor any other person shall have any right to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage, or otherwise encumber, transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amounts, if any, payable hereunder, or any part hereof, which are, and all rights to which are expressly declared to be, unassignable and non-transferable. No part of the amounts payable shall, prior to actual payment, be subject to seizure, attachment, garnishment (except to the extent the Plan Sponsor may be required to garnish amounts from payments due under this Plan pursuant to applicable law), or sequestration for the payment of any debts, judgments, alimony, or separate maintenance owed by a Participant or any other person, be transferable by operation of law in the event of a Participant’s or any other person’s bankruptcy or insolvency, or be transferable to a spouse as a result of a property settlement or otherwise. If any Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest is adjudicated bankrupt or purports to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage or otherwise encumber transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amount, if any, payable hereunder, or any part thereof, the Plan Administrator, in its discretion, may cancel such distribution or payment (or any part thereof) to or for the benefit of such Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest in such manner as the Plan Administrator shall direct.

 

18  

 

  

10.3 Not a Contract of Employment. The terms and conditions of this Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract of employment between the Plan Sponsor and the Participant. Nothing in this Plan shall be deemed to give a Participant the right to be retained in the service of the Plan Sponsor as an employee or otherwise or to interfere with the right of the Plan Sponsor to discipline or discharge the Participant at any time.

 

10.4 Unclaimed Benefits. In the case that the Plan Administrator is unable to locate the Participant or Beneficiary to whom a benefit is payable, such Plan benefit shall be forfeited to the Plan Sponsor upon the Plan Administrator’s determination. Notwithstanding the foregoing, payment may be made to a Participant, and that payment will be treated as made upon the date specified under the Plan, if the Participant provides notice to the Plan Sponsor within ninety (90) days of the latest date upon which the payment could have been timely made in accordance with the terms of the Plan and Section 409A, and if not paid, if the Participant takes further enforcement measures within one-hundred eighty (180) days after such latest date.

 

10.5 Governing Law. Subject to ERISA, the provisions of this Plan shall be construed and interpreted according to the internal laws of the State of Maryland without regard to its conflicts of laws principles.

 

10.6 Notice. Any notice, consent or demand required or permitted to be given under the provisions of this Plan shall be in writing and shall be signed by the party giving or making the same. If such notice, consent, or demand is mailed, it shall be sent by United States certified mail, postage prepaid, addressed to the addressee’s last known address as shown on the records of the Plan Sponsor. The date of such mailing shall be deemed the date of notice consent or demand. Any person may change the address to which notice is to be sent by giving notice of the change of address in the manner aforesaid.

 

10.7 Coordination with Other Benefits. The benefits provided for a Participant and Participant’s Beneficiary under this Plan are in addition to any other benefits available to such Participant under any other plan or program for employees of the Plan Sponsor. This Plan shall supplement and shall not supersede, modify, or amend any other such plan or program except as may otherwise be expressly provided herein.

 

19  

 

  

10.8 Compliance. A Participant shall have no right to receive payment with respect to the Participant’s Accrued Benefit until all legal and contractual obligations of the Plan Sponsor relating to establishment of the Plan and the making of such payments shall have been complied with in full.

 

10.9 Compliance with Section 409A and Authoritative Guidance. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, all provisions of this Plan, including but not limited to the definitions of terms, elections to defer, and distributions, shall be made in accordance with and shall comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. The Plan Sponsor will amend the terms of this Plan retroactively, if necessary, to the extent required to comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. No election made by a Participant hereunder, and no change made by a Participant to a previous election, shall be accepted by the Plan Sponsor if the Plan Sponsor determines that acceptance of such election or change could violate any of the requirements of Section 409A or the authoritative guidance. This Plan and any accompanying fauns shall be interpreted in accordance with, and incorporate the terms and conditions required by, Section 409A and the authoritative guidance, including, without limitation, any such Treasury Regulations or other guidance that may be issued after the date hereof.

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Plan Sponsor has signed this Plan document as of the Effective Date.

 

WITNESS:   FOR THE PLAN SPONSOR
     
/s/ Felicia C. Norris   /s/ William J. Pasenelli
(third party witness)   (Signature of Bank officer other than Participant)
   
     
Felicia C. Norris   William J. Pasenelli
(print name)   (print name)
     
DATE:   PARTICIPANT
     
December 18, 2014   /s/ James Burke
    James Burke

 

20  

 

Exhibit 10.37

 

LIFE INSURANCE

 

ENDORSEMENT METHOD SPLIT DOLLAR

 

PLAN AGREEMENT

 

Insurers: NYL; GWL; Ohio Nat’l; John Hancock;  Midland Nat’l

 

Policy Number(s) 77253546; 85270625; C 6952615; BL 09727240: 695008

 

Bank: Community Bank of Tri County
   
Insured: Todd Capitani

 

Relationship of Insured to Bank: Executive

 

The respective rights and duties of the Bank and the Insured in the above referenced policy shall be pursuant to the terms set forth below:

 

  I. DEFINITIONS

 

Refer to the policy contract for the definition of all terms in this Agreement other than the following:

 

“Normal Retirement” shall be defined to mean the Insured remains employed by the Bank until at least age 65.

 

  II.  POLICY TITLE AND OWNERSHIP

 

Title and ownership shall reside in the Bank for its use and for the use of the Insured all in accordance with this Agreement. The Bank alone may, to the extent of its interest, exercise the right to borrow or withdraw on the policy cash values. Where the Bank and the Insured (or assignee, with the consent of the Insured) mutually agree to exercise the right to increase the coverage under the subject Split Dollar policy, then, in such event, the rights, duties and benefits of the parties to such increased coverage shall continue to be subject to the terms of this Agreement.

 

  1

 

 

  III. BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION RIGHTS

  

The Insured (or assignee) shall have the right and power to designate a beneficiary or beneficiaries to receive the Insured’s share of the proceeds payable upon the death of the Insured, and to elect and change a payment option for such beneficiary, subject to any right or interest the Bank may have in such proceeds, as provided in the Agreement.

 

  IV. PREMIUM PAYMENT METHOD

 

The Bank shall pay an amount equal to the planned premiums and any other premium payments that might become necessary to keep the policy in force.

 

  V. TAX TREATMENT

 

It is agreed by and between the parties hereto that, because the arrangement established pursuant to this Agreement provides only death benefits by use of a Bank-owned policy, it is properly reportable and taxable, for income and payroll tax purposes, under the “economic benefit” regime of the IRS’s 2003 final split dollar regulations, and it should not be considered a nonqualified deferred compensation plan subject to the restrictions of section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code. Accordingly, annually the Insured will receive a taxable benefit equal to the assumed cost of insurance as required by the Internal Revenue Service. The Bank (or its administrator) will report to the Insured the amount of imputed income each year on Form W-2 or its equivalent. No further amounts are reportable in respect of this Agreement.

 

  VI. DIVISION OF DEATH PROCEEDS

 

Subject to Paragraphs VII and IX herein, the division of the death proceeds of the policy is as follows:

 

  A. Should the Insured be employed by the Bank at the time of death, the Insured’s beneficiary (ies), designated in accordance with Paragraph III, shall be entitled to an amount equal to the lesser of $500,000 or the net amount at risk insurance portion of the proceeds. The net amount at risk portion is the total proceeds less the cash value of the policy.

 

B. If the Insured has qualified for Normal Retirement as defined in Paragraph I at the time of death, the Insured’s beneficiary (ies), designated in accordance with Paragraph I and Paragraph III, shall be entitled to an amount equal to the lesser of $ 100,000 or the net amount at risk insurance portion of the proceeds. The net amount at risk portion is the total proceeds less the cash value of the policy.

 

  C. The Bank shall be entitled to the remainder of such proceeds.

 

  2

 

 

  D. The Bank and the Insured (or assignees) shall share in any interest due on the death proceeds on a pro rata basis as the proceeds due each respectively bears to the total proceeds, excluding any such interest.

 

  VII. DIVISION OF THE CASH SURRENDER VALUE OF THE POLICY

 

The Bank shall at all times be entitled to the policy’s entire cash value, as that term is defined in the policy contract, less any policy loans and unpaid interest or cash withdrawals previously incurred by the Bank and any applicable surrender charges. Such cash value shall be determined as of the date of surrender or death as the case may be. Neither the Insured nor the Insured’s assignee shall at any time have any interest in the policy’s cash value.

 

  VIII. RIGHTS OF PARTIES WHERE POLICY ENDOWMENT OR ANNUITY ELECTION EXISTS

 

In the event the policy involves an endowment or annuity element, the bank’s right and interest in any endowment proceeds or annuity benefits, on expiration of the deferment period, shall be determined under the provisions of this Agreement by regarding such endowment proceeds of the commuted value of such annuity benefits as the policy’s cash value. Such endowment proceeds or annuity benefits shall be considered to be like death proceeds for the purposes of division under this Agreement.

 

  IX. TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT

 

This Agreement shall terminate upon the occurrence of any one of the following:

 

A. The Insured shall leave the employment of the Bank voluntarily or involuntarily at any time.
     
B. Surrender, lapse, or other termination of the Policy by the Bank.

 

Upon such termination, the Insured (or assignee) shall have a fifteen (15) day option to receive from the Bank an absolute assignment of the policy in consideration of a cash payment to the Bank, whereupon this Agreement shall terminate. Such cash payment referred to hereinabove shall be the greater of:

 

  1. The cash value of the policy on the date of such assignment, as defined in this Agreement; or
     
  2. The amount of the premiums that have been paid by the Bank prior to the date of such assignment.

 

  3

 

 

If, within said fifteen (15) day period, the Insured fails to exercise said option, fails to procure the entire aforestated cash payment, or dies, then the option shall terminate, the Insured (or assignee) shall have no payment obligation hereunder and the Insured (or assignee) agrees that all of the Insured’s rights, interest and claims in the policy shall terminate as of the date of the termination of this Agreement.

 

The Insured expressly agrees that this Agreement shall constitute sufficient written notice to the Insured of the Insured’s option to receive an absolute assignment of the policy as set forth herein. Except as provided above, this Agreement shall terminate upon distribution of the death benefit proceeds in accordance with Paragraph VI above.

 

  X. INSURED’S OR ASSIGNEE’S ASSIGNMENT RIGHTS

 

The Insured may not, without the written consent of the Bank, assign to any individual, trust or other organization, any right, title or interest in the subject policy nor any rights, options, privileges or duties created under this Agreement.

 

  XI. AGREEMENT BINDING UPON THE PARTIES

 

This Agreement shall bind the Insured and the Bank, their heirs, successors, personal representatives and assigns.

 

  XII. ERISA PROVISIONS

 

The following provisions are part of this Agreement and are intended to meet the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”):

 

  A. Named Fiduciary and Plan Administrator:

 

The “Named Fiduciary and Plan Administrator” of this Endorsement Method Split Dollar Agreement shall be the Executive Committee of the Board of Trustees of the Bank. As Named Fiduciary and Plan Administrator, the Bank shall be responsible for the management, control, and administration of this Split Dollar Plan as established herein. The Named Fiduciary may delegate to others certain aspects of the management and operation responsibilities of the Plan, including the employment of the advisors and the delegation of any ministerial duties to qualified individuals.

 

  B. Funding Policy:

 

The funding policy for this Split Dollar Plan shall be to maintain the subject policy in force by paying, when due, all premiums required.

 

  4

 

 

  C. Basis of Payment of Benefits:

 

Direct payment by the Insurer is the basis of payment of benefits under this Agreement, with those benefits in turn being based on the payment of premiums as provided in this Agreement.

 

  D . Claim Procedures:

 

Claim forms or claim information as to the subject policy can be obtained by contacting The Pangburn Group at 800-634-3287. When the Named Fiduciary has a claim which may be covered under the provisions described in the insurance policy, they should contact the office named above, and they will either complete a claim form and forward it to an authorized representative of the Insurer or advise the named Fiduciary what further requirements are necessary. The Insurer will evaluate and make a decision as to payment. If the claim is payable, a benefit check will be issued in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

In the event that a claim is not eligible under the policy, the Insurer will notify the Named Fiduciary of the denial pursuant to the requirements under the terms of the policy. If the Named Fiduciary is dissatisfied with the denial of claim and wishes to contest such claim denial, they should contact the office named above and they will assist in making an inquiry to the Insurer. All objections to the Insurer’s actions should be in writing and submitted to the office named above for transmittal to the Insurer.

 

  XIII. GENDER

 

Whenever in this Agreement words are used in the masculine or neuter gender, they shall be read and construed as in the masculine, feminine or neuter gender, whenever they should so apply.

 

  XIV. INSURANCE COMPANY NOT PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT

 

The Insurer shall not be deemed a party to this Agreement, but will respect the rights of the parties as herein developed upon receiving an executed copy of this Agreement. Payment or other performance in accordance with the policy provisions shall fully discharge the Insurer from any and all liability.

 

  XV. AMENDMENT OR REVOCATION

 

It is agreed by and between the parties hereto that, during the lifetime of the Insured, this Agreement may be amended or revoked at any time or times, in whole or in part, by the mutual written consent of the Insured and the Bank.

 

  5

 

 

  XVI. EFFECTIVE DATE

 

The effective date of this Agreement shall be the 1st day of September 2010.

 

SEVERABILITY AND INTERPRETATION

 

If a provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall nonetheless be enforceable according to their terms. Further, in the event that any provision is held to be overbroad as written, such provision shall be deemed amended to narrow its application to the extent necessary to make the provision enforceable to law and enforced as amended.

 

  XVII. APPLICABLE LAW

 

The validity and interpretation of this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maryland, except to the extent preempted by federal law.

 

Executed at Waldorf, MD on the 3 rd day of March, 2011.

 

  Community Bank of TRI-Country, Waldorf, MD
   
Laura Hewitt   By: /s/ Todd L. Capitani SR FINANCIAL OFFICER
Witness     Title
       
       
Witness      

 

  6

 

 

 

Exhibit 10.38

 

LIFE INSURANCE

 

ENDORSEMENT METHOD SPLIT DOLLAR

 

PLAN AGREEMENT

 

Insurers:                NYL;      GWL;      Ohio Nat’l;      John Hancock;      Midland Nat’l

 

Policy Number(s)  77253545;  85270624;  C 6952611;  BL 09727230:     695007

 

Bank: Community Bank of Tri County
     
Insured:   James Burke
     
Relationship of Insured to Bank: Executive

 

The respective rights and duties of the Bank and the Insured in the above referenced policy shall be pursuant to the terms set forth below:

 

I. DEFINITIONS

 

Refer to the policy contract for the definition of all terms in this Agreement other than the following:

 

“Normal Retirement” shall be defined to mean the Insured remains employed by the Bank until at least age 65.

 

II. POLICY TITLE AND OWNERSHIP

 

Title and ownership shall reside in the Bank for its use and for the use of the Insured all in accordance with this Agreement. The Bank alone may, to the extent of its interest, exercise the right to borrow or withdraw on the policy cash values. Where the Bank and the Insured (or assignee, with the consent of the Insured) mutually agree to exercise the right to increase the coverage under the subject Split Dollar policy, then, in such event, the rights, duties and benefits of the parties to such increased coverage shall continue to be subject to the terms of this Agreement.

 

    1
 

 

III. BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION RIGHTS

 

The Insured (or assignee) shall have the right and power to designate a beneficiary or beneficiaries to receive the Insured’s share of the proceeds payable upon the death of the Insured, and to elect and change a payment option for such beneficiary, subject to any right or interest the Bank may have in such proceeds, as provided in the Agreement.

 

IV. PREMIUM PAYMENT METHOD

 

The Bank shall pay an amount equal to the planned premiums and any other premium payments that might become necessary to keep the policy in force.

 

V. TAX TREATMENT

 

It is agreed by and between the parties hereto that, because the arrangement established pursuant to this Agreement provides only death benefits by use of a Bank-owned policy, it is properly reportable and taxable, for income and payroll tax purposes, under the “economic benefit” regime of the IRS’s 2003 final split dollar regulations, and it should not be considered a nonqualified deferred compensation plan subject to the restrictions of section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code. Accordingly, annually the Insured will receive a taxable benefit equal to the assumed cost of insurance as required by the Internal Revenue Service. The Bank (or its administrator) will report to the Insured the amount of imputed income each year on Form W-2 or its equivalent. No further amounts are reportable in respect of this Agreement.

 

VI. DIVISION OF DEATH PROCEEDS

 

Subject to Paragraphs VII and IX herein, the division of the death proceeds of the policy is as follows:

 

A. Should the Insured be employed by the Bank at the time of death, the Insured’s beneficiary (ies), designated in accordance with Paragraph III, shall be entitled to an amount equal to the lesser of $500,000 or the net amount at risk insurance portion of the proceeds. The net amount at risk portion is the total proceeds less the cash value of the policy.

 

B. If the Insured has qualified for Normal Retirement as defined in Paragraph I at the time of death, the Insured’s beneficiary (ies), designated in accordance with Paragraph III, shall be entitled to an amount equal to the lesser of $100,000 or the net amount at risk insurance portion of the proceeds. The net amount at risk portion is the total proceeds less the cash value of the policy.

 

C. The Bank shall be entitled to the remainder of such proceeds.

 

    2
 

 

D. The Bank and the Insured (or assignees) shall share in any interest due on the death proceeds on a pro rata basis as the proceeds due each respectively bears to the total proceeds, excluding any such interest.

 

VII. DIVISION OF THE CASH SURRENDER VALUE OF THE POLICY

 

The Bank shall at all times be entitled to the policy’s entire cash value, as that term is defined in the policy contract, less any policy loans and unpaid interest or cash withdrawals previously incurred by the Bank and any applicable surrender charges. Such cash value shall be determined as of the date of surrender or death as the case may be. Neither the Insured nor the Insured’s assignee shall at any time have any interest in the policy’s cash value.

 

VIII. RIGHTS OF PARTIES WHERE POLICY ENDOWMENT OR ANNUITY ELECTION EXISTS

 

In the event the policy involves an endowment or annuity element, the bank’s right and interest in any endowment proceeds or annuity benefits, on expiration of the deferment period, shall be determined under the provisions of this Agreement by regarding such endowment proceeds of the commuted value of such annuity benefits as the policy’s cash value. Such endowment proceeds or annuity benefits shall be considered to be like death proceeds for the purposes of division under this Agreement.

 

IX. TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT

 

This Agreement shall terminate upon the occurrence of any one of the following:

 

A. The Insured shall leave the employment of the Bank voluntarily or involuntarily at any time.

 

B. Surrender, lapse, or other termination of the Policy by the Bank.

 

Upon such termination, the Insured (or assignee) shall have a fifteen (15) day option to receive from the Bank an absolute assignment of the policy in consideration of a cash payment to the Bank, whereupon this Agreement shall terminate. Such cash payment referred to hereinabove shall be the greater of:

 

1. The cash value of the policy on the date of such assignment, as defined in this Agreement; or

 

2. The amount of the premiums that have been paid by the Bank prior to the date of such assignment.

 

    3
 

 

If, within said fifteen (15) day period, the Insured fails to exercise said option, fails to procure the entire aforestated cash payment, or dies, then the option shall terminate, the Insured (or assignee) shall have no payment obligation hereunder and the Insured (or assignee) agrees that all of the Insured’s rights, interest and claims in the policy shall terminate as of the date of the termination of this Agreement.

 

The Insured expressly agrees that this Agreement shall constitute sufficient written notice to the Insured of the Insured’s option to receive an absolute assignment of the policy as set forth herein. Except as provided above, this Agreement shall terminate upon distribution of the death benefit proceeds in accordance with Paragraph VI above.

 

X. INSURED’S OR ASSIGNEE’S ASSIGNMENT RIGHTS

 

The Insured may not, without the written consent of the Bank, assign to any individual, trust or other organization, any right, title or interest in the subject policy nor any rights, options, privileges or duties created under this Agreement.

 

XI. AGREEMENT BINDING UPON THE PARTIES

 

This Agreement shall bind the Insured and the Bank, their heirs, successors, personal representatives and assigns.

 

XII. ERISA PROVISIONS

 

The following provisions are part of this Agreement and are intended to meet the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”):

 

A. Named Fiduciary and Plan Administrator:

 

The “Named Fiduciary and Plan Administrator” of this Endorsement Method Split Dollar Agreement shall be the Executive Committee of the Board of Trustees of the Bank. As Named Fiduciary and Plan Administrator, the Bank shall be responsible for the management, control, and administration of this Split Dollar Plan as established herein. The Named Fiduciary may delegate to others certain aspects of the management and operation responsibilities of the Plan, including the employment of the advisors and the delegation of any ministerial duties

to qualified individuals.

 

B. Funding Policy:

 

The funding policy for this Split Dollar Plan shall be to maintain the subject policy in force by paying, when due, all premiums required.

 

    4
 

 

C. Basis of Payment of Benefits:

 

Direct payment by the Insurer is the basis of payment of benefits under this Agreement, with those benefits in turn being based on the payment of premiums as provided in this Agreement.

 

D. Claim Procedures:

 

Claim forms or claim information as to the subject policy can be obtained by contacting The Pangburn Group at 800-634-3287. When the Named Fiduciary has a claim which may be covered under the provisions described in the insurance policy, they should contact the office named above, and they will either complete a claim form and forward it to an authorized representative of the Insurer or advise the named Fiduciary what further requirements are necessary. The Insurer will evaluate and make a decision as to payment. If the claim is payable, a benefit check will be issued in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

In the event that a claim is not eligible under the policy, the Insurer will notify the Named Fiduciary of the denial pursuant to the requirements under the terms of the policy. If the Named Fiduciary is dissatisfied with the denial of claim and wishes to contest such claim denial, they should contact the office named above and they will assist in making an inquiry to the Insurer. All objections to the Insurer’s actions should be in writing and submitted to the office named above for transmittal to the Insurer.

 

XIII. GENDER

 

Whenever in this Agreement words are used in the masculine or neuter gender, they shall be read and construed as in the masculine, feminine or neuter gender, whenever they should so apply.

 

XIV. INSURANCE COMPANY NOT PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT

 

The Insurer shall not be deemed a party to this Agreement, but will respect the rights of the parties as herein developed upon receiving an executed copy of this Agreement. Payment or other performance in accordance with the policy provisions shall fully discharge the Insurer from any and all liability.

 

XV. AMENDMENT OR REVOCATION

 

It is agreed by and between the parties hereto that, during the lifetime of the Insured, this Agreement may be amended or revoked at any time or times, in whole or in part, by the mutual written consent of the Insured and the Bank.

 

    5
 

 

XVI. EFFECTIVE DATE

 

The effective date of this Agreement shall be the 1st day of September 2010.

 

SEVERABILITY AND INTERPRETATION

 

If a provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall nonetheless be enforceable according to their terms. Further, in the event that any provision is held to be overbroad as written, such provision shall be deemed amended to narrow its application to the extent necessary to make the provision enforceable to law and enforced as amended.

 

XVII. APPLICABLE LAW

 

The validity and interpretation of this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maryland, except to the extent preempted by federal law.

 

Executed at Waldord, MD on the 15 th day of March, 2011.

 

Community Bank of TRI-County, Waldorf, MD

 

Laura Hewitt   By: /s/ James M. Burke E.V.P
Witness     Title

 

       
Witness    

 

    6

 

Exhibit 10.39

 

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

 

THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”) is entered into this 23rd day of April, 2013, by and between Community Bank of Tri-County, with its principal place of business at 3035 Leonardtown Road, Waldorf, Maryland 20601 (the “Bank”), Todd Capitani (the “Employee”), and Tri-County Financial Corporation (the “Company”), solely as guarantor of the Bank’s obligations hereunder, and is effective as of the date hereof (the “Effective Date”).

 

WHEREAS, the parties desire by this writing to set forth the continuing employment relationship between the Bank and the Employee.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants contained herein, the Bank and the Employee hereby agree as follows:

 

1.          EMPLOYMENT. The Employee shall serve the Bank as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. In such position, the Employee shall have the duties, responsibilities, functions and authority determined and designated from time to time by the Board of Directors (the “Board”) and the Chief Executive Officer. The Employee shall render such administrative and management services to the Bank and its affiliates as are customarily performed by persons in a similar executive capacity.

 

2.          EFFECTIVE DATE AND TERM. The Bank agrees to employ the Employee for an initial period of three (3) years, beginning on the Effective Date and ending on the day before the third (3rd) anniversary of the Effective Date, and during the period of any additional extensions described below (the “Term of Employment”). The parties intend that, at any point in time during the Employee’s employment hereunder, the then-remaining Term of Employment shall be three (3) years. On the day after the Effective Date and on each day thereafter, the Term of Employment shall extend by one day, so that, on any date, the term of Employment will expire on the day before the third (3rd) anniversary of such date. These extensions shall continue unless (a) the Bank notifies the Employee that it has elected to discontinue the extensions; (b) the Employee notifies the Bank of the employee’s election to discontinue the extensions; or (c) the Employee’s employment with the Bank is terminated, whether by resignation, discharge or otherwise. On the earlier of (i) the date on which such notice is given; or (ii) the effective date of a termination of Employee’s Employment with the Bank, the Term of Employment will convert to a fixed period of three (3) years ending on the day before the third (3rd) anniversary of such date (provided, however, that subject to any rights of the Employee under this Agreement, the Term of Employment shall terminate on such earlier date as may be specifically provided in this Agreement in the event of the Employee’s death, voluntary termination, Disability or termination for Cause). The last day of the Agreement term, as extended in accordance with this Section 2, is referred to in this Agreement as the ‘Expiration Date.’”

 

 

 

3.          COMPENSATION AND BENEFITS.

 

3.1      BASE SALARY. During the Term of Employment, the Bank agrees to pay the Employee base salary at the rate of $230,000 per annum, subject to increase from time to time in accordance with the usual practices of the Bank with respect to its review of compensation for senior executives. Any increase in the Employee’s base salary shall become the “base salary” for purposes of this Agreement. The Employee’s base salary shall be payable in periodic installments in accordance with the Bank’s usual practice.
 

3.2      EMPLOYEE BENEFITS. The Employee shall also be entitled to participate in any and all employee benefit plans, medical insurance plans, disability income plans, retirement plans, bonus incentive plans and other benefit plans from time to time in effect for senior executives of the Bank. Such participation shall be subject to (a) the terms of the applicable plan documents, (b) generally applicable policies of the Bank and (c) the discretion of the Board or any administrative or other committee provided for in, or contemplated by, such plans.

 

3.3      INCENTIVE COMPENSATION. The Employee shall be eligible to participate in any incentive compensation or bonus programs sponsored by the Bank on such terms as the Board may establish for the Employee’s participation.

 

3.4      BUSINESS EXPENSES. The Bank shall pay, or reimburse, the Employee for reasonable travel and other business expenses incurred by the Employee in the performance of the Employee’s duties and responsibilities, subject to such reasonable requirements with respect to substantiation and documentation as may be specified by the Bank.

 

3.5      LEAVE. The Employee shall be entitled to leave (vacation, sick and personal) in accordance with the Bank’s standard policies for senior executives. Further, the Board, in its discretion, may grant to the Employee a leave or leaves of absence, with or without pay, at such time or times and upon such terms and conditions as the Board, in its discretion, may determine.

 

3.6      OTHER EMPLOYEE BENEFITS. The Employee shall be entitled to participate in any compensatory plans, arrangements or programs the Bank makes available to its senior executive officers, including, but not limited to, stock compensation programs, supplemental retirement arrangements, or executive health or life insurance programs, subject to, and on a basis consistent with, the terms and conditions of such plans, arrangements or programs.

 

3.7      GENERAL. The Employee’s participation in any plans, arrangements or programs currently in effect or made available in the future shall not be deemed to be in lieu of other compensation to which the Employee is entitled as described under this Agreement.

 

4.          EXTENT OF SERVICE. During the Term of Employment, the Employee shall devote his full time, best efforts and business judgment, skills and knowledge to the advancement of the Bank’s interests and to the discharge of his responsibilities under this Agreement; provided, however, that the Employee may:

 

  2  

 

 

(a)      invest personal assets in such form or manner as shall not require any material services on the Employee’s part in the operations or affairs of the entities in which such investments are made, provided that the Employee may not own any interest in an entity that competes with the Bank or any affiliate (other than up to 4.9% of the outstanding voting stock of such entity that is a publicly-traded entity); or

 

(b)       serve on the board of directors of any company not in competition with the Bank or any affiliate, provided that the Employee shall not render any material services with respect to the operations or affairs of any such company; or

 

(c)      engage in religious, charitable or other community or non-profit activities which do not impair the Employee’s ability to fulfill his duties and responsibilities under this Agreement.

 

5.           DEATH. In the event of the Employee’s death during the Term of Employment, the Employee’s employment (and the Term of Employment) shall terminate on the date of death. The Bank shall pay to the Employee’s beneficiary, or estate, (a) any compensation due the Employee through the last day of the calendar month in which death occurred, plus (b) any other compensation or benefits as may be provided in accordance with the terms and provisions of any applicable plans and programs of the Bank in which the Employee participated as of the date of death.

 

6.           DISCHARGE FOR CAUSE.

 

6.1       NOTICE AND DETERMINATION OF CAUSE. The Bank may terminate the Employee’s employment at any time during the Term of Employment for Cause, as defined below. Such termination shall be deemed to have occurred for Cause only if:

 

(a)        The Board, by a separate affirmative vote of at least three-fourths (3/4) of the entire membership, determines that the Employee has: (i) engaged in acts of personal dishonesty which have resulted in loss to the Bank or one of its affiliates; (ii) intentionally failed to perform stated duties; (iii) committed a willful violation of any law, rule, regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses); (iv) become subject to the entry of a final cease and desist order which results in substantial loss to the Bank or one of its affiliates; (v) been convicted of a crime or act involving moral turpitude; (vi) willfully breached the Bank’s or the Company’s code of conduct and business ethics; (vii) been disqualified or barred by any governmental or self-regulatory authority from serving in the Employee’s then-current employment capacity or (viii) willfully attempted to obstruct or failed to cooperate with any investigation authorized by the Board or any governmental or self-regulatory entity. No act or failure to act on the part of the Employee shall be considered “willful” unless it is done, or omitted to be done, by the Employee in bad faith or without reasonable belief that the Employee’s action or omission was in the best interests of the Bank. Any act or failure to act that is based upon authority given pursuant to a resolution duly adopted by the Board of Directors, or upon the advice of legal counsel for the Bank, shall be conclusively presumed to be done, or omitted to be done, by the Employee in good faith and in the best interests of the Bank and its affiliates; and

 

  3  

 

 

(b)      At least ten (10) days prior to the vote contemplated by Section 6.1(a), the Bank has provided the Employee with notice of its intent to discharge the Employee for Cause, detailing with particularity the facts and circumstances which are alleged to constitute Cause (a “Notice of Intent to Discharge”); and

 

(c)     After giving the Employee Notice of Intent to Discharge and before taking the vote contemplated by Section 6.1(a), the Employee is afforded a reasonable opportunity to make both written and oral presentations before the Board for the purpose of refuting the alleged grounds for Cause for discharge; and

 

(d)     After the vote contemplated by Section 6.1(a), the Bank has furnished to the Employee a notice of termination which specifies the effective date of the Employee’s termination of employment (which shall not be earlier than the date on which such notice is deemed given), and include a copy of a resolution or resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors authorizing the termination of the Employee for Cause and stating with particularity the facts and circumstances found to constitute Cause for discharge (the “Final Discharge Notice”).

 

 6.2       SUSPENSION; FINAL DISCHARGE. Following the provision of Notice of Intent to Discharge, the Bank may temporarily suspend the Employee’s duties and authority and, in such event, may also suspend the payment of salary and other cash compensation (but not participation in retirement, insurance and other employee benefit plans). If the Employee is discharged for Cause, all payments withheld during the suspension period shall be deemed forfeited and shall not be payable to the Employee. If the Bank does not give a Final Discharge Notice to the Employee within one hundred and twenty (120) days after giving him Notice of Intent to Discharge, the Notice of Intent to Discharge shall be deemed withdrawn and any future action to discharge the Employee for Cause shall require the Bank to give the Employee a new Notice of Intent to Discharge.

 

  6.3       EFFECT OF TERMINATION FOR CAUSE. In the event of termination pursuant to this Section 6, the Term of Employment shall terminate and the Bank shall pay to the Employee an amount equal to the sum of (a) base salary or other compensation earned through the date of termination, plus (b) any other compensation or vested benefits as may be provided in accordance with the terms and provisions of any applicable plans and programs of the Bank. All other obligations of the Bank shall terminate as of the date of termination.

 

7.             DISABILITY. The Bank may terminate the Employee’s employment (and the Term of Employment) after having established the Employee’s Disability. For purposes of this Agreement, “Disability” means a physical or mental infirmity that impairs the Employee’s ability to substantially perform his duties under this Agreement and results in the Employee becoming eligible for long-term disability benefits under the Bank’s long-term disability plan (or, if the Bank has no such plan in effect, that impairs the Employee’s ability to substantially perform his full-time duties under this Agreement for a period of one hundred eighty (180) consecutive days). The Employee shall be entitled to the compensation and benefits provided for under this Agreement for (a) any period during the Term of Employment and prior to the establishment of the Employee’s Disability during which the Employee is unable to work due to physical or mental infirmity, or (b) any period of Disability which is prior to the Employee’s termination of employment pursuant to this Section 7.

 

  4  

 

 

8.           TERMINATION WITHOUT CAUSE. The Board may, by written notice to the Employee, immediately terminate his employment at any time for a reason other than Cause, in which event the Employee shall be entitled to receive the termination payment set forth in Section 10.2 of this Agreement, payable in one lump sum within ten (10) days of termination. The Bank shall also continue to provide the Employee with benefit continuation as set forth in Section 10.3 of this Agreement.

 

9.           VOLUNTARY TERMINATION BY EMPLOYEE. Subject to Section 11 hereof, the Employee may voluntarily terminate employment with the Bank during the term of this Agreement, upon at least 60 days’ prior written notice, in which case the Term of Employment shall end and the Bank shall pay to the Employee an amount equal to the (a) base salary or other compensation earned through the date of termination plus (b) any other compensation and benefits as may be provided in accordance with the terms and provisions of any applicable benefit plans and programs of the Bank.

 

10.         CHANGE IN CONTROL.

 

10.1      DEFINITION OF CHANGE IN CONTROL. For purposes of this Agreement, a “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of any of the following events:

 

(a)          individuals who, on the date of this Agreement, constitute the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Incumbent Directors”) cease for any reason to constitute at least half of the Board of Directors of the Company, provided that any person becoming a director subsequent to such time, whose election or nomination for election was approved by a vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the Incumbent Directors then on the Board of Directors of the Company (either by a specific vote or by approval of the proxy statement of the Company in which such person is named as a nominee for director, without written objection to such nomination) shall be an Incumbent Director; provided, however, that no individual initially elected or nominated as a director of the Company as a result of an actual or threatened election contest with respect to directors or as a result of any other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of any person other than the Board of Directors of the Company shall be deemed to be an Incumbent Director;

 

(b)          any “person” (as such term is defined in Section 3(a)(9) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”) and as used in Sections 13(d)(3) and 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act) is or becomes a “beneficial owner” (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly, of securities of the Company representing 25% or more of the combined voting power of the Company’s then outstanding securities eligible to vote for the election of the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Company Voting Securities”); provided, however, that the event described in this paragraph (b) shall not be deemed to be a Change in Control by virtue of any of the following acquisitions: (A) by the Company or any subsidiary, (B) by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Company or any subsidiary, (C) by any underwriter temporarily holding securities pursuant to an offering of such securities or (D) a transaction (other than one described in (c) below) in which Company Voting Securities are acquired from the Company, if a majority of the Incumbent Directors approve a resolution providing expressly that the acquisition pursuant to this clause (D) does not constitute a Change in Control under this paragraph (b);

 

  5  

 

 

(c)          the consummation of a merger, consolidation, statutory share exchange or similar form of corporate transaction involving the Company or any of its subsidiaries that requires the approval of the Company’s stockholders, whether for such transaction or the issuance of securities in the transaction (a “Business Combination”), unless immediately following such Business Combination: (A) at least 50% of the total voting power of (x) the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (the “Surviving Corporation”), or (y) if applicable, the ultimate parent corporation that directly or indirectly has beneficial ownership of 100% of the voting securities eligible to elect directors of the Surviving Corporation (the “Parent Corporation”), is represented by the Company Voting Securities that were outstanding immediately prior to such Business Combination (or, if applicable, is represented by shares into which such Company Voting Securities were converted pursuant to such Business Combination), and such voting power among (and only among) the holders thereof is in substantially the same proportion as the voting power of such Company Voting Securities among the holders thereof immediately prior to the Business Combination, (B) no person (other than any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Surviving Corporation or the Parent Corporation) is or becomes the beneficial owner, directly or indirectly, of 25% or more of the total voting power of the outstanding voting securities eligible to elect directors of the Parent Corporation (or, if there is no Parent Corporation, the Surviving Corporation) and (C) at least 50% of the members of the board of directors of the Parent Corporation (or, if there is no Parent Corporation, the Surviving Corporation) following the consummation of the Business Combination were Incumbent Directors at the time of the Company Board’s approval of the execution of the initial agreement providing for such Business Combination; or

 

(d)          the stockholders of the Company approve a plan of complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company or a sale of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets.

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Change in Control shall not be deemed to occur solely because any person acquires beneficial ownership of more than 25% of Company Voting Securities as a result of the acquisition of Company Voting Securities by the Company which reduces the number of Company Voting Securities outstanding; provided, that if after such acquisition by the Company such person becomes the beneficial owner of additional Company Voting Securities that increases the percentage of outstanding Company Voting Securities beneficially owned by such person, a Change in Control of the Company shall then occur.

 

  6  

 

 

  10.2      TERMINATION PAYMENT. Notwithstanding any provision herein to the contrary, if the Bank (i) terminates the Employee’s employment pursuant to Section 8 of this Agreement or (ii) terminates the Employee’s employment under this Agreement without the Employee’s prior written consent and for a reason other than Cause, in connection with or within twelve (12) months after a Change in Control, then the Employee shall be paid an unreduced lump sum severance benefit equal to the sum of the following items:

 

(a)          Two (2) times the Employee’s annual base salary (as provided for in Section 3 of this Agreement) at the rate in effect on the date of the Employee’s termination of employment (including any amount contributed by the Bank on the Employee’s behalf pursuant to a salary reduction agreement and which is not included in the Employee’s gross income under Sections 125, 132(f) or 402(e)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended); and

 

(b)          Two (2) times the most recent annual incentive compensation payment made to the Employee (as provided for in Section 3 of this Agreement).

 

The severance benefit payment under this Section 10.2 shall be made to the Employee in one lump sum within ten (10) days of the Employee’s termination of employment.

 

  10.3      BENEFIT CONTINUATION. Employee shall also be entitled to continuation of the medical, dental and life insurance benefits existing on the date of termination at the level in effect, and at the same out-of-pocket premium cost to the Employee, as on the date of termination for a period of thirty-six (36) months following the Employee’s termination of employment. If the benefits under any benefit plan or program continued pursuant to this Section 10.3 may not be provided because the Employee is no longer an employee of the Bank or an affiliate, the Bank shall pay or provide for coverage on a comparable basis for the Employee and, where applicable, the Employee’s dependents.

 

  10.4     OTHER TERMINATION. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement to the contrary, the Employee may voluntarily terminate employment under this Agreement within twelve (12) months following a Change in Control of the Bank or Corporation, and the Employee shall be entitled to receive the payments and benefit continuation described in Sections 10.2 and 10.3 of this Agreement, upon the occurrence of any of the following events, or within ninety (90) days thereafter, which have not been consented to in advance by the Employee in writing: (a) the requirement that the Employee move his primary personal residence, or perform his principal executive functions, more than thirty-five (35) miles from his primary office as of the date of the Change in Control; (b) a material reduction in the Employee’s base salary as in effect on the date of the Change in Control or as the same may be increased from time to time; (c) the failure of the Bank to continue to provide the Employee with compensation and benefits provided for under this Agreement, as the same may be increased from time to time, or with benefits substantially similar to those provided to him under any of the employee benefit plans in which the Employee now or hereafter becomes a participant, or the taking of any action by the Bank which would directly or indirectly reduce any such benefits or deprive the Employee of any material fringe benefit provided to him at the time of the Change in Control; (d) the assignment to the Employee of duties and responsibilities materially different from those normally associated with his position as referenced in Section 1; (e) a failure to elect or reelect the Employee to the Board if the Employee is serving on the Board on the date of the Change in Control; or (f) a material diminution or reduction in the Employee’s responsibilities or authority (including reporting responsibilities) in connection with his employment with the Bank.

 

  7  

 

 

11.           LIMITATION OF BENEFITS UNDER CERTAIN CIRCUMSTANCES. “If the payments and benefits provided pursuant to Section 10 of this Agreement, either alone or together with other payments and benefits the Employee has the right to receive from the Bank, would constitute a “parachute payment” under Section 280G of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), the payments and benefits pursuant to Section 10 shall be reduced by the amount, if any, which is the minimum necessary to result in no portion of the payments and benefits under Section 10 being non-deductible to the Bank pursuant to Section 280G of the Code and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. If such a reduction is necessary and none of the payments or benefits constitutes a “deferral of compensation” within the meaning of and subject to Section 409A of the Code, then the reduction shall occur in a manner the Employee elects in writing prior to the date of payment. If the payments or benefits constitute a deferral of compensation or if the Employee fails to make an election pursuant to the preceding sentence, then the payments and/or benefits to be reduced will be determined in a manner which has the least economic cost to the Employee. The Bank’s independent public accountants will determine any reduction in the payments and benefits to be made pursuant to Section 10; the Bank will pay for the accountant’s opinion. If the Bank and/or the Employee do not agree with the accountant’s opinion, the Bank will pay to the Employee the maximum amount of payments and benefits pursuant to Section 10 (as selected by the Employee if the payments and benefits do not constitute a deferral of compensation) that the opinion indicates have a high probability of not causing any of the payments and benefits to be non-deductible to the Bank and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code.”

 

12.           NO MITIGATION. In the event of any termination of employment under this Agreement, the Employee shall be under no obligation to seek other employment or to otherwise mitigate damages, and there shall be no offset against any amounts due to the Employee under this Agreement for any reason, including, without limitation, on account of any remuneration attributable to subsequent employment. Any amounts due under this Agreement are in the nature of severance payments or liquidated damages, or both, and are not in the nature of a penalty.

 

13.           MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS.

 

  13.1      CONFLICTING AGREEMENTS. The Employee hereby represents and warrants that the execution of this Agreement and the performance of the Employee’s obligations hereunder will not breach or be in conflict with any other agreement to which the Employee is a party or is bound, and that the Employee is not now subject to any covenants against competition or similar covenants which would affect the performance of the Employee’s obligations under this Agreement.

 

  8  

 

 

 13.2      WITHHOLDING. All payments made under this Agreement shall be net of any tax or other amounts required to be withheld under applicable law.

 

  13.3      ARBITRATION. The Bank and the Employee agree that any claim, dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Agreement (including, without limitation, any such claim, dispute or controversy arising under any federal, state or local statute, regulation or ordinance or any of the Bank’s employee benefit plans, policies or programs) shall be resolved solely and exclusively by binding arbitration. The arbitration shall be held in the County of Charles, Maryland (or at such other location as shall be mutually agreed upon by the parties). The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Rules (the “Rules”) of the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”) in effect at the time of the arbitration, except that the arbitrator shall be selected by alternatively striking from a list of five arbitrators supplied by the AAA. All fees and expenses of the arbitration, excluding a transcript, shall be borne equally by the parties. Each party will pay for the fees and expenses of its own attorneys, experts, witnesses, and preparation and presentation of proofs and post-hearing briefs (unless the Employee prevails on a claim for which attorney’s fees are recoverable under the Agreement). Any action to enforce or vacate the arbitrator’s award shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act, if applicable, and otherwise by applicable state law. If either the Bank or the Employee pursues any claim, dispute or controversy against the other in a legal proceeding, other than the arbitration provided for herein, the responding party shall be entitled to dismissal or injunctive relief regarding such action and recovery of all costs, losses and attorneys’ fees related to such action. Notwithstanding the provisions of this paragraph, either party may seek injunctive relief in a court of competent jurisdiction, whether or not the case is then pending before the panel of arbitrators. Following the court’s determination of the injunction issue, the case shall continue in arbitration as provided herein.

 

 13.4      INDEMNIFICATION FOR ATTORNEYS’ FEES. In the event any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with the Employee’s termination of employment or this Agreement is resolved in favor of the Employee, whether by judgment, arbitration or settlement, the Employee shall be entitled to the payment of: (i) all legal fees and expenses incurred by the Employee in resolving such dispute or controversy, and (ii) any back-pay, including salary, bonuses and any other cash compensation, fringe benefits and any compensation and benefits due to the Employee under this Agreement.

 

 13.5      ASSIGNMENT; SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS, ETC.

 

(a)         This Agreement is personal to the Employee and shall not be assignable by the Employee without the prior written consent of the Bank, other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be enforceable by the Employee’s legal representatives.

 

(b)         This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Bank and its successors and permitted assigns.

 

  9  

 

 

(c)          The Bank may not assign this Agreement or any interest herein without the prior written consent of the Employee and, without such consent, any attempted transfer or assignment shall be null and void and of no effect; provided, however, that the Bank shall require any successor (whether direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise) to all or substantially all of the business and/or assets of the Bank expressly to assume and to agree to perform this Agreement in the same manner and to the same extent that the Bank would have been required to perform it if no such succession had taken place. As used in this Agreement, “the Bank” shall mean both the Bank and the Company, as defined above, and any successor that assumes and agrees to perform this Agreement, by operation of law or otherwise.

 

 13.6       ENFORCEABILITY. If any portion or provision of this Agreement shall to any extent be declared illegal or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, then the remainder of this Agreement, or the application of such portion or provision in circumstances other than those as to which it is so declared illegal or unenforceable, shall not be affected thereby, and each portion and provision of this Agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law.

 

 13.7       REDUCTIONS; REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, any and all payments and benefits to be provided to the Employee under this Agreement are subject to reduction to the extent required by applicable statutes, regulations, rules and directives of federal, state and other governmental and regulatory bodies having jurisdiction over the Bank and its affiliates. The Employee is aware and acknowledges that the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation has the power to preclude the Bank or its affiliates from making payments to the Employee under this Agreement under certain circumstances. The Employee agrees that neither the Bank nor its affiliates shall be deemed to be in breach of this Agreement if it is precluded from making a payment otherwise payable hereunder by reason of regulatory requirements binding on the Bank or its affiliates, as the case may be.

 

  13.8      WAIVER. No waiver of any provision of this Agreement shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by the waiving party. The failure of any party to require the performance of any term or obligation of this Agreement, or the waiver by any party of any breach of this Agreement, shall not prevent any subsequent enforcement of such term or obligation or be deemed a waiver of any subsequent breach.

 

 13.9      NOTICES. Any notices, requests, demands and other communications provided for by this Agreement shall be sufficient if in writing and delivered in person or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, and addressed to the Employee at the Employee’s last known address on the books of the Bank or, in the case of the Bank, at its main office, attention of the Chief Executive Officer of the Board of Directors.

 

  13.10     AMENDMENT. This Agreement may be amended or modified only by a written instrument signed by the Employee and a duly authorized representative of the Bank.

 

  10  

 

 

 

 13.11      NO EFFECT ON LENGTH OF SERVICE. Nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to prohibit the Bank from terminating the Employee’s employment before the end of the Term of Employment with or without notice for any reason. This Agreement shall determine the relative rights and obligations of the Bank and the Employee in the event of any such termination. In addition, nothing in this Agreement shall require the termination of the Employee’s employment at the expiration of the Term of Employment. Any continuation of the Employee’s employment beyond the expiration of the Term of Employment shall be on an “at-will” basis, unless the parties agree otherwise.

 

  13.12      SOURCE OF PAYMENTS. The Bank shall make in a timely manner all payments provided for under this Agreement in cash or check from its general funds. The Company, however, unconditionally guarantees payment and the provision of all amounts and benefits due to the Employee under this Agreement. If the Bank does not timely pay or provide such amounts and benefits, the Company shall pay or provide such amounts and benefits.

 

 13.13      ENTIRE AGREEMENT; EFFECT ON PRIOR AGREEMENTS. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties pertaining to its subject matter and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements, understandings, negotiations, prior draft agreements, and discussions of the parties, whether oral or written.

 

  13.14      COUNTERPARTS AND FACSIMILE SIGNATURES. This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, all of which shall be considered one and the same agreement and shall become effective when one or more counterparts have been signed by each party and delivered to the other party, it being understood that all parties need not sign the same counterpart. This Agreement may be executed by facsimile signatures.

 

  13.15      GOVERNING LAW. This is a Maryland contract and shall be construed under and be governed in all respects by the laws of the State of Maryland, without giving effect to its conflicts of law principles.

 

14.           EFFECT OF CODE SECTION 409A. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, if the Bank in good faith determines, as of the effective date of the Employee’s termination of employment, that amounts payable to the Employee hereunder, are required to be suspended or delayed for six months in order to satisfy the requirements of Section 409A of the Code, then the Bank will so advise the Employee, and any such payments shall be suspended and accrued for six months, whereupon they shall be paid to the Employee in a lump sum (together with interest thereon at the then-prevailing prime rate). The Employee agrees that the Bank shall be deemed to be in breach of this Agreement if it delays making a payment otherwise payable hereunder by reason of Section 409A.

 

  11  

 

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement on the day and year first above the written.

 
ATTEST:   COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ William J. Pasenelli
     
    For the Bank
     
ATTEST:   TRI-COUNTY FINANCIAL CORPORATION
    (As Guarantor)
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ William J. Pasenelli
     
    For the Corporation
     
WITNESS:   EMPLOYEE:
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ Todd L. Capitani
    Todd Capitani
 

  12  

 

 

Exhibit 10.40

 

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

 

THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”) is entered into this 20 th day of April , 2007, by and between Community Bank of Tri-County, with its principal place of business at 3035 Leonardtown Road, Waldorf; Maryland 20601 (the “Bank”), James M. Burke (the “Employee”), and Tri-County Financial Corporation (the “Company”), solely as guarantor of the Bank’s obligations hereunder, and is effective as of the date hereof (the “Effective Date”).

 

WHEREAS, the parties desire by this writing to set forth the continuing employment relationship between the Bank and the Employee.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants contained herein, the Bank and the Employee hereby agree as follows:

 

1.           EMPLOYMENT. The Employee shall serve the Bank as Executive Vice President. In such position, the Employee shall have the duties, responsibilities, functions and authority determined and designated from time to time by the Board of Directors (the “Board”) and the Chief Executive Officer. The Employee shall render such administrative and management services to the Bank and its affiliates as are customarily performed by persons in a similar executive capacity.

 

2.           EFFECTIVE DATE AND TERM. The Bank agrees to employ the Employee for an initial period of one (1) year, beginning on the Effective Date and ending on the day before the first (1st) anniversary of the Effective Date, and during the period of any additional extensions described below (the “Term of Employment”). The parties intend that, at any point in time during the Employee’s employment hereunder, the then-remaining Term of Employment shall be one (1) year. On the day after the Effective Date and on each day thereafter, the Term of Employment shall extend by one day, so that, on any date, the term of Employment will expire on the day before the first (1 st ) anniversary of such date. These extensions shall continue unless (a) the Bank notifies the Employee that it has elected to discontinue the extensions; (b) the Employee notifies the Bank of his election to discontinue the extensions; or (c) the Employee’s employment with the Bank is terminated, whether by resignation, discharge or otherwise. On the earlier of (i) the date on which such notice is given; or (ii) the effective date of a termination of Employee’s Employment with the Bank, the Term of Employment will convert to a fixed period of one (1) year ending on the day before the first (1st) anniversary of such date (provided, however, that subject to any rights of the Employee under this Agreement, the Term of Employment shall terminate on such earlier date as may be specifically provided in this Agreement in the event of the Employee’s death, voluntary termination, Disability or termination for Cause). The last day of the Agreement term, as extended in accordance with this Section 2, is referred to in this Agreement as the “Expiration Date.”

 

 

 

 

3. COMPENSATION AND BENEFITS.

 

3.1         BASE SALARY. During the Term of Employment, the Bank agrees to pay the Employee base salary at the rate of $125,000 per annum, subject to increase from time to time in accordance with the usual practices of the Bank with respect to its review of compensation for senior executives. Any increase in the Employee’s base salary shall become the “base salary” for purposes of this Agreement. The Employee’s base salary shall be payable in periodic installments in accordance with the Bank’s usual practice.

 

3.2        EMPLOYEE BENEFITS. The Employee shall also be entitled to participate in any and all employee benefit plans, medical insurance plans, disability income plans, retirement plans, bonus incentive plans and other benefit plans from time to time in effect for senior executives of the Bank. Such participation shall be subject to (a) the terms of the applicable plan documents, (b) generally applicable policies of the Bank and (c) the discretion of the Board or any administrative or other committee provided for in, or contemplated by, such plans.

 

3.3          INCENTIVE COMPENSATION. The Employee shall be eligible to participate in any incentive compensation or bonus programs sponsored by the Bank on such terms as the Board may establish for the Employee’s participation.

 

3.4         BUSINESS EXPENSES. The Bank shall pay, or reimburse, the Employee for reasonable travel and other business expenses incurred by the Employee in the performance of the Employee’s duties and responsibilities, subject to such reasonable requirements with respect to substantiation and documentation as may be specified by the Bank.

 

3.5         LEAVE. The Employee shall be entitled to leave (vacation, sick and personal) in accordance with the Bank’s standard policies for senior executives. Further, the Board, in its discretion, may grant to the Employee a leave or leaves of absence, with or without pay, at such time or times and upon such terms and conditions as the Board, in its discretion, may determine.

 

3.6        OTHER EMPLOYEE BENEFITS. The Employee shall be entitled to participate in any compensatory plans, arrangements or programs the Bank makes available to its senior executive officers, including, but not limited to, stock compensation programs, supplemental retirement arrangements, or executive health or life insurance programs, subject to, and on a basis consistent with, the terms and conditions of such plans, arrangements or programs.

 

3.7         GENERAL. The Employee’s participation in any plans, arrangements or programs currently in effect or made available in the future shall not be deemed to be in lieu of other compensation to which the Employee is entitled as described under this Agreement.

 

4.            EXTENT OF SERVICE. During the Term of Employment, the Employee shall devote his full time, best efforts and business judgment, skills and knowledge to the advancement of the Bank’s interests and to the discharge of his responsibilities under this Agreement; provided, however, that the Employee may:

 

  2  
 

 

(a)           invest personal assets in such form or manner as shall not require any material services on the Employee’s part in the operations or affairs of the entities in which such investments are made, provided that the Employee may not own any interest in an entity that competes with the Bank or any affiliate (other than up to 4.9% of the outstanding voting stock of such entity that is a publicly-traded entity); or

 

(b)           serve on the board of directors of any company not in competition with the Bank or any affiliate, provided that the Employee shall not render any material services with respect to the operations or affairs of any such company; or

 

(c)           engage in religious, charitable or other community or non-profit activities which do not impair the Employee’s ability to fulfill his duties and responsibilities under this Agreement.

 

5.            DEATH. In the event of the Employee’s death during the Term of Employment, the Employee’s employment (and the Term of Employment) shall terminate on the date of death. The Bank shall pay to the Employee’s beneficiary, or estate, (a) any compensation due the Employee through the last day of the calendar month in which death occurred, plus (b) any other compensation or benefits as may be provided in accordance with the terms and provisions of any applicable plans and programs of the Bank in which the Employee participated as of the date of death.

 

6. DISCHARGE FOR CAUSE.

 

6.1         NOTICE AND DETERMINATION OF CAUSE. The Bank may terminate the Employee’s employment at any time during the Term of Employment for Cause, as defined below. Such termination shall be deemed to have occurred for Cause only if:

 

(a)           The Board, by a separate affirmative vote of at least three-fourths (3/4) of the entire membership, determines that the Employee has: (i) engaged in acts of personal dishonesty which have resulted in loss to the Bank or one of its affiliates; (ii) intentionally failed to perform stated duties; (iii) committed a willful violation of any law, rule, regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses); (iv) become subject to the entry of a final cease and desist order which results in substantial loss to the Bank or one of its affiliates; (v) been convicted of a crime or act involving moral turpitude; (vi) willfully breached the Bank’s or the Company’s code of conduct and business ethics; (vii) been disqualified or barred by any governmental or self-regulatory authority from serving in the Employee’s then-current employment capacity or (viii) willfully attempted to obstruct or failed to cooperate with any investigation authorized by the Board or any governmental or self-regulatory entity. No act or failure to act on the part of the Employee shall be considered “willful” unless it is done, or omitted to be done, by the Employee in bad faith or without reasonable belief that the Employee’s action or omission was in the best interests of the Bank. Any act or failure to act that is based upon authority given pursuant to a resolution duly adopted by the Board of Directors, or upon the advice of legal counsel for the Bank, shall be conclusively presumed to be done, or omitted to be done, by the Employee in good faith and in the best interests of the Bank and its affiliates; and

 

  3  
 

 

(b)           At least ten (10) days prior to the vote contemplated by Section 6.1(a), the Bank has provided the Employee with notice of its intent to discharge the Employee for Cause, detailing with particularity the facts and circumstances which are alleged to constitute Cause (a “Notice of Intent to Discharge”); and

 

(c)           After giving the Employee Notice of Intent to Discharge and before taking the vote contemplated by Section 6.1(a), the Employee is afforded a reasonable opportunity to make both written and oral presentations before the Board for the purpose of refuting the alleged grounds for Cause for discharge; and

 

(d)           After the vote contemplated by Section 6.1(a), the Bank has furnished to the Employee a notice of termination which specifies the effective date of the Employee’s termination of employment (which shall not be earlier than the date on which such notice is deemed given), and include a copy of a resolution or resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors authorizing the termination of the Employee for Cause and stating with particularity the facts and circumstances found to constitute Cause for discharge (the “Final Discharge Notice”).

 

6.2         SUSPENSION; FINAL DISCHARGE. Following the provision of Notice of Intent to Discharge, the Bank may temporarily suspend the Employee’s duties and authority and, in such event, may also suspend the payment of salary and other cash compensation (but not participation in retirement, insurance and other employee benefit plans). If the Employee is discharged for Cause, all payments withheld during the suspension period shall be deemed forfeited and shall not be payable to the Employee. If the Bank does not give a Final Discharge Notice to the Employee within one hundred and twenty (120) days after giving him Notice of Intent to Discharge, the Notice of Intent to Discharge shall be deemed withdrawn and any future action to discharge the Employee for Cause shall require the Bank to give the Employee a new Notice of Intent to Discharge.

 

6.3         EFFECT OF TERMINATION FOR CAUSE. In the event of termination pursuant to this Section 6, the Term of Employment shall terminate and the Bank shall pay to the Employee an amount equal to the sum of (a) base salary or other compensation earned through the date of termination, plus (b) any other compensation or vested benefits as may be provided in accordance with the terms and provisions of any applicable plans and programs of the Bank. All other obligations of the Bank shall terminate as of the date of termination.

 

7.              DISABILITY. The Bank may terminate the Employee’s employment (and the Term of Employment) after having established the Employee’s Disability. For purposes of this Agreement, “Disability” means a physical or mental infirmity that impairs the Employee’s ability to substantially perform his duties under this Agreement and results in the Employee becoming eligible for long-term disability benefits under the Bank’s long-term disability plan (or, if the Bank has no such plan in effect, that impairs the Employee’s ability to substantially perform his full-time duties under this Agreement for a period of one hundred eighty (180) consecutive days). The Employee shall be entitled to the compensation and benefits provided for under this Agreement for (a) any period during the Term of Employment and prior to the establishment of the Employee’s Disability during which the Employee is unable to work due to physical or mental infirmity, or (b) any period of Disability which is prior to the Employee’s termination of employment pursuant to this Section 7.

 

  4  
 

 

8.            TERMINATION WITHOUT CAUSE. The Board may, by written notice to the Employee, immediately terminate his employment at any time for a reason other than Cause, in which event the Employee shall be entitled to receive the termination payment set forth in Section 10.2 of this Agreement, payable in one lump sum within ten (10) days of termination. The Bank shall also continue to provide the Employee with benefit continuation as set forth in Section 10.3 of this Agreement.

 

9.             VOLUNTARY TERMINATION BY EMPLOYEE. Subject to Section 11 hereof, the Employee may voluntarily terminate employment with the Bank during the term of this Agreement, upon at least 60 days’ prior written notice, in which case the Term of Employment shall end and the Bank shall pay to the Employee an amount equal to the (a) base salary or other compensation earned through the date of termination plus (b) any other compensation and benefits as may be provided in accordance with the terms and provisions of any applicable benefit plans and programs of the Bank.

 

10. CHANGE IN CONTROL.

 

10.1       DEFINITION OF CHANGE IN CONTROL. For purposes of this Agreement, a “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of any of the following events:

 

(a)           individuals who, on the date of this Agreement, constitute the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Incumbent Directors”) cease for any reason to constitute at least half of the Board of Directors of the Company, provided that any person becoming a director subsequent to such time, whose election or nomination for election was approved by a vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the Incumbent Directors then on the Board of Directors of the Company (either by a specific vote or by approval of the proxy statement of the Company in which such person is named as a nominee for director, without written objection to such nomination) shall be an Incumbent Director; provided, however, that no individual initially elected or nominated as a director of the Company as a result of an actual or threatened election contest with respect to directors or as a result of any other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of any person other than the Board of Directors of the Company shall be deemed to be an Incumbent Director;

 

(b)           any “person” (as such term is defined in Section 3(a)(9) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”) and as used in Sections 13(d)(3) and 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act) is or becomes a “beneficial owner” (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly, of securities of the Company representing 25% or more of the combined voting power of the Company’s then outstanding securities eligible to vote for the election of the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Company Voting Securities”); provided, however, that the event described in this paragraph (b) shall not be deemed to be a Change in Control by virtue of any of the following acquisitions: (A) by the Company or any subsidiary, (B) by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Company or any subsidiary, (C) by any underwriter temporarily holding securities pursuant to an offering of such securities or (D) a transaction (other than one described in (c) below) in which Company Voting Securities are acquired from the Company, if a majority of the Incumbent Directors approve a resolution providing expressly that the acquisition pursuant to this clause (D) does not constitute a Change in Control under this paragraph (b);

 

  5  
 

 

(c)           the consummation of a merger, consolidation, statutory share exchange or similar form of corporate transaction involving the Company or any of its subsidiaries that requires the approval of the Company’s stockholders, whether for such transaction or the issuance of securities in the transaction (a “Business Combination”), unless immediately following such Business Combination: (A) at least 50% of the total voting power of (x) the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (the “Surviving Corporation”), or (y) if applicable, the ultimate parent corporation that directly or indirectly has beneficial ownership of 100% of the voting securities eligible to elect directors of the Surviving Corporation (the “Parent Corporation”), is represented by the Company Voting Securities that were outstanding immediately prior to such Business Combination (or, if applicable, is represented by shares into which such Company Voting Securities were converted pursuant to such Business Combination), and such voting power among (and only among) the holders thereof is in substantially the same proportion as the voting power of such Company Voting Securities among the holders thereof immediately prior to the Business Combination, (B) no person (other than any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Surviving Corporation or the Parent Corporation) is or becomes the beneficial owner, directly or indirectly, of 25% or more of the total voting power of the outstanding voting securities eligible to elect directors of the Parent Corporation (or, if there is no Parent Corporation, the Surviving Corporation) and (C) at least 50% of the members of the board of directors of the Parent Corporation (or, if there is no Parent Corporation, the Surviving Corporation) following the consummation of the Business Combination were Incumbent Directors at the time of the Company Board’s approval of the execution of the initial agreement providing for such Business Combination; or

 

(d)           the stockholders of the Company approve a plan of complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company or a sale of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets.

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Change in Control shall not be deemed to occur solely because any person acquires beneficial ownership of more than 25% of Company Voting Securities as a result of the acquisition of Company Voting Securities by the Company which reduces the number of Company Voting Securities outstanding; provided, that if after such acquisition by the Company such person becomes the beneficial owner of additional Company Voting Securities that increases the percentage of outstanding Company Voting Securities beneficially owned by such person, a Change in Control of the Company shall then occur.

 

  6  
 

 

10.2       TERMINATION PAYMENT. Notwithstanding any provision herein to the contrary, if the Bank (i) terminates the Employee’s employment pursuant to Section 8 of this Agreement or (ii) terminates the Employee’s employment under this Agreement without the Employee’s prior written consent and for a reason other than Cause, in connection with or within twelve (12) months after a Change in Control, then the Employee shall be paid an unreduced lump sum severance benefit equal to the sum of the following items:

 

(a)           One (1) times the Employee’s annual base salary (as provided for in Section 3 of this Agreement) at the rate in effect on the date of the Employee’s termination of employment (including any amount contributed by the Bank on the Employee’s behalf pursuant to a salary reduction agreement and which is not included in the Employee’s gross income under Sections 125, 132(f) or 402(e)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended); and

 

(b)           One (1) times the most recent annual incentive compensation payment made to the Employee (as provided for in Section 3 of this Agreement).

 

The severance benefit payment under this Section 10.2 shall be made to the Employee in one lump sum within ten (10) days of the Employee’s termination of employment.

 

10.3       BENEFIT CONTINUATION. Employee shall also be entitled to continuation of the medical, dental and life insurance benefits existing on the date of termination at the level in effect, and at the same out-of-pocket premium cost to the Employee, as on the date of termination for a period of twelve (12) months following the Employee’s termination of employment. If the benefits under any benefit plan or program continued pursuant to this Section 10.3 may not be provided because the Employee is no longer an employee of the Bank or an affiliate, the Bank shall pay or provide for coverage on a comparable basis for the Employee and, where applicable, the Employee’s dependents.

 

10.4       OTHER TERMINATION. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement to the contrary, the Employee may voluntarily terminate employment under this Agreement within twelve (12) months following a Change in Control of the Bank or Corporation, and the Employee shall be entitled to receive the payments and benefit continuation described in Sections 10.2 and 10.3 of this Agreement, upon the occurrence of any of the following events, or within ninety (90) days thereafter, which have not been consented to in advance by the Employee in writing: (a) the requirement that the Employee move his primary personal residence, or perform his principal executive functions, more than thirty-five (35) miles from his primary office as of the date of the Change in Control; (b) a material reduction in the Employee’s base salary as in effect on the date of the Change in Control or as the same may be increased from time to time; (c) the failure of the Bank to continue to provide the Employee with compensation and benefits provided for under this Agreement, as the same may be increased from time to time, or with benefits substantially similar to those provided to him under any of the employee benefit plans in which the Employee now or hereafter becomes a participant, or the taking of any action by the Bank which would directly or indirectly reduce any such benefits or deprive the Employee of any material fringe benefit provided to him at the time of the Change in Control; (d) the assignment to the Employee of duties and responsibilities materially different from those normally associated with his position as referenced in Section 1; (e) a failure to elect or reelect the Employee to the Board if the Employee is serving on the Board on the date of the Change in Control; or (f) a material diminution or reduction in the Employee’s responsibilities or authority (including reporting responsibilities) in connection with his employment with the Bank.

 

  7  
 

 

11.          LIMITATION OF BENEFITS UNDER CERTAIN CIRCUMSTANCES. If the payments and benefits provided pursuant to Section 10 of this Agreement, either alone or together with other payments and benefits the Employee has the right to receive from the Bank, would constitute a “parachute payment” under Section 280G of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), the payments and benefits pursuant to Section 10 shall be reduced or revised, in the manner determined by the Employee, by the amount, if any, which is the minimum necessary to result in no portion of the payments and benefits under Section 10 being non-deductible to the Bank pursuant to Section 280G of the Code and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. The Bank’s independent public accountants will determine any reduction in the payments and benefits to be made pursuant to Section 10; the Bank will pay for the accountant’s opinion. If the Bank and/or the Employee do not agree with the accountant’s opinion, the Bank will pay to the Employee the maximum amount of payments and benefits pursuant to Section 10, as selected by the Employee, that the opinion indicates have a high probability of not causing any of the payments and benefits to be non-deductible to the Bank and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. The Bank may also request, and the Employee has the right to demand that the Bank request, a ruling from the IRS as to whether the disputed payments and benefits pursuant to Section 10 have such tax consequences. The Bank will promptly prepare and file the request for a ruling from the IRS, but in no event will the Bank make this filing later than thirty (30) days from the date of the accountant’s opinion referred to above. The request will be subject to the Employee’s approval prior to filing; the Employee shall not unreasonably withhold such approval. The Bank and the Employee agree to be bound by any ruling received from the IRS and to make appropriate payments to each other to reflect any IRS rulings, together with interest at the applicable federal rate provided for in Section 7872(f)(2) of the Code. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall result in a reduction of any payments or benefits to which the Employee may be entitled upon termination of employment other than pursuant to Section 10 hereof, or a reduction in the payments and benefits specified in Section 10, below zero.

 

12.          NO MITIGATION. In the event of any termination of employment under this Agreement, the Employee shall be under no obligation to seek other employment or to otherwise mitigate damages, and there shall be no offset against any amounts due to the Employee under this Agreement for any reason, including, without limitation, on account of any remuneration attributable to subsequent employment. Any amounts due under this Agreement are in the nature of severance payments or liquidated damages, or both, and are not in the nature of a penalty.

 

13.          MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS.

 

13.1       CONFLICTING AGREEMENTS. The Employee hereby represents and warrants that the execution of this Agreement and the performance of the Employee’s obligations hereunder will not breach or be in conflict with any other agreement to which the Employee is a party or is bound, and that the Employee is not now subject to any covenants against competition or similar covenants which would affect the performance of the Employee’s obligations under this Agreement.

 

  8  
 

 

13.2     WITHHOLDING. All payments made under this Agreement shall be net of any tax or other amounts required to be withheld under applicable law.

 

13.3     ARBITRATION. The Bank and the Employee agree that any claim, dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with this Agreement (including, without limitation, any such claim, dispute or controversy arising under any federal, state or local statute, regulation or ordinance or any of the Bank’s employee benefit plans, policies or programs) shall be resolved solely and exclusively by binding arbitration. The arbitration shall be held in the County of Charles, Maryland (or at such other location as shall be mutually agreed upon by the parties). The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Rules (the “Rules”) of the American Arbitration Association (the “AAA”) in effect at the time of the arbitration, except that the arbitrator shall be selected by alternatively striking from a list of five arbitrators supplied by the AAA. All fees and expenses of the arbitration, excluding a transcript, shall be borne equally by the parties. Each party will pay for the fees and expenses of its own attorneys, experts, witnesses, and preparation and presentation of proofs and post-hearing briefs (unless the Employee prevails on a claim for which attorney’s fees are recoverable under the Agreement). Any action to enforce or vacate the arbitrator’s award shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act, if applicable, and otherwise by applicable state law. If either the Bank or the Employee pursues any claim, dispute or controversy against the other in a legal proceeding, other than the arbitration provided for herein, the responding party shall be entitled to dismissal or injunctive relief regarding such action and recovery of all costs, losses and attorneys’ fees related to such action. Notwithstanding the provisions of this paragraph, either party may seek injunctive relief in a court of competent jurisdiction, whether or not the case is then pending before the panel of arbitrators. Following the court’s determination of the injunction issue, the case shall continue in arbitration as provided herein.

 

13.4       INDEMNIFICATION FOR ATTORNEYS’ FEES. In the event any dispute or controversy arising under or in connection with the Employee’s termination of employment or this Agreement is resolved in favor of the Employee, whether by judgment, arbitration or settlement, the Employee shall be entitled to the payment of: (i) all legal fees and expenses incurred by the Employee in resolving such dispute or controversy, and (ii) any back-pay, including salary, bonuses and any other cash compensation, fringe benefits and any compensation and benefits due to the Employee under this Agreement.

 

13.5       ASSIGNMENT; SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS, ETC.

 

(a)           This Agreement is personal to the Employee and shall not be assignable by the Employee without the prior written consent of the Bank, other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be enforceable by the Employee’s legal representatives.

 

(b)           This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon the Bank and its successors and permitted assigns.

 

  9  
 

 

(c)          The Bank may not assign this Agreement or any interest herein without the prior written consent of the Employee and, without such consent, any attempted transfer or assignment shall be null and void and of no effect; provided, however, that the Bank shall require any successor (whether direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise) to all or substantially all of the business and/or assets of the Bank expressly to assume and to agree to perform this Agreement in the same manner and to the same extent that the Bank would have been required to perform it if no such succession had taken place. As used in this Agreement, “the Bank” shall mean both the Bank and the Company, as defined above, and any successor that assumes and agrees to perform this Agreement, by operation of law or otherwise.

 

13.6       ENFORCEABILITY. If any portion or provision of this Agreement shall to any extent be declared illegal or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, then the remainder of this Agreement, or the application of such portion or provision in circumstances other than those as to which it is so declared illegal or unenforceable, shall not be affected thereby, and each portion and provision of this Agreement shall be valid and enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law.

 

13.7       REDUCTIONS; REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, any and all payments and benefits to be provided to the Employee under this Agreement are subject to reduction to the extent required by applicable statutes, regulations, rules and directives of federal, state and other governmental and regulatory bodies having jurisdiction over the Bank and its affiliates. The Employee is aware and acknowledges that the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation has the power to preclude the Bank or its affiliates from making payments to the Employee under this Agreement under certain circumstances. The Employee agrees that neither the Bank nor its affiliates shall be deemed to be in breach of this Agreement if it is precluded from making a payment otherwise payable hereunder by reason of regulatory requirements binding on the Bank or its affiliates, as the case may be.

 

13.8       WAIVER. No waiver of any provision of this Agreement shall be effective unless made in writing and signed by the waiving party. The failure of any party to require the performance of any term or obligation of this Agreement, or the waiver by any party of any breach of this Agreement, shall not prevent any subsequent enforcement of such term or obligation or be deemed a waiver of any subsequent breach.

 

13.9       NOTICES. Any notices, requests, demands and other communications provided for by this Agreement shall be sufficient if in writing and delivered in person or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, and addressed to the Employee at the Employee’s last known address on the books of the Bank or, in the case of the Bank, at its main office, attention of the Chief Executive Officer of the Board of Directors.

 

13.10    AMENDMENT. This Agreement may be amended or modified only by a written instrument signed by the Employee and a duly authorized representative of the Bank.

 

  10  
 

 

13.11    NO EFFECT ON LENGTH OF SERVICE. Nothing in this Agreement shall be deemed to prohibit the Bank from terminating the Employee’s employment before the end of the Term of Employment with or without notice for any reason. This Agreement shall determine the relative rights and obligations of the Bank and the Employee in the event of any such termination. In addition, nothing in this Agreement shall require the termination of the Employee’s employment at the expiration of the Term of Employment. Any continuation of the Employee’s employment beyond the expiration of the Term of Employment shall be on an “at-will” basis, unless the parties agree otherwise.

 

13.12    SOURCE OF PAYMENTS. The Bank shall make in a timely manner all payments provided for under this Agreement in cash or check from its general funds. The Company, however, unconditionally guarantees payment and the provision of all amounts and benefits due to the Employee under this Agreement. If the Bank does not timely pay or provide such amounts and benefits, the Company shall pay or provide such amounts and benefits.

 

13.13    ENTIRE AGREEMENT; EFFECT ON PRIOR AGREEMENTS. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties pertaining to its subject matter and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements, understandings, negotiations, prior draft agreements, and discussions of the parties, whether oral or written.

 

13.14    COUNTERPARTS AND FACSIMILE SIGNATURES. This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, all of which shall be considered one and the same agreement and shall become effective when one or more counterparts have been signed by each party and delivered to the other party, it being understood that all parties need not sign the same counterpart. This Agreement may be executed by facsimile signatures.

 

13.15    GOVERNING LAW. This is a Maryland contract and shall be construed under and be governed in all respects by the laws of the State of Maryland, without giving effect to its conflicts of law principles.

 

14.           EFFECT OF CODE SECTION 409A. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, if the Bank in good faith determines, as of the effective date of the Employee’s termination of employment, that amounts payable to the Employee hereunder, are required to be suspended or delayed for six months in order to satisfy the requirements of Section 409A of the Code, then the Bank will so advise the Employee, and any such payments shall be suspended and accrued for six months, whereupon they shall be paid to the Employee in a lump sum (together with interest thereon at the then-prevailing prime rate). The Employee agrees that the Bank shall be deemed to be in breach of this Agreement if it delays making a payment otherwise payable hereunder by reason of Section 409A.

 

  11  
 

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement on the day and year first above the written.

 

ATTEST:   COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
     
/s/ Gregory C. Cockerham   /s/ Michael L. Middleton
    Michael L. Middleton
    President
     
ATTEST:   TRI-COUNTY FINANCIAL CORPORATION
    (As Guarantor)
     
/s/ Gregory C. Cockerham   /s/ Michael L. Middleton
    Michael L. Middleton
    President
     
WITNESS:   EMPLOYEE:
     
/s/ Gregory C. Cockerham   /s/ James M.Burke
    James M.Burke

 

  12  
 

 

Amendment
to the
Employment Agreement

 

This Amendment to the Employment Agreement is entered into as of November 24, 2008, by and between Community Bank of Tri-County (the “Bank”) and Tri-County Financial Corporation (as guarantor) and James M. Burke (the “Employee”).

 

WHEREAS, the Employee is currently employed as an Executive Vice President of the Bank;

 

WHEREAS, the Employee and the Bank previously entered into an Employment Agreement dated April 20, 2007 (the “Employment Agreement”); and

 

WHEREAS, the parties to the Employment Agreement desire to amend the Employment Agreement to increase the severance benefit payable pursuant to the terms of the Employment Agreement.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and agreements set forth herein and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto agree to amend the Employment Agreement as follows:

 

1.             Section 10.2 is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following new Section 10.2 to read as follows:

 

10.2       TERMINATION PAYMENT. Notwithstanding any provision herein to the contrary, if the Bank (i) terminates the Employee’s employment pursuant to Section 8 of this Agreement or (ii) terminates the Employee’s employment under this Agreement without the Employee’s prior written consent and for a reason other than Cause, in connection with or within twelve (12) months after a Change in Control, then the Employee shall be paid an unreduced lump sum severance benefit equal to the sum of the following items:

 

(a)          Two (2) times the Employee’s annual base salary (as provided for in Section 3 of this Agreement) at the rate in effect on the date of the Employee’s termination of employment (including any amount contributed by the Bank on the Employee’s behalf pursuant to a salary reduction agreement and which is not included in the Employee’s gross income under Sections 125, 132(f) or 402(c)(3) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended); and

 

 

 

 

(b)          Two (2) times the most recent annual incentive compensation payment made to the Employee (as provided for in Section 3 of this Agreement).

 

The severance benefit payment under this Section 10.2 shall be made to the Employee in one lump sum within ten (10) days of the Employee’s termination of employment.

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have duly executed and delivered this Amendment to the Employment Agreement, or have caused this Amendment to the Employment Agreement to be duly executed and delivered in their name and on their behalf, as of the day and year first above written.

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
   
By: /s/ Michael L. Middleton  
   
Title: President  
   
   
TRI-COUNTY FINANCIAL CORPORATION
   
By: /s/ Michael L. Middleton  
   
Title: President  
   
EMPLOYEE:  
   
/s/ James M.Burke  
James M.Burke  

  

  

 

 

 

Second Amendment
Employment Agreement

 

THIS AMENDMENT, made and entered into as of the 23 rd day of April, 2013, by and between Community Bank of Tri-County (the “Bank”), James M. Burke (the “Employee”) and Tri-County Financial Corporation (the “Company”), solely as guarantor of the Bank’s obligations under the employment agreement entered into by the parties.

 

WHEREAS, the Employee, the Bank and the Company entered into an amended and restated employment agreement, dated as of April 20, 2007, (the “Agreement”); and

 

WHEREAS, the Employee, the Bank and the Company desire to amend the Agreement to make certain changes to the potential severance obligations under the Agreement and to reflect certain other changes; and

 

WHEREAS, Section 13.1 0 of the Agreement provides that the parties may amend the Agreement by a written instrument.         

 

ACCORDINGLY, the Agreement is hereby amended, effective as of the date first set forth above as follows:

 

First Change

 

Section 2 of the Agreement is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following new Section 2:

 

“2.           EFFECTIVE DATE AND TERM. The Bank agrees to employ the Employee for an initial period of three (3) years, beginning on the Effective Date and ending on the day before the third (3rd) anniversary of the Effective Date, and during the period of any additional extensions described below (the “Term of Employment”). The parties intend that, at any point in time during the Employee’s employment hereunder, the then-remaining Term of Employment shall be three (3) years. On the day after the Effective Date and on each day thereafter, the Term of Employment shall extend by one day, so that, on any date, the term of Employment will expire on the day before the third (3rd) anniversary of such date. These extensions shall continue unless (a) the Bank notifies the Employee that it has elected to discontinue the extensions; (b) the Employee notifies the Bank of the employee’s election to discontinue the extensions; or (c) the Employee’s employment with the Bank is terminated, whether by resignation, discharge or otherwise. On the earlier of (i) the date on which such notice is given; or (ii) the effective date of a termination of Employee’s Employment with the Bank, the Term of Employment will convert to a fixed period of three (3) years ending on the day before the third (3rd) anniversary of such date (provided, however, that subject to any rights of the Employee under this Agreement, the Term of Employment shall terminate on such earlier date as may be specifically provided in this Agreement in the event of the Employee’s death, voluntary termination, Disability or termination for Cause). The last day of the Agreement term, as extended in accordance with this Section 2, is referred to in this Agreement as the ‘Expiration Date.”’

 

Second Change

 

Section 10.3 of the Agreement is deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following new Section 10.3:

 

“10.3      BENEFIT CONTINUATION. Employee shall also be entitled to continuation of the medical, dental and life insurance benefits existing on the date of termination at the level in effect, and at the same out-of-pocket premium cost to the Employee, as on the date of termination for a period of thirty-six (36) months following the Employee’s termination of employment. If the benefits under any benefit plan or program continued pursuant to this Section 10.3 may not be provided because the Employee is no longer an employee of the Bank or an affiliate, the Bank shall pay or provide for coverage on a comparable basis for the Employee and, where applicable, the Employee’s dependents.”

 

 

 

 

Third Change

 

Section 11 of the Agreement amended by deleting the first three sentences thereof and replacing them with the following new language:

 

“If the payments and benefits provided pursuant to Section 10 of this Agreement, either alone or together with other payments and benefits the Employee has the right to receive from the Bank, would constitute a “parachute payment” under Section 280G of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), the payments and benefits pursuant to Section 10 shall be reduced by the amount, if any, which is the minimum necessary to result in no portion of the payments and benefits under Section 10 being non-deductible to the Bank pursuant to Section 280G of the Code and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code. If such a reduction is necessary and none of the payments or benefits constitutes a “deferral of compensation” within the meaning of and subject to Section 409A of the Code, then the reduction shall occur in a manner the Employee elects in writing prior to the date of payment. If the payments or benefits constitute a deferral of compensation or if the Employee fails to make an election pursuant to the preceding sentence, then the payments and/or benefits to be reduced will be determined in a manner which has the least economic cost to the Employee. The Bank’s independent public accountants will determine any reduction in the payments and benefits to be made pursuant to Section 10; the Bank will pay for the accountant’s opinion. If the Bank and/or the Employee do not agree with the accountant’s opinion, the Bank will pay to the Employee the maximum amount of payments and benefits pursuant to Section 10 (as selected by the Employee if the payments and benefits do not constitute a deferral of compensation) that the opinion indicates have a high probability of not causing any of the payments and benefits to be non-deductible to the Bank and subject to the excise tax imposed under Section 4999 of the Code.”

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto each acknowledge that each has carefully read this amendment to the Agreement and executed the original on the date indicated.

 

    COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ William J. Pasenelli
Witness   For the Bank
     
April 23, 2013    
Date    
     
    TRI-COUNTY FINANCIAL CORPORATION
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ William J. Pasenelli
Witness   For the Company
     
April 23, 2013    
Date    
     
    EMPLOYEE
     
/s/ Christy M. Lombardi   /s/ James M. Burke
Witness   James M. Burke
     
April 23, 2013    
Date    

 

 

 

Exhibit 10.41

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
SALARY CONTINUATION AGREEMENT

 

THIS SALARY CONTINUATION AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”) is adopted this 21st day of August, 2006, by and between COMMUNITY BANK OF TM-COUNTY, a state-chartered commercial bank located in Waldorf, Maryland (the “Company - ) and JAMES MULDOWNEY BURKE (the “Executive”).

 

The purpose of this Agreement is to provide specified benefits to the Executive, a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees who contribute materially to the continued growth, development, and future business success of the Company. This Agreement shall be unfunded for tax purposes and for purposes of Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), as amended from time to time.

 

Article 1
Definitions

 

Whenever used in this Agreement, the following words and phrases shall have the meanings specified:

 

1.1 Beneficiary ” means each designated person, or the estate of the deceased Executive, entitled to benefits, if any, upon the death of the Executive determined pursuant to Article 4.

 

1.2 Beneficiary Designation Form ” means the form established from time to time by the Plan Administrator that the Executive completes, signs, and returns to the Plan Administrator to designate one or more Beneficiaries.

 

1.3 Board ” means the Board of Directors of the Company as from time to time constituted.

 

1.4 Change in Control ” shall mean the occurrence of any of the following events:

 

(a)          individuals who, on the date of this Agreement, constitute the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Incumbent Directors”) cease for any reason to constitute at least half of the Board of Directors of the Company, provided that any person becoming a director subsequent to such time, whose election or nomination for election was approved by a vote of at least two-thirds (2/3) of the Incumbent Directors then on the Board of Directors of the Company (either by a specific vote or by approval of the proxy statement of the Company in which such person is named as a nominee for director, without written objection to such nomination) shall be an Incumbent Director; provided, however, that no individual initially elected or nominated as a director of the Company as a result of an actual or threatened election contest with respect to directors or as a result of any other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of any person other than the Board of Directors of the Company shall be deemed to be an Incumbent Director;

 

  1  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

(b)          any “person” (as such term is defined in Section 3(a)(9) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”) and as used in Sections 13(d)(3) and 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act) is or becomes a “beneficial owner” (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly, of securities of the Company representing 25% or more of the combined voting power of the Company’s then outstanding securities eligible to vote for the election of the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Company Voting Securities”); provided, however, that the event described in this paragraph (b) shall not be deemed to be a Change in Control by virtue of any of the following acquisitions: (1) by the Company or any subsidiary, (2) by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Company or any subsidiary, (3) by any underwriter temporarily holding securities pursuant to an offering of such securities or (4) a transaction (other than one described in (c) below) in which Company Voting Securities are acquired from the Company, if a majority of the Incumbent Directors approve a resolution providing expressly that the acquisition pursuant to this clause (4) does not constitute a Change in Control under this paragraph (b);

 

(c)          the consummation of a merger, consolidation, statutory share exchange or similar form of corporate transaction involving the Company or any of its subsidiaries that requires the approval of the Company’s stockholders, whether for such transaction or the issuance of securities in the transaction (a “Business Combination”), unless immediately following such Business Combination: (1) at least 50% of the total voting power of (x) the corporation resulting from such Business Combination (the “Surviving Corporation”), or (y) if applicable, the ultimate parent corporation that directly or indirectly has beneficial ownership of 100% of the voting securities eligible to elect directors of the Surviving Corporation (the “Parent Corporation”), is represented by the Company Voting Securities that were outstanding immediately prior to such Business Combination (or, if applicable, is represented by shares into which such Company Voting Securities were converted pursuant to such Business Combination), and such voting power among (and only among) the holders thereof is in substantially the same proportion as the voting power of such Company Voting Securities among the holders thereof immediately prior to the Business Combination, (2) no person (other than any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Surviving Corporation or the Parent Corporation) is or becomes the beneficial owner, directly or indirectly, of 25% or more of the total voting power of the outstanding voting securities eligible to elect directors of the Parent Corporation (or, if there is no Parent Corporation, the Surviving Corporation) and (3) at least 50% of the members of the board of directors of the Parent Corporation (or, if there is no Parent Corporation, the Surviving Corporation) following the consummation of the Business Combination were Incumbent Directors at the time of the Company Board’s approval of the execution of the initial agreement providing for such Business Combination; or

 

  2  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

(d)          the stockholders of the Company approve a plan of complete liquidation or dissolution of the Company or a sale of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets.

 

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Change in Control shall not be deemed to occur solely because any person acquires beneficial ownership of more than 25% of Company Voting Securities as a result of the acquisition of Company Voting Securities by the Company which reduces the number of Company Voting Securities outstanding; provided, that if after such acquisition by the Company such person becomes the beneficial owner of additional Company Voting Securities that increases the percentage of outstanding Company Voting Securities beneficially owned by such person, a Change in Control of the Company shall then occur.

 

1.5 Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.6 Corporation ” means the Tri-County Financial Corporation.

 

1.7 Disability ” means the Executive’s (i) inability to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment which can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months; or (ii) receipt of disability benefits for a period of 3 months under an accident and health plan of the employer by reason of the participant’s medically determinable physical or mental impairment which can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months.

 

1.8 Early Termination ” means Separation from Service before Normal Retirement Age except when such Separation from Service occurs: (i) within twelve (12) months following a Change in Control; or (ii) due to death, Disability, or Termination for Cause.

 

1.9 Effective Date ” means January 1, 2006.

 

1.10 Normal Retirement Age ” means the Executive attaining age sixty-five (65).

 

1.11 Normal Retirement Date ” means the date of the Executive’s Separation from Service on or after attaining Normal Retirement Age.

 

1.12 Plan Administrator ” means the plan administrator described in Article 6.

 

1.13 Plan Year ” means each twelve-month period commencing on January l and ending on December 31 st of each year. The initial Plan Year shall commence on the Effective Date of this Agreement and end on the following December 31 st .

 

  3  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

1.14 Schedule A ” means the schedule attached to this Agreement and made a part hereof. Schedule A shall be updated upon a change in any of the benefits under Articles 2 or 3.

 

1.15 Separation from Service ” means the termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company for reasons other than death (except as provided in Section 1.8). Whether a Separation from Service takes place is determined based on the facts and circumstances surrounding the termination of the Executive’s employment and whether the Company and the Executive intended for the Executive to provide significant services for the Company following such termination_ A termination of employment will not be considered a Separation from Service if:

 

(a) the Executive continues to provide services as an employee of the Company at an annual rate that is twenty percent (20%) or more of the services rendered, on average, during the immediately preceding three full calendar years of employment (or, if employed less than three years, such lesser period) and the annual remuneration for such services is twenty percent (20%) or more of the average annual remuneration earned during the final three full calendar years of employment (or, if less, such lesser period), or

 

(b) the Executive continues to provide services to the Company in a capacity other than as an employee of the Company at an annual rate that is fifty percent (50%) or more of the services rendered, on average, during the immediately preceding three full calendar years of employment (or if employed less than three years, such lesser period) and the annual remuneration for such services is fifty percent (50%) or more of the average annual remuneration earned during the final three full calendar years of employment (or if less, such lesser period).

 

1.16 Specified Employee ” means a key employee (as defined in Section 416(i) of the Code without regard to paragraph 5 thereof) of the Company if any stock of the Company is publicly traded on an established securities market or otherwise.

 

1.17 Termination for Cause ” shall have the meaning set forth in Article 5.

 

Article 2
Distributions During Lifetime

 

2.1 Normal Retirement Benefit . Upon Separation from Service on or after the Normal Retirement Date, the Company shall distribute to the Executive the benefit described in this Section 2.1 in lieu of any other benefit under this Article.

 

2.1.1 Amount of Benefit . The annual benefit under this Section 2.1 is Sixty-Five Thousand Dollars ($65,000), payable for a period of fifteen (15) years and resulting in a total benefit of Nine Hundred Seventy-Five Thousand Dollars ($975,000). The Company’s Board of Directors, in its sole discretion, through a duly adopted resolution, may increase the annual benefit under this Section prior to the Executive’s Separation from Service.

 

  4  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

2.1.2 Distribution of Benefit . The Company shall distribute the benefit to the Executive in one hundred eighty (180) consecutive equal monthly installments, commencing on the first day of the month following Separation from Service.

 

2.2 Early Termination Benefit . Upon Early Termination, the Company shall distribute to the Executive the benefit described in this Section 2.2 in lieu of any other benefit under this Article.

 

2.2.1 Amount of Benefit . The benefit under this Section 2.2 is the Early Termination Benefit set forth on Schedule A for the Plan Year ending prior to Separation from Service.

 

2.2.2 Distribution of Benefit . The Company shall distribute the benefit to the Executive in one hundred eighty (180) consecutive equal monthly installments commencing the first day of the month following the Executive attaining Normal Retirement Age.

 

2.3 Disability Benefit . If the Executive experiences a Disability which results in a Separation from Service prior to Normal Retirement Age, the Company shall distribute to the Executive the benefit described in this Section 2.3 in lieu of any other benefit under this Article.

 

2.3.1 Amount of Benefit . The benefit under this Section 2.3 is the Normal Retirement Benefit amount described in Section 2.1.1.

 

2.3.2 Distribution of Benefit . The Company shall distribute the benefit to the Executive in one hundred eighty (180) consecutive equal monthly installments commencing the first day of the month following the Executive attaining Normal Retirement Age.

 

2.4 Change in Control Benefit . Upon a Change in Control, followed within twelve (12) months by a Separation from Service, the Company shall distribute to the Executive the benefit described in this Section 2.4 in lieu of any other benefit under this Article.

 

2.4.1 Amount of Benefit . The benefit under this Section 2.4 is the Normal Retirement Benefit amount described in Section 2.1.1.

 

2.4.2 Distribution of Benefit . The Company shall distribute the benefit to the Executive in one hundred eighty (180) consecutive equal monthly installments commencing the first day of the month following the Executive attaining Normal Retirement Age.

 

  5  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

2.5 Restriction on Timing of Distribution . Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, if the Executive is considered a Specified Employee at Separation from Service under such procedures as established by the Company in accordance with Section 409A of the Code, benefit distributions that are made upon Separation from Service may not commence earlier than six (6) months after the date of such Separation from Service. Therefore, in the event this Section 2.5 is applicable to the Executive, any distribution which would otherwise be paid to the Executive within the first six months following the Separation from Service shall be accumulated and paid to the Executive in a lump sum on the first day of the seventh month following the Separation from Service. All subsequent distributions shall be paid in the manner specified under this Article 11 of the Plan with respect to the applicable benefit.

 

2.6 Distributions Upon Income Inclusion Under Section 409A of the Code . Upon the inclusion of any amount into the Executive’s income as a result of the failure of this non-qualified deferred compensation plan to comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code, to the extent such tax liability can be covered by the amount which the Company has accrued with respect to the obligations described in this Article 2, a distribution shall be made as soon as is administratively practicable following the discovery of the plan failure.

 

2.7 Change in Form or Timing of Distributions . For distribution of benefits under this Article 2, the Executive and the Company may, subject to the terms of Section 8.1, amend the Agreement to delay the timing or change the form of distributions. Any such amendment:

 

(a) may not accelerate the time or schedule of any distribution, except as provided in Section 409A of the Code and the regulations thereunder;

 

(b) must, for benefits distributable under Section 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4, be made at least twelve (12) months prior to the first scheduled distribution;

 

(c) must, for benefits distributable under Sections 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4, delay the commencement of distributions for a minimum of five (5) years from the date the first distribution was originally scheduled to be made; and

 

(d) must take effect not less than. twelve (12) months after the amendment is made.

 

Article 3
Distribution at Death

 

3.1 Death During Active Service . If the Executive dies before Separation from Service and prior to Normal Retirement Age, the Company shall distribute to the Beneficiary the benefit described in this Section 3.1. This benefit shall be distributed in lieu of the benefits under Article 2.

 

  6  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

3.1.1 Amount of Benefit . The benefit under this Section 3.1 is the Normal Retirement Benefit amount described in Section 2.1.1.

 

3.1.2 Distribution of Benefit . The Company shall distribute the benefit to the Beneficiary in one hundred eighty (180) consecutive equal monthly installments for commencing the first day of the month following receipt by the Company of the Executive’s death certificate.

 

3.2 Death During Distribution of a Benefit . If the Executive dies after any benefit distributions have commenced under this Agreement but before receiving all such distributions, the Company shall distribute to the Beneficiary the remaining benefits at the same time and. in the same amounts that would have been distributed to the Executive had the Executive survived.

 

3.3 Death After Separation from Service But Before Benefit Distributions Commence . If the Executive is entitled to benefit distributions under this Agreement, but dies prior to the commencement of said benefit distributions, the Company shall distribute to the Beneficiary the same benefits that the Executive was entitled to prior to death except that the benefit distributions shall commence within thirty (30) days following receipt by the Company of the Executive’s death certificate.

 

Article 4
Beneficiaries

 

4.1 Beneficiary . The Executive shall have the right, at any time, to designate a Beneficiary to receive any benefit distributions under this Agreement upon the death of the Executive. The Beneficiary designated under this Agreement may be the same as or different from the beneficiary designation under any other plan of the Company in which the Executive participates.

 

4.2 Beneficiary Designation: Change . The Executive shall designate a Beneficiary by completing and signing the Beneficiary Designation Form, and delivering it to the Plan Administrator or its designated agent. The Executive’s beneficiary designation shall be deemed automatically revoked if the Beneficiary predeceases the Executive or if the Executive names a spouse as Beneficiary and the marriage is subsequently dissolved. The Executive shall have the right to change a Beneficiary by completing, signing and otherwise complying with the terms of the Beneficiary Designation Form and the Plan Administrator’s rules and procedures, as in effect from time to time. Upon the acceptance by the Plan Administrator of a new Beneficiary Designation Form, all Beneficiary designations previously filed shall be cancelled. The Plan Administrator shall be entitled to rely on the last Beneficiary Designation Form filed by the Executive and accepted by the Plan Administrator prior to the Executive’s death.

 

  7  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

4.3 Acknowledgment . No designation or change in designation of a Beneficiary shall be effective until received, accepted and acknowledged in writing by the Plan Administrator or its designated agent.

 

4.4 No Beneficiary Designation . If the Executive dies without a valid beneficiary designation, or if all designated Beneficiaries predecease the Executive, then the Executive’s spouse shall be the designated Beneficiary. If the Executive has no surviving spouse, the benefits shall be made to the personal representative of the Executive’s estate.

 

4.5 Facility of Distribution . If the Plan Administrator determines in its discretion that a benefit is to be distributed to a minor, to a person declared incompetent, or to a person incapable of handling the disposition of that person’s property, the Plan Administrator may direct distribution of such benefit to the guardian, legal representative or person having the care or custody of such minor, incompetent person or incapable person. The Plan Administrator may require proof of incompetence, minority or guardianship as it may deem appropriate prior to distribution of the benefit. Any distribution of a benefit shall be a distribution for the account of the Executive and the Executive’s Beneficiary, as the case may be, and shall be a complete discharge of any liability under the Agreement for such distribution amount.

 

Article 5
General Limitations

 

5.1 Termination for Cause . Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, the Company shall not pay any benefit under this Agreement if the Company terminates the Executive’s employment for Cause. Cause shall mean a good faith determination of the Company’s Board of Directors that the Executive has: (a) engaged in acts of personal dishonesty which have resulted in loss to the Company, or one of its affiliates, (b) intentionally failed to perform stated duties, (c) committed a willful violation of any law, rule, regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses), (d) become subject to the entry of a final cease and desist order which results in substantial loss to the Company or one of its affiliates, (e) been convicted of a crime or act involving moral turpitude, (f) willfully breached the Company’s code of conduct and business ethics, (g) been disqualified or barred by any governmental or self-regulatory authority from serving in the Executive’s then-current employment capacity or (h) willfully attempted to obstruct or failed to cooperate with any investigation authorized by the Board of Directors or any governmental or self-regulatory entity. No act or failure to act on the part of the Executive shall be considered “willful” unless it is done, or omitted to be done, by the Executive in bad faith or without reasonable belief that the Executive’s action or omission was in the best interests of the Company. Any act or failure to act that is based upon authority given pursuant to a resolution duly adopted by the Board of Directors, or upon the advice of legal counsel for the Company, shall be conclusively presumed to be done, or omitted to be done, by the Executive in good faith and in the best interests of the Company.

 

  8  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

5.2 Suicide or Misstatement . No benefits shall be distributed if the Executive commits suicide within three years after the Effective Date of this Agreement, or if an insurance company which issued a life insurance policy covering the Executive and owned by the Company denies coverage (i) for material misstatements of fact made by the Executive on an application for such life insurance, or (ii) for any other reason.

 

5.3 Required Regulatory Provision . No payments will be made under this Agreement that would violate of 12 U.S.C. Sec. 1828(k) or 12 U.S.C. Sec. 1818(e) or any regulation promulgated thereunder.

 

Article 6
Administration of Agreement

 

6.1 Plan Administrator Duties . This Agreement shall be administered by a Plan Administrator which shall consist of the Board, or such committee or person(s) as the Board shall appoint. The Plan Administrator shall administer this Agreement according to its express terms and shall also have the discretion and authority to (i) make, amend, interpret and enforce all appropriate rules and regulations for the administration of this Agreement and (ii) decide or resolve any and all questions including interpretations of this Agreement, as may arise in connection with the Agreement to the extent the exercise of such discretion and authority does not conflict with Section 409A of the Code and regulations thereunder.

 

6.2 Agents . In the administration of this Agreement, the Plan Administrator may employ agents and delegate to them such administrative duties as it sees fit, (including acting through a duly appointed representative), and may from time to time consult with counsel who may be counsel to the Company.

 

6.3 Binding Effect of Decisions . The decision or action of the Plan Administrator with respect to any question arising out of or in connection with the administration, interpretation and application of the Agreement and the rules and regulations promulgated hereunder shall be final and conclusive and binding upon all persons having any interest in the Agreement.

 

6.4 Indemnity of Plan Administrator . The Company shall indemnify and hold harmless the members of the Plan Administrator against any and all claims, losses, damages, expenses or liabilities arising from any action or failure to act with respect to this Agreement, except in the case of willful misconduct by the Plan Administrator or any of its members.

 

6.5 Company information . To enable the Plan Administrator to perform its functions, the Company shall supply full and timely information to the Plan Administrator on all matters relating to the date and circumstances of the Disability, death, or Separation from Service of the Executive and such other pertinent information as the Plan Administrator may reasonably require.

 

  9  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

6.6 Annual Statement . The Plan Administrator shall provide to the Executive, within one hundred twenty (120) days after the end of each Plan Year, a statement setting forth the benefits to be distributed under this Agreement.

 

Article 7
Claims And Review Procedures

 

7.1 For all claims, the following procedures will apply:

 

7.1.1 Claims Procedure . Any individual (“Claimant”) who has not received benefits under this Agreement that he or she believes should be paid shall make a claim for such benefits as follows:

 

7.1.1.1 Initiation — Written Claim . The Claimant initiates a claim by submitting to the Company a written claim for the benefits.

 

7.1.1.2 Timing of Company Response . The Company shall respond to such Claimant within ninety (90) days after receiving the claim. If the Company determines that special circumstances require additional time for processing the claim, the Company can extend the response period by an additional ninety (90) days by notifying the Claimant in writing, prior to the end of the initial ninety (90) day period, that an additional period is required. The notice of extension must set forth the special circumstances and the date by which the Company expects to render its decision.

 

7.1.1.3 Notice of Decision . If the Company denies part or all of the claim, the Company shall notify the Claimant in writing of such denial. The Company shall write the notification in a manner calculated to be understood by the Claimant. The notification shall set forth:

 

(a) The specific reasons for the denial,

 

(b) A reference to the specific provisions of this Agreement on which the denial is based,

 

(c) A description of any additional information or material necessary for the Claimant to perfect the claim and an explanation of why it is needed,

 

(d) An explanation of this Agreement’s review procedures and the time limits applicable to such procedures, and

 

(e) A statement of the Claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA Section 502(a) following an adverse benefit determination on review.

 

  10  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

7.1.2 Review Procedure . If the Company denies part or all of the claim, the Claimant shall have the opportunity for a full and fair review by the Company of the denial, as follows:

 

7.1.2.1 Initiation — Written Request . To initiate the review, the Claimant, within 60 days after receiving the Company’s notice of denial, must file with the Company a written request for review.

 

7.1.2.2 Additional Submissions — Information Access . The Claimant shall then have the opportunity to submit written comments, documents, records and other information relating to the claim. The Company shall also provide the Claimant, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information relevant (as defined in applicable ERISA regulations) to the Claimant’s claim for benefits.

 

7.1.2.3 Considerations on Review . In considering the review, the Company shall take into account all materials and information the Claimant submits relating to the claim, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

7.1.2.4 Timing of Company Response . The Company shall respond in writing to such Claimant within 60 days after receiving the request for review. If the Company determines that special circumstances require additional time for processing the claim, the Company can extend the response period by an additional 60 days by notifying the Claimant in writing, prior to the end of the initial 60-day period, that an additional period is required. The notice of extension must set forth the special circumstances and the date by which the Company expects to render its decision.

 

7.1.2.5 Notice of Decision . The Company shall notify the Claimant in writing of its decision on review. The Company shall write the notification in a manner calculated to be understood by the Claimant. The notification shall set forth:

 

(a) The specific reasons for the denial,

 

(b) A reference to the specific provisions of this Agreement on which the denial is based,

 

(c) A statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information relevant (as defined in applicable ERISA regulations) to the Claimant’s claim for benefits, and

 

  11  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

(d) A statement of the Claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA Section 502(a).

 

Article 8
Amendments and Termination

 

8.1 Amendments . This Agreement may be amended only by a written agreement signed by the Company and the Executive. However, the Company may unilaterally amend this Agreement to conform with written directives to the Company from its auditors or banking regulators or to comply with legislative or tax law, including without limitation Section 409A of the Code and any and all regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder.

 

8.2 Plan Termination Generally . This Agreement may be terminated only by a written agreement signed by the Company and the Executive. However, the Company may unilaterally amend this Agreement to conform with written directives to the Company from its auditors or banking regulators or to comply with legislative or tax law, including without limitation Section 409A of the Code and any and all regulations and guidance promulgated thereunder. The benefit shall be frozen as of the date the Agreement is terminated. Except as provided in Section 8.3, the termination of this Agreement shall not cause a distribution of benefits under this Agreement. Rather, upon such termination benefit distributions will be made at the earliest distribution event permitted under Article 2 or Article 3.

 

8.3 Plan Terminations Under Section 409A . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Section 8.2, if the Company terminates this Agreement in the following circumstances:

 

(a) Within thirty (30) days before, or twelve (12) months after a change in the ownership or effective control of the Company, or in the ownership of a substantial portion of the assets of the Company as described in Section 409A(2)(A)(v) of the Code, provided that all distributions are made no later than twelve (12) months following such termination of the Agreement and further provided that all the Company’s arrangements which are substantially similar to the Agreement are terminated so the Executive and all participants in the similar arrangements are required to receive all amounts of compensation deferred under the terminated arrangements within twelve (12) months of the termination of the arrangements;

 

(b) Upon the Company’s dissolution or with the approval of a bankruptcy court provided that the amounts deferred under the Agreement are included in the Executive’s gross income in the latest of (i) the calendar year in which the Agreement terminates; (ii) the calendar year in which the amount is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; or (iii) the first calendar year in which the distribution is administratively practical; or

 

  12  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

(c) Upon the Company’s termination of this and all other non-account balance plans (as referenced in Section 409A of the Code or the regulations thereunder), provided that all distributions are made no earlier than twelve (12) months and no later than twenty-four (24) months following such termination, and the Company does not adopt any new non-account balance plans for a minimum of five (5) years following the date of such termination;

 

the Company may distribute the amount which the Company has accrued with respect to the Company’s obligations under Article 2 hereof, determined as of the date of the termination of the Agreement, to the Executive in a lump sum subject to the above terms.

 

Article 9
Miscellaneous

 

9.1 Binding Effect . This Agreement shall bind the Executive and the Company, and their beneficiaries, survivors, executors, administrators and transferees.

 

9.2 No Guarantee of Employment . This Agreement is not a contract for employment. It does not give the Executive the right to remain as an employee of the Company, nor does it interfere with the Company’s right to discharge the Executive. It also does not require the Executive to remain an employee nor interfere with the Executive’s right to terminate employment at any time.

 

9.3 Non-Transferability . Benefits under this Agreement cannot be sold, transferred, assigned, pledged, attached or encumbered in any manner.

 

9.4 Tax Withholding and Reporting . The Company shall withhold any taxes that are required to be withheld, including, but not limited to, taxes owed under Section 409A of the Code and regulations thereunder, from the benefits provided under this Agreement. The Executive acknowledges that the Company’s sole liability regarding taxes is to forward any amounts withheld to the appropriate taxing authority(ies). Further, the Company shall satisfy all applicable reporting requirements, including those under Section 409A of the Code and regulations thereunder.

 

9.5 Applicable Law . The Agreement and all rights hereunder shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maryland, except to the extent preempted by the laws of the United States Of America.

 

9.6 Unfunded Arrangement . The Executive and the Beneficiary are general unsecured creditors of the Company for the distribution of benefits under this Agreement. The benefits represent the mere promise by the Company to distribute such benefits. The rights to benefits are not subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance, attachment, or garnishment by creditors. Any insurance on the Executive’s life or other informal funding asset is a general asset of the Company to which the Executive and Beneficiary have no preferred or secured claim.

 

  13  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

9.7 Reorganization . The Company shall not merge or consolidate into or with another bank, or reorganize, or sell substantially all of its assets to another bank, firm, or person unless such succeeding or continuing bank, firm, or person agrees to assume and discharge the obligations of the Company under this Agreement. Upon the occurrence of such event, the term “Company” as used in this Agreement shall be deemed to refer to the successor or survivor bank.

 

9.8 Entire Agreement . This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the Company and the Executive as to the subject matter hereof. No rights are granted to the Executive by virtue of this Agreement other than those specifically set forth herein.

 

9.9 Interpretation . Wherever the fulfillment of the intent and purpose of this Agreement requires, and the context will permit, the use of the masculine gender includes the feminine and use of the singular includes the plural.

 

9.10 Alternative Action . in the event it shall become impossible for the Company or the Plan Administrator to perform any act required by this Agreement, the Company or Plan Administrator may in its discretion perform such alternative act as most nearly carries out the intent and purpose of this Agreement and is in the best interests of the Company, provided that such alternative acts do not violate Section 409A of the Code.

 

9.11 Headings . Article and section headings are for convenient reference only and shall not control or affect the meaning or construction of any of its provisions.

 

9.12 Validity . In case any provision of this Agreement shall be illegal or invalid for any reason, said illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining parts hereof, but this Agreement shall be construed and enforced as if such illegal and invalid provision has never been inserted herein.

 

9.13 Notice . Any notice or filing required or permitted to be given to the Company or Plan Administrator under this Agreement shall be sufficient if in writing and hand-delivered, or sent by registered or certified mail, to the address below:

 

  Community Bank of Tri-County  
  P.O. Box 38  
  Waldorf, MD 20601  

 

Such notice shall be deemed given as of the date of delivery or, if delivery is made by mail, as of the date shown on the postmark on the receipt for registration or certification.

 

  14  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

Any notice or filing required or permitted to be given to the Executive under this Agreement shall be sufficient if writing and hand-delivered, or sent by mail, to the last known address of the Executive.

 

9.14 Compliance with Section 409A . This Agreement shall at all times be administered and the provisions of this Agreement shall be interpreted consistent with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and any and all regulations thereunder, including such regulations as may be promulgated after the Effective Date of this Agreement.

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Executive and a duly authorized representative of the Company have signed this Agreement.

 

EXECUTIVE:   COMPANY  
       
    COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
       
/s/ James Muldowney Burke   By /s/ Michael L. Middleton  
James Muldowney Burke   Title President  

 

 

  15  

 

 

Community Bank of Tri-county
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

FIRST AMENDMENT
TO THE
COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
SALARY CONTINUATION AGREEMENT
DATED AUGUST 21, 2006
FOR
JAMES MULDOWNEY BURKE

 

THIS FIRST AMENDMENT is adopted this 13 th day of April, 2007, by and between Community Bank of Tri-County, a state-chartered commercial bank located in Waldorf, Maryland (the “Company”) and James Muldowney Burke (the “Executive”).

 

The Company and the Executive executed the Salary Continuation Agreement on August 21, 2006 effective January 1, 2006 (the “Agreement”).

 

The undersigned hereby amend the Agreement for the purpose of changing the Disability and Change in Control benefit amounts. Therefore, the following changes shall be made:

 

Section 2.3.1 of the Agreement shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

2.3.1 Amount of Benefit. The benefit under this Section 2.3 is the Disability Benefit set forth on Schedule A for the Plan Year ending prior to Separation from Service.

 

Section 2.4.1 of the Agreement shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

2.4.1 Amount of Benefit. The benefit under this Section 2.4 is the Change in Control Benefit set forth on Schedule A for the Plan Year ending prior to Separation from Service.

 

Section 2.4.2 of the Agreement shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

2.4.2 Distribution of Benefit . The Company shall distribute the benefit to the Executive in one hundred eighty (180) consecutive monthly installments commencing the first day of the month following Separation from Service.

 

Section 2.7 of the Agreement shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

2.7 Change in Form or Timing of Distributions . For distribution of benefits under this Article 2, the Executive and the Company may, subject to the terms of Section 8.1, amend the Agreement to delay the timing or change the form of distributions. Any such amendment:

 

  1  

 

 

Community Bank of Tri-county
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

(a) may not accelerate the time or schedule of any distribution, except as provided in Section 409A of the Code and the regulations thereunder;

 

(b) must, for benefits distributable under Sections 2.2 and 2.3, be made at least twelve (12) months prior to the first scheduled distribution;

 

(c) must, for benefits distributable under Sections 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4, delay the commencement of distributions for a minimum of five (5) years from the date the first distribution was originally scheduled to be made; and

 

(d) must take effect not less than twelve (12) months after the amendment is made.

 

IN WITNESS OF THE ABOVE , the Company and the Executive hereby consent to this First Amendment.

 

EXECUTIVE:   COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
       
/s/ James Muldowney Burke   By /s/ William J. Pasenelli
James Muldowney Burke   Title CFO & EVP              

 

  2  

 

 

Community Bank of Tri-county
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

SECOND AMENDMENT
TO THE
COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
SALARY CONTINUATION AGREEMENT
DATED AUGUST 21, 2006
AND AMENDED APRIL 13, 2007
FOR
JAMES MULDOWNEY BURKE

 

THIS SECOND AMENDMENT is adopted this 30 th day of December, 2007, by and between Community Bank of Tri-County, a state-chartered commercial bank located in Waldorf, Maryland (the “Company”) and James Muldowney Burke (the “Executive”).

 

The Company and the Executive executed the Salary Continuation Agreement on August 21, 2006 effective January 1, 2006 a First Amendment on April 13, 2007 (the “Agreement”).

 

The undersigned hereby amend the Agreement for the purpose of changing the Change in Control definition, increasing the Normal Retirement Benefit and updating the plan termination provision. Therefore, the following changes shall be made:

 

Section 1.4 of the Agreement shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

1.4 Change in Control ” means a change in the ownership or effective control of the Bank, or in the ownership of a substantial portion of the assets of the Bank, as such change is defined in Code Section 409A and regulations thereunder.

 

Section 2_1_1 of the Agreement shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

2.1.1 Amount of Benefit . The annual benefit under this Section 2.1 is One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($101,000) for a period of fifteen (15) years resulting in a total benefit of One Million Five Hundred Thousand Fifteen Dollars ($1,515,000). The Company’s Board of Directors, in its sole discretion, through duly adopted resolution, may increase the annual benefit under this Section prior to the Executive’s Separation from Service.

 

Section 8.3 of the Agreement shall be deleted in its entirety and replaced with the following:

 

8.3 Plan Terminations Under Section 409A . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Section 8.2, if the Company terminates this Agreement in the following circumstances:

 

(a) Within thirty (30) days before, or twelve (12) months after a Change in Control, provided that all distributions are made no later than twelve (12) months following such termination of the Agreement and further provided that all the Company’s arrangements which are substantially similar to the Agreement are terminated so the Executive and all participants in the similar arrangements are required to receive all amounts of compensation deferred under the terminated arrangements within twelve (12) months of the termination of the arrangements;

 

  1  

 

 

Community Bank of Tri-county
Salary Continuation Agreement

 

(b) Upon the Company’s dissolution or with the approval of a bankruptcy court provided that the amounts deferred under the Agreement are included in the Executive’s gross income in the latest of (i) the calendar year in which the Agreement terminates; (ii) the calendar year in which the amount is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; or (iii) the first calendar year in which the distribution is administratively practical; or
(c) Upon the Company’s termination of this and all other arrangements that would be aggregated with this Agreement pursuant to Treasury Regulations Section 1.409A-1(c) if the Executive participated in such arrangements (“Similar Arrangements”), provided that (i) the termination and liquidation does not occur proximate to a downturn in the financial health of the Company, (ii) all termination distributions are made no earlier than twelve (12) months and no later than twenty-four (24) months following such termination, and (iii) the Company does not adopt any new arrangement that would be a Similar Arrangement for a minimum of three (3) years following the date the Company takes all necessary action to irrevocably terminate and liquidate the Agreement;

 

The Company may distribute the amount which the Company has accrued with respect to the Company’s obligations hereunder, determined as of the date of the termination of the Agreement, to the Executive in a lump sum subject to the above terms.

 

Schedule A shall be deleted and replaced with the attached Schedule A.

 

IN WITNESS OF THE ABOVE, the Company and the Executive hereby consent to this Second Amendment.

 

 

Executive:   Community Bank of-County
       
       
/s/ James Muldowney Burke   By /s/ Michael L. Middleton  
James Muldowney Burke   Title President  

 

 

  2  

Exhibit 10.42

 

SUPPLEMENTAL EXECUTIVE RETIREMENT PLAN

 

THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 1st day of January, 2011, by and between Community Bank of TRI-County, a banking corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Maryland, hereinafter referred to as the “Plan Sponsor”, and Michael Middleton, hereinafter referred to as the “Participant’.

 

WITNESSETH

 

WHEREAS, it is the consensus of the Board that the Participant’s services to the Plan Sponsor in the past have been of exceptional merit and have constituted an invaluable contribution to the general welfare of the Plan Sponsor bringing it to its present status of operating efficiency, and its present position in its field of activity; and,

 

WHEREAS, the experience of the Participant, his knowledge of the affairs of the Plan Sponsor, his reputation and contacts in the industry are so valuable that assurance of his continued services is essential for the future growth and profits of the Plan Sponsor and it is in the best interests of the Plan Sponsor to arrange terms of continued employment for the Participant so as to reasonably assure his remaining in the Plan Sponsor’s employment during his lifetime or until the age of retirement; and,

 

WHEREAS, it is the desire of the Plan Sponsor that his services be retained as herein provided; and,

 

WHEREAS, the Participant is willing to continue in the employ of the Plan Sponsor provided the Plan Sponsor agrees to pay to his beneficiaries certain benefits in accordance with the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth; and,

 

WHEREAS, the Plan Sponsor intends that the Plan shall at all times be administered and interpreted in such a manner as to constitute an unfunded nonqualified deferred compensation plan for tax purposes and for purposes of Title I of ERISA. This Plan is not intended to qualify for favorable tax treatment pursuant to IRC Section 401(a) of the Code or any successor section or statute. This Plan is intended to comply with IRC Section 409A as created under The American Jobs Creation Act of 2004 (the “Jobs Act of 2004”). It is both anticipated and expected that the terms and provisions of this Plan may need to be amended in the future to assure continued compliance. The Plan Sponsor and the Participant acknowledge that fact and agree to take any and all steps necessary to operate the plan in “good faith” based on their current understanding of the regulations;

 

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of services performed in the past and to be performed in the future as well as of the mutual promises and covenants herein contained, it is agreed as follows:

 

ARTICLE 1

DEFINITIONS

 

DEFINITION OF TERMS. Certain words and phrases are defined when first used in later Articles of this Plan. Whenever any words are used herein in the masculine, they shall be construed as though they were in the feminine in all cases where they would so apply; and whenever any words are used herein in the singular or in the plural, they shall be construed as though they were used in the plural or the singular, as the case may be, in all cases where they would so apply. For the purpose of this Plan, unless otherwise clearly apparent from the context, the following phrases or terms shall have the following indicated meanings:

 

  Page 1 of 17

 

  

1.1           “Accrued Benefit” shall mean the portion of the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit that has accrued as of the applicable date of reference, with respect to services performed by the Participant beginning on January 1, 2011, as calculated for purposes of Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and recorded on the books of the Plan Sponsor.

 

1.2           “Applicable Guidance” shall mean, as the context requires, Code § 409A and the Final Treasury Regulations issued thereunder, or other written Treasury or IRS guidance regarding or affecting Code § 409A.

 

1.3           “Beneficiary” shall mean the person or persons, natural or otherwise, designated in writing by a Participant in accordance with Article 5 before his death to receive Plan benefits in the event of the Participant’s death.

 

1.4           “Board” shall mean the board of directors of the Plan Sponsor, unless specifically noted otherwise.

 

1.5           “Cause” shall mean any of the following acts or circumstances: (i) willful destruction by the Participant of property of the Plan Sponsor having a material value to the Plan Sponsor; (ii) fraud, embezzlement, theft, or comparable dishonest activity committed by the Participant (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iii) the Participant’s conviction of or entering a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any crime constituting a felony or any misdemeanor involving fraud, dishonesty, or moral turpitude (excluding acts involving a de minimis dollar value and not related to the Plan Sponsor); (iv) the Participant’s breach, neglect, refusal, or failure to materially discharge the Participant’s duties (other than due to physical or mental illness) commensurate with the Participant’s title and function or the Participant’s failure to comply with the lawful directions of a senior managing officer of the Plan Sponsor in any such case that is not cured within fifteen (15) days after the Participant has received written notice thereof from such senior managing officer; or (v) any willful misconduct by the Participant which may cause substantial economic or reputation injury to the Plan Sponsor, including, but not limited to, sexual harassment .

 

1.6           “Change in Control” shall mean the occurrence of a Change in Control event, within the meaning of Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(1)(5) and described in any of subparagraph (a), (b), or (c), (collectively referred to as “Change in Control Events”), or any combination of the Change in Control Events. To constitute a Change in Control Event with respect to the Participant or Beneficiary, the Change in Control Event must relate to: (i) the corporation for whom the Participant is performing services at the time of the Change in Control Event; (ii) the corporation that is liable for the payment of the deferred compensation (or all corporations liable for the payment if more than one corporation is liable); or (iii) a corporation that is a majority shareholder of a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii), or any corporation in a chain of corporations in which each corporation is a majority shareholder of another corporation in the chain, ending in a corporation identified in clause (i) or (ii).

 

(a)           Change in Ownership. A Change in Ownership occurs if a person, or a group of persons acting together, acquires more than fifty percent (50%) of the stock of the corporation, measured by voting power or value. Incremental increases in ownership by a person or group that already owns fifty percent (50%) of the corporation do not result in a Change of Ownership, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(v).

 

(b)           Change in Effective Control. A Change in Effective Control occurs if, over a Twelve (12) month period: (i) a person or group acquires stock representing thirty percent (30%) of the voting power of the corporation; or (ii) a majority of the members of the board of directors of the ultimate parent corporation is replaced by directors not endorsed by the persons who were members of the board before the new directors’ appointment, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(vi).

 

  Page 2 of 17

 

  

(c)           Change in Ownership of a Substantial Portion of Corporate Assets. A Change in Control based on the sale of assets occurs if a person or group acquires Forty percent (40%) or more of the gross fair market value of the assets of a corporation over a Twelve (12) month period. No change in control results pursuant to this Article (c) if the assets are transferred to certain entities controlled directly or indirectly by the shareholders of the transferring corporation, as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(5)(vii).

 

1.7           “Claimant” shall mean a person who believes that he or she is being denied a benefit to which he or she is entitled hereunder.

 

1.8           “Code” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

1.9           “Disability” shall mean a condition of the Participant whereby he or she either: (i) is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, or (ii) is, by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Plan Sponsor. The Administrator will determine whether the Participant has incurred a Disability based on its own good faith determination and may require the Participant to submit to reasonable physical and mental examinations for this purpose. The Participant will also be deemed to have incurred a Disability if determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration, Railroad Retirement Board, or in accordance with a disability insurance program, provided that the definition of disability applied under such disability insurance program complies with the requirements of Treasury Regulation §1.409A-3(i)(4) and authoritative guidance.

 

1.10         “Effective Date” shall mean the date specified on the first page of this Plan.

 

1.11         “Eligible Employee” shall mean for any Plan Year (or applicable portion of a Plan Year), an Employee who is determined by the Plan Sponsor, or its designee, to be a Participant under the Plan. If the Plan Sponsor determines that an Employee first becomes an Eligible Employee during a Plan Year, the Plan Sponsor shall notify the individual in writing of its determination and of the date during the Plan Year on which the individual shall first become a Plan Participant.

 

1.12         “Employee” shall mean a person providing services to the Plan Sponsor in the capacity of a common law Employee of the Plan Sponsor.

 

1.13         “ERISA” shall mean the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as it may be amended from time to time.

 

1.14         “Normal Retirement Age” shall mean the date the Participant attains age 67.

 

1.15         “Normal Retirement Benefit” shall mean an annual benefit payment in the amount of Twenty Eight Thousand Three Hundred and Forty Eight dollars ($28,348) for a period of Fifteen (15) years.

 

1.16         “Participant” shall mean any Eligible Employee: (i) who is selected to participate in this Plan, or, (ii) a former Eligible Employee who continues to be entitled to a benefit under this Plan.

 

1.17         “Plan” shall mean this Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan Agreement, all Election Forms, the Trust, (if any), and any other written documents relevant to the Plan. For purposes of applying Code § 409A requirements, this Plan is a non-account balance plan under Treasury Regulation §1.409-1 (c) (2) (i) (A).

 

  Page 3 of 17

 

  

1.18         “Plan Administrator” or “Administrator” shall be a committee designated by the Plan Sponsor. If a Participant is part of a group of persons designated as a committee or Plan Administrator, then the Participant may not participate in any activity or decision relating solely to his or her individual benefits under this Plan. Matters solely affecting the applicable Participant will be resolved by the remaining committee members.

 

1.19         “Plan Sponsor” shall mean the person or entity: (i) receiving the services of the Participant; and (ii) all persons with whom such person or entity would be considered a single employer under the parent-subsidiary rules of Code §414(b) or §414(c).

 

1.20         “Plan Year” shall mean, for the first Plan Year, the period beginning on the Effective Date of the Plan and ending December 31 of such calendar year, and thereafter, a Twelve (12) month period beginning January 1 of each calendar year and continuing through December 31 of such calendar year.

 

1.21         “Section 409A” shall mean Section 409A of the Code and the Treasury Regulations and other Applicable Guidance issued under that Section.

 

1.22         “Separation from Service” shall mean the occurrence of a Participant’s death, retirement, or “other termination of employment” (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(1)(ii)) with the Plan Sponsor (as defined in Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(h)(3)). However, a Separation from Service shall not occur if the Participant is on military leave, sick leave, or other bona fide leave of absence if the period of such leave does not exceed six months, or if longer, so long as the Participant retains a right to reemployment with the Plan Sponsor under an applicable statute or by contract.

 

1.23         “Specified Employee” shall mean that the Participant also satisfies the definition of a “key employee” as such term is defined in Code §416(i) (without regard to Section 416(i)(5)). However, the Participant is not a Specified Employee unless any stock of the Plan Sponsor is publicly traded on an established securities market or otherwise, as defined in Code §1,897-1(m). If the Participant is a key employee at any time during the Twelve (12) months ending on the identification date (see below), the Participant is a Specified Employee for the Twelve (12) month period commencing on the first day of the fourth month following the identification date. For purposes of this Article, the identification date is December 31. The determination of the Participant as a Specified Employee shall be made by the Administrator in accordance with IRC Section 416(i), the “specified employee” requirements of Section 409A, and Treasury Regulations.

 

1.24         “Taxable Year” shall mean the Twelve (12) consecutive month period ending each December 31.

 

1.25         “Treasury Regulations” shall mean regulations promulgated by the Internal Revenue Service for the U.S. Department of the Treasury, as they may be amended from time to time.

 

1.26         “Trust” shall mean one or more trusts that may be established in accordance with the terms of this Plan.

 

ARTICLE 2

Selection, Enrollment, Eligibility

 

2.1           Selection by Plan Sponsor. Participation in the Plan shall be limited to a select group of management or highly compensated employees of the Plan Sponsor, as determined by the Plan Sponsor in its sole and absolute discretion. The initial group of Eligible Employees shall become Participants on the Effective Date. Any Eligible Employee selected as a Plan Participant after the Effective Date, shall become a Participant on a date determined by the Plan Sponsor.

 

  Page 4 of 17

 

  

2.2           Re-Employment. If a Participant who incurs a Separation from Service is subsequently re-employed, he or she may, at the sole and absolute discretion of the Plan Administrator, become a Participant in accordance with the provisions of the Plan.

 

2.3           Enrollment Requirements. As a condition of participation, each selected Employee shall complete, execute, and return to the Plan Administrator all form(s) required by the Plan Administrator and within the time specified by the Plan Administrator. In addition, the Plan Administrator shall establish such other enrollment requirements as it determines necessary or advisable.

 

2.4           Eligibility; Commencement of Participation. Provided that an Employee selected to participate in the Plan has met all enrollment requirements set forth in the Plan and required by the Plan Administrator, the Employee shall commence participation in the Plan on the date the Plan is executed by the Plan Sponsor.

 

2.5           Termination of Participation. If the Plan Administrator determines in good faith that a Participant no longer qualifies as a member of a select group of management or highly compensated employees, as membership in such group is determined in accordance with Section 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of ERISA, the Plan Administrator shall cease further benefit accruals hereunder.

 

ARTICLE 3

BENEFITS

 

3.1           Normal Retirement Benefit. If the Participant remains in the service of the Plan Sponsor until reaching his Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be entitled to his Normal Retirement Benefit. The annual installments shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the Normal Retirement Age. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the first day of the seventh month following Normal Retirement Age.

 

3.2           Death Prior to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant should die while actively employed by the Plan Sponsor at any time after the date of this Plan but prior to his Normal Retirement Age, the Plan Sponsor will pay the Accrued Benefit in Fifteen (15) equal annual installments to the Participant’s Beneficiary. The payments shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant dies.

 

3.3           Death Subsequent to Commencement of Benefit Payments. In the event the Participant dies while receiving payments, but prior to receiving the Fifteen (15) annual installment payments due and owing hereunder, the unpaid balance of the payments shall continue to be paid to the Participant’s Beneficiary for the balance of the Fifteen (15) annual installments.

 

3.4           Disability Benefit. In the event the Participant becomes Disabled prior to the date the Participant dies or experiences a Separation from Service, and prior to the date of a Change in Control, the Participant shall be entitled to receive his Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of determination of Disability. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the month following the Participant’s Sixty-Fifth (65th) birthday or death (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in Fifteen (15) equal annual installments.

 

  Page 5 of 17

 

  

3.5           Separation from Service Benefit. If the Participant experiences a Separation from Service prior to Normal Retirement Age, death, Disability, or as described in the second paragraph of Section 3.6, then the Participant shall be entitled to a benefit equal to the Accrued Benefit, calculated as of the date of Separation from Service. Such benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or dies (whichever occurs first), and shall be paid in Fifteen (15) equal annual installments. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that the Participant is determined by the Plan Administrator to be a Specified Employee, the first benefit payment shall be paid on the later of (i) the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant achieves Normal Retirement Age or (ii) the first day of the seventh month following Separation from Service (except in the case of a Separation from Service due to death).

 

3.6           Change in Control Benefit. In the event there is a Change in Control prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, the Participant shall become 100% vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit. Subject to the paragraph below, the Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the month in which the Participant attains Normal Retirement Age or dies, whichever is first to occur.

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, if the Participant experiences a Separation from Service within 24 months following the Change in Control, the following provisions apply. The Participant’s Normal Retirement Benefit shall commence to be paid on the first day of the second month following the Participant’s Separation from Service (or, if the Participant is a Specified Employee, on the first day of the seventh month following the Participant’s Separation from Service). In lieu of receiving the Normal Retirement Benefit in Fifteen (15) annual installments, the Participant may elect to receive the Normal Retirement Benefit pursuant to this Section 3.6 in the form of (i) a lump sum, (ii) equal annual installments over two (2) years, or (iii) equal annual installments over five (5) years. Any election by the Participant pursuant to this Section 3.6 must be submitted to the Plan Sponsor by the Effective Date, or within thirty (30) days thereafter.

 

3.7           Termination for Cause. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, if the Plan Sponsor terminates the Participant’s employment for “Cause”, then the Participant shall not be entitled to any benefits under the terms of this Plan.

 

3.8           Prohibition on Acceleration of Payments. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, neither the Plan Sponsor nor a Participant may accelerate the time or schedule of any payment or amount scheduled to be paid under this Plan, except that the Plan Sponsor, in its discretion, may accelerate payments as permitted by Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(j)(4). The Plan Sponsor shall deny any change made to an election if the Plan Sponsor determines that the change violates the requirements of authoritative guidance.

 

3.9           Subsequent Changes in the Time or Form of Payment. If permitted by the Plan Sponsor, a Participant may elect to change the time or form of payments (collectively, “payment elections”), provided the following conditions are met:

 

(i)          Such change will not take effect until at least Twelve (12) months after the date on which the new payment election is made and approved by the Plan Administrator:

 

(ii)         If the change of payment election relates to a payment based on Separation from Service, or if the payment is at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the change of payment election must result in payment being deferred for a period of not less than five (5) years from the date such payment would otherwise have been paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, five (5) years from the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid):

 

  Page 6 of 17

 

  

(iii)        If the change of payment election relates to a payment at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule, the Participant or Plan Sponsor must make the change of payment election not less than Twelve (12) months before the date the payment is scheduled to be paid (or in the case of a life annuity or installment payments, which are treated as a single payment, Twelve (12) months before the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid).

 

Notwithstanding the preceding, to the extent permitted under Section 409A and by the Plan Sponsor, the Participant may elect the timing and manner of distributions during 2008 (except that a Participant cannot in 2008 change payment elections with respect to payments that the Participant would otherwise receive in 2008, or make an election that causes payments scheduled for subsequent years to be made in 2008), and such election shall not be treated as a change in the form and timing of payment or an acceleration of payment under Section 409A.

 

3.10         Delay in Payment by Plan Sponsor.

 

(a)          A payment may be delayed to a date after the designated payment date under any of the circumstances described below, and the provision will not fail to meet the requirements of establishing a permissible payment event. The delay in the payment will not constitute a subsequent deferral election, so long as the Plan Sponsor treats all payments to similarly situated Participants on a reasonably consistent basis.

 

(i)           Payments subject to Section 162(m). A payment may be delayed to the extent that the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that if the payment were made as scheduled, the Plan Sponsor’s deduction with respect to such payment would not be permitted due to the application of Code §162(m). If a payment is delayed, such payment must be made either:

 

(1) during the Participant’s first Taxable Year in which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates, or should reasonably anticipate, that if the payment is made during such year, the deduction of such payment will not be barred by application of Code §162(m) or,

 

(2) during the period beginning with the date of the Participant’s Separation from Service and ending on the later of the last day of the Taxable Year of the Plan Sponsor in which the Participant separates from service or the 15th day of the third month following the Participant’s Separation from Service. Where any scheduled payment to a specific Participant in the Plan Sponsor’s Taxable Year is delayed in accordance with this Article, the delay in payment will be treated as a subsequent deferral election unless all scheduled payments to the Participant that could be delayed in accordance with this Article are also delayed. Where the payment is delayed to a date on or after the Participant’s Separation from Service, the payment will be considered a payment upon a Separation from Service for purposes of the rules under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-3(i)(2) (payments to specified employees upon a separation from service) and, the 6 month delay rule will apply for Specified Employees.

 

(ii)          Payments that would violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law. A payment may be delayed where the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law provided that the payment is made at the earliest date at which the Plan Sponsor reasonably anticipates that the making of the payment will not cause such violation. The making of a payment that would cause inclusion in gross income or the application of any penalty provision or other provision of the Internal Revenue Code is not treated as a violation of applicable law.

 

  Page 7 of 17

 

 

(iii)         Other events and conditions. The Plan Sponsor may delay a payment upon such other events and conditions as the Commissioner of the IRS may prescribe.

 

(iv)        Notwithstanding the above, a payment may be delayed where the payment would jeopardize the ability of the Plan Sponsor to continue as a going concern.

 

(b)           Treatment of Payment as Made on Designated Payment Date. Each payment under this Plan is deemed made on the required payment date even if the payment is made after such date, provided the payment is made by the latest of: (i) the end of the calendar year in which the payment is due; (ii) the 15th day of the third calendar month following the payment due date; (iii) in case the Plan Sponsor cannot calculate the payment amount on account of administrative impracticality which is beyond the Participant’s control (or the control of the Participant’s estate), in the first calendar year in which payment is practicable; (iv) in case the Plan Sponsor does not have sufficient funds to make the payment without jeopardizing the Plan Sponsor’s solvency, in the first calendar year in which the Plan Sponsor’s funds are sufficient to make the payment.

 

3.11         Unsecured General Creditor Status of Participant:

 

(a)          Payment to the Participant or any Beneficiary hereunder shall be made from assets which shall continue, for all purposes, to be part of the general, unrestricted assets of the Plan Sponsor and no person shall have any interest in any such asset by virtue of any provision of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligation hereunder shall be an unfunded and unsecured promise to pay money in the future. To the extent that any person acquires a right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor under the provisions hereof, such right shall be no greater than the right of any unsecured general creditor of the Plan Sponsor and no such person shall have or acquire any legal or equitable right, interest, or claim in or to any property or assets of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(b)          In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies insuring the life of a Participant or employee, to allow the Plan Sponsor to recover or meet the cost of providing benefits, in whole or in part, hereunder, no Participant or Beneficiary shall have any rights whatsoever in said policy or the proceeds therefrom. The Plan Sponsor or the Trustee of the Trust (if any) shall be the primary owner and beneficiary of any such insurance policy or property and shall possess and may exercise all incidents of ownership therein. No insurance policy with regard to any director, “highly compensated employee”, or “highly compensated individual” as defined in IRS Section 101(j) shall be acquired before satisfying the Section 101(j) “Notice and Consent” requirements.

 

(c)          In the event that the Plan Sponsor purchases an insurance policy or policies on the life of a Participant as provided for above, then all of such policies shall be subject to the claims of the creditors of the Plan Sponsor.

 

(d)          If the Plan Sponsor chooses to obtain insurance on the life of a Participant in connection with its obligations under this Plan, the Participant hereby agrees to take such physical examinations and to truthfully and completely supply such information as may be required by the Plan Sponsor or the insurance company designated by the Plan Sponsor.

 

3.12         Facility of Payment. If a distribution is to be made to a minor, or to a person who is otherwise incompetent, then the Plan Administrator may make such distribution: (i) to the legal guardian, or if none, to a parent of a minor payee with whom the payee maintains his or her residence; or (ii) to the conservator or administrator or, if none, to the person having custody of an incompetent payee. Any such distribution shall fully discharge the Plan Sponsor and the Plan Administrator from further liability on account thereof.

 

  Page 8 of 17

 

  

3.13         Excise Tax Limitation. In the event that any payment or benefit (within the meaning of Code §280G(b)(2) of the Code) to the Participant or for the Participant’s benefit paid or payable or distributed or distributable (including, but not limited to, the acceleration of the time for the vesting or payment of such benefit or payment) pursuant to the terms of this Plan or otherwise in connection with, or arising out of, the Participant’s employment with the Plan Sponsor or any of its Affiliates or a Change in Control within the meaning of Code §280G of the Code (a ‘Payment” or “Payments”), would be subject to the excise tax imposed by Code §4999 of the Code (the “Excise Tax”), then the Payments shall be increased in an amount necessary to provide for the payment of the excise tax imposed by Code § 4999 (the “Section 4999 Limit”). Any payment made to the Participant under this Section 3.13 shall be made no later than the end of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Participant remits the related taxes.

 

ARTICLE 4

Vesting and Taxes

 

4.1           Vesting. The Participant shall be vested at all times in his Accrued Benefit. Upon attainment of Normal Retirement Age, the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.2           Acceleration of Vesting. If, prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Age, and prior to the date the Participant dies, becomes Disabled or experiences a Separation from Service, there is a Change in Control of the Plan Sponsor, then the Participant shall be One Hundred (100%) percent vested in his Nor anal Retirement Benefit.

 

4.3           FICA, Withholding and Other Taxes:

 

(a)          When a Participant becomes vested in a portion of his Normal Retirement Benefit, the Plan Sponsor shall withhold from the Participant’s cash compensation in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor, the Participant’s share of FICA and other employment taxes on such vested Normal Retirement Benefit.

 

(b)          Distributions. The Plan Sponsor, or trustee of the Trust, shall withhold from any payments made to a Participant or Beneficiary under this Plan all federal, state and local income, employment and other taxes required to be withheld by the Plan Sponsor in a manner determined in the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor or the trustee of the Trust in compliance with applicable tax withholding requirements.

 

ARTICLE 5

BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION

 

5.1           Designation of Beneficiaries.

 

(a)           The Participant may designate any person or persons (who may be named contingently or successively) to receive any benefits payable under the Plan upon the Participant’s death, and the designation may be changed from time to time by the Participant by filing a new designation. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the Participant and shall be in the form prescribed by the Administrator, and shall be effective only when filed in writing with the Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime.

 

(b)           In the absence of a valid Beneficiary designation, or if, at the time any benefit payment is due to a Beneficiary, there is no living Beneficiary validly named by the Participant, the Plan Sponsor shall pay the benefit payment to the Participant’s spouse, if then living, and if the spouse is not then living to the Participant’s then living descendants, if any, per stirpes, and if there are no living descendants, to the Participant’s estate. In determining the existence or identity of anyone entitled to a benefit payment, the Plan Sponsor may rely conclusively upon information supplied by the Participant’s personal representative, executor, or administrator.

 

  Page 9 of 17

 

  

(c)           If a question arises as to the existence or identity of anyone entitled to receive a death benefit payment under the Plan, or if a dispute arises with respect to any death benefit payment under the Plan, the Plan Sponsor may distribute the payment to the Participant’s estate without liability for any tax or other consequences, or may take any other action which the Plan Sponsor deems to be appropriate.

 

5.2           Information to be Furnished by Participants and Beneficiaries; Inability to Locate Participants or Beneficiaries. Any communication, statement, or notice addressed to the Participant or to a Beneficiary at his or her last post office address as shown on the Plan Sponsor’s records shall be binding on the Participant or Beneficiary for all purposes of this Plan. The Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to search for any Participant or Beneficiary beyond the sending of a registered letter to the last known address.

 

ARTICLE 6

ADMINISTRATION

 

6.1           Administrator Duties. The Administrator shall be responsible for the management, operation, and administration of the Plan. The Administrator shall act at meetings by affirmative vote of a majority of its members. Any action permitted to be taken at a meeting may be taken without a meeting if, prior to such action, a unanimous written consent to the action is signed by all members and such written consent is filed with the minutes of the proceedings of the Administrator, provided, however that no member may vote or act upon any matter which relates solely to the Participant. The chair, or any other member or members of the Administrator designated by the chair, may execute any certificate or other written direction on behalf of the Administrator. When making a determination or calculation, the Administrator shall be entitled to rely on information furnished by the Participant or the Plan Sponsor. No provision of this Plan shall be construed as imposing on the Administrator any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law, or any duty similar to any fiduciary duty under ERISA or other law.

 

6.2           Administrator Authority. The Administrator shall enforce this Plan in accordance with its terms, shall be charged with the general administration of this Plan, and shall have all powers necessary to accomplish its purposes, including, but not by way of limitation, the following:

 

(a)           To construe and interpret the terms and provisions of this Plan;

 

(b)           To compute and certify the amount and kind of benefits payable to the Participant and their Beneficiaries; to determine the time and manner in which such benefits are paid; and to determine the amount of any withholding taxes to be deducted;

 

(c)           To maintain all records that may be necessary for the administration of this Plan;

 

(d)           To provide for the disclosure of all information and the filing or provision of all reports and statements to the Participant, Beneficiaries, and governmental agencies as shall be required by law;

 

(e)           To make and publish such rules for the regulation of this Plan and procedures for the administration of this Plan as are not inconsistent with the terms hereof;

 

  Page 10 of 17

 

  

(f)           To administer this Plan’s claims procedures;

 

(g)           To approve election forms and procedures for use under this Plan; and

 

(h)           To appoint a plan record keeper or any other agent, and to delegate to them such powers and duties in connection with the administration of this Plan as the Administrator may from time to time prescribe.

 

6.3           Binding Effect of Decision. The decision or action of the Administrator with respect to any question arising out of or in connection with the administration, interpretation, and application of this Plan and the rules and regulations promulgated hereunder shall be final and conclusive and binding upon all persons having any interest in this Plan.

 

6.4           Compensation, Expenses, and Indemnity. The Administrator shall serve without compensation for services rendered hereunder. The Administrator is authorized at the expense of the Plan Sponsor to employ such legal counsel and/or Plan record keeper as it may deem advisable to assist in the performance of its duties hereunder. Expense and fees in connection with the administration of this Plan shall be paid by the Plan Sponsor.

 

6.5           Plan Sponsor Information. To enable the Administrator to perform its functions, the Plan Sponsor shall supply full and timely information to the Administrator, on all matters relating to the compensation of the Participant, the date and circumstances of the Disability, death, or Separation from Service of the Participant, and such other pertinent information as the Administrator may reasonably require.

 

6.6           Periodic Statements. Under procedures established by the Administrator, Participant shall be provided a statement of his Accrued Benefit on an annual basis.

 

ARTICLE 7

CLAIMS PROCEDURE

 

7.1           Claims Procedures. This Section 7.1 is based on final regulations issued by the Department of Labor and published in the Federal Register on November 21, 2000 and codified at section 2560.503 1 of the Department of Labor Regulations. If any provision of this Section 8.4 conflicts with the requirements of those regulations, the requirements of those regulations will prevail.

 

(a)           Initial Claim. A Participant or Beneficiary who believes he or she is entitled to any Benefit (a “Claimant”) under this Plan may file a claim with the Administrator. The Administrator will review the claim itself or appoint another individual or entity to review the claim.

 

(i)           Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability. If the claim is for a benefit other than a disability benefit, the Claimant will be notified within ninety (90) days after the claim is filed whether the claim is allowed or denied, unless the Claimant receives written notice from the Administrator or appointee of the Administrator before the end of the ninety (90) day period stating that special circumstances require an extension of the time for decision, such extension not to extend beyond the day which is one hundred eighty (180) days after the day the claim is filed.

 

(ii)          Disability Benefit Claims. In the case of a benefits claim that requires a determination by the Plan Administrator of a Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will notify the Claimant of the Plan’s adverse benefit determination within a reasonable period of time, but not later than forty-five (45) days after receipt of the claim. If, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, the Plan Administrator needs additional time to process a claim, the Claimant will be notified, within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator receives the claim, of those circumstances and of when the Plan Administrator expects to make its decision but not beyond seventy-five (75) days. If, prior to the end of the extension period, due to matters beyond the control of the Plan, a decision cannot be rendered within that extension period, the period for making the determination may be extended for up to one hundred five (105) days, provided that the Plan Administrator notifies the Claimant of the circumstances requiring the extension and the date as of which the Plan expects to render a decision. The extension notice will specifically explain the standards on which entitlement to a disability benefit is based, the unresolved issues that prevent a decision on the claim and the additional information needed from the Claimant to resolve those issues, and the Claimant will be afforded at least forty-five (45) days within which to provide the specified information.

 

  Page 11 of 17

 

  

(ii) Manner and Content of Denial of Initial Claims. If the Plan Administrator denies a claim, it must provide to the Claimant, in writing or by electronic communication:

 

(A)         The specific reasons for the denial;

 

(B)         A reference to the Plan provision or insurance contract provision upon which the denial is based;

 

(C)         A description of any additional information or material that the Claimant must provide in order to perfect the claim;

 

(D)         An explanation of why such additional material or information is necessary;

 

(E)         Notice that the Claimant has a right to request a review of the claim denial and information on the steps to be taken if the Claimant wishes to request a review of the claim denial; and

 

(F)         A statement of the participant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) following a denial on review of the initial denial.

 

In addition, in the case of a denial of disability benefits on the basis of the Plan Administrator’s independent determination of the Participant’s disability status, the Plan Administrator will provide a copy of any rule, guideline, protocol, or other similar criterion relied upon in making the adverse determination (or a statement that the same will be provided upon request by the Claimant and without charge).

 

(b)           Review Procedures.

 

(i)           Benefit Claims that do not Require a Determination of Disability. Except for claims requiring an independent determination of a Participant’s disability status, a request for review of a denied claim must be made in writing to the Plan Administrator within sixty (60) days after receiving notice of denial. The decision upon review will be made within sixty (60) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which ease a decision will be rendered not later than one hundred twenty (120) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial sixty (60) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

The reviewer will afford the Claimant an opportunity to review and receive, without charge, all relevant documents, information and records and to submit issues and comments in writing to the Plan Administrator. The reviewer will take into account all comments, documents, records and other information submitted by the Claimant relating to the claim regardless of whether the information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

(ii)          Disability Benefit Claims. In addition to having the right to review documents and submit comments as described in (i) above, a Claimant whose claim for disability benefits requires an independent determination by the Plan Administrator of the Participant’s disability status has at least one hundred eighty (180) days following receipt of a notification of an adverse benefit determination within which to request a review of the initial determination. In such cases, the review will meet the following requirements:

 

  Page 12 of 17

 

  

(A)         The Plan will provide a review that does not afford deference to the initial adverse benefit determination and that is conducted by an appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan who did not make the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal, nor is a subordinate of the individual who made the determination.

 

(B)         The appropriate named fiduciary of the Plan will consult with a health care professional who has appropriate training and experience in the field of medicine involved in the medical judgment before making a decision on review of any adverse initial determination based in whole or in part on a medical judgment. The professional engaged for purposes of a consultation in the preceding sentence will not be an individual who was consulted in connection with the initial determination that is the subject of the appeal or the subordinate of any such individual.

 

(C)         The Plan will identify to the Claimant the medical or vocational experts whose advice was obtained on behalf of the Plan in connection with the review, without regard to whether the advice was relied upon in making the benefit review determination.

 

(D)         The decision on review will be made within forty-five (45) days after the Plan Administrator’s receipt of a request for review, unless special circumstances require an extension of time for processing, in which case a decision will be rendered not later than ninety (90) days after receipt of a request for review. A notice of such an extension must be provided to the Claimant within the initial forty-five (45) day period and must explain the special circumstances and provide an expected date of decision.

 

(iii)         Manner and Content of Notice of Decision on Review. Upon completion of its review of an adverse initial claim determination, the Plan Administrator will give the Claimant, in writing or by electronic notification, a notice containing:

 

(A)         its decision;

 

(B)         the specific reasons for the decision;

 

(C)         the relevant Plan provisions or insurance contract provisions on which its decision is based;

 

(D)         a statement that the Claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and without charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information in the Plan’s files which is relevant to the Claimant’s claim for benefits;

 

(E)         a statement describing the Claimant’s right to bring an action for judicial review under ERISA section 502(a); and

 

(F)         if an internal rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion was relied upon in making the adverse determination on review, a statement that a copy of the rule, guideline, protocol or other similar criterion will be provided without charge to the Claimant upon request.

 

(c)           Calculation of Time Periods. For purposes of the time periods specified in this Section, the period of time during which a benefit determination is required to be made begins at the time a claim is filed in accordance with the Plan procedures without regard to whether all the information necessary to make a decision accompanies the claim. If a period of time is extended due to a Claimant’s failure to submit all information necessary, the period for making the determination shall be tolled from the date the notification is sent to the Claimant until the date the Claimant responds.

 

  Page 13 of 17

 

  

(d)           Failure of Plan to Follow Procedures. If the Plan fails to follow the claims procedures required by this Section 7.1, a Claimant shall be deemed to have exhausted the administrative remedies available under the Plan and shall be entitled to pursue any available remedy under ERISA section 502(a) on the basis that the Plan has failed to provide a reasonable claims procedure that would yield a decision on the merits of the claim.

 

(e)           Failure of Claimant to Follow Procedures. A Claimant’s compliance with the foregoing provisions of this Section 7.1 is a mandatory prerequisite to the Claimant’s right to commence any legal action with respect to any claim for benefits under the Plan.

 

7.2           Arbitration of Claims. All claims or controversies arising out of or in connection with this Plan shall, subject to the initial review provided for in the foregoing provisions of this Article, be resolved through arbitration. Except as otherwise mutually agreed to by the parties, any arbitration shall be administered under and by the Judicial Arbitration & Mediation Services, Inc. (“JAMS”), in accordance with the JAMS procedures then in effect. The arbitration shall be held in the JAMS office nearest to where the Claimant is or was last employed by the Plan Sponsor or at a mutually agreeable location.

 

ARTICLE 8

AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

 

8.1           Amendment. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to amend this Plan at any time to comply with Section 409A and other Applicable Guidance or for any other purpose, provided that such amendment will not cause the Plan to violate the provisions of Section 409A. Except to the extent necessary to bring this Plan into compliance with Section 409A, no amendment or modification shall be effective to decrease the value or vested percentage of a Participant’s Accrued Benefit in existence at the time an amendment or modification is made to the Plan.

 

8.2           Plan Termination. The Plan Sponsor reserves the right to terminate this Plan in accordance with one of the following, subject to the restrictions imposed by Section 409A and authoritative guidance:

 

(a)          Corporate Dissolution or Bankruptcy. This Plan may be terminated within Twelve (12) months of a corporate dissolution taxed under Code § 331, or with the approval of a Plan Sponsor bankruptcy court pursuant to 11 U.S.C. Section 503(b)(1)(A), and distributions may then be made to the Participant provided that the amounts payable under this Plan are included in the Participants’ gross income in the latest of:

 

(i)           The calendar year in which the Plan termination occurs;

 

(ii)          The calendar year in which the amount is no longer subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture; or

 

(iii)         The first calendar year in which the payment is administratively practicable.

 

(b)          Change in Control. This Plan may be terminated within the thirty (30) days preceding or the Twelve (12) months following a Change in Control. This Plan will then be treated as terminated only if all substantially similar arrangements sponsored by the Plan Sponsor are terminated so that all participants in all similar arrangements are required to receive all amounts of compensation deferred under the terminated arrangements within Twelve (12) months of the date of termination of the arrangements.

 

  Page 14 of 17

 

  

(c)          Discretionary Termination. The Plan Sponsor may also terminate this Plan and make distributions provided that:

 

(i)           All plans sponsored by the Plan Sponsor that would be aggregated with any terminated arrangements under Treasury Regulations §1.409A-1(c) are terminated;

 

(ii)          No payments, other than payments that would be payable under the terms of this plan if the termination had not occurred, are made within Twelve (12) months of this plan termination;

 

(iii)         All payments are made within twenty-four (24) months of this plan termination; and

 

(iv)         Neither the Plan Sponsor nor any of its affiliates adopts a new plan that would be aggregated with any terminated plan if the same Participant participated in both arrangements at any time within three (3) years following the date of termination of this Plan.

 

(v)          The termination does not occur proximate to a downturn in the financial health of the Plan Sponsor.

 

ARTICLE 9

THE TRUST

 

9.1           Establishment of Trust. The Plan Sponsor may establish a grantor trust (the “Trust”), of which the Plan Sponsor is the grantor, within the meaning of subpart E, part I, subchapter J, subtitle A of the Code, to pay benefits under this Plan. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, all benefits payable under this Plan to a Participant shall be paid directly by the Plan Sponsor from the Trust. To the extent such benefits are not paid from the Trust, the benefits shall be paid from the general assets of the Plan Sponsor. The Trust, (if any), shall be a grantor trust which conforms to the terms of the model trust as described in IRS Revenue Procedure 92-64, I.R.B. 1992-33, as same may be amended or modified from time to time. If the Plan Sponsor establishes a Trust, the assets of the Trust will be subject to the claims of the Plan Sponsor’s creditors in the event of its insolvency. Except as may otherwise be provided under the Trust, the Plan Sponsor shall not be obligated to set aside, earmark, or escrow any funds or other assets to satisfy its obligations under this Plan, and the Participant and/or his or her designated Beneficiaries shall not have any property interest in any specific assets of the Plan Sponsor other than the unsecured right to receive payments from the Plan Sponsor, as provided in this Plan.

 

9.2           Interrelationship of the Plan and the Trust. The provisions of this Plan shall govern the rights of a Participant to receive distributions pursuant to this Plan. The provisions of the Trust (if established) shall govern the rights of the Participant and the creditors of the Plan Sponsor to the assets transferred to the Trust. The Plan Sponsor and each Participant shall at all times remain liable to carry out its obligations under this Plan. The Plan Sponsor’s obligations under this Plan may be satisfied with Trust assets distributed pursuant to the terms of the Trust.

 

9.3           Contribution to the Trust. Amounts may be contributed by the Plan Sponsor to the Trust at the sole discretion of the Plan Sponsor.

 

  Page 15 of 17

 

 

ARTICLE 10

MISCELLANEOUS

 

10.1         Validity. In case any provision of this Plan shall be illegal or invalid for any reason, said illegality or invalidity shall not affect the remaining parts hereof, but this Plan shall be construed and enforced as if such illegal or invalid provision had never been inserted herein; except to the extent that Section 409A requires that this Section 10.1 be disregarded because it purports to nullify Plan terms that are not in compliance with Section 409A.

 

10.2         Nonassignability. Neither any Participant nor any other person shall have any right to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage, or otherwise encumber, transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amounts, if any, payable hereunder, or any part hereof, which are, and all rights to which are expressly declared to be, unassignable and non-transferable. No part of the amounts payable shall, prior to actual payment, be subject to seizure, attachment, garnishment (except to the extent the Plan Sponsor may be required to garnish amounts from payments due under this Plan pursuant to applicable law), or sequestration for the payment of any debts, judgments, alimony, or separate maintenance owed by a Participant or any other person, be transferable by operation of law in the event of a Participant’s or any other person’s bankruptcy or insolvency, or be transferable to a spouse as a result of a property settlement or otherwise. If any Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest is adjudicated bankrupt or purports to commute, sell, assign, transfer, pledge, anticipate, mortgage or otherwise encumber transfer, hypothecate, alienate, or convey in advance of actual receipt, the amount, if any, payable hereunder, or any part thereof, the Plan Administrator, in its discretion, may cancel such distribution or payment (or any part thereof) to or for the benefit of such Participant, Beneficiary, or successor in interest in such manner as the Plan Administrator shall direct.

 

10.3         Not a Contract of Employment. The terms and conditions of this Plan shall not be deemed to constitute a contract of employment between the Plan Sponsor and the Participant. Nothing in this Plan shall be deemed to give a Participant the right to be retained in the service of the Plan Sponsor as an employee or otherwise or to interfere with the right of the Plan Sponsor to discipline or discharge the Participant at any time.

 

10.4         Unclaimed Benefits. In the case that the Plan Administrator is unable to locate the Participant or Beneficiary to whom a benefit is payable, such Plan benefit shall be forfeited to the Plan Sponsor upon the Plan Administrator’s determination. Notwithstanding the foregoing, payment may be made to a Participant, and that payment will be treated as made upon the date specified under the Plan, if the Participant provides notice to the Plan Sponsor within ninety (90) days of the latest date upon which the payment could have been timely made in accordance with the terms of the Plan and Section 409A, and if not paid, if the Participant takes further enforcement measures within one-hundred eighty (180) days after such latest date.

 

10.5         Governing Law. Subject to ERISA, the provisions of this Plan shall be construed and interpreted according to the internal laws of the State of Maryland without regard to its conflicts of laws principles.

 

10.6         Notice. Any notice, consent or demand required or permitted to be given under the provisions of this Plan shall be in writing and shall be signed by the party giving or making the same. If such notice, consent, or demand is mailed, it shall be sent by United States certified mail, postage prepaid, addressed to the addressee’s last known address as shown on the records of the Plan Sponsor. The date of such mailing shall be deemed the date of notice consent or demand. Any person may change the address to which notice is to be sent by giving notice of the change of address in the manner aforesaid.

 

10.7         Coordination with Other Benefits. The benefits provided for a Participant and Participant’s Beneficiary under this Plan are in addition to any other benefits available to such Participant under any other plan or program for employees of the Plan Sponsor. This Plan shall supplement and shall not supersede, modify, or amend any other such plan or program except as may otherwise be expressly provided herein.

 

  Page 16 of 17

 

  

10.8         Compliance. A Participant shall have no right to receive payment with respect to the Participant’s Accrued Benefit until all legal and contractual obligations of the Plan Sponsor relating to establishment of the Plan and the making of such payments shall have been complied with in full.

 

10.9         Compliance with Section 409A and Authoritative Guidance. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, all provisions of this Plan, including but not limited to the definitions of terms, elections to defer, and distributions, shall be made in accordance with and shall comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. The Plan Sponsor will amend the terms of this Plan retroactively, if necessary, to the extent required to comply with Section 409A and any authoritative guidance. No election made by a Participant hereunder, and no change made by a Participant to a previous election, shall be accepted by the Plan Sponsor if the Plan Sponsor determines that acceptance of such election or change could violate any of the requirements of Section 409A or the authoritative guidance. This Plan and any accompanying forms shall be interpreted in accordance with, and incorporate the terms and conditions required by, Section 409A and the authoritative guidance, including, without limitation, any such Treasury Regulations or other guidance that may be issued after the date hereof.

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Plan Sponsor has signed this Plan document as of the Effective Date.

 

WITNESS:   FOR THE PLAN SPONSOR:
     
/s/ Laura Hewitt   /s/ William J. Pasenelli 
(third party witness)   (Signature of Bank officer other than Participant)
     
Laura Hewitt   William J. Pasenelli
(print name)   (print name)
     
DATE :   PARTICIPANT :
     
March 6, 2011    /s/ Michael Middleton
    Michael Middleton

 

  Page 17 of 17

 

 

Exhibit 10.43

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

SUPPLEMENTAL LIFE INSURANCE AGREEMENT

 

THIS SUPPLEMENTAL LIFE INSURANCE AGREEMENT is adopted this 12 day of January, 2004, by and between COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY, a Corporation located in WALDORF, MARYLAND (the “Company”), and MICHAEL L. MIDDLETON (the “Executive”).

 

The purpose of this Agreement is to retain and reward the Executive, by dividing the death proceeds of certain life insurance policies which are owned by the Company on the life of the Executive with the designated beneficiary of the Executive. The Company will pay the life insurance premiums from its general assets.

 

ARTICLE 1

DEFINITIONS

 

Whenever used in this Agreement, the following terms shall have the meanings specified:

 

1.1 Beneficiary ” means each designated person, or the estate of the deceased Executive, entitled to benefits, if any, upon the death of the Executive.

 

1.2 Beneficiary Designation Form ” means the form established from time to time by the Plan Administrator that the Executive completes, signs and returns to the Plan Administrator to designate one or more Beneficiaries.

 

1.3 Board ” means the Board of Directors of the Company as from time to time constituted.

 

1.4 Change in Control ” means any one of the following events: (i) the acquisition of ownership, holding or power to vote more than 25% of the voting stock of the Company or the Corporation; (ii) the acquisition of the ability to control the election of a majority of the Company’s or the Corporation’s directors; (iii) the acquisition of a controlling influence over the management or policies of the Company or the Corporation by an y person or by persons acting as a “group” ( within the meaning of Section 1 3(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934); or (iv) during any period of two consecutive years, individuals (the “Continuing Directors”) who at the beginning of such period constitute the Board of Directors of the Company or the Corporation (the “Existing Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least two-thirds thereof, provided that any individual whose election or nomination for election as a member of the Existing Board was approved by a vote of at least two-thirds of the Continuing Directors then in office shall be considered a Continuing Director. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Corporation’s ownership of the Company shall not of itself constitute a Change in Control for purposes of the Agreement. For purposes of this paragraph only, the term “person” refers to an individual or a corporation, partnership, trust, association, joint venture, pool, syndicate, sole proprietorship, unincorporated organization or any other form of entity not specifically listed herein.

 

1  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement 

  

1.5 Company’s Interest ” means the benefit set forth in Section 3.2.

 

1.6 Corporation ” means the Tri-County Financial Corporation.

 

1.7 Disability ” means a physical or mental infirmity which impairs the Executive’s ability to substantially perform the Executive’s duties under the Employment Agreement with the Company and which results in the Executive becoming eligible for long-term disability benefits under the Company’s long-tear’ disability plan (or if the Company has no such plan in effect, which impairs the Executive’s ability to substantially perform his duties under his Employment Agreement for a period of 180 consecutive days).

 

1.8 Employment Agreement ” means the Restated Employment Agreement between the Company and the Executive dated February 23, 1998, as the same may be amended from time to time.

 

1.9 Executive’s Interest ” means the benefit set forth in Section 3.1.

 

1.10 Insured ” means the Executive.

 

1.11 Insurer ” means the insurance company issuing the life insurance policy on the life of the Insured.

 

1.12 Net Death Proceeds ” means the total death proceeds of the Policy minus the cash surrender value.

 

1.13 Normal Retirement Age ” means the Executive attaining age 62.

 

1.14 Policy ” means the individual insurance policy or policies adopted by the Company for purposes of insuring the Executive’s life under this Agreement.

 

1.15 Termination of Employment ” means the termination of Executive’s service for any reason, voluntarily or involuntarily, other than a leave of absence approved by the Company.

 

1.16 Termination for Cause ” means that the Executive’s employment with the Company has been or is terminated by the Board because of the Executive’s personal dishonesty, incompetence, willful misconduct, breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform stated duties, willful violation of any law, rule or regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist order, or material breach of any provision of this Agreement. No act, or failure to act, on the Executive’s part shall be considered “willful” unless the Executive has acted, or failed to act, with an absence of good faith and without a reasonable belief that the Executive’ s action or failure to act was in the best interest of the Company.

 

2  

 

  

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement 

 

ARTICLE 2

PARTICIPATION

 

2.1 Termination of Participation . The Executive’s rights under this Agreement shall automatically cease and his or her participation in this Agreement shall automatically terminate, if either of the following events occur: (i) if there is a Termination for Cause; or (ii) if the Executive’s employment with the Company is terminated prior to Normal Retirement Age for reasons other than (1) Disability (except as set forth in Section 2.2(b)), (2) Change in Control, or (3) a leave of absence approved by the Company. In the event that the Company decides to maintain the Policy after the Executive’s termination of participation in the Agreement, the Company shall be the direct beneficiary of the entire death proceeds of the Policy.

 

2.2 Disability and Change in Control .

 

(a) Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (b) of this Section 2.2, if the Executive’s employment with the Company is terminated because of the Executive’s (1) Disability or (2) within twenty-four (24) months following a Change in Control, the Company shall maintain the Policy in full force and effect and, in no event, shall the Company amend, terminate or otherwise abrogate the Executive’s Interest in the Policy. However, the Company may replace the Policy with a policy that provides comparable death benefits provided under this Agreement.

 

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (a) of this Section 2.2, upon the disabled Executive’s gainful employment with an entity other than the Company, the Company shall have no further obligation to the disabled Executive, and the disabled Executive’s rights pursuant to the Agreement shall cease. In the event the disabled Executive’s rights are terminated hereunder and the Company decides to maintain the Policy, the Company shall be the direct beneficiary of the entire death proceeds of the Policy.

 

2.3 Retirement . If the Executive remains in the continuous employ of the Company, upon Termination of Employment on or after the Executive’s Normal Retirement Age, the Company shall maintain the Policy in full force and effect and in no event shall the Company amend, terminate or otherwise abrogate the Executive’s Interest in the Policy. However, the Company may replace the Policy with a policy that provides comparable death benefits to cover the benefit under this Agreement.

 

3  

 

  

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement 

 

ARTICLE 3

POLICY OWNERSHIP/INTERESTS

 

3.1 Executive’s Interest . The Executive, or the Executive’s assignee, shall have the right to designate the Beneficiary of an amount of death proceeds equal to $1,000,000, not to exceed the greater of (i) Net Death Proceeds or (ii) premiums paid by the Company, subject to:

 

(a) Forfeiture of Executive’s rights upon termination of Participation as set forth in Section 2.1;
(b) Forfeiture of Executive’s rights upon gainful employment following Disability.
(c) Termination of the Agreement and the corresponding forfeiture of rights for all Executives or any one Executive in accordance with Section 9.1 hereof; and
(d) Forfeiture of the Executive’s rights and interest hereunder that the Company may reasonably consider necessary to conform with applicable law (including the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002).

 

3.2 Company’s Interest . The Company shall own the Policy and shall have the right to exercise all incidents of ownership except that the Company shall not sell, surrender or transfer ownership of a Policy so long as the Executive has an interest in the Policy as described in Section 3.1. However, the Company may replace the Policy with a policy that provides comparable death benefits to cover the benefit provided under this Agreement. This provision shall not impair the right of the Company, subject to Article 9, to terminate this Agreement. The Company shall be the beneficiary of the remaining death proceeds of the Policy after the Executive’s Interest is determined according to Section 3.1.

 

ARTICLE 4

PREMIUMS

 

4.1 Premium Payment . The Company shall pay all premiums due on all Policies.

 

4.2 Economic Benefit . The Company shall determine the economic benefit attributable to the Executive based on the amount of the current term rate for the Executive’s age multiplied by the aggregate death benefit payable to the Executive’s Beneficiary. The “current term rate” is the minimum amount required to be imputed under Internal Revenue Notice 2002-8, or any subsequent applicable authority.

 

4.3 Imputed Income . The Company shall impute the economic benefit to the Executive on an annual basis, by adding the economic benefit to the Executive’s W-2, or if applicable, Form 1099.

 

4  

 

  

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement 

 

ARTICLE 5

BENEFICIARIES

 

5.1 Beneficiary . The Executive shall have the right, at any time, to designate a Beneficiary(ies) to receive any benefits payable under the Agreement to a beneficiary upon the death of the Executive. The Beneficiary designated under this Agreement may be the same as or different from the Beneficiary designation under any other Agreement of the Company in which the Executive participates.

 

5.2 Beneficiary Designation; Change . The Executive shall designate a Beneficiary by completing and signing the Beneficiary Designation Form, and delivering it to the Company or its designated agent. The Executive’s beneficiary designation shall be deemed automatically revoked if the Beneficiary predeceases the Executive or if the Executive names a spouse as Beneficiary and the marriage is subsequently dissolved. The Executive shall have the right to change a Beneficiary by completing, signing and otherwise complying with the terms of the Beneficiary Designation Form and the Company’s rules and procedures, as in effect from time to time. Upon the acceptance by the Company of a new Beneficiary Designation Form, all Beneficiary designations previously filed shall be cancelled. The Company shall be entitled to rely on the last Beneficiary Designation Form filed by the Executive and accepted by the Company prior to the Executive’s death.

 

5.3 Acknowledgment . No designation or change in designation of a Beneficiary shall be effective until received, accepted and acknowledged in writing by the Company or its designated agent.

 

5.4 No Beneficiary Designation . If the Executive dies without a valid designation of beneficiary, or if all designated Beneficiaries predecease the Executive, then the Executive’s surviving spouse shall be the designated Beneficiary. If the Executive has no surviving spouse, the benefits shall be made payable to the personal representative of the Executive’s estate.

 

5.5 Facility of Payment . If the Company determines in its discretion that a benefit is to be paid to a minor, to a person declared incompetent, or to a person incapable of handling the disposition of that person’s property, the Company may direct payment of such benefit to the guardian, legal representative or person having the care or custody of such minor, incompetent person or incapable person. The Company may require proof of incompetence, minority or guardianship as it may deem appropriate prior to distribution of the benefit. Any payment of a benefit shall be a payment for the account of the Executive and the Executive’s Beneficiary, as the case may be, and shall be a complete discharge of any liability under the Agreement for such payment amount.

 

ARTICLE 6

ASSIGNMENT

 

The Executive may irrevocably assign without consideration all or part of the Executive’s Interest in this Agreement to any person, entity or trust. In the event the Executive shall transfer all or part of the Executive’s Interest, then all or part of the Executive’s Interest in this Agreement shall be vested in the Executive’s transferee, who shall be substituted as a party hereunder, and the Executive shall have no further interest in this Agreement.

 

5  

 

  

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement 

  

ARTICLE 7

INSURER

 

The Insurer shall be bound only by the terms of its given Policy. The Insurer shall not be bound by or deemed to have notice of the provisions of this Agreement. The Insurer shall have the right to rely on the Company’s representations with regard to any definitions, interpretations or Policy interests as specified under this Agreement.

 

ARTICLE 8

CLAIMS AND REVIEW PROCEDURE

 

8.1 Claims Procedure . The Executive or Beneficiary (“claimant”) who has not received benefits under the Agreement that he or she believes should be paid shall make a claim for such benefits as follows:

 

8.1.1 Initiation  – Written Claim . The claimant initiates a claim by submitting to the Company a written claim for the benefits.

 

8.1.2 Timing of Company Response . The Company shall respond to such claimant within 90 days after receiving the claim. If the Company determines that special circumstances require additional time for processing the claim, the Company can extend the response period by an additional 90 days by notifying the claimant in writing, prior to the end of the initial 90-day period, that an additional period is required. The notice of extension must set forth the special circumstances and the date by which the Company expects to render its decision.

 

8.1.3 Notice of Decision . If the Company denies part or all of the claim, the Company shall notify the claimant in writing of such denial. The Company shall write the notification in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant. The notification shall set forth:

 

(a) The specific reasons for the denial;
(b) A reference to the specific provisions of the Agreement on which the denial is based;
(c) A description of any additional information or material necessary for the claimant to perfect the claim and an explanation of why it is needed;
(d) An explanation of the Agreement’s review procedures and the time limits applicable to such procedures; and
(e) A statement of the claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA Section 502(a) following an adverse benefit determination on review.

 

8.2 Review Procedure . If the Company denies part or all of the claim, the claimant shall have the opportunity for a full and fair review by the Company of the denial, as follows:

 

6  

 

  

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement 

  

8.2.1 Initiation – Written Request . To initiate the review, the claimant, within 60 days after receiving the Company’s notice of denial, must file with the Company a written request for review.

 

8.2.2 Additional Submissions – Information Access . The claimant shall then have the opportunity to submit written comments, documents, records and other information relating to the claim. The Company shall also provide the claimant, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information relevant (as defined in applicable ERISA regulations) to the claimant’s claim for benefits.

 

8.2.3 Considerations on Review . In considering the review, the Company s hall take into account all materials and information the claimant submits relating to the claim, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

8.2.4 Timing of Company’s Response . The Company shall respond in writing to such claimant within 60 days after receiving the request for review. If the Company determines that special circumstances require additional time for processing the claim, the Company can extend the response period by an additional 60 days by notifying the claimant in writing, prior to the end of the initial 60-day period, that an additional period is required. The notice of extension must set forth the special circumstances and the date by which the Company expects to render its decision.

 

8.2.5 Notice of Decision . The Company shall notify the claimant in writing of its decision on review. The Company shall write the notification in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant. The notification shall set forth:

 

(a) The specific reasons for the denial;
(b) A reference to the specific provisions of the Agreement on which the denial is based;
(c) A statement that the claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information relevant (as defined in applicable ERISA regulations) to the claimant’s claim for benefits; and
(d) A statement of the claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA Section 502(a).

 

7  

 

  

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement 

  

ARTICLE 9

AMENDMENTS AND TERMINATION

 

9.1 Amendment or Termination of Agreement . Except as otherwise provided in Sections 2.2 and 2.3, the Company may amend or terminate this Agreement at any time prior to the Executive’s death. Such amendment or termination shall be by written notice to the Executive. In the event that the Company decides to maintain the Policy after the termination of the Agreement, the Company shall be the direct beneficiary of the entire death proceeds of the Policy.

 

9.2 Option to Purchase Upon Termination . If the Company exercises the right to terminate the Agreement, the Company shall not sell, surrender or transfer ownership of a Policy without first giving the Executive or the Executive’s transferee the option to purchase the Policy for a period of sixty (60) days from written notice of such intention. The purchase price shall be an amount equal to the cash surrender value of the Policy.

 

ARTICLE 10

ADMINISTRATION

 

10.1 Company Duties . This Agreement shall be administered by the Company which shall consist of the Board, or such committee or persons as the Board may choose. The Company shall also have the discretion and authority to (i) make, amend, interpret and enforce all appropriate rules and regulations for the administration of this Agreement and (ii) decide or resolve any and all questions including interpretations of this Agreement, as may arise in connection with this Agreement.

 

10.2 Agents . In the administration of this Agreement, the Company may employ agents and delegate to them such administrative duties as it sees fit, (including acting through a duly appointed representative), and may from time to time consult with counsel who may be counsel to the Company.

 

10.3 Binding Effect of Decisions . The decision or action of the Company with respect to any question arising out of or in connection with the administration, interpretation and application of this Agreement and the rules and regulations promulgated hereunder shall be final and conclusive and binding upon all persons having any interest in this Agreement.

 

10.4 Indemnity of Company . The Company shall indemnify and hold harmless the members of the Company against any and all claims, losses, damages, expenses or liabilities arising from any action or failure to act with respect to this Agreement, except in the case of willful misconduct by the Company or any of its members.

 

ARTICLE 11

MISCELLANEOUS

 

11.1 Binding Effect . This Agreement shall bind the Executive and the Company, their beneficiaries, survivors, executors, administrators and transferees and any Beneficiary.

 

11.2 No Guarantee of Employment . This Agreement is not an employment policy or contract. It does not give the Executive the right to remain an Executive of the Company, nor does it interfere with the Company’s right to discharge the Executive. It also does not require the Executive to remain an Executive nor interfere with the Executive’s right to terminate employment at any time.

 

8  

 

  

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY

Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement 

  

11.3 Applicable Law . The Agreement and all rights hereunder shall be governed by and construed according to the laws of the State of MARYLAND, except to the extent preempted by the laws of the United States of America.

 

11.4 Reorganization . The Company shall not merge or consolidate into or with another company, or reorganize, or sell substantially all of its assets to another company, firm or person unless such succeeding or continuing company, firm or person agrees to assume and discharge the obligations of the Company under this Agreement. Upon the occurrence of such event, the term “Company” as used in this Agreement shall be deemed to refer to the successor or survivor company.

 

11.5 Notice . Any notice or filing required or permitted to be given to the Company under this Agreement shall be sufficient if in writing and hand-delivered, or sent by registered or certified mail, to the address below:

 

 
 
 
 

 

Such notice shall be deemed given as of the date of delivery or, if delivery is made by mail, as of the date shown on the postmark or the receipt for registration or certification.

 

Any notice or filing required or permitted to be given to the Executive under this Agreement shall be sufficient if in writing and hand-delivered, or sent by mail, to the last known address of the Executive.

 

11.6 Entire Agreement . This Agreement, along with the Executive’s Beneficiary Designation Form constitute the entire agreement between the Company and the Executive as to the subject matter hereof. No rights are granted to the Executive under this Agreement other than those specifically set forth herein.

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement as of the date indicated above.

 

EXECUTIVE:   COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
     
/s/ Michael L. Middleton   By /s/ William J. Pasenelli
MICHAEL L. MIDDLETON   Title Executive Vice President

 

9  

 

Exhibit 10.44

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
SUPPLEMENTAL LIFE INSURANCE AGREEMENT

 

THIS SUPPLEMENTAL LIFE INSURANCE AGREEMENT is adopted this 12 day of January, 2004, by and between COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY, Corporation located in WALDORF, MARYLAND (the “Company”), and WILLIAM J. PASENELLI (the “Executive”).

 

The purpose of this Agreement is to retain and reward the Executive, by dividing the death proceeds of certain life insurance policies which are owned by the Company on the life of the Executive with the designated beneficiary of the Executive. The Company will pay the life insurance premiums from its general assets.

 

ARTICLE 1
DEFINITIONS

 

Whenever used in this Agreement, the following terms shall have the meanings specified:

 

1.1 Beneficiary ” means each designated person, or the estate of the deceased Executive, entitled to benefits, if any, upon the death of the Executive.

 

1.2 Beneficiary Designation Form ” means the form established from time to time by the Plan Administrator that the Executive completes, signs and returns to the Plan Administrator to designate one or more Beneficiaries.

 

1.3 Board ” means the Board of Directors of the Company as from time to time constituted.

 

1.4 Change in Control ” means any one of the following events: (i) the acquisition of ownership, holding or power to vote more than 25% of the voting stock of the Company or the Corporation; (ii) the acquisition of the ability to control the election of a majority of the Company’s or the Corporation’s directors; (iii) the acquisition of a controlling influence over the management or policies of the Company or the Corporation by any person or by persons acting a s a“group” ( within the meaning of Section 1 3(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934); or (iv) during any period of two consecutive years, individuals (the “Continuing Directors”) who at the beginning of such period constitute the Board of Directors of the Company or the Corporation (the “Existing Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least two-thirds thereof, provided that any individual whose election or nomination for election as a member of the Existing Board was approved by a vote of at least two-thirds of the Continuing Directors then in office shall be considered a Continuing Director. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Corporation’s ownership of the Company shall not of itself constitute a Change in Control for purposes of the Agreement. For purposes of this paragraph only, the term “person” refers to an individual or a corporation, partnership, trust, association, joint venture, pool, syndicate, sole proprietorship, unincorporated organization or any other form of entity not specifically listed herein.

 

  1  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

1.5 Company’s Interest ” means the benefit set forth in Section 3.2.

 

1.6 Corporation ” means the Tri-County Financial Corporation.

 

1.7 Disability ” means a physical or mental infirmity which impairs the Executive’s ability to substantially perform the Executive’s duties under the Employment Agreement with the Company and which results in the Executive becoming eligible for long-term disability benefits under the Company’s long-term disability plan (or if the Company has no such plan in effect, which impairs the Executive’s ability to substantially perform his duties under his Employment Agreement for a period of 180 consecutive days).

 

1.8 Employment Agreement ” means the Employment Agreement between the Company and the Executive dated 02/01/2001 as the same may be amended from time to time.

 

1.9 Executive’s Interest ” means the benefit set forth in Section 3.1.

 

1.10 Insured ” means the Executive.

 

1.11 Insurer ” means the insurance company issuing the life insurance policy on the life of the Insured.

 

1.12 Net Death Proceeds ” means the total death proceeds of the Policy minus the cash surrender value.

 

1.13 Normal Retirement Age ” means the Executive attaining age 62.

 

1.14 Policy ” means the individual insurance policy or policies adopted by the Company for purposes of insuring the Executive’s life under this Agreement.

 

1.15 Termination of Employment ” means the termination of Executive’s service for any reason, voluntarily or involuntarily, other than a leave of absence approved by the Company.

 

1.16 Termination for Cause ” means that the Executive’s employment with the Company has been or is terminated by the Board because of the Executive’s personal dishonesty, incompetence, willful misconduct, breach of fiduciary duty involving personal profit, intentional failure to perform stated duties, willful violation of any law, rule or regulation (other than traffic violations or similar offenses) or final cease-and-desist order, or material breach of any provision of this Agreement. No act, or failure to act, on the Executive’s part shall be considered “willful” unless the Executive has acted, or failed to act, with an absence of good faith and without a reasonable belief that the Executive’ s action or failure to act was in the best interest of the Company.

 

  2  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

ARTICLE 2
PARTICIPATION

 

2.1 Termination of Participation . The Executive’s rights under this Agreement shall automatically cease and his or her participation in this Agreement shall automatically terminate, if either of the following events occur: (i) if there is a Termination for Cause; or (ii) if the Executive’s employment with the Company is terminated prior to Normal Retirement Age for reasons other than (1) Disability (except as set forth in Section 2.2(b)), (2) Change in Control, or (3) a leave of absence approved by the Company. In the event that the Company decides to maintain the Policy after the Executive’s termination of participation in the Agreement, the Company shall be the direct beneficiary of the entire death proceeds of the Policy.

 

2.2 Disability and Change in Control .

 

(a) Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (b) of this Section 2.2, if the Executive’s employment with the Company is terminated because of the Executive’s (1) Disability or (2) within twelve (12) months following a Change in Control, the Company shall maintain the Policy in full force and effect and, in no event, shall the Company amend, terminate or otherwise abrogate the Executive’s Interest in the Policy. However, the Company may replace the Policy with a policy that provides comparable death benefits provided under this Agreement.

 

(b) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (a) of this Section 2.2, upon the disabled Executive’s gainful employment with an entity other than the Company, the Company shall have no further obligation to the disabled Executive, and the disabled Executive’s rights pursuant to the Agreement shall cease. In the event the disabled Executive’s rights are terminated hereunder and the Company decides to maintain the Policy, the Company shall be the direct beneficiary of the entire death proceeds of the Policy.

 

2.3 Retirement . If the Executive remains in the continuous employ of the Company, upon Termination of Employment on or after the Executive’s Normal Retirement Age, the Company shall maintain the Policy in full force and effect and in no event shall the Company amend, terminate or otherwise abrogate the Executive’s Interest in the Policy. However, the Company may replace the Policy with a policy that provides comparable death benefits to cover the benefit under this Agreement.

 

  3  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

ARTICLE 3
POLICY OWNERSHIP/INTERESTS

 

3.1 Executive’s Interest . The Executive, or the Executive’s assignee, shall have the right to designate the Beneficiary of an amount of death proceeds equal to $500,000, not to exceed the greater of (i) Net Death Proceeds or (ii) premiums paid by the Company, subject to:

 

(a) Forfeiture of Executive’s rights upon termination of Participation as set forth in Section 2.1;
(b) Forfeiture of Executive’s rights upon gainful employment following Disability.
(c) Termination of the Agreement and the corresponding forfeiture of rights for all Executives or any one Executive in accordance with Section 9.1 hereof; and
(d) Forfeiture of the Executive’s rights and interest hereunder that the Company may reasonably consider necessary to conform with applicable law (including the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002).

 

3.2 Company’s Interest . The Company shall own the Policy and shall have the right to exercise all incidents of ownership except that the Company shall not sell, surrender or transfer ownership of a Policy so long as the Executive has an interest in the Policy as described in Section 3.1. However, the Company may replace the Policy with a policy that provides comparable death benefits to cover the benefit provided under this Agreement. This provision shall not impair the right of the Company, subject to Article 9, to terminate this Agreement. The Company shall be the beneficiary of the remaining death proceeds of the Policy after the Executive’s Interest is determined according to Section 3.1.

 

ARTICLE 4
PREMIUMS

 

4.1 Premium Payment . The Company shall pay all premiums due on all Policies.

 

4.2 Economic Benefit . The Company shall determine the economic benefit attributable to the Executive based on the amount of the current term rate for the Executive’s age multiplied by the aggregate death benefit payable to the Executive’s Beneficiary. The “current term rate” is the minimum amount required to be imputed under Internal Revenue Notice 2002-8, or any subsequent applicable authority.

 

4.3 Imputed Income . The Company shall impute the economic benefit to the Executive on an annual basis, by adding the economic benefit to the Executive’s W-2, or if applicable, Form 1099.

 

  4  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

ARTICLE 5
BENEFICIARIES

 

5.1 Beneficiary . The Executive shall have the right, at any time, to designate a Beneficiary(ies) to receive any benefits payable under the Agreement to a beneficiary upon the death of the Executive. The Beneficiary designated under this Agreement may be the same as or different from the Beneficiary designation under any other Agreement of the Company in which the Executive participates.

 

5.2 Beneficiary Designation; Change . The Executive shall designate a Beneficiary by completing and signing the Beneficiary Designation Form, and delivering it to the Company or its designated agent. The Executive’s beneficiary designation shall be deemed automatically revoked if the Beneficiary predeceases the Executive or if the Executive names a spouse as Beneficiary and the marriage is subsequently dissolved. The Executive shall have the right to change a Beneficiary by completing, signing and otherwise complying with the terms of the Beneficiary Designation Form and the Company’s rules and procedures, as in effect from time to time. Upon the acceptance by the Company of a new Beneficiary Designation Form, all Beneficiary designations previously filed shall be cancelled. The Company s hall be entitled to rely on the last Beneficiary Designation Form filed by the Executive and accepted by the Company prior to the Executive’s death.

 

5.3 Acknowledgment . No designation or change in designation of a Beneficiary shall be effective until received, accepted and acknowledged in writing by the Company or its designated agent.

 

5.4 No Beneficiary Designation . If the Executive dies without a valid designation of beneficiary, or if all designated Beneficiaries predecease the Executive, then the Executive’s surviving spouse shall be the designated Beneficiary. If the Executive has no surviving spouse, the benefits shall be made payable to the personal representative of the Executive’s estate.

 

5.5 Facility of Payment . If the Company determines in its discretion that a benefit is to be paid to a minor, to a person declared incompetent, or to a person incapable of handling the disposition of that person’s property, the Company may direct payment of such benefit to the guardian, legal representative or person having the care or custody of such minor, incompetent person or incapable person. The Company may require proof of incompetence, minority or guardianship as it may deem appropriate prior to distribution of the benefit. Any payment of a benefit shall be a payment for the account of the Executive and the Executive’s Beneficiary, as the case may be, and shall be a complete discharge of any liability under the Agreement for such payment amount.

 

  5  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

ARTICLE 6
ASSIGNMENT

 

The Executive may irrevocably assign without consideration all or part of the Executive’s Interest in this Agreement to any person, entity or trust. In the event the Executive shall transfer all or part of the Executive’s Interest, then all or part of the Executive’s Interest in this Agreement shall be vested in the Executive’s transferee, who shall be substituted as a party hereunder, and the Executive shall have no further interest in this Agreement.

 

ARTICLE 7
INSURER

 

The Insurer shall be bound only by the terms of its given Policy. The Insurer shall not be bound by or deemed to have notice of the provisions of this Agreement. The Insurer shall have the right to rely on the Company’s representations with regard to any definitions, interpretations or Policy interests as specified under this Agreement.

 

ARTICLE 8
CLAIMS AND REVIEW PROCEDURE

 

8.1 Claims Procedure . The Executive or Beneficiary (“claimant”) who has not received benefits under the Agreement that he or she believes should be paid shall make a claim for such benefits as follows:

 

8.1.1 Initiation * Written Claim . The claimant initiates a claim by submitting to the Company a written claim for the benefits.

 

8.1.2 Timing of Company Response . The Company shall respond to such claimant within 90 days after receiving the claim. If the Company determines that special circumstances require additional time for processing the claim, the Company can extend the response period by an additional 90 days by notifying the claimant in writing, prior to the end of the initial 90-day period, that an additional period is required. The notice of extension must set forth the special circumstances and the date by which the Company expects to render its decision.

 

8.1.3 Notice of Decision . If the Company denies part or all of the claim, the Company shall notify the claimant in writing of such denial. The Company shall write the notification in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant. The notification shall set forth:

 

(a) The specific reasons for the denial;
(b) A reference to the specific provisions of the Agreement on which the denial is based;
(c) A description of any additional information or material necessary for the claimant to perfect the claim and an explanation of why it is needed;

 

  6  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

(d) An explanation of the Agreement’s review procedures and the time limits applicable to such procedures; and
(e) A statement of the claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA Section 502(a) following an adverse benefit determination on review.

 

8.2 Review Procedure . If the Company denies part or all of the claim, the claimant shall have the opportunity for a full and fair review by the Company of the denial, as follows:

 

8.2.1 Initiation — Written Request . To initiate the review, the claimant, within 60 days after receiving the Company’s notice of denial, must file with the Company a written request for review.

 

8.2.2 Additional Submissions — Information Access . The claimant shall then have the opportunity to submit written comments, documents, records and other information relating to the claim. The Company shall also provide the claimant, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information relevant (as defined in applicable ERISA regulations) to the claimant’s claim for benefits.

 

8.2.3 Considerations on Review . In considering the review, the Company shall take into account all materials and information the claimant submits relating to the claim, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination.

 

8.2.4 Timing of Company’s Response . The Company shall respond in writing to such claimant within 60 days after receiving the request for review. If the Company determines that special circumstances require additional time for processing the claim, the Company can extend the response period by an additional 60 days by notifying the claimant in writing, prior to the end of the initial 60-day period, that an additional period is required. The notice of extension must set forth the special circumstances and the date by which the Company expects to render its decision.

 

8.2.5 Notice of Decision . The Company shall notify the claimant in writing of its decision on review. The Company shall write the notification in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant. The notification shall set forth:

 

(a) The specific reasons for the denial;
(b) A reference to the specific provisions of the Agreement on which the denial is based;
(c) A statement that the claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records and other information relevant (as defined in applicable ERISA regulations) to the claimant’s claim for benefits; and
(d) A statement of the claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA Section 502(a).

 

  7  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

ARTICLE 9
AMENDMENTS AND TERMINATION

 

9.1 Amendment or Termination of Agreement . Except as otherwise provided in Sections 2.2 and 2.3, the Company may amend or terminate this Agreement at any time prior to the Executive’s death. Such amendment or termination shall be by written notice to the Executive. In the event that the Company decides to maintain the Policy after the termination of the Agreement, the Company shall be the direct beneficiary of the entire death proceeds of the Policy.

 

9.2 Option to Purchase Upon Termination . If the Company exercises the right to terminate the Agreement, the Company shall not sell, surrender or transfer ownership of a Policy without first giving the Executive or the Executive’s transferee the option to purchase the Policy for a period of sixty (60) days from written notice of such intention. The purchase price shall be an amount equal to the cash surrender value of the Policy.

 

ARTICLE 10
ADMINISTRATION

 

10.1 Company Duties . This Agreement shall be administered by the Company which shall consist of the Board, or such committee or persons as the Board may choose. The Company shall also have the discretion and authority to (i) make, amend, interpret and enforce all appropriate rules and regulations for the administration of this Agreement and (ii) decide or resolve any and all questions including interpretations of this Agreement, as may arise in connection with this Agreement.

 

10.2 Agents . In the administration of this Agreement, the Company may employ agents and delegate to them such administrative duties as it sees fit, (including acting through a duly appointed representative), and may from time to time consult with counsel who may be counsel to the Company.

 

10.3 Binding Effect of Decisions . The decision or action of the Company with respect to any question arising out of or in connection with the administration, interpretation and application of this Agreement and the rules and regulations promulgated hereunder shall be final and conclusive and binding upon all persons having any interest in this Agreement.

 

10.4 Indemnity of Company . The Company shall indemnify and hold harmless the members of the Company against any and all claims, losses, damages, expenses or liabilities arising from any action or failure to act with respect to this Agreement, except in the case of willful misconduct by the Company or any of its members.

 

  8  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

ARTICLE 11
MISCELLANEOUS

 

11.1 Binding Effect . This Agreement shall bind the Executive and the Company, their beneficiaries, survivors, executors, administrators and transferees and any Beneficiary.

 

11.2 No Guarantee of Employment . This Agreement is not an employment policy or contract. It does not give the Executive the right to remain an Executive of the Company, nor does it interfere with the Company’s right to discharge the Executive. It also does not require the Executive to remain an Executive nor interfere with the Executive’s right to terminate employment at any time.

 

11.3 Applicable Law . The Agreement and all rights hereunder shall be governed by and construed according to the laws of the State of MARYLAND, except to the extent preempted by the laws of the United States of America.

 

11.4 Reorganization . The Company shall not merge or consolidate into or with another company, or reorganize, or sell substantially all of its assets to another company, firm or person unless such succeeding or continuing company, firm or person agrees to assume and discharge the obligations of the Company under this Agreement. Upon the occurrence of such event, the term “Company” as used in this Agreement shall be deemed to refer to the successor or survivor company.

 

11.5 Notice. Any notice or filing required or permitted to be given to the Company under this Agreement shall be sufficient if in writing and hand-delivered, or sent by registered or certified mail, to the address below:

 

 
 
 
 

 

Such notice shall be deemed given as of the date of delivery or, if delivery is made by mail, as of the date shown on the postmark or the receipt for registration or certification.

 

Any notice or filing required or permitted to be given to the Executive under this Agreement shall be sufficient if in writing and hand-delivered, or sent by mail, to the last known address of the Executive.

 

11.6 Entire Agreement . This Agreement, along with the Executive’s Beneficiary Designation Form constitute the entire agreement between the Company and the Executive as to the subject matter hereof. No rights are granted to the Executive under this Agreement other than those specifically set forth herein.

 

  9  

 

 

COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
Supplemental Life Insurance Agreement

 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement as of the date indicated above.

 

EXECUTIVE:   COMMUNITY BANK OF TRI-COUNTY
       
/s/ William J. Pasenelli   By /s/ Michael L. Middleton 
WILLIAM J. PASENELLI      
    Title President

 

  10  

 

Exhibit 10.45

 

LIFE INSURANCE

 

ENDORSEMENT METHOD SPLIT DOLLAR

 

PLAN AGREEMENT

 

Insurers: NYL; GWL; Ohio Nat’l; John Hancock; Midland Nat’l
   
Policy Number(s) 77253553; 85270632; C 6952609; EL 09727320; 695015
   
Bank: Community Bank of Tri County
   
Insured: William Pasenelli
   
Relationship of Insured to Bank: Executive

 

The respective rights and duties of the Bank and the Insured in the above referenced policy shall be pursuant to the terms set forth below:

 

I. DEFINITIONS

 

Refer to the policy contract for the definition of all terms in this Agreement other than the following:

 

“Normal Retirement” shall be defined to mean the Insured remains employed by the Bank until at least age 65.

 

II. POLICY TITLE AND OWNERSHIP

 

Title and ownership shall reside in the Bank for its use and for the use of the Insured all in accordance with this Agreement. The Bank alone may, to the extent of its interest, exercise the right to borrow or withdraw on the policy cash values. Where the Bank and the Insured (or assignee, with the consent of the Insured) mutually agree to exercise the right to increase the coverage under the subject Split Dollar policy, then, in such event, the rights, duties and benefits of the parties to such increased coverage shall continue to be subject to the terms of this Agreement.

 

    1

 

 

III.       BENEFICIARY DESIGNATION RIGHTS

 

The Insured (or assignee) shall have the right and power to designate a beneficiary or beneficiaries to receive the Insured’s share of the proceeds payable upon the death of the Insured, and to elect and change a payment option for such beneficiary, subject to any right or interest the Bank may have in such proceeds, as provided in the Agreement.

 

IV.        PREMIUM PAYMENT METHOD

 

The Bank shall pay an amount equal to the planned premiums and any other premium payments that might become necessary to keep the policy in force.

 

V.         TAX TREATMENT

 

It is agreed by and between the parties hereto that, because the arrangement established pursuant to this Agreement provides only death benefits by use of a Bank-owned policy, it is properly reportable and taxable, for income and payroll tax purposes, under the “economic benefit” regime of the IRS’s 2003 final split dollar regulations, and it should not be considered a nonqualified deferred compensation plan subject to the restrictions of section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code. Accordingly, annually the Insured will receive a taxable benefit equal to the assumed cost of insurance as required by the Internal Revenue Service. The Bank (or its administrator) will report to the Insured the amount of imputed income each year on Form W-2 or its equivalent. No further amounts are reportable in respect of this Agreement.

 

VI.      DIVISION OF DEATH PROCEEDS

 

Subject to Paragraphs VII and IX herein, the division of the death proceeds of the policy is as follows:

 

  A. Should the Insured be employed by the Bank at the time of death, the Insured’s beneficiary (ies), designated in accordance with Paragraph III, shall be entitled to an amount equal to the lesser of $500,000 or the net amount at risk insurance portion of the proceeds. The net amount at risk portion is the total proceeds less the cash value of the policy.
     
  B. The Bank shall be entitled to the remainder of such proceeds.
     
  C. The Bank and the Insured (or assignees) shall share in any interest due on the death proceeds on a pro rata basis as the proceeds due each respectively bears to the total proceeds, excluding any such interest.

 

    2

 

 

VII. DIVISION OF THE CASH SURRENDER VALUE OF THE POLICY

 

The Bank shall at all times be entitled to the policy’s entire cash value, as that term is defined in the policy contract, less any policy loans and unpaid interest or cash withdrawals previously incurred by the Bank and any applicable surrender charges. Such cash value shall be determined as of the date of surrender or death as the case may be. Neither the Insured nor the Insured’s assignee shall at any time have any interest in the policy’s cash value.

 

VIII. RIGHTS OF PARTIES WHERE POLICY ENDOWMENT OR ANNUITY ELECTION EXISTS

 

In the event the policy involves an endowment or annuity element, the bank’s right and interest in any endowment proceeds or annuity benefits, on expiration of the deferment period, shall be determined under the provisions of this Agreement by regarding such endowment proceeds of the commuted value of such annuity benefits as the policy’s cash value. Such endowment proceeds or annuity benefits shall be considered to be like death proceeds for the purposes of division under this Agreement.

 

IX. TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT

 

This Agreement shall terminate upon the occurrence of any one of the following:

 

A. The Insured shall leave the employment of the Bank voluntarily or involuntarily at any time.

 

B. Surrender, lapse, or other termination of the Policy by the Bank.

 

Upon such termination, the Insured (or assignee) shall have a fifteen (15) day option

to receive from the Bank an absolute assignment of the policy in consideration of a cash payment to the Bank, whereupon this Agreement shall terminate. Such cash payment referred to hereinabove shall be the greater of:

 

1. The cash value of the policy on the date of such assignment, as defined in this Agreement; or

 

2. The amount of the premiums that have been paid by the Bank prior to the date of such assignment.

 

If, within said fifteen (15) day period, the Insured fails to exercise said option, fails to procure the entire aforestated cash payment, or dies, then the option shall terminate, the Insured (or assignee) shall have no payment obligation hereunder and the Insured (or assignee) agrees that all of the Insured’s rights, interest and claims in the policy shall terminate as of the date of the termination of this Agreement.

 

    3

 

 

The Insured expressly agrees that this Agreement shall constitute sufficient written notice to the Insured of the Insured’s option to receive an absolute assignment of the policy as set forth herein. Except as provided above, this Agreement shall terminate upon distribution of the death benefit proceeds in accordance with Paragraph VI above.

 

X. INSURED’S OR ASSIGNEE’S ASSIGNMENT RIGHTS

 

The Insured may not, without the written consent of the Bank, assign to any individual, trust or other organization, any right, title or interest in the subject policy nor any rights, options, privileges or duties created under this Agreement.

 

XI. AGREEMENT BINDING UPON THE PARTIES

 

This Agreement shall bind the Insured and the Bank, their heirs, successors, personal representatives and assigns.

 

XII. ERISA PROVISIONS

 

The following provisions are part of this Agreement and are intended to meet the requirements of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”):

 

A. Named Fiduciary and Plan Administrator:

 

The “Named Fiduciary and Plan Administrator” of this Endorsement Method Split Dollar Agreement shall be the Executive Committee of the Board of Trustees of the Bank. As Named Fiduciary and Plan Administrator, the Bank shall be responsible for the management, control, and administration of this Split Dollar Plan as established herein. The Named Fiduciary may delegate to others certain aspects of the management and operation responsibilities of the Plan, including the employment of the advisors and the delegation of any ministerial duties to qualified individuals.

 

B. Funding Policy:

 

The funding policy for this Split Dollar Plan shall be to maintain the subject policy in force by paying, when due, all premiums required.

 

C. Basis of Payment of Benefits:

 

Direct payment by the Insurer is the basis of payment of benefits under this Agreement, with those benefits in turn being based on the payment of premiums as provided in this Agreement.

 

    4

 

 

D. Claim Procedures:

 

Claim forms or claim information as to the subject policy can be obtained by contacting The Pangburn Group at 800-634-3287. When the Named Fiduciary has a claim which may be covered under the provisions described in the insurance policy, they should contact the office named above, and they will either complete a claim form and forward it to an authorized representative of the Insurer or advise the named Fiduciary what further requirements are necessary. The Insurer will evaluate and make a decision as to payment. If the claim is payable, a benefit check will be issued in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

 

In the event that a claim is not eligible under the policy, the Insurer will notify the Named Fiduciary of the denial pursuant to the requirements under the terms of the policy. If the Named Fiduciary is dissatisfied with the denial of claim and wishes to contest such claim denial, they should contact the office named above and they will assist in making an inquiry to the Insurer. All objections to the Insurer’s actions should be in writing and submitted to the office named above for transmittal to the Insurer.

 

XIII. GENDER

 

Whenever in this Agreement words are used in the masculine or neuter gender, they shall be read and construed as in the masculine, feminine or neuter gender, whenever they should so apply.

 

XIV. INSURANCE COMPANY NOT PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT

 

The Insurer shall not be deemed a party to this Agreement, but will respect the rights of the parties as herein developed upon receiving an executed copy of this Agreement. Payment or other performance in accordance with the policy provisions shall fully discharge the Insurer from any and all liability.

 

XV. AMENDMENT OR REVOCATION

 

It is agreed by and between the parties hereto that, during the lifetime of the Insured, this Agreement may be amended or revoked at any time or times, in whole or in part, by the mutual written consent of the Insured and the Bank.

 

XVI. EFFECTIVE DATE

 

The effective date of this Agreement shall be the 1st day of September 2010.

 

    5

 

 

SEVERABILITY AND INTERPRETATION

 

If a provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall nonetheless be enforceable according to their terms. Further, in the event that any provision is held to be overbroad as written, such provision shall be deemed amended to narrow its application to the extent necessary to make the provision enforceable to law and enforced as amended.

 

XVII. APPLICABLE LAW

 

The validity and interpretation of this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maryland, except to the extent preempted by federal law.

 

Executed at Waldorf, MD on the 15 th day of march, 2011.

 

    Community Bank of TRI-County, Waldorf, MD
     
/s/ Laura M Hewitt   By: /s/ William J. Pasenelli
Witness   Title
     
     
Witness    

 

    6

 

Exhibit 14.0

 

THE COMMUNITY FINANCIAL CORPORATION

 

CODE OF ETHICS

 

GENERAL PHILOSOPHY

 

The honesty, integrity and sound judgment of our senior executives, financial officers, directors and employees is essential to the reputation and success of The Community Financial Corporation and Community Bank of the Chesapeake (collectively, the “Company”).

 

Throughout this Code of Ethics, the term “Company” refers to The Community Financial Corporation and/or the subsidiary in which an individual works or serves as a director, depending on context.

 

This Code of Ethics governs the actions and working relationships of senior executives, financial officers, directors and employees of the Company with current and potential customers, consumers, fellow employees, competitors, government and self-regulatory organizations, the media, and anyone else with whom the Company has contact. These relationships are essential to the continued success of the Company as a financial services provider.

 

This Code of Ethics:

 

- Requires the highest standards for honest and ethical conduct, including proper and ethical procedures for dealing with actual or apparent conflicts of interest between personal and professional relationships.

 

- Requires full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosure in the periodic reports filed with, or submitted to the Company with governmental and regulatory agencies and in other public communications made by the Company.

 

- Requires compliance with applicable laws, rules and regulations.

 

- Addresses potential or apparent conflicts of interest and provides guidance on how to communicate those conflicts to the Company.

 

- Addresses misuse or misapplication of the Company’s property and corporate opportunities.

 

- Requires the highest level of confidentiality and fair dealing within and without the Company environment.

 

- Requires reporting of any illegal behavior.

 

- Requires accountability for adherence to the Code.

 

 

 

 

- Addresses the prompt internal reporting of violations of the Code to the Company.

 

IDENTIFICATION OF SENIOR EXECUTIVES, FINANCIAL OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS

 

Certain portions of this Code of Ethics may apply specifically to the Company’s senior executives, financial officers and directors. These include all officers with the title of President and Executive Vice President as well as the Company’s other chief accounting officers (including its controller) and board of directors.

 

CONFLICTS OF INTEREST

 

A “conflict of interest” occurs when your private interest interferes or appears to interfere in any way with the interests of the Company. You are expected to avoid all situations that might lead to a real or apparent material conflict between your self-interest and the interests of the Company. Any position or interest, financial or otherwise, which could materially conflict with your responsibility to the Company, or which affects or could reasonably be expected to affect your independence or judgment concerning transactions between the Company, its customers, suppliers or competitors or otherwise reflects negatively on the Company would be considered a conflict of interest.

 

CONFIDENTIALITY

 

Nonpublic information regarding the Company or its businesses, employees, customers and suppliers is confidential. You are only to use such confidential information for the business purpose intended. You are not to share confidential information with anyone outside of the Company, including family and friends, or with other employees who do not need the information to carry out their duties. You may be required to sign a confidentiality agreement in the course of your employment at the Company. You remain under an obligation to keep all information confidential even if your employment with the Company ends.

 

The following is a non-exclusive list of confidential information:

 

(i) Trade secrets, which include any business or technical information, such as formula, program, method, technique, compilation or information that is valuable because it is not generally known.

 

(ii) All rights to any invention or process developed by an employee using the Company facilities or trade secret information, from any work for the Company, or relating to the Company’s business, is considered to be “work-for-hire” under the United States copyright laws and shall belong to the Company.

 

(iii) Proprietary information such as customer lists and customers’ confidential information.

 

(iv) Financial results, budgets or forecasts.

 

  2  

 

 

(v) Business plans, operating plans, strategy statements, memorandums, operating manuals, organizational charts and other internal communications.

 

(vi) New products, processes and designs.

 

(vii) Wages and salaries, bonus or compensation plans, notices to employees or unannounced personnel changes.

 

(viii) Company investments, acquisitions or divestitures.

 

(ix) Whether a products or business is meeting financial or other expectations.

 

(x) Business relationships or the terms of any business arrangement, including prices paid or received by the Company.

 

Public and media communications involving the Company must be made only by the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and President or his designee.

 

You may not disclose to unauthorized persons or use for your own personal advantage or profit, or the advantage or profit of another, any confidential information that you obtain as a result of your position with the Company. This includes not only financial analysts and the press, but also business associates, family members and personal friends. It is a serious mistake to disclose such information to anyone simply because you are confident that person will neither try to benefit from it nor disclose it to others.

 

Your obligations not to disclose the Company’s confidential information and not to use it for unauthorized purposes continue after your affiliation with the Company ends.

 

The Company is entrusted with important information about individuals and businesses. It is essential that you respect the confidential nature of this information. The Company is legally obliged to protect the privacy of a consumer’s personal financial information. The Company’s privacy practices are set out in a privacy policy that is circulated to our customers and made available to the public. All employees are expected to adhere to the Company’s privacy policy.

 

CORPORATE OPPORTUNITIES

 

Using confidential information about the Company or its businesses, directors, officers, employees, customers, consumers or suppliers for personal benefit or disclosing such information to others outside your normal duties is prohibited.

 

Title 18 U.S. Code, Section 215, makes it a criminal offense for any Company employee to corruptly:

 

(i) Solicit for himself or herself or for a third party anything of value from anyone in return for any business, service or confidential information of the Company; or

 

  3  

 

 

(ii) Accept anything of value (other than normal authorized compensation) from anyone in connection with the business of the Company, either before or after a transaction is discussed or consummated.

 

You are prohibited from:

 

(i) Personally benefiting from opportunities that are discovered through the use of the property, contacts, information or position of the Company.

 

(ii) Accepting employment or engaging in a business (including consulting or similar arrangements) that may conflict with the performance of your duties or the Company’s interest.

 

(iii) Soliciting, demanding, accepting or agreeing to accept anything of value from any person in conjunction with the performance of your employment or duties at the Company.

 

(iv) Acting on behalf of the Company in any transaction in which you or your immediate family has a significant direct or indirect financial or other interest.

 

There are certain situations in which you may accept a personal benefit from someone with whom you transact business such as:

 

(i) Accepting a gift in recognition of a commonly recognized event or occasion (such as a promotion, new job, wedding, retirement or holiday). An award in recognition of service and accomplishment may also be accepted without violating these guidelines so long as the gift does not exceed $150 from any one individual in any calendar year. Any gift in excess of $150 must be reported to the President and Chief Executive Officer.

 

(ii) Accepting something of value if the benefit is available to the general public under the same conditions on which it is available to you.

 

(iii) Accepting meals, refreshments, travel arrangements and accommodations and entertainment of reasonable value in the course of a meeting or other occasion to conduct business or foster business relations if the expense would be reimbursed by the Company as a business expense if the other party did not pay for it.

 

INSIDER TRADING

 

It is both unethical and illegal to buy, sell, trade or otherwise participate in transactions involving the Company’s common stock while in possession of material information concerning the Company that has not been released to the general public, but which when released may have an impact on the market price of the Company’s common stock. It is also unethical and illegal to buy, sell, trade or otherwise participate in transactions involving the common stock or other security of any other company while in possession of similar non-public material information concerning such company. Any questions concerning the propriety of participating in a Company or other company stock or other security transaction should be directed to the Chief Financial Officer.

 

  4  

 

 

EXTENSIONS OF CREDIT

 

The Company may extend credit to any officer, director, or principal shareholder or employee of the Company only in compliance with Maryland and federal law and regulations and the Company’s policies with respect thereto, if any.

 

OUTSIDE BUSINESS RELATIONSHIPS

 

You must disclose all new directorships or potential directorships to the President and Chief Executive Officer in order to avoid any conflicts of interest. Senior executives and financial officers of the Company are prohibited from holding outside employment.

 

The Company encourages civic, charitable, educational and political activities as long as they do not interfere with the performance of your duties at the Company.

 

FAIR DEALING

 

You should undertake to deal fairly with the Company’s customers, suppliers, competitors and employees. Additionally, no one should take advantage of another through manipulation, concealment, abuse of privileged information, misrepresentation of material facts, or any other unfair-dealing practices.

 

You must disclose prior to or at the time of hire, the existence of any employment agreement, non-compete or non-solicitation agreement, confidentiality agreement or similar agreement with a former employer that would in any way restrict or prohibit the performance of any duties or responsibilities with the Company. Copies of such agreements should be provided to the human resources personnel to permit evaluation of the agreement in light of your position. In no event shall you use any trade secrets, proprietary information or other similar property, acquired in the course of your employment with another employer, in the performance if your duties for or on behalf of the Company.

 

You should not directly or indirectly accept bequests under a will or trust if such bequests have been made to them because of their employment with the Company.

 

PROTECTION AND PROPER USE OF COMPANY PROPERTY

 

You should protect the Company’s property and assets and ensure their efficient and proper use. Theft, carelessness and waste can directly impact the Company’s profitability, reputation and success. Permitting the Company property (including data transmitted or stored electronically and computer resources) to be damaged, lost, or used in an unauthorized manner is strictly prohibited. You may not use corporate, bank or other official stationary for personal purposes.

 

  5  

 

 

COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS, RULES AND REGULATIONS

 

This Code of Ethics is based on the Company’s policy that all directors, officers and employees comply with the law. While the law prescribes a minimum standard of conduct, this Code of Ethics requires conduct that often exceeds the legal standard.

 

PREPARATION OF PERIODIC REPORTS FILED WITH GOVERNMENTAL AND REGULATORY AGENCIES

 

Particular care is required in the preparation of the Company’s filings (“Securities Reports”) with the Securities and Exchange Commission pursuant to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission thereunder (collectively, the “Securities Laws”), as well as the Company’s filings and communications (collectively, “Regulatory Reports”) with federal and Maryland bank regulatory authorities. It is essential that the Company’s Securities Reports contain full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosure and otherwise comply with the letter and spirit of the Securities Laws for the protection of the Company and its stockholders and to engender public confidence in the information provided by the Company in its Securities Reports. Similarly, it is essential that the Company’s Regulatory Reports contain full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosure and otherwise comply with the letter and spirit of applicable federal and state banking laws and regulations (“Banking Laws”). Accordingly, you must use your best efforts to ensure that the Company’s Securities Reports and Regulatory Reports and other public communications made by the Company contain full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosure and that the Company at all times complies in all material respects with the letter and spirit of the Securities Laws and the Banking Laws.

 

REPORTING OF ILLEGAL OR UNETHICAL BEHAVIOR AND VIOATIONS OF THIS CODE OF ETHICS

 

You are expected to demonstrate the ability to properly manage your personal finances, particularly the prudent use of credit. The Company recognizes that its customers must have faith and confidence in the honesty and character of its employees, officers and directors. In addition to the importance of maintaining customer confidence, there are specific laws that outline the action the Company must take regarding any known, or suspected, crime involving the affairs of the Company. With respect to bank personnel covered by this policy, Community Bank of the Chesapeake will file a Suspicious Activity Report in the case of any known, or suspected, theft, embezzlement, check/debit card fraud, kiting, misapplication or other defalcation involving bank funds.

 

Fraud is an element of business that can significantly affect the reputation and success of the Company. The Company requires its employees, officers and directors to report directly to the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors and discuss any known or suspected criminal activity involving the Company or its employees. If, during the course of employment, you become aware of any suspicious activity or behavior, violations of laws, rules, regulations or this Code of Ethics, you must report it to the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors. Concerns regarding questionable accounting or auditing matters should be handled under the procedures for confidential, anonymous submissions established by the Audit Committee. Reporting the activity will not subject you to discipline absent a knowingly false report.

 

  6  

 

 

ADMINISTRATION AND WAIVER OF CODE OF ETHICS

 

This Code of Ethics shall be administered and monitored by the Company’s Chief Administrative Officer who will report such matters directly to the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors. Any questions and further information on this Code of Ethics should be directed to this individual.

 

It is also the responsibility of the Chief Administrative Officer to annually reaffirm compliance with the Code of Ethics by all employees, officers and directors, and to obtain affirmation that each employee, officer and director has read and understands the Code and will comply with it. You will be required to acknowledge that you received and have read this Code of Ethics and will comply with its provisions.

 

You are expected to follow this Code of Ethics at all times. Generally, there should be no waivers to this Code of Ethics. However, in rare circumstances conflicts may arise that necessitate waivers. Waivers will be determined on a case-by-case basis by the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors. The Audit Committee of the Board of Directors shall have the sole and absolute discretionary authority to approve any deviation or waiver from this Code of Ethics. Any waiver and the grounds for such waiver by directors or executive officers shall be promptly disclosed to stockholders in a Current Report on Form 8-K.

 

Known or suspected violations of this Code of Ethics will be investigated and may result in disciplinary action up to and including immediate termination of employment.

 

The Company will provide to any person without charge, upon request, a copy of this Code of Ethics. Such request should be made, in writing, to: Chief Administrative Officer, Tri-County Financial Corporation, 3035 Leonardtown Road, Waldorf, Maryland 20601.

 

  7  

 

 

EXHIBIT 21

 

SUBSIDIARIES OF THE REGISTRANT

 

Parent

 

The Community Financial Corporation

 

State of   Percentage    
Subsidiary   Owned   Incorporation
         
Community Bank of the Chesapeake   100%   Maryland
         
Tri-County Capital Trust I   100%   Delaware
         
Tri-County Capital Trust II   100%   Delaware
         
Subsidiaries of Community Bank of Tri-County        
         
Community Mortgage Corporation of Tri-County   100%   Maryland

 

 

 

EXHIBIT 23

 

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

 

We hereby consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements on Form S-3 (333-199455) and Forms S-8 (33-97174, 333-79237, 333-70800, 333-125103, and 333-204200), of The Community Financial Corporation of our report, dated March 10, 2016, with respect to the consolidated financial statements of The Community Financial Corporation and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, which appears in this Annual Report on Form 10-K of The Community Financial Corporation, for the year ended December 31, 2015.

 

/s/ Stegman & Company  
   
Baltimore, Maryland  
March 10, 2016  

 

 

 

EXHIBIT 31.1

Certification

 

I, William J. Pasenelli, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of The Community Financial Corporation;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

(b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant's disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant's ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: March 10, 2016  
   
/s/ William J. Pasenelli  
   
William J. Pasenelli  
President and Chief Executive Officer  
(Principal Executive Officer)  

 

 

 

EXHIBIT 31.2

 

Certification

I, Todd L. Capitani, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this Annual Report on Form 10-K of The Community Financial Corporation;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 

(a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

(b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

(c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

(d) Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

(a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant's ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

(b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting.

 

Date: March 10, 2016  
   
/s/ Todd L. Capitani  
   
Todd L. Capitani  

Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

 
(Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)  

 

 

 

EXHIBIT 32

 

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO 18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO SECTION 906 OF THE

SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

 

The undersigned executive officers of The Community Financial Corporation (the “Registrant”) hereby certify that this Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2015 (the “Report”) fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, and the information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Registrant.

 

    By: /s/ William J. Pasenelli
     
    Name: William J. Pasenelli
    Title: President and Chief Executive Officer
     
    By: /s/ Todd L. Capitani
     
   

Name: Todd L. Capitani

    Title: Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
Date: March 10, 2016